Aastra 9143I Series Users Manual IP Phone Admin Guide
675xiseriesphone 01e94ebd-4fa3-4958-b124-f928fa965cc4 Aastra Telecom IP Phone 9143i Series User Guide |
2015-02-02
: Aastra Aastra-9143I-Series-Users-Manual-402225 aastra-9143i-series-users-manual-402225 aastra pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 1184
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT
and 675xi Series Phones
t1
SIP IIP PHONE
SI
41-001160-03
Rev 00
D
ra
f
Administrator Guide
Release 2.4
t1
ra
f
D
Aastra Telecom will not accept liability for any damages and/or long distance charges, which result from
unauthorized and/or unlawful use. While every effort has been made to ensure accuracy, Aastra Telecom will
not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained within this documentation. The
information contained in this documentation is subject to change without notice.
Copyright 2008 Aastra Telecom. www.aastratelecom.com
All Rights Reserved.
Software License Agreement
t1
Aastra Telecom Inc., hereinafter known as "Seller", grants to Customer a
personal, worldwide, non-transferable, non-sublicenseable and non-exclusive,
restricted use license to use Software in object form solely with the Equipment for
which the Software was intended. This Product may integrate programs, licensed
to Aastra by third party Suppliers, for distribution under the terms of this
agreement. These programs are confidential and proprietary, and are protected as
such by copyright law as unpublished works and by international treaties to the
fullest extent under the applicable law of the jurisdiction of the Customer. In
addition, these confidential and proprietary programs are works conforming to the
requirements of Section 401 of title 17 of the United States Code. Customer shall
not disclose to any third party such confidential and proprietary programs and
information and shall not export licensed Software to any country except in
accordance with United States Export laws and restrictions.
D
ra
f
Customer agrees to not reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble or display
Software furnished in object code form. Customer shall not modify, copy,
reproduce, distribute, transcribe, translate or reduce to electronic medium or
machine readable form or language, derive source code without the express
written consent of the Seller and its Suppliers, or disseminate or otherwise
disclose the Software to third parties. All Software furnished hereunder (whether
or not part of firmware), including all copies thereof, are and shall remain the
property of Seller and its Suppliers and are subject to the terms and conditions of
this agreement. All rights reserved.
Customer's use of this software shall be deemed to reflect Customer's agreement
to abide by the terms and conditions contained herein. Removal or modification
of trademarks, copyright notices, logos, etc., or the use of Software on any
Equipment other than that for which it is intended, or any other material breach of
this Agreement, shall automatically terminate this license. If this Agreement is
terminated for breach, Customer shall immediately discontinue use and destroy or
return to Seller all licensed software and other confidential or proprietary
information of Seller. In no event shall Seller or its suppliers or licensors be liable
for any damages whatsoever (including without limitation, damages for loss of
business profits, business interruption, loss of business information, other
pecuniary loss, or consequential damages) arising out of the use of or inability to
use the software, even if Seller has been advised of the possibility of such
damages.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
iii
t1
ra
f
D
Third Party Copyright Compliance
This product contains software provided under license to Aastra Telecom by one
or more third parties. In addition to the Aastra SLA shown above, use and
distribution of this product is subject to the following license terms:
Expat XML Parser
t1
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do
so, subject to the following conditions:
ra
f
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
D
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
v
M5T SIP Stack - M5T
Portions of this software are © 1997 - 2006 M5T a Division of Media5 Corporation ("M5T( tm )").
All intellectual property rights in such portions of the software and documentation are owned by
M5T and are protected by Canadian copyright laws, other applicable copyright laws and
international treaty provisions. M5T and its suppliers retain all rights not expressly granted.
MD5 RSA
ra
f
t1
Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data
Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing this
software or this function. License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that
such works are identified as "derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest
Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this
software or the suitability of this software for any particular purpose. It is provided "as is" without
express or implied warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or software.
D
OpenSSL
License Issues
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License
and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts.
Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to
OpenSSL please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
vi
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
OpenSSL License
D
ra
f
t1
/* ============================================================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2007 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
* the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
* software must display the following acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
* endorse or promote products derived from this software without
* prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
* openssl-core@openssl.org.
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
* permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
* acknowledgment:
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
vii
D
ra
f
t1
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ====================================================================
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*/
Original SSLeay License
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
viii
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
D
ra
f
t1
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* "This product includes cryptographic software written by
* Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
* being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
* "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
ix
D
ra
f
t1
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
x
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
libSRTP (SRTP) - Cisco
Copyright (c) 2001-2005 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
•
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
•
Neither the name of the Cisco Systems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
t1
•
D
ra
f
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION).
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
xi
Wind River Systems - VxWorks software
D
UPnP - Intel
ra
f
t1
The VxWorks Run-Time software module is Copyright (c) WindRiver Systems Inc, all rights
reserved. It is licensed for use, not sold. All use of this product and the VxWorks Run-Time
module is subject to agreement with the following EULA terms
With respect to the Run-Time Module, Wind River and its licensors are third party beneficiaries of
the End User License Agreement and that the provisions related to the Run-Time Module are made
expressly for the benefit of, and are enforceable by, Wind River and its licensors.
Activities expressly prohibited: (i) copying the Run-Time Module, except for archive purposes
consistent with the End User’s archive procedures; (ii) transferring the Run-Time Module to a
third party apart from the Target Application; (iii) modifying, decompiling, disassembling, reverse
engineering or otherwise attempting to derive the Source Code of the Run-Time Module; (iv)
exporting the Run-Time Module or underlying technology in contravention of applicable U.S. and
foreign export laws and regulations; and (v) using the Run-Time Module other than in connection
with operation of the Target Application.
Aastra Telecom and Wind River Systems: (i) Retain ownership of all copies of the Run-Time
Module; (ii) expressly disclaim all implied warranties, including without limitation the implied
warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, title and non-infringement; (iii)
exclude liability for any special, indirect, punitive, incidental and consequential damages; and (iv)
require that any further distribution of the Run-Time Module be subject to the same restrictions set
forth herein.
INTEL SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (Final, Site License)
IMPORTANT - READ BEFORE COPYING, INSTALLING OR USING.
Do not use or load this software and any associated materials (collectively, the "Software") until
you have carefully read the following terms and conditions. By loading or using the Software, you
agree to the terms of this Agreement. If you do not wish to so agree, do not install or use the
Software.
LICENSE. You may copy the Software onto your organization's computers for your organization's
use, and you may make a reasonable number of back-up copies of the Software, subject to these
conditions:
xii
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
1. You may not copy, modify, rent, sell, distribute or transfer any part of the Software except as
provided in this Agreement, and you agree to prevent unauthorized copying of the Software.
2. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Software.
3. You may not sublicense the Software.
4. The Software may include portions offered on terms in addition to those set out here,
as set out in a license accompanying those portions.
t1
OWNERSHIP OF SOFTWARE AND COPYRIGHTS. Title to all copies of the Software remains
with Intel or its suppliers. The Software is copyrighted and protected by the laws of the United
States and other countries, and international treaty provisions. You may not remove any copyright
notices from the Software. Intel may make changes to the Software, or to items referenced therein,
at any time without notice, but is not obligated to support or update the Software. Except as
otherwise expressly provided, Intel grants no express or implied right under Intel patents,
copyrights, trademarks, or other intellectual property rights. You may transfer the Software only if
the recipient agrees to be fully bound by these terms and if you retain no copies of the Software.
D
ra
f
LIMITED MEDIA WARRANTY. If the Software has been delivered by Intel on physical media,
Intel warrants the media to be free from material physical defects for a period of ninety days after
delivery by Intel. If such a defect is found, return the media to Intel for replacement or alternate
delivery of the Software as Intel may select.
EXCLUSION OF OTHER WARRANTIES. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED ABOVE, THE
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
NONINFRINGEMENT, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Intel does not warrant or assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness of any
information, text, graphics, links or other items contained within the Software.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTEL OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOST INFORMATION) ARISING OUT
OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF INTEL HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS PROHIBIT EXCLUSION OR
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
xiii
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. YOU
MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER LEGAL RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO
JURISDICTION. TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT.
Intel may terminate this Agreement at any time if you violate its terms. Upon termination, you will
immediately destroy the Software or return all copies of the Software to Intel.
APPLICABLE LAWS. Claims arising under this Agreement shall be governed by the laws of
California, excluding its principles of conflict of laws and the United Nations Convention on
Contracts for the Sale of Goods. You may not export the Software in violation of applicable export
laws and regulations. Intel is not obligated under any other agreements unless they are in writing
and signed by an authorized representative of Intel.
D
ra
f
t1
GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The Software is provided with "RESTRICTED
RIGHTS."
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in
FAR52.227-14 and DFAR252.227-7013 et seq. or its successor. Use of the Software by the
Government constitutes acknowledgment of Intel's proprietary rights therein. Contractor or
Manufacturer is Intel Corporation, 2200 Mission College Blvd., Santa Clara, CA 95052.
xiv
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Software License Agreement iii
Third Party Copyright Compliance v
Expat XML Parser ....................................................................................................1-v
.
M5T SIP Stack - M5T .............................................................................................. 1-vi
.
MD5 RSA ................................................................................................................ 1-vi
.
OpenSSL ................................................................................................................. 1-vi
.
t1
License Issues ........................................................................................................ 1-vi
.
OpenSSL License .................................................................................................. 1-vii
.
Original SSLeay License ....................................................................................... 1-viii
.
ra
f
libSRTP (SRTP) - Cisco .......................................................................................... 1-xi
Wind River Systems - VxWorks software ............................................................... 1-xii
.
.
UPnP - Intel ............................................................................................................ 1-xii
Preface
About this guide .......................................................................................................... 1-xvii
.
.
D
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 1-xvii
.
Audience .............................................................................................................. 1-xvii
.
Other Documentation ...........................................................................................1-xviii
.
Chapters and appendixes in this guide ................................................................. 1-xix
.
Chapter 1
Overview
.
About this chapter ...........................................................................................................1-1
.
IP Phone Models ............................................................................................................1-3
.
Description ...............................................................................................................1-3
.
Model 9143i IP Phone ..............................................................................................1-6
.
Model 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones ...................................................................1-10
Model 6751i IP Phone ............................................................................................1-15
Model 6753i IP Phone ............................................................................................1-20
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
.
.
.
v
Contents
Contents
Contents
Model 6755i IP Phone ............................................................................................1-23
Model 6757i and 6757i CT IP Phones ...................................................................1-27
.
.
Firmware Installation Information .................................................................................1-33
.
Description .............................................................................................................1-33
.
Installation Considerations .....................................................................................1-33
.
Installation Requirements .......................................................................................1-34
.
Configuration Server Requirement .........................................................................1-35
.
Firmware and Configuration Files .................................................................................1-36
.
Description .............................................................................................................1-36
.
Configuration File Precedence ...............................................................................1-38
.
Installing the Firmware/Configuration Files ............................................................1-39
.
Chapter 2
Configuration Interface Methods
t1
.
About this chapter ...........................................................................................................2-1
.
Configuration Methods ...................................................................................................2-2
.
Description ...............................................................................................................2-2
.
ra
f
IP Phone UI ..............................................................................................................2-2
.
Aastra Web UI ..........................................................................................................2-6
.
Configuration Files (Administrator Only) ................................................................2-17
D
Chapter 3
Administrator Options
.
.
About this chapter ...........................................................................................................3-1
Administrator Level Options ...........................................................................................3-3
.
.
Description ...............................................................................................................3-3
.
IP Phone UI Options ................................................................................................3-3
.
Aastra Web UI Options ............................................................................................3-6
.
Configuration File Options ........................................................................................3-8
.
Phone Status ............................................................................................................3-9
.
Restarting Your Phone ...........................................................................................3-13
Set Phone to Factory Defaults/Erase Local Configuration .....................................3-15
.
.
Basic Settings ........................................................................................................3-19
.
Account Configuration ............................................................................................3-35
.
Network Settings ....................................................................................................3-37
.
Line Settings ..........................................................................................................3-71
.
vi
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Softkeys, Programmable Keys, Expansion Module Keys ......................................3-72
.
Contents
Action URI ..............................................................................................................3-73
.
Configuration Server Settings ................................................................................3-75
.
Firmware Update Features ....................................................................................3-84
.
TLS Support ...........................................................................................................3-85
.
802.1x Support .......................................................................................................3-89
.
Troubleshooting .....................................................................................................3-92
.
Chapter 4
Configuring Network and
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
.
About this chapter ...........................................................................................................4-1
Overview .........................................................................................................................4-3
t1
Network Settings ............................................................................................................4-4
.
.
.
Basic Network Settings ............................................................................................4-4
Advanced Network Settings ...................................................................................4-30
.
.
Global SIP Settings ......................................................................................................4-70
.
ra
f
Description .............................................................................................................4-70
.
Basic SIP Settings ..................................................................................................4-71
Advanced SIP Settings (optional) ..........................................................................4-84
Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings .........................................................4-93
.
.
.
D
Autodial Settings ..................................................................................................4-103
Configuration Server Protocol ....................................................................................4-108
Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol .....................................................4-108
.
.
.
Chapter 5
Configuring Operational Features
.
About this chapter ...........................................................................................................5-1
.
Operational Features ......................................................................................................5-5
.
Description ...............................................................................................................5-5
.
User Passwords .......................................................................................................5-5
.
Administrator Passwords .........................................................................................5-9
.
Locking/Unlocking the Phone .................................................................................5-10
.
Defining an Emergency Dial Plan ..........................................................................5-16
.
Time and Date ........................................................................................................5-19
.
Backlight Mode (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only) .....................5-30
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
.
vii
Live Dial Pad* .........................................................................................................5-33
Contents
.
Language ...............................................................................................................5-34
.
Locking IP Phone Keys ..........................................................................................5-49
.
Locking/Unlocking the SAVE and DELETE keys (6753i) .......................................5-50
.
Local Dial Plan .......................................................................................................5-53
.
Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls ............................................................................5-59
.
Suppressing DTMF Playback .................................................................................5-63
.
Display DTMF Digits ..............................................................................................5-65
Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone ...............................................................................5-67
.
.
Stuttered Dial Tone .................................................................................................5-70
.
XML Beep Support .................................................................................................5-72
.
Status Scroll Delay .................................................................................................5-74
.
Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing .............................................................................5-76
t1
.
Switch Focus to Ringing Line .................................................................................5-79
Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout ............................................................5-81
Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call .....................................................................5-85
ra
f
UPnP Mapping Lines (for remote phones) .............................................................5-87
Message Waiting Indicator Line .............................................................................5-89
.
.
.
.
.
DND Key Mode ......................................................................................................5-91
.
Call Forward Mode .................................................................................................5-93
.
D
Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) and Emergency
Location Identification Number (ELIN) ...................................................................5-97
.
Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In .............................5-102
.
Group Paging RTP Settings .................................................................................5-107
.
Key Mapping ........................................................................................................5-113
.
Ring Tones and Tone Sets ...................................................................................5-117
.
Priority Alerting .....................................................................................................5-122
.
Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) ...........................................5-129
.
Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys ................5-141
Customizing the Key Type List in the Aastra Web UI ...........................................5-164
.
.
Speeddial Prefixes ...............................................................................................5-167
.
Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add or Edit a Speeddial Key ...................................5-168
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) ........................................................................................5-169
.
.
BLF Subscription Period ......................................................................................5-176
.
BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer Keys ......................................................................5-178
viii
.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers) .....................................5-188
ACD Subscription Period .....................................................................................5-198
BLA Subscription Period ......................................................................................5-200
Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup (for Sylantro Servers) ............................5-202
.
Contents
Speeddial/Conference Key (not applicable to the 6751i) .....................................5-184
.
.
.
.
Do Not Disturb (DND) ..........................................................................................5-211
.
Bridged Line Appearance (BLA) ..........................................................................5-222
.
BLA Support for Third Party Registration .............................................................5-229
.
P-Preferred Identity Header for BLA Accounts ....................................................5-230
BLA Support for Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) .............................................5-231
.
.
Park/Pick Up Key .................................................................................................5-234
.
Last Call Return (lcr) (Sylantro Servers) ..............................................................5-245
.
Call Forwarding ....................................................................................................5-249
t1
.
Callers List ...........................................................................................................5-288
.
Customizable Callers List and Services Keys ......................................................5-294
Missed Calls Indicator ..........................................................................................5-295
.
.
ra
f
Directory List ........................................................................................................5-297
Voicemail (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only) .............................5-308
.
.
XML Customized Services ...................................................................................5-311
XML Override for a Locked Phone .......................................................................5-356
.
.
D
Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments ...................................................5-357
Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers) ..........................5-359
“SIP Join” Feature for 3-Way Conference (not applicable to the 6751i) ..............5-363
.
.
.
Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods, used with Broadsoft Client
Management System (CMS) ................................................................................5-365
.
Customizing the Display Columns on the M675i Expansion Module ...................5-368
.
Chapter 6
Configuring Advanced
Operational Features
.
About this chapter ...........................................................................................................6-1
.
Advanced Operational Features .....................................................................................6-3
.
Description ...............................................................................................................6-3
.
MAC Address/Line Number in REGISTER Messages .............................................6-5
.
SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer ..............................................................6-7
.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
ix
Update Caller ID During a Call .................................................................................6-8
Contents
.
Boot Sequence Recovery Mode ..............................................................................6-9
.
Auto-discovery Using mDNS ..................................................................................6-10
.
Single Call Restriction (6757i CT and 9480i CT only) ............................................6-11
.
Missed Call Summary Subscription .......................................................................6-13
.
As-Feature-Event Subscription ..............................................................................6-17
.
Blacklist Duration ...................................................................................................6-22
.
Whitelist Proxy .......................................................................................................6-24
.
Transport Layer Security (TLS) ..............................................................................6-26
.
802.1x Support .......................................................................................................6-31
.
Symmetric UDP Signaling ......................................................................................6-43
Removing UserAgent and Server SIP Headers .....................................................6-44
t1
GRUU and sip.instance Support ............................................................................6-45
Multi-Stage Digit Collection (Billing Codes) Support (for Sylantro Servers) ...........6-46
.
.
.
.
Configurable DNS Queries .....................................................................................6-49
Ignore Out of Sequence Errors ..............................................................................6-51
ra
f
“Early-Only” Parameter in Replaces Header RFC3891 .........................................6-52
Reason Header Field in SIP Message ...................................................................6-52
Chapter 7
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
.
.
.
.
.
D
About this chapter ...........................................................................................................7-1
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone ....................................................................................7-2
.
.
Configuration File Encryption Method ......................................................................7-2
.
Procedure to Encrypt Configuration Files ................................................................7-4
Vendor Configuration File Encryption .......................................................................7-6
Chapter 8
Upgrading the Firmware
.
.
.
About this chapter ...........................................................................................................8-1
.
Upgrading the Firmware .................................................................................................8-2
.
Using the “Firmware Update” Page in the Aastra Web UI .......................................8-2
Using the Restart Feature ........................................................................................8-5
Using the Auto-Resync Feature ...............................................................................8-7
x
.
.
.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Contents
Chapter 9
Troubleshooting
.
About this chapter ...........................................................................................................9-1
Troubleshooting ..............................................................................................................9-3
.
.
Log Settings .............................................................................................................9-3
.
Module/Debug Level Settings ..................................................................................9-4
.
Support Information ..................................................................................................9-7
.
WatchDog Task Feature .........................................................................................9-12
.
Error Messages Display .........................................................................................9-15
.
Troubleshooting Solutions ............................................................................................9-19
.
Description .............................................................................................................9-19
.
Why does my phone display “Application missing”? ..............................................9-19
.
t1
Why does my phone display the “No Service” message? ......................................9-20
Why does my phone display "Bad Encrypted Config"? ..........................................9-20
Why is my phone not receiving the TFTP IP address from the DHCP Server? .....9-21
How do I restart the IP phone? ..............................................................................9-22
.
.
.
.
ra
f
How do I set the IP phone to factory default? ........................................................9-23
.
How do I erase the phone’s local configuration? ...................................................9-24
.
How to reset a user’s password? ...........................................................................9-25
How do I lock and unlock the phone? ....................................................................9-27
.
.
D
Appendix A
Configuration Parameters
About this appendix ....................................................................................................... A-1
.
.
Setting Parameters in Configuration Files ..................................................................... A-6
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters ............................................................. A-7
Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu ..................................................................... A-7
.
.
.
Network Settings ..................................................................................................... A-8
.
DHCP Option Settings .......................................................................................... A-13
.
Password Settings ................................................................................................ A-15
.
Emergency Dial Plan Settings ............................................................................... A-16
.
Aastra Web UI Settings ......................................................................................... A-17
.
Configuration Server Settings ............................................................................... A-18
.
Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings ........................................................ A-29
.
Rport Setting ......................................................................................................... A-31
.
Local SIP UDP/TCP Port Setting .......................................................................... A-32
.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
xi
Local SIP TLS Port ................................................................................................ A-32
Contents
.
HTTPS Client and Server Settings ........................................................................ A-33
.
HTTPS Server Certificate Validation Settings ....................................................... A-35
.
UPnP Settings ....................................................................................................... A-37
.
Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Settings ......................................................... A-38
.
Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP Settings ................................................................... A-44
.
Time and Date Settings ......................................................................................... A-45
.
Time Server Settings ............................................................................................. A-52
.
Custom Time Zone and DST Settings .................................................................. A-54
.
Backlight Mode Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) ..................... A-63
.
Live Dialpad Settings ............................................................................................ A-64
.
SIP Local Dial Plan Settings ................................................................................. A-65
.
SIP Basic, Global Settings .................................................................................... A-67
t1
.
SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings ................................................................................. A-76
.
BLA Support for MWI ............................................................................................ A-87
Centralized Conferencing Settings ........................................................................ A-88
.
.
ra
f
SIP Join Feature for 3-Way Conference ............................................................... A-90
HTTP/HTTPS Authentication Support for Broadsoft CMS .................................... A-91
.
.
Advanced SIP Settings ......................................................................................... A-92
.
Missed Call Summary Subscription Settings ...................................................... A-101
.
As-Feature-Event Subscription Settings ............................................................. A-104
D
.
Transport Layer Security (TLS) Settings ............................................................. A-105
.
802.1x Support Settings ...................................................................................... A-109
RTP, Codec, DTMF Global Settings .................................................................... A-114
.
.
Autodial Settings ................................................................................................. A-119
.
Voicemail Settings ............................................................................................... A-122
.
Directory Settings ................................................................................................ A-123
.
Callers List Settings ............................................................................................ A-124
.
Customize Callers List and Services Key ........................................................... A-125
.
Call Forward Settings .......................................................................................... A-126
.
Call Forward Key Mode Settings ......................................................................... A-127
.
LLDP-MED and ELIN Settings ............................................................................ A-129
.
Missed Calls Indicator Settings ........................................................................... A-131
.
XML Settings ....................................................................................................... A-132
.
xii
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Action URI Settings ............................................................................................. A-135
.
Contents
XML SIP Notify Settings ...................................................................................... A-141
.
Polling Action URI Settings ................................................................................. A-142
.
Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings ............................................................ A-143
.
Ring Tone Per-Line Settings ............................................................................... A-145
.
Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing Setting .............................................................. A-146
.
Switch Focus to Ringing Line .............................................................................. A-148
.
Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout ......................................................... A-149
Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call .................................................................. A-150
.
.
Stuttered Dial Tone Setting ................................................................................. A-151
.
Call Waiting Settings ........................................................................................... A-152
.
Message Waiting Indicator Settings .................................................................... A-153
.
DND Key Mode Settings ..................................................................................... A-154
t1
.
Priority Alert Settings ........................................................................................... A-155
.
Bellcore Cadence Settings .................................................................................. A-160
Language Settings .............................................................................................. A-162
ra
f
Language Pack Settings ..................................................................................... A-164
.
.
.
Suppress DTMF Playback Setting ...................................................................... A-173
.
Display DTMF Digits Setting ............................................................................... A-174
.
Intercom, Auto-Answer, and Barge In Settings ................................................... A-175
D
Group Paging RTP Settings ................................................................................ A-179
Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustment Settings ..................................... A-180
Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) Settings ............................ A-184
.
.
.
.
ACD Auto-Available Timer Settings ................................................................... A-186
.
Park and Pickup Global Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 6757i/6757i CT only) .......... A-187
Mapping Key Settings ......................................................................................... A-189
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters ......... A-192
Softkey Settings for 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT ............................. A-193
Programmable Key Settings for 9143i, 6753i, and 6755i .................................... A-202
Top Softkey Settings for 6757i and 6757i CT ...................................................... A-207
Handset Feature Key Settings for the 9480i CT and 6757i CT ........................... A-214
Expansion Module Key Settings for M670i (6753i, 6755i, 6757i,
6757i CT) and M675i (for 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) .............................................. A-216
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Customizing the Key Type List ............................................................................ A-223
.
Locking Softkeys and Programmable Keys ........................................................ A-226
.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
xiii
Locking the SAVE and DLETE Keys (6753i) ....................................................... A-229
Contents
.
Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add/Edit Speeddial Keys ....................................... A-230
.
BLF List URI Settings .......................................................................................... A-230
.
Customizing M675i Expansion Module Column Display ........................................... A-231
.
Expansion Module 1 through 3 ........................................................................... A-231
.
Advanced Operational Parameters ........................................................................... A-233
.
Blind Transfer Setting .......................................................................................... A-233
.
Update Caller ID Setting. .................................................................................... A-233
.
Boot Sequence Recovery Mode Settings. .......................................................... A-234
.
Single Call Restriction Setting ............................................................................. A-235
.
Blacklist Duration Setting .................................................................................... A-236
.
Whitelist Proxy Setting ........................................................................................ A-236
.
t1
XML Key Redirection Settings (for Redial, Xfer, Conf, Icom, Voicemail) ............ A-237
Options Key Redirection Setting (Services key on 6751i) ................................... A-239
.
.
Off-Hook and XML Application Interaction Setting .............................................. A-239
.
XML Override for a Locked Phone Setting .......................................................... A-240
ra
f
Symmetric UDP Signaling Setting ....................................................................... A-240
.
.
User-Agent Setting .............................................................................................. A-241
.
GRUU and sip.instance Support ......................................................................... A-241
.
DNS Query Setting .............................................................................................. A-242
.
Ignore Out of Order SIP Requests ...................................................................... A-243
D
.
Configuration Encryption Setting ......................................................................... A-243
.
Troubleshooting Parameters ..................................................................................... A-244
.
Log Settings ........................................................................................................ A-244
.
WatchDog Settings ............................................................................................. A-247
.
Appendix B
Configuring the IP Phone
at the Asterisk IP PBX
About this appendix ....................................................................................................... B-1
.
.
IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX ................................................................................... B-2
.
Appendix C
Sample Configuration Files
About this appendix ....................................................................................................... C-1
.
.
Sample Configuration Files ........................................................................................... C-2
.
6757i Sample Configuration File ............................................................................. C-2
xiv
.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
6757i CT Sample Configuration File ..................................................................... C-12
.
Contents
6753i Sample Configuration File ........................................................................... C-29
.
Appendix D
Sample BLF Softkey Settings
About this appendix ....................................................................................................... D-1
.
.
Sample BLF Softkey Settings ........................................................................................ D-2
.
Asterisk BLF ............................................................................................................ D-2
.
BroadSoft BroadWorks BLF .................................................................................... D-3
.
Appendix E
Sample Multiple Proxy Server Configuration
About this appendix ....................................................................................................... E-1
.
.
Multiple Proxy Server Configuration .............................................................................. E-2
.
t1
Appendix F
Creating and Managing
XML Applications
About this appendix ....................................................................................................... F-1
.
.
Creating an XML Application ......................................................................................... F-3
.
Overview ................................................................................................................. F-3
.
ra
f
XML format .............................................................................................................. F-3
.
Creating XML Objects ............................................................................................. F-4
.
Creating Custom Softkeys ...................................................................................... F-5
.
Text Menu Object (Menu Screens) .......................................................................... F-6
D
Text Screen Object (Text Screens) ........................................................................ F-14
.
.
UserInput Object (User Input Screens) ................................................................. F-23
Directory Object (Directory List Screen) ................................................................ F-39
Status Message Object (Idle Screen) .................................................................... F-41
Execute Commands Object (for executing XML commands) ............................... F-43
XML URI for Key Press Simulation ....................................................................... F-60
Dynamic Configuration Object (to push a configuration to the phone) .................. F-64
XML Image Objects (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i/6757i CT only) ..................... F-70
Attributes/Options to Use with XML Objects ......................................................... F-80
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
HTTP Post ............................................................................................................. F-84
.
XML Schema File .................................................................................................. F-87
.
Managing XML Applications ........................................................................................ F-90
.
Description ............................................................................................................ F-90
.
Support of Virtual Web Servers ............................................................................. F-90
.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
xv
Non-Blocking HTTP Connections ......................................................................... F-90
.
XML SIP Notify ...................................................................................................... F-91
.
Limited Warranty
D
ra
f
t1
.
Preface
About this guide
Introduction
t1
This SIP IP Phone Administrator Guide provides information on the basic
network setup, operation, and maintenance of the IP phones, Models 9143i, 9480i,
9480i CT and the 675xi Series IP Phones (6751i, 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and
6757i CT). It also includes details on the functioning and configuration of the IP
phones.
D
Audience
ra
f
Note: Features, characteristics, requirements, and configuration that are
specific to a particular IP phone model are indicated where required in
this guide.
This guide is for network administrators, system administrators, developers and
partners who need to understand how to operate and maintain the IP phone on a
SIP network. It also provides some user-specific information.
This guide contains information that is at a technical level, more suitable for
system or network administrators. Prior knowledge of IP Telephony concepts is
recommended.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
xvii
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this guide
Other Documentation
The IP phone documentation consists of:
SIP IP Phone Installation Guide – contains installation
and set-up instructions, information on general features and functions, and
basic options list customization. Included with the phone.
•
Model 9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT, and 675xi Series SIP IP Phone
Administrator Guide – explains how to set the phone up on the network, as
well as advanced configuration instructions for the SIP IP phone. This guide
contains information that is at a technical level more suitable for a system or
network administrator.
•
SIP IP Phone User Guides – explains the most commonly
used features and functions for an end user.
t1
•
D
ra
f
This Administrator Guide complements the Aastra product-specific Installation
Guide and the Aastra product-specific User Guide.
xviii
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Chapters and appendixes in this guide
This guide contains the following chapters and appendixes:
Go to
An overview of the IP Phones and the IP Phone firmware installation
information
Chapter 1
IP Phone interface methods
Chapter 2
Administrator options information
Chapter 3
Configuring the Network and Global SIP Features on the IP Phone
Chapter 4
Configuring operational information on the IP Phones
Chapter 5
Configuring advanced operational information on the IP Phones
Chapter 6
Encryption information
Chapter 7
Firmware upgrade information
Chapter 8
Troubleshooting solutions
Chapter 9
Appendix A
Appendix B
Sample configuration files
Appendix C
Sample BLF softkey settings
Appendix D
Sample multiple proxy server configuration
Appendix E
Creating XML applications
Appendix F
D
Configuring the IP Phones at the Asterisk PBX
ra
f
Configuration parameters
t1
For
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
xix
t1
ra
f
D
Chapter 1
Overview
About this chapter
Introduction
Topics
ra
f
t1
This chapter briefly describes the IP Phone Models, and provides information
about installing the IP phone firmware. It also describes the firmware and
configuration files that the IP phone models use for operation.
This chapter covers the following topics:
D
Topic
IP Phone Models
Page
page 1-3
Model 9143i IP Phone
page 1-6
Model 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones
page 1-10
Model 6751i IP Phone
page 1-15
Model 6753i IP Phone
page 1-20
Model 6755i IP Phone
page 1-23
Model 6757i and 6757i CT IP Phones
page 1-27
Firmware Installation Information
page 1-33
Installation Considerations
page 1-33
Installation Requirements
page 1-34
Configuration Server Requirement
page 1-35
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
1-1
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter
Topic
Page
Firmware and Configuration Files
page 1-36
page 1-38
Installing the Firmware/Configuration Files
page 1-39
D
ra
f
t1
Configuration File Precedence
1-2
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Overview
IP Phone Models
IP Phone Models
Description
All Aastra SIP IP Phone Models communicate over an IP network allowing you to
receive and place calls in the same manner as a regular business telephone.
All phone models support the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). The 9480i CT and
6757i CT offers the base phone along with a cordless extension.
References
For more information about the features and installation requirements, see the
SIP IP Phone Installation Guide for your specific model.
t1
The following illustrations show the types of IP Phone Models.
ra
f
Hold
Redi
al
Go
od
bye
Op
tio
ns
Op
Save
Conf
De
tions
Dire
ctor
y
948
0i
lete
Xfer
L3
L2
L1
Xfer
Co
nf
Ico
D
Mut
e
m
Serv
ice
s
9480i
9143i
Hold
Redi
al
Go
od
bye
Op
tio
ns
948
0i C
T
Xfer
Co
nf
Ico
m
Serv
ice
s
9480i CT
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
1-3
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
6753i
6751i
t1
6757i CT
6755i
ra
f
6757i
Optional Accessories
D
The following are optional accessories for the IP Phones.
Power over Ethernet (PoE)
Inline Power Injector
1-4
Additional Ethernet Cable
(category 5/5e straight through
cable)
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Overview
IP Phone Models
A Power over Ethernet (PoE) inline power injector supplies 48V power to the IP
phone through the Ethernet cable on pins 4 & 5 and 7 & 8.
Warning: Do not use this inline PoE power injector to power other
devices. See your phone-specific Installation Guide for more information.
Reference
D
ra
f
t1
For more information about installing the PoE and additional Ethernet cable, see
your phone-specific Installation Guide.
M670i Expansion Module
for 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT
M675i Expansion Module
for 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT
The M670i module adds 36 additional softkeys to the IP phone models 6753i,
6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT. The M670i provides paper labels for each softkey. Up
to 3 modules can be piggy-backed to provide up to 108 additional softkeys for the
phone.
The M675i module adds 60 additional softkeys to the IP phone models 6755i,
6757i, and 6757i CT (using the 3 function keys on the bottom right of the unit).
The M675i module provides an LCD display for display softkey labels. Up to 3
modules can be piggy-backed to provide up to 180 additional softkeys for the
phone.
Reference
For more information about installing and using the expansion modules, see your
phone-specific Installation Guide and phone-specific User Guide.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
1-5
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
Model 9143i IP Phone
This section provides brief information about the Model 9143i IP Phone. It
includes a list of features and describes the hard keys on the 9143i.
Options
Directory
Save
Delete
Conf
Xfer
1
2 ABC
3 DEF
4 GHI
5 JKL
6 MNO
7
8
9 WXYZ
TUV
L3
L2
t1
PQRS
*
0
#
L1
ra
f
Mute
9143i Phone Features
•
•
•
•
3-line LCD screen
3 call appearance lines with LEDs
7 programmable keys
Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature
Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
Supports up to 9 call lines
Headset support (modular connector)
Built-in two-port, 10/100 Ethernet ports - lets you share a connection with
your computer
Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power
adapters.
AC power adapter (included)
Enhanced busy lamp fields*
Set paging*
D
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.
1-6
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Overview
IP Phone Models
9143i Symbol Key Descriptions*
Keys
Key Description
Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view
different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than
1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through
menu selections, such as the Options List.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/
call appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or
enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display,
pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the
RIGHT arrow key sets the option.
t1
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open
list, such as the Options List, without saving changes.
Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the
call appearance button beside the light that is flashing.
ra
f
Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer,
and handsfree speaker.
Conf
Xferer
D
Callers List key - Allows you to access the Callers List that stores up to
200 of the last calls received.
Conference key - Allows you to begin a conference call with up to 3 active
call parties.
Transfer key - Allows you to perform blind or consultative transfer of an
active call to another number. In blind transfer, you transfer the call without
waiting for the far end to answer. In consultative transfer, you wait for the far
end to answer before transferring the call.
Redial key - Redials a previously dialed number. The Redial key stores up
to 100 previously dialed numbers you can select from. Pressing the Redial
key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
1-7
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
Keys
Key Description
Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra
9143i IP Phone supports up to 3 line keys.
L1 L2 L3 L4
Directory key - Accesses the Directory on the phone. The Directory List is
your personal phone book, conveniently stored within your phone. You can
enter up to 200 entries into the 9143i Directory by adding them manually, or
by saving the number and name from other lists stored on your phone.
Each entry can contain a maximum of 16 letters and
numbers.
D
Directory
Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Specific options
are available to your System Administrator only and are password
protected. Contact your System Administrator for more information.
ra
f
Options
t1
Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls
without lifting the handset. When the audio mode option is set, this key is
used to switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone.
Save key - Allows you to save entries when storing numbers and names in
Directory. Also allows you to save Option settings when using the
programmable keys.
Delete key - Allows you to remove entries from the Redial, Directory, or
Callers Lists.
1-8
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Overview
IP Phone Models
Keys
Key Description
Programmable keys - Allows you to use the feature configured for that
key. You can program up to 7 keys with a specific function. By default, there
are no functions configured on the programmable keys (keys are
configured as “None”).
ra
f
t1
Note: For more information about configuring the programmable keys 1
through 7 to perform specific functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring
Operational Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature
Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-141.
D
Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the
light indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute).
*See the Aastra 9143i User Guide for more information about each of these keys.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
1-9
Model 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones
This section provides brief information about the Models 9480i and 9480i CT IP
Phones. It includes a list of features and describes the hard keys on these models.
35i
Hold
Hold
Redial
edial
35i
Good
oodbye
Hold
Hold
Redial
edial
Good
oodbye
1
2 ABC
D EF
3 DEF
GHI
4 GHI
JKL
5 JKL
6 MNO
PQ RS
TU V
7 PQRS
8 TUV
9 WXYZYZ
Options
Options
Options
Options
2 ABC
D EF
3 DEF
GHI
4 GHI
JKL
5 JKL
6 MNO
7
8
9 WXYZYZ
0
#
Xfer
er
Icom
om
Conf
onf
Servi
vices
es
*
0
#
Xfer
er
Icom
om
Conf
onf
L1
L2
L3
Servi
vices
es
L4
L1
L2
L3
L4
t1
*
TU V
TUV
9480i
9480i CT
9480i and 9480i CT Phone Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ra
f
PQ RS
PQRS
5 line graphical LCD screen with large backlit display
6 multi-functional, state-based softkeys
Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature
4 call appearance lines with LEDs
Supports up to 9 call lines
Speakerphone for handsfree calls
Headset support (modular connector)
Built-in-two-port, 10/100 Ethernet switch - lets you share a connection with
your computer.
Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power
adapters.
AC power adapter (included)
Enhanced busy lamp fields*
Set paging*
D
1
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.
Overview
IP Phone Models
9480i and 9480i CT Key Descriptions*
Keys
Key Description
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open
list, such as the Options List, without saving changes.
Good
oodbye
Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System
Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check
with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only
options.
Options
Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the
call appearance button beside the light that is flashing.
t1
Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the
Redial key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number.
ra
f
Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer,
and handsfree speaker.
D
Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls
without lifting the handset. When the audio mode option is set, this key is
used to switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone.
Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the
light indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute).
Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra
9480i and 9480i CT IP phones support up to 4 line keys.
L1
L2
L3
L4
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
1-11
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
Keys
Key Description
Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view
different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than
1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through
menu selections, such as the Options List.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/
call appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or
enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display,
pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the
RIGHT arrow key sets the option.
Transfer key - Transfers an active call to another number.
Xfer
er
Icom key - Begins an intercom call to a remote extension and answers
incoming intercom calls. The 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones also have
default softkey 4 configured as Icom.
ra
f
Icom
om
Conference key - Begins a conference call with the active call.
t1
Conf
D
Services key - Displays a list of Services available to your phone, if
specific services have been configured. The available Aastra services
include Directory & Callers Log. The 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones also
have default softkey 1 configured as Services.
Note: Availability of the services feature is dependant on your phone
system and/or service provider.
Softkeys - 6 state-based softkeys on the 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones.
By default, key 1 is assigned as WebApps. When you pick up the handset,
the following displays on key 1:
Dial - After entering a phone number from the keypad, you can press the
Dial softkey to immediately dial the number.
Note: For more information about configuring softkeys 1 through 6 to
perform specific functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational
Features” the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/
Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-141.
*See the Aastra 9480i and 9480i CT User Guides for more information about each of these
keys.
1-12
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Overview
IP Phone Models
9480i CT Cordless Handset Features
5 line backlit display screen
2 multi-functional softkeys
Programmable function key supports up to 14 functions
Vibration Alerter
Headset Jack
Desk charging stand
D
ra
f
t1
•
•
•
•
•
•
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
1-13
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
9480i CT Cordless Handset Key Descriptions*
Function Description
1
Receiver
2
Volume key
During Ringing: Adjusts ringer volume
During a call: Adjusts receiver volume
During text mode (not in a call): Moves cursor right/left
3
Display
4
Features ƒ Key List
Access key to the programmed Feature Key List
Scrolls up when in the various lists
Adds a space during editing
5
Softkeys
Activates feature or option shown on the display above
the keys
6
Call key
Used to obtain dial tone
Also used as a Hold key
7
Dial Pad
10
11
ra
f
9
Mute Key
When used, prevents the caller from hearing you
Headset Jack
Status Light
D
8
t1
Function #
Release key
To end calls and go on hook
Exits Menu and the various lists
12
Menu Key
Access key to the different Options
Scrolls down when in the various lists
Used as Backspace during editing
13
Redial Key
Displays the last 10 numbers dialed
14
Charging Jack
15
Charging Contacts
16
Microphone
*See the Aastra 9480i CT User Guide for more information about each of these keys.
1-14
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Overview
IP Phone Models
Model 6751i IP Phone
This section provides brief information about the Model 6751i IP Phone. It
includes a list of features and describes the hard keys on the 6751i. The 6751i is
available with a symbol keypad or a text keypad.
Goodbye
t1
Services
Hold
ra
f
Redial
6751i with Symbol Keys
Save
Delete
Swap
Speaker
Mute
6751i with Text Keys
•
•
D
6751i Phone Features
3-line LCD screen
1 call appearance line
•
•
Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature
Supports 1 call line with transfer capabilities
•
Full-duplex speakerphone for monitoring calls
•
Built-in two-port, 10/100 Ethernet ports - lets you share a connection with
your computer
•
AC power adapter (sold separately)
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
1-15
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
6751i Symbol Key Descriptions*.
Keys
Key Description
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open
list, such as the Options List, without saving changes.
Services key - Accesses services and options to customize your phone.
This keys also access the Directory List and Callers List. Your System
Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check
with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only
options.
Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the
Hold key again.
t1
Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the
Redial key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number.
ra
f
Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, ringer, and
handsfree speaker.
D
Save key - Saves names and numbers to the Directory List. Also saves
names and numbers from the Callers List to the Directory List.
Delete key - Deletes individual or all entries from the Directory List and
Callers List. Deletes all entries from the Redial List. You can also use this
key to backspace and delete a character when entering values for
speeddial softkeys.
Swap key - If you are on an active call and a second call comes in, you can
press the Swap key. This key places the first call on hold and answers the
second call. Pressing the Swap key again toggles between the two active
calls.
The Swap key works with two active calls only. A third call cannot be
accepted.
Speaker key - Activates Handsfree for receiving calls without lifting the
handset. Can be used on active calls to switch from the handset to
handsfree.
1-16
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Overview
IP Phone Models
Keys
Key Description
Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you.
Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view
different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than
1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through
menu selections, such as the Options List.
UP Arrow - This key also acts as a Transfer Key, allowing you to transfer
calls when required.
DOWN Arrow - This key also acts as a Conference Key, allowing you to join
conferences when required.
t1
Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view the lines on the LCD.
While in the Options List, the navigation keys allow you to exit or enter the
current option. When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the
LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the RIGHT arrow
key sets the option.
D
ra
f
*See the Aastra 6751i User Guide for more information about each of these keys.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
1-17
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
6751i Text Key Descriptions*.
Keys
Key Description
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open
list, such as the Options List, without saving changes.
Services key - Accesses services and options to customize your phone.
This keys also access the Directory List and Callers List. Your System
Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check
with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only
options.
Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the
Hold key again.
t1
Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the
Redial key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number.
ra
f
Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, ringer, and
handsfree speaker.
D
Save key - Saves names and numbers to the Directory List. Also saves
names and numbers from the Callers List to the Directory List.
Delete key - Deletes individual or all entries from the Directory List and
Callers List. Deletes all entries from the Redial List. You can also use this
key to backspace and delete a character when entering values for
speeddial softkeys.
Swap key - If you are on an active call and a second call comes in, you can
press the Swap key. This key places the first call on hold and answers the
second call. Pressing the Swap key again toggles between the two active
calls.
The Swap key works with two active calls only. A third call cannot be
accepted.
Speaker key - Activates Handsfree for receiving calls without lifting the
handset. Can be used on active calls to switch from the handset to
handsfree.
1-18
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Overview
IP Phone Models
Keys
Key Description
Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you.
Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view
different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than
1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through
menu selections, such as the Options List.
UP Arrow - This key also acts as a Transfer Key, allowing you to transfer
calls when required.
DOWN Arrow - This key also acts as a Conference Key, allowing you to join
conferences when required.
t1
Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view the lines on the LCD.
While in the Options List, the navigation keys allow you to exit or enter the
current option. When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the
LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the RIGHT arrow
key sets the option.
D
ra
f
*See the Aastra 6751i User Guide for more information about each of these keys.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
1-19
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
Model 6753i IP Phone
ra
f
t1
This section provides brief information about the Model 6753i IP Phone. It
includes a list of features, and describes the hard keys and default programmable
keys on the 6753i.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
D
6753i Phone Features
3-line LCD screen
6 top keys - all 6 keys are programmable
3 call appearance lines with LEDs
Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature
Supports up to 9 call lines
Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
Headset support (modular connector)
Built-in two-port, 10/100 Ethernet ports - lets you share a connection with
your computer
AC power adapter (included)
Enhanced busy lamp fields*
Set paging*
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.
1-20
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Overview
IP Phone Models
6753i Key Descriptions*
Keys
Key Description
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open
list, such as the Options List, without saving changes.
Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System
Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check
with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only
options.
Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the
call appearance button beside the light that is flashing.
t1
Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the
Redial key twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number.
ra
f
Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer,
and handsfree speaker.
D
Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra
6753i IP phone supports up to 3 line keys.
Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls
without lifting the handset. When the audio mode option is set, this key is
used to switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone.
Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the
light indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute).
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
1-21
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
Keys
Key Description
Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view
different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more
than 1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll
through menu selections, such as the Options List.
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/
call appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or
enter the current option. When you are editing entries on the display,
pressing the LEFT arrow key erases the character on the left; pressing the
RIGHT arrow key sets the option.
Programmable keys - 6 Top Keys - all 6 keys are programmable.
Keys 1 and 2 are designated as the SAVE and DELETE keys, respectively.
These keys are locked but can be unlocked and made configurable if
required by the System Administrator.
Allows you to save numbers and/or names to the
Directory. Using this key, you enter the number,
name, and line (or speeddial key) to record in the
Directory List.
2 - DELETE
Allows you to delete a single entry or all entries from
the Directory List and Callers List.
3 - DIRECTORY
Displays up to 200 names and phone numbers
(stored in alphabetical order).
4 - CALLERS LIST Accesses the last 200 calls received.
5 - TRANSFER
Transfers the active call to another number.
6 - CONFERENCE Begins a conference call with the active call.
D
ra
f
1 - SAVE
t1
The following are the default functions for the programmable keys on the
6753i IP phone:
Notes:
1. For more information about programming the SAVE and DELETE
keys, see “Locking/Unlocking the SAVE and DELETE keys (6753i)” on
page 5-50.
2, For more information about configuring keys 1 thru 6 to perform
specific functions, see Chapter 5 the section, “Softkeys/Programmable
Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-141.
*See the Aastra 6753i User Guide for more information about each of these keys.
1-22
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Overview
IP Phone Models
Model 6755i IP Phone
ra
f
t1
This section provides brief information about the Model 6755i IP Phone. It
includes a list of features, and describes the hard keys, default programmable
keys, and default softkeys on the 6755i.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
D
6755i Phone Features
8 line graphical LCD screen (144 x 75 pixels) with white backlight
12 programmable keys
6 Top keys:Programmable hard keys
6 Bottom keys:Programmable state-based softkeys
4 call appearance lines with LEDs
Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature
Supports up to 9 call lines
Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
Headset support (modular connector)
Built-in-two-port, 10/100 Ethernet switch - lets you share a connection with
your computer.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
1-23
•
•
•
•
Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power
adapters.
AC power adapter (included)
Enhanced busy lamp fields*
Set paging*
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.
6755i Key Descriptions*
Key Description
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such
as the Options List, without saving changes.
t1
Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System
Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check with your
System Administrator before changing the administrator-only options.
ra
f
Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the call
appearance button beside the light that is flashing.
Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the Redial key
twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number.
D
Keys
Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer, and
handsfree speaker.
Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra 6755i IP
phone supports up to 4 line keys.
Overview
IP Phone Models
Keys
Key Description
Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls without lifting
the handset. When the audio mode option is set, this key is used to switch between
a headset and the handsfree speakerphone.
Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the light
indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute).
Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different
status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/
text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through menu selections, such as
the Options List.
t1
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/call
appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or enter the
current option. When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the LEFT arrow
key erases the character on the left; pressing the RIGHT arrow key sets the option.
Programmable keys - 6 Top keys: programmable hard keys (up to 6 programmable
functions)
ra
f
By default, the top keys 1 through 4 are assigned as Services, Directory, Callers List,
and Intercom, respectively. Keys 5 and 6 have no assigned functions. All 6 keys are
programmable and can be assigned to perform specific functions.
D
The following are the default functions for the programmable keys on the 6755i IP
phone:
1 - SERVICES
Accesses enhanced features and services such as XML
applications and voicemail, provided by third parties.
2 - DIRECTORY
Displays up to 200 names and phone numbers (stored in
alphabetical order).
3 - CALLERS LIST Accesses the last 200 calls received.
4 - ICOM
Accesses another extension on the network.
5 - NONE
No assigned function.
6 - NONE
No assigned function.
Note: For more information about configuring the programmable keys 1 through 6 to
perform specific functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features” the
section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on
page 5-141.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
1-25
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
Keys
Key Description
Softkeys - 6 Bottom keys: programmable state-based softkeys (up to 20
programmable functions).
By default, keys 1 through 6 have no assigned functions. You can configure all 6
bottom softkeys to perform specific functions on the 6755i IP phone. However, after
you lift the handset, there are specific static softkeys that display that cannot be
changed. These are as follows:
1 - DIAL
2 - CONF
3 - XFER
Allows you to dial out on the phone.
Begins a conference call with the active phone.
Transfers the active call to another number.
t1
Note: For more information about configuring softkeys 1 through 6 to perform
specific functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features” the section,
“Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on
page 5-141.
D
ra
f
*See the Aastra 6755i User Guide for more information about each of these keys.
1-26
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Overview
IP Phone Models
Model 6757i and 6757i CT IP Phones
ra
f
6757i
t1
This section provides brief information about the Model 6757i IP Phone. It
includes a list of features, and describes the hard keys and default softkeys on the
6757i.
6757i CT
•
•
D
6757i and 6757i CT Phone Features
11 line graphical LCD screen (144 x 128 pixels) with white backlight
12 multi-functional softkeys
- 6 Top Keys: programmable static softkeys
•
•
•
•
•
•
- 6 Bottom Keys: programmable state-based softkeys
4 call appearance lines with LEDs
Press-and-Hold speeddial key configuration feature
Supports up to 9 call lines
Full-duplex speakerphone for handsfree calls
Headset support (modular connector)
Built-in-two-port, 10/100 Ethernet switch - lets you share a connection with
your computer.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
1-27
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
•
•
•
•
Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power
adapters.
AC power adapter (included)
Enhanced busy lamp fields*
Set paging*
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.
6757i and 6757i CT Key Descriptions*
Keys
Key Description
Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such
as the Options List, without saving changes.
t1
Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System
Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check with your
System Administrator before changing the administrator-only options.
ra
f
Hold key - Places an active call on hold. To retrieve a held call, press the call
appearance button beside the light that is flashing.
D
Redial key - Redials up to 100 previously dialed numbers. Pressing the Redial key
twice simultaneously redials the last dialed number.
Volume control key - Adjusts the volume for the handset, headset, ringer, and
handsfree speaker.
Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra 6757i IP
phone supports up to 4 line keys.
1-28
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Overview
IP Phone Models
Keys
Key Description
Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls without lifting
the handset. When the audio mode option is set, this key is used to switch between
a headset and the handsfree speakerphone.
Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the light
indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute).
Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different
status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/
text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through menu selections, such as
the Options List.
D
ra
f
t1
Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/call
appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or enter the
current option. When you are editing entries on the display, pressing the LEFT arrow
key erases the character on the left; pressing the RIGHT arrow key sets the option.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
1-29
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
Keys
Key Description
Softkeys - 12 softkeys on the 6757i IP Phone.
- 6 Top Keys: programmable static softkeys (up to 10 programmable functions)
- 6 Bottom Keys: programmable state-based softkeys (up to 20 programmable
functions)
By default, the top softkeys 1 through 4 are assigned as Services, Directory, Callers
List, and Intercom, respectively. Keys 5 and 6 have no assigned functions. All 6 keys
are programmable and can be assigned to perform specific functions.
The following are the default functions for the top softkeys on the 6757i IP phone:
Accesses enhanced features and services such as XML
applications and voicemail, provided by third parties.
2 - DIRECTORY
Displays up to 200 names and phone numbers (stored in
alphabetical order).
3 - CALLERS LIST Accesses the last 200 calls received.
4 - ICOM
Accesses another extension on the network.
5 - NONE
No assigned function.
6 - NONE
No assigned function.
t1
1 - SERVICES
ra
f
By default, the bottom softkeys 7 through 12 have no assigned functions. You can
configure all 6 bottom softkeys to perform specific functions on the 6757i IP phone.
However, after you lift the handset, there are specific static softkeys that display that
cannot be changed. These are as follows:
Allows you to dial out on the phone.
Begins a conference call with the active phone.
Transfers the active call to another number.
D
7- DIAL
8- CONF
9- XFER
Note: For more information about programming the softkeys to perform specific
functions, see Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features” the section, “Softkeys/
Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-141.
*See the Aastra 6757i or 6757i CT User Guide for more information about each of these keys.
1-30
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Overview
IP Phone Models
6757i CT Cordless Handset Features
5 line backlit display screen
2 multi-functional softkeys
Programmable function key supports up to 14 functions
Vibration Alerter
Headset Jack
Desk charging stand
D
ra
f
t1
•
•
•
•
•
•
6757i CT Cordless Handset Key Descriptions
Function #
Function Description
1
Receiver
2
Volume key
During Ringing: Adjusts ringer volume
During a call: Adjusts receiver volume
During text mode (not in a call): Moves cursor right/left
3
Display
4
Features ƒ Key List
Access key to the programmed Feature Key List
Scrolls up when in the various lists
Adds a space during editing
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
1-31
IP Phone Administrator Guide
IP Phone Models
Function Description
5
Softkeys
Activates feature or option shown on the display above
the keys
6
Call key
Used to obtain dial tone
Also used as a Hold key
7
Dial Pad
8
Mute Key
When used, prevents the caller from hearing you
9
Headset Jack
10
Status Light
11
Release key
To end calls and go on hook
Exits Menu and the various lists
12
Menu Key
Access key to the different Options
Scrolls down when in the various lists
Used as Backspace during editing
15
16
1-32
ra
f
14
Redial Key
Displays the last 10 numbers dialed
Charging Jack
Charging Contacts
Microphone
D
13
t1
Function #
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Overview
Firmware Installation Information
Firmware Installation Information
Description
The firmware setup and installation for the IP phone can be done using any of the
following:
•
Phone User Interface via the keypad (Phone UI)
•
Aastra Web-based user interface (Aastra Web UI)
Installation Considerations
t1
When the IP phone is initialized for the first time, DHCP is enabled by default.
Depending on the type of configuration server setup you may have, the IP phone
may download a firmware version automatically, or you may need to download it
manually.
•
If you are planning on using dynamic IP addresses, make sure a DHCP server
is enabled and running on your network.
D
•
ra
f
The following considerations must be made before connecting the IP phone to the
network:
If you are not planning on using dynamic IP addresses, see Chapter 4, the
section, “Configuring Network Settings Manually” on page 4-24 for manually
setting up an IP address.
To install the IP phone hardware and cabling, refer to the model-specific
SIP IP Phone Installation Guide.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
1-33
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Firmware Installation Information
Installation Requirements
The following are general requirements for setting up and using your SIP IP
phone:
•
SIP-based IP PBX system or network installed and running with a SIP
account created for the IP phone.
•
Access to a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP), File Transfer Protocol
(FTP), Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) server, or HyperText Transfer
Protocol over Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) (HTTPS).
•
Ethernet/Fast Ethernet LAN (10/100 Mb)
•
Category 5/5e straight through cabling
•
Power source
t1
— For Ethernet networks that supply in-line power to the phone (IEEE
802.3af):
ra
f
— For power, use the Ethernet cable (supplied) to connect from the
phone directly to the network for power. (No 48v AC power adapter
required.)
— For Ethernet networks that DO NOT supply power to the phone:
D
— For power, use the 48V AC Power Adapter (included) to connect
from the DC power port on the phone to a power source.
or
— (optional) - For power, use a Power over Ethernet (PoE) power
injector or a PoE switch. A PoE power injector is available as an
optional accessory from Aastra Telecom. Contact your Administrator
for more information.
1-34
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Overview
Firmware Installation Information
Configuration Server Requirement
A basic requirement for setting up the IP phone is to have a configuration server.
The configuration server allows you to:
•
Store the firmware images that you need to download to your IP phone.
•
Stores configuration files for the IP phone
•
Stores the software when performing software upgrades to the IP phone
Note: If you use TFTP, the configuration server must be able to accept
connections anonymously.
t1
Reference
To set the protocol for your configuration server, see Chapter 4, the section,
“Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108.
D
ra
f
To update the firmware on your phone, see Chapter 8, “Upgrading the Firmware”.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
1-35
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Firmware and Configuration Files
Firmware and Configuration Files
Description
When the IP phone is initialized for the first time, DHCP is enabled by default
allowing the phone to automatically get its IP address from the network. Upon
bootup, the phone also automatically updates it firmware and configuration files
from the configuration server using the default TFTP protocol.
The IP Phones support TFTP, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS as download protocols.
You can change the protocol server that you use to download firmware and
configuration files, and can perform the download manually or configure the
phone to download them automatically.
ra
f
t1
Note: Automatic download is dependant on your configuration server
setup. For more information about manual and automatic download of
firmware, see Chapter 8, “Upgrading the Firmware.” For more
information on changing the download protocol on your phone, see
Chapter 4, the section, “Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-108.
D
The firmware consists of a single file called:
• .st (for example, 55i.st (for 6755i)) - This file contains
information about the specific IP Phone model and contains the language
packs to load to the phone.
The configuration files consist of two files called:
• aastra.cfg - This file contains configuration information about the IP Phone.
• .cfg (for example, 00085D1610DE.cfg) - This file contains
configuration information about the IP Phone.
1-36
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Overview
Firmware and Configuration Files
The following table provides the files that the phone requests from the
configuration server during bootup of the phone:
Associated Firmware
Configuration Files
Language Files
9143i
9143i.st
aastra.cfg
9480i
9480i.st
9480i CT
9480iCT.st
6751i
51i.st
6753i
53i.st
6755i
55i.st
6757i
57i.st
.cfg
(for example, 00085D1610DE.cfg)
lang_de.txt
(German)
lang_es.txt
(Spanish)
lang_es_mx.txt (Mexican Spanish)
lang_fr.txt
(French)
lang_fr_ca.txt
(Canadian French)
lang_it.txt
(Italian)
6757i CT
57iCT.st
t1
IP Phone Model
ra
f
The IP Phone firmware file includes all the necessary files you need for your
phone, including the language files. Loading the language files to your phone(s) is
optional.
Reference
D
For more information about loading language files and using the various
languages on the IP phone, see Chapter 5, the section, “Language” on page 5-34.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
1-37
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Firmware and Configuration Files
Configuration File Precedence
Aastra IP phones can accept two sources of configuration data:
•
The server configuration most recently downloaded/cached from the
configuration server files, aastra.cfg/.cfg (or the aastra.tuz/.tuz
encrypted equivalents).
•
Local configuration changes stored on the phone that were entered using
either the IP phone UI or the Aastra Web UI
In the event of conflicting values set by the different methods, values are applied
in the following sequence:
Default values hard-coded in the phone software
2.
Values downloaded from the configuration server
3.
Values stored locally on the phone
t1
1.
ra
f
The last values to be applied to the phone configuration are the values that take
effect.
D
For example, if a parameter’s value is set in the local configuration (via Aastra
Web UI or IP phone UI) and the same value was also set differently in one of the
.cfg/aastra.cfg files on the configuration server, the local configuration
value is the value that takes effect because that is the last value applied to the
configuration.
1-38
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Overview
Firmware and Configuration Files
Installing the Firmware/Configuration Files
The following procedure describes how to install the firmware and configuration
files.
Step
Action
1
If DHCP is disabled, manually enter the configuration server’s IP address. For details on manually
setting DHCP, see Chapter 4, the section “DHCP” on page 4-4.
2
Copy the firmware file .st to the root directory of the configuration server. The IP
phone accepts the new firmware file only if it is different from the firmware currently loaded on the IP
phone.
Note: The attribute is the IP phone model (i.e., 9143i.st, 9480i.st, 9480iCT.st, 51i.st,
53i.st, 55i.st, 57i.st, 57iCT.st).
Copy the Aastra configuration files (aastra.cfg and .cfg) to the root directory of the
configuration server.
t1
3
Note: The attribute represents the actual MAC address of your phone.
(i.e., 00085D030996.cfg).
ra
f
Note: Restart the IP phone as described in Chapter 3, “Restarting Your Phone” on page 3-13.
D
4
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
1-39
t1
ra
f
D
Chapter 2
Configuration Interface Methods
About this chapter
Introduction
t1
This chapter describes the methods you, as an Administrator, can use to configure
the IP phones.
ra
f
Note: Features, characteristics, requirements, and configuration that are
specific to a particular IP phone models are indicated where required in
this guide.
D
Topics
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic
Page
Configuration Methods
page 2-2
IP Phone UI
page 2-2
Aastra Web UI
page 2-6
Configuration Files (Administrator Only)
page 2-17
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
2-1
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Methods
Configuration Methods
Description
You can use the following to setup and configure the IP phone:
•
IP phone UI
•
Aastra Web UI
•
Configuration files
t1
Note: There are specific parameters you can configure using only the IP
Phone UI, only and Aastra Web UI, only the configuration files, or a
combination of any of these methods. For more information about
configuring the phone, see Chapter 4, Chapter 5, and Chapter 6.
IP Phone UI
ra
f
The following paragraphs describe each method of configuring the IP Phone.
D
The IP Phone User Interface (UI) provides an easy way to access features and
functions for using and configuring the IP phone. An Administrator can configure
all features and functions on the phone. A User can configure a subset of these
features and functions. Users of the IP phones should see their Model-specific
User’s Guide for available features and functions to configure.
You use the phone’s hard keys and keypad to configure specific features on the IP
phone. By default, specific softkeys/programmable keys on each phone model can
also access the Directory List and Callers List, and initiate transfers and
conference calls.
Reference
Refer to Chapter 1, the section “IP Phone Models” on page 1-3 for keys specific to
your phone model.
For more information about using the hard keys on each phone, see Chapter 5, the
section, “Locking IP Phone Keys” on page 5-49.
For more information about the softkeys/programmable keys, see Chapter 5, the
section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys”
on page 5-141.
2-2
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuration Interface Methods
Configuration Methods
Options Key
The Options key allows you to access the "Options List" on the IP phone.
Accessible options in this list are for both user and Administrator use. An
Administrator must enter a password for administrator options.
Note: An Administrator can apply a simplified options menu to the IP
phones. An Administrator can also enable and disable the use of an
Administrator password protection in the IP phone UI. These features are
configurable using the configuration files only.
For more information about these features, see Chapter 3, the section,
“Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu” on page page 3-5, and Chapter
5, the section, “Administrator Passwords” on page 5-9.
t1
This document describes the administrator options only. For a description of the
user options in the "Options List", see your model-specific SIP IP Phone User
Guide.
The following illustrations indicate the location of the Options Key on each phone
model.
ra
f
Options Key
Options
9480i
Directory
Hold
Redial
Goodbye
Save
Options
Delete
D
Conf
1
2
4 GHI
5 JKL
6 MNO
7 PQRS 8 TUV
9 WXYZ
ABC
3 DEF
Xfer
1
2
4 GHI
5 JKL
6 MNO
7 PQRS 8 TUV
9 WXYZ
*
0
ABC
3
DEF
#
L3
L2
*
L1
0
#
Xfer
Icom
Conf
Mute
L1
Services
L2
L3
L4
9480i/9480i CT
9143i
Options Key
9480i CT Handset
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
2-3
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Methods
Options Key
6751i
6753i
t1
6755i
ra
f
Options Key
6757i CT Handset
D
6757i/6757i CT
2-4
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuration Interface Methods
Configuration Methods
Using the Options Key
Step
Action
1
Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.
Note: Press the Services key on the 6751i and then select Options from the list.
2
3
Use the r and s to scroll through the list of options.
On 9143i, 6751i, 6753i:
To select an option, press the Enter softkey, or select the number on the keypad that corresponds to
the option in the Option List.
On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT:
To select an option, press the Select softkey, press 4, or select the number on the keypad that
corresponds to the option in the Option List.
On 9143i, 6751i, 6753i:
Use the Set softkey after making a change to an option, to save the change.
t1
4
On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT:
Use the Change softkey to change a selected option.
Press the Done softkey at any time to save the changes and exit the current option.
6
Press the Cancel softkey, press 3, press
changes.
ra
f
5
, or press
Good
oodbye
any time to exit without saving
Step
1
2
3
4
Action
D
From the 9480i CT and 6757i CT handset:
Press the  key to enter the Options List when the phone is not in use.
Use the scroll keys  and Ï to scroll the options.
To select and change an option, press the r keys.
Press y when done.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
2-5
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Methods
Aastra Web UI
An administrator can setup and configure the IP phone using the Aastra Web UI.
The Aastra Web UI supports Internet Explorer and Gecko engine-based browsers
like Firefox, Mozilla or Netscape.
Note: An Administrator can enable or disable the Aastra Web UI for a
single phone or all phones in a network. For more information about
enabling/disabling the Aastra Web UI, see “Enabling/Disabling the
Aastra Web UI” on page 2-16.
HTTP/HTTPS Support
t1
The Aastra Web UI supports both Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) and
Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS) client and server
protocols.
ra
f
HTTP is the set of rules for transferring files (text, graphic images, sound,
video, and other multimedia files) over the Internet. When you open your
Web browser, you are indirectly making use of HTTP. HTTP is an
application protocol that runs on top of the TCP/IP suite of protocols (the
foundation protocols for the Internet).
D
HTTPS is a Web protocol that encrypts and decrypts user page requests as well as
the pages that are returned by the Web server. HTTPS uses Secure Socket Layer
(SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) as a sublayer under its regular HTTP
application layering. SSL is a commonly-used protocol for managing the
security of a message transmission on the Internet. It uses a 40-bit key size
for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm, which is considered an adequate degree
of encryption for commercial exchange. TLS is a protocol that ensures privacy
between communicating applications and their users on the Internet. When a
server and client communicate, TLS ensures that no third party may eavesdrop or
tamper with any message. TLS is the successor to SSL.
Note: HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions
with the TCP/IP lower layer. Both the HTTP and HTTPS port numbers
are configurable using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, the Aastra
Web UI and DHCP Option 66. For more information about configuring
these ports, see Chapter 4, the section, “Configuring the Configuration
Server Protocol” on page 4-108.
2-6
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuration Interface Methods
Configuration Methods
HTTP/HTTPS Client and Server Support
The Aastra IP phones allow for HTTP request processing and associated data
transfers to perform over a secure connection (HTTPS). The IP phones support
the following:
•
Transfer of firmware images, configuration files, script files, and web page
content over a secure connection.
•
Web browser phone configuration over a secure connection.
•
TLS 1.0or SSL 3.0 methods for both client and server
HTTPS Client
t1
When an HTTPS client opens and closes its TCP socket, the SSL software
respectively handshakes upon opening and disconnects upon closing from the
HTTPS server. The main HTTPS client functions are:
Downloading of configuration files and firmware images.
•
Downloading of script files based on an “HTTPS://” URL supplied by a
softkey definition.
ra
f
•
HTTPS Server
•
•
D
The HTTPS server provides HTTP functionality over secure connections. It
coexists with the HTTP server but has its own set of tasks. The main HTTPS
server functions are:
Delivery of web page content to a browser client over a secure connection.
Execution of HTTP GET and POST requests received over a secure
connection
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
2-7
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Methods
Non-Blocking HTTP Connections
The IP Phones support a non-blocking HTTP connection feature. This feature
allows the user to continue using the phone when there is a delay during an
HTTP connection while the phone is waiting for the HTTP server to
respond. This feature also allows a user to abort the connection and perform other
operations on the phone (which will abort the HTTP connection automatically). A
user can also abort the HTTP loading by pressing the GOODBYE key while the
phone is displaying “Loading Page.......”.
Note: This feature impacts only the HTTP calls triggered by a phone key
(softkey or programmable key); the HTTP calls performed by action
URIs are still blocking.
t1
Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods for
Broadsoft Client Management System (CMS)
D
ra
f
The IP Phones have authentication support per RFC 2617 when using HTTP or
HTTPS as download protocols. If a 5i Series phone is challenged by an HTTP or
HTTPS server when the server attempts to download the aastra.cfg file, the phone
automatically sends "aastra" as the default Username and Password back to the
server. For more information about this feature, see Chapter 5, the section,
“Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods, used with
Broadsoft Client Management System (CMS)” on page 5-365.
2-8
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuration Interface Methods
Configuration Methods
Using HTTPS via the Aastra Web UI
HTTPS is enabled by default on the IP phones. When you open a browser window
and enter an IP address or host name for a phone using HTTP, a server redirection
occurs which automatically converts an HTTP connection to an HTTPS
connection. After the redirection, a “Security Alert” certificate window displays
alerting the user that information exchanged with the phone cannot be viewed or
changed by others. Accepting the certificate then forwards you to the phone’s Web
UI.
Notes:
1. The private key and certificate generate outside the phone and embed
in the phone firmware for use by the HTTPS server during the SSL
handshake.
ra
f
t1
2. Using the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI,
you can configure the following regarding HTTPS:
- Specify HTTPS security client method to use (TLS 1.0 or SSL 3.0)
- Enable or disable HTTP to HTTPS server redirect function
- HTTPS server blocking of XML HTTP POSTS to the phone
Reference
•
•
D
For more information on configuring the HTTPS protocol, see Chapter 4, the
sections:
“Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108
“HTTPS Client/Server Configuration” on page 4-40
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
2-9
Accessing the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to access the Aastra Web UI.
Step
Action
1
Open your web browser and enter the phone’s IP address or host name into the address field.
The following is an example of the Login screen that displays.
D
ra
f
t1
IP address or
host name
Configuration Interface Methods
Configuration Methods
Step
Action
2
Enter your username and password and click
.
Note: For an administrator, the default username is “admin” and the password is “22222”.
For a user, the default username is “user” and the password field is left blank.
The IP phones accept numeric passwords only.
The Network Status window displays for the IP phone you are accessing. The following illustration is
an example of a Network Status screen for the 9143i IP phone.
D
ra
f
t1
9143i Network
Status Window
3
You can logout of the Aastra Web UI at any time by clicking LOGOFF.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
2-11
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Methods
Depending on the model phone you are accessing, the following categories
display in the side menu of the Aastra Web UI: Status, Operation, Basic
Settings, Advanced Settings.
Note: Programmable Keys apply to the 9143i, 6753i, and 6755i. Softkeys
apply to the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT. Expansion
Modules apply to the 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only.
Status
Operation
t1
The Status section displays the network status and the MAC address of the IP
phone. It also displays hardware and firmware information about the IP phone.
The status window also displays the SIP Account information for each account on
the phone. The information in the Network Status window is read-only.
The Operation section provides the following options:
Description
ra
f
Heading
User Password
Allows you to change user password.
(Applicable to User and Administrator).
D
Phone Lock
Allows you to assign an emergency dial plan to the phone,
lock the phone to prevent any changes to the phone and to
prevent use of the phone, and reset the user password.
Note: You can also configure a softkey to use for locking/
unlocking the phone.
(Applicable to User and Administrator).
Programmable Keys
9143i - 7 multi-functional programmable keys
6753i - 6 Top, multi-functional, programmable keys
6755i - 6 Top multi-functional, programmable keys
(Applicable to User and Administrator).
2-12
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuration Interface Methods
Configuration Methods
Heading
Description
Softkeys and XML
9480i/9480i CT6 state-based, multi-functional softkeys
6755i
6 Bottom, state-based, multi-functional
softkeys
6757i/6757i CT6 Top, multi-functional, static softkeys
6 Bottom, state-based, multi-functional
softkeys
(Applicable to User and Administrator).
The M670i has up to 36 configurable keys. The M675i has
up to 60 configurable keys. You can have up to 3 expansion
modules attached to a single phone allowing you to
configure keys for Expansion Module 1, Expansion Module
2, and Expansion Module 3.See your Model-specific User
Guide for applicable expansion modules for your model
phone.
t1
Expansion Module
Note: Expansion Modules apply to the 6753i, 6755i, 6757i,
and 6757i CT only.
ra
f
(Applicable to User and Administrator).
Allows you to configure up to 15 softkeys on the handset.
Keypad Speed Dial
Allows you to configure up to 9 speeddial keys. These fields
map to the keypad digits 1 through 9 on the phone. You can
also configure additional speeddials on the programmable
keys, softkeys and expansion modules. See your
model-specific User Guide for more information about this
feature.
D
Handset Keys
(9480i CT and 6757i CT
only)
(Applicable to User and Administrator).
(Applicable to User and Administrator).
Directory
Allows you to copy the Callers List and Directory List from
your IP phone to your PC.
(Applicable to User and Administrator).
Reset
Allows you to restart the IP phone when required.
(Applicable to User and Administrator).
This setting also allows you to set the IP phone back to its
factory default settings or remove the local configuration.
(Applicable Administrator only).
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
2-13
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Methods
Basic Settings
The Basic Settings section provides the following options:
Heading
Description
Preferences
Allows you to set the following General specifications on the
IP phone.
Local Dial Plan (Admin Only)
Send Dial Plan Terminator (Admin Only)
Digit Timeout (Admin Only)
Park Call (not available on 9143i and 6753i)
Pickup Parked Call (not available on 9143i and 6753i)
Suppress DTMF Playback
Display DTMF Digits
Call Waiting
Play Call Waiting Tone
Stuttered Dial Tone
XML Beep Support
Status Scroll Delay
Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing
Switch Focus to Ringing Line
Preferred Line
Preferred Line Timeout (seconds)
Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call
UPnP Mapping Lines
Message Waiting Indicator Line
DND Key Mode
Call Forward Key Mode
Use LLDP ELIN
D
ra
f
t1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
This section also allows you to set:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Account Configuration
2-14
Incoming Intercom Settings
Outgoing Intercom Settings (Admin Only; Administrator
can enable these for a User if required)
Group Paging RTP Settings
Key Mapping (Admin Only)
Ring Tones
Priority Alert Settings (Admin Only)
Directed Call Pickup Settings (Admin Only)
Auto Call Distribution Settings (Admin Only)
Time and Date Settings
Language Settings (Only the Admin can specify the
language pack names to load to the phone). Both the
Admin and User can select the language type to display
for the Web UI.
Allows you to configure DND (Do Not Disturb) and/or Call
Forwarding by specific account or by all accounts. Also
allows you to enable/disable specific states for each
account, specify different phone numbers for call
forwarding, and specify number of rings for a “No Answer”
state.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuration Interface Methods
Configuration Methods
Advanced Settings (Applicable to Administrator Only)
The Advanced Settings section provides the following options:
Description
Network
Allows you to set Basic Network Settings, Advanced
Network Settings, Type of Service DSCP, and VLAN
settings.
Global SIP
Allows you to set global Basic SIP Authentication Settings,
Basic SIP Network Settings, Advanced SIP Settings,
Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) settings, and Autodial
Settings that apply to all lines on the IP phone.
Lines 1 through 9
Allows you to set per-line Basic SIP Authentication Settings,
Basic SIP Network Settings, Advanced SIP Settings,
Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) settings, and Autodial
Settings that apply to specific lines on the IP phone.
t1
Heading
Allows an administrator to specify a uniform resource
identifier (URI) that triggers a GET when certain events
occur. An Administrator can also specify a URI to be called,
enable polling for the URI, and specify the interval between
polls.
ra
f
Action URI
(Applicable to Administrator Only)
D
Configuration Server
Firmware Update
Allows you to set the protocol to use on the configuration
server (TFTP (default), FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS), configure
automatic firmware and configuration file updates, enable/
disable auto-resync, and assign an XML push server list.
(Applicable to Administrator Only)
Allows you to manually perform a firmware update on the IP
phone from the configuration server using any of the IP
Phones supported protocols.
(Applicable to Administrator Only)
TLS Support
Allows you to specify the SIP Root and Intermediate
Certificate files to use when the phone uses the TLS
transport protocol to setup a call.
(Applicable to Administrator Only)
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
2-15
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Methods
Heading
Description
802.1x Support
Allows you to enable/disable the 802.1x Protocol
(Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)) to use on the IP
phones for authentication purposes. Applicable choices are
EAP-MD5 or EAP-TLS.
(Applicable to Administrator Only)
Troubleshooting
Allows you to perform troubleshooting tasks whereby the
results can be forwarded to Aastra Technical Support for
analyzing and troubleshooting.
(Applicable to Administrator Only)
Enabling/Disabling the Aastra Web UI
ra
f
t1
The Aastra Web UI is enabled by default on the IP phones. A System
Administrator can disable the Aastra Web UI on a single phone or on all phones if
required using the configuration files. Use the following procedure to enable and
disable the Aastra Web UI.
To disable the Aastra Web UI:
D
Configuration Files
Step
Action
1
Using a text-based editing application, open the .cfg file if you want to disable the Web UI on a
single phone. Open the aastra.cfg file to disable the Web UI on all phones
2
Enter the following parameter:
web interface enabled: 0
Note: A value of zero (0) disables the Web UI on the phone. A value of 1 enables the Web UI.
3
Save the changes and close the .cfg or the aastra.cfg file.
4
Restart the phone to apply the changes. The Aastra Web UI is disabled for a single IP phone or for all
phones.
2-16
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuration Interface Methods
Configuration Methods
Configuration Files (Administrator Only)
A system administrator can enter specific parameters in the configuration files to
configure the IP phones. All parameters in configuration files can only be set by
an administrator.
You can enter specific configuration parameters in either of the following
configuration files:
•
aastra.cfg
•
.cfg
References
t1
For information about configuration file precedence, see Chapter 1, “Overview.”
For a description of each configuration file parameter, see Appendix A,
“Configuration Parameters.”
ra
f
Using the Configuration Files
When you use the configuration files to configure the IP phones, you must use a
text-based editing application to open the configuration file (aastra.cfg or
.cfg).
D
Use the following procedure to add, delete, or change parameters and their
settings in the configuration files.
Note: Apply this procedure wherever this Administrator Guide refers to
configuring parameters using the configuration files.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
2-17
Configuration files
Step
Action
1
Using a text-based editing application, open the configuration file for the phone, for which you want to
configure the directory list (either aastra.cfg, .cfg or both).
2
Enter the required configuration parameters followed by the applicable value. For example,
directory 1: company_directory
directory 2: my_personal_directory
3
Save the changes and close the configuration file.
4
If the parameter requires the phone to be restarted in order for it to take affect, use the
IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI to restart the phone.
t1
Locking Parameters in the Configuration File
ra
f
The IP Phones allow you to lock individual configuration parameters to prevent
an end user from changing the configuration on the phone. This feature allows
service providers to prevent the end-user from changing the values of specific
parameters that would affect the service they provide.
An Administrator can lock parameters on the phone by placing an exclamation
mark (!) before the parameter in the configuration file. For example,
D
!admin password: 22222
!emergency dial plan: 911|999
You can lock parameters on the phone using the configuration files only. Once the
parameters are locked, they cannot be changed at all during the phones run-time.
The parameters appear as read-only when accessing the Aastra Web UI and the IP
Phone UI. In the Aastra Web UI, they appear grayed out. In the IP Phone UI the
ability to change the parameters is removed. In addition, when parameters are
locked, they cannot be changed via XML.
Configuration Interface Methods
Configuration Methods
Notes:
1.
The “parameter locking” feature applies to Release 2.4 and up. Any
phones that have a previous release loaded on the phone will not be able
to use the locking functionality in the configuration file.
2.
Any parameter duplicated in the mac.cfg from the aastra.cfg is
overwritten by the locking status and the value of the parameter found in
the mac.cfg file.
Limitations
A User possessing the Administrator password can bypass the locking of
configuration server details by defaulting the phone.
•
Parameters cannot be locked using XML.
•
Configuration files that include locked parameters are not backwards
compatible
D
ra
f
t1
•
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
2-19
t1
ra
f
D
Chapter 3
Administrator Options
About this chapter
Introduction
ra
f
t1
The IP phones provide specific options on the IP Phone that only an Administrator
can access. These options are password protected and allow an Administrator to
change or set features and configuration information as required. For all models,
an Administrator can use the IP Phone UI, the Aastra Web UI, or the configuration
files to enter and change values.
D
Note: Specific options are configurable only via the IP Phone UI, and/or
Aastra Web UI, and/or configuration files.
This chapter provides information about the available Administrator options.
Topics
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic
Page
Administrator Level Options
page 3-3
IP Phone UI Options
page 3-3
Aastra Web UI Options
page 3-6
Configuration File Options
page 3-8
Phone Status
page 3-9
Restarting Your Phone
page 3-13
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-1
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter
Topic
Page
page 3-15
Basic Settings
page 3-19
Account Configuration
page 3-35
Network Settings
page 3-37
Line Settings
page 3-71
Softkeys, Programmable Keys, Expansion Module Keys
page 3-72
Action URI
page 3-73
Configuration Server Settings
page 3-75
Firmware Update Features
page 3-84
TLS Support
page 3-85
802.1x Support
page 3-89
page 3-92
D
ra
f
Troubleshooting
t1
Set Phone to Factory Defaults/Erase Local Configuration
3-2
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Administrator Level Options
Description
There are options on the IP phone that both a User and Administrator can access.
However, there are specific options that an Administrator can access only. These
options allow the Administrator to configure and manage local and/or remote IP
phones in a network.
IP Phone UI Options
t1
An Administrator can access and manage these options using the IP Phone UI, the
Aastra Web UI, or the configuration files.
ra
f
Using the IP Phone UI, you can access the Administrator options at
Options->Administrator Menu using the default password of "22222"
Administrator Menu
D
Options Menu
1. Call Forward
2. Preferences
3. Phone Status
4. User Password
5. Administrator Menu
6. Restart Phone
7. Phone Lock
Select
Done
Note: An administrator has the option of enabling and disabling the use
of password protection in the IP phone UI. This is configurable using the
configuration files only. For more information about this feature, see
Appendix A, the section “Password Settings” on page A-15
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-3
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
The following are administrator options in the "Options List" on the IP phone UI:
•
Administrator Menu
— Configuration Server
— Network Settings
— SIP Settings
— Factory Default
— Erase Local Config.
References
D
ra
f
t1
For information about all other user options in the “Options Menu”, see your
model-specific SIP IP Phone User Guide.
For procedures on configuring Administrator Options on the IP phone via the IP
phone UI, see:
Chapter 4, “Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features”
Chapter 5, “Configuring Operational Features”
Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features”
3-4
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu
An Administrator can replace the existing options menu on the Phone UI with a
more simplified options menu. In the configuration files, the “options simple
menu” parameter allows you to display either the full menu (if set to 0), or the
simplified menu (if set to 1). The following table illustrates the differences
between the full menu and the simplified menu.
When setting the “options simple menu” parameter, the menu changes in the
Phone UI only. The Aastra Web UI is not affected.
Simplified Options Menu
Call Forward
Call Forward
Preferences
Preferences
Phone Status
User Password
Administrator Menu
Phone Status
Removed
Removed
Removed
ra
f
Restart Phone
t1
Full Options Menu
Phone Lock
Phone Lock
D
Warning: When using the simplified menu, you cannot change the
Network settings from the IP Phone UI. If the network settings become
misconfigured, you must “factory default” the phone and use the full
menu to recover the network settings from the Phone UI OR use the
Aastra Web UI to configure the network settings.
Configuring the Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu
You can enable the simplified IP Phone UI Options menu using the configurations
files only.
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Simplified IP
Phone UI Options Menu” on page A-7.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-5
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Aastra Web UI Options
An Administrator can configure specific options using the Aastra Web UI. These
options display after an Administrator logs into the Web UI using a Web browser
and entering the Admin username and password at the login prompt (The default
username is "admin" and the default password is "22222". The IP phones accept
numeric passwords only.) The column on the left side of the screen indicates the
configurable options. A User has limited configuration options as shown in the
following illustrations.
Administrator Web UI Menu
D
ra
f
t1
User Web UI Menu
3-6
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
The following are options that an Administrator can configure in the Aastra Web
UI (and are not available for the User to configure):
•
•
•
Operation->Reset
— Restore to Factory Defaults
— Remove Local Configuration Settings
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
— Local Dial Plan
— Send Dial Plan Terminator
— Digit Timeout (seconds)
Basic Settings->Preferences->Outgoing Intercom Settings (User can
configure this via the Aastra Web UI if enabled by an Administrator)
Basic Settings->Preferences->Key Mapping
•
Basic Settings->Preferences->Priority Alerting Settings
•
Basic Settings->Preferences->Directed Call Pickup Settings
•
Basic Settings->Preferences->Auto Call Distribution Settings
•
Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings
— Language 1 (entering language pack filename)
— Language 2 (entering language pack filename)
— Language 3 (entering language pack filename)
— Language 4 (entering language pack filename)
Advanced Settings
— Network
— Global SIP
— Line 1 through 9 Settings
— Action URI
— Configuration Server
— Firmware Update
— TLS Support
— 802.1x Support
— Troubleshooting
ra
f
D
•
t1
•
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-7
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
References
For information about options available to a User AND Administrator in the
Aastra Web UI, see your Model-specific User Guide.
For procedures to Restart your phone or restore factory defaults, see “Restarting
Your Phone” on page 3-13, and “Set Phone to Factory Defaults/Erase Local
Configuration” on page 3-15.
For more information about Advanced Settings for the IP Phone, see Chapter 4,
“Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features.”
Configuration File Options
t1
For procedures on configuring the Basic Settings for the IP Phone, see Chapter 5,
“Configuring Operational Features.”
ra
f
An Administrator can enter specific parameters in the configuration files to
configure the IP phones. All parameters in configuration files can only be set by
an administrator.
References
D
For a procedure on using the configuration files, see Chapter 2, the section,
“Configuration Files (Administrator Only)” on page 2-1.
For a description of each parameter you can enter in the configuration files, see
Appendix A, “Configuration Parameters.”
3-8
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Phone Status
The Phone Status on the IP Phone displays the network status and firmware
version of the IP phone.
You can display phone status using the IP phone UI or the Aastra Web UI.
Phone Status via IP Phone UI
In the IP phone UI, the Phone Status options are available to the user and the
administrator and do not require a password entry.
The following options display for phone status on the IP phone UI:
Phone Status Screen for 9143i, 6751i, 6753i Phones
ra
f
t1
Phone Status
1. IP&MAC Addresses
2. LAN Port
3. PC Port
4. Firmware Info
=Next
=Enter
D
Phone Status Screen for 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT
Phones
Phone Status
1. IP&MAC Addresses
2. LAN Port
3. PC Port
4. Firmware Info
Select
Done
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-9
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
•
IP&MAC Addresses
Displays the IP address and MAC address of the phone.
•
LAN Port
Displays the Link State, Negotiation Method, Speed, and Duplex Method that
the phone uses on its LAN port.
•
PC Port
Displays the Link State, Negotiation Method, Speed, and Duplex Method that
the phone uses on its PC Port.
•
Firmware Info
Displays information about the firmware that is currently installed on the IP
phone.
Phone Status via Aastra Web UI
D
ra
f
t1
The first screen that displays after logging into the Aastra Web UI for a phone is
the Network Status screen. This screen also displays when selecting
Status->System Information. The information on this screen is available to the
user and the administrator as read-only.
3-10
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
The following is a description of the information on the Network Status screen:
Network Attributes
Displays the network status of the Ethernet ports at the back of the phone. You
can also view the phone’s IP and MAC addresses. Information in this field
includes Link State, Negotiation, Speed, and Duplex for Port 0 and Port 1.
•
Hardware Information
Displays the current IP phone platform and the revision number.
•
Firmware Information
Displays information about the firmware that is currently installed on the IP
phone. Information in this field includes Firmware Version, Firmware Release
Code, Boot Version, Release Date/Time.
•
SIP Status
Displays information about the SIP registration status of the phone. If there
are accounts configured on the IP Phone, their SIP status displays in this field.
The 6751i displays only one status line. All other model phones display the
status of up to 9 lines.
D
ra
f
t1
•
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-11
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
The following table describes the status conditions that can display for an
account(s).
Status Condition
Description
Registered
Displays this status on accounts that HAVE been registered with the SIP proxy
server.
Example:
Line
1
Backup
Registrar
SIP Account
Status
Used?
9057604603@anasipproxy.aastra.com:5060Registered Yes
SIP Error Number
t1
where
Account Number is “1”
SIP Account is “9057604603@anasipproxy.aastra.com” on port “5060”
Status is “Registered”
Backup registrar is used (“Yes”)
Displays on accounts when registration fails with the SIP proxy server.
ra
f
Example:
Line
4
SIP Account
Status
9057604601@anasipproxy.aastra.com:5060401
Backup
Registrar
Used?
No
D
where
Account Number is “4”
SIP Account is “9057604601@anasipproxy.aastra.com” on port “5060”
Status is “401” - Unregistered if SIP registration fails.
Backup registrar is used (“No”)
Note: The IP Phones can register with multiple server using the same
user name. So the SIP Status information on the Network Status screen
may display the same account with different registrar and proxy IP
addresses. For more information, see
3-12
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Restarting Your Phone
As System Administrator, there may be times when you need to restart a phone.
The Restart option allows you reboot the phone when required. A reset may be
necessary when:
•
There is a change in your network, OR
•
To re-load modified configuration files, OR
•
If the settings for the IP phone on the IP PBX system have been modified.
You can restart the phone using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI.
t1
Restarting the Phone Using the IP Phone UI
IP Phone UI
Action
1
Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.
2
Select Restart Phone.
3
For 9143i. 6751i, 6753i:
Press # to confirm.
ra
f
Step
D
Note: To cancel the Restart, press the 3 key.
For 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT:
Press Restart.
Note: To cancel the Restart, press Cancel.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-13
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Restarting the Phone Using the Aastra Web UI
Aastra Web UI
Click on Operation->Reset->Phone.
2
Click
ra
f
t1
1
D
to restart the phone.
3-14
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Set Phone to Factory Defaults/Erase Local Configuration
You can set phones to their factory default setting or remove a local phone’s
configuration using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI.
Setting Factory Defaults on the Phone
Factory default settings are the settings that reside on the phone after it has left the
factory. The factory default settings on the phone sets the factory defaults for all
of the settings in the aastra.cfg, .cfg, and local configuration. Performing
this action results in losing all user-modified settings.You can reset a phone to
factory defaults using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI.
t1
Setting Factory Defaults Using the IP Phone UI
IP Phone UI
Action
1
Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.
2
Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator Password (default is 22222).
3
Select Factory Default.
4
For 9143i, 6751i, 6753i:
The “Restore Defaults?” prompt displays.
Press # to confirm.
D
ra
f
Step
For 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i/6757i/6757i CT:
The “Reset phone to factory defaults?” prompt displays.
Press Default to confirm.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-15
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Settings Factory Defaults Using the Aastra Web UI
Aastra Web UI
Action
1
Click on Operation->Reset->Current Settings.
2
In the "Restore to Factory Defaults" field, click
ra
f
t1
Step
.
D
This restores all factory defaults, and removes any saved configuration and directory list files.
3-16
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Erasing the Phone’s Local Configuration
You can reset the IP Phone’s local configuration if required. The local
configuration is the last updated configuration you performed using the IP Phone
UI or the Aastra Web UI. Performing this action results in losing all recently
user-modified settings. For more information about local configuration, see
Chapter 1, the section, “Configuration File Precedence” on page 1-38.
Erasing the Phone’s Local Configuration Using the IP Phone UI
IP Phone UI
Action
1
Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.
2
Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator Password (default is 22222).
3
Select Erase Local Config.
4
For 9143i, 6751i, 6753i:
The “Erase local config?” prompt displays.
Press # to confirm.
ra
f
t1
Step
D
For 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT:
The “Erase local config?” prompt displays.
Press Erase to confirm.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-17
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Erasing the Phone’s Local Configuration Using the Aastra Web UII
Aastra Web UI
Action
1
Click on Operation->Reset->Current Settings.
2
In the "Remove Local Configuration Settings" field, click
ra
f
t1
Step
.
D
This removes the last customized configuration settings made on the phone.
3-18
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Basic Settings
An Administrator has access to specific Basic Setting options to configure and
manage the IP Phone in the network. The following sections identify the options
available to an Administrator only, or where indicated, to a User and
Administrator. These tables also identify whether you can configure them using
the Aastra Web UI, IP Phone UI, or the configuration files.
General Settings
Local Dial Plan
Parameter in
Configuration Files
sip dial plan
Description
A dial plan that describes the number and pattern of
digits that a user dials to reach a particular telephone
number. Dial Plan field accepts up to 512 characters.
t1
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
For more information on this feature, see “Local Dial
Plan” on page 5-53.
Digit Timeout
Allows you to enable or disable a dial plan terminator.
When you configure the dial plan on the phone to use
a dial plan terminator (such as the pound symbol (#)),
the phone waits 4 or 5 seconds after you pick up the
handset or after dialing the number on the keypad
before making the call.
ra
f
sip dial plan terminator
D
Send Dial Plan
Terminator
sip digit timeout
For more information on this feature, see “SIP Dial
Plan Terminator” on page 5-55.
Represents the time, in seconds, to configure the
timeout between consecutive key presses.
For more information on this feature, see. “Digit
Timeout” on page 5-55.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-19
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
Park Call
sprecode
Description
The parking of a live call to a specific extension.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
This feature on the Basic Preferences screen is
available on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and
6757i CT only.
To configure the Park feature on a global basis, see
Chapter 5, the section, “Park Calls/Pick Up Parked
Calls” on page 5-59.
To configure the Park feature on a key, see Chapter 5,
the section, “Park/Pick Up Key” on page 5-234.
Pick Up Parked Call
Picking up a parked call at the specified extension.
t1
pickupsprecode
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
This feature on the Basic Preferences screen is
available on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and
6757i CT only.
ra
f
To configure the Pickup feature on a global basis, see
Chapter 5, the section, “Park Calls/Pick Up Parked
Calls” on page 5-59.
Suppress DTMF
Playback
D
To configure the Pickup feature on a key, see Chapter
5, the section, “Park/Pick Up Key” on page 5-234.
suppress dtmf playback
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Display DTMF Digits
For more information on this feature, see.
“Suppressing DTMF Playback” on page 5-63.
display dtmf digits
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Call Waiting
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
3-20
Enables and disables suppression of DTMF playback
when a number is dialed from the softkeys or
programmable keys.
Enables and disables the display of DTMF digits on
the IP phone display during a connected state.
For more information on this feature, see. “Display
DTMF Digits” on page 5-65.
call waiting
Enable or disables Call Waiting on the IP Phone.
For more information on this feature, see. “Call
Waiting/Call Waiting Tone” on page 5-67.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
Play Call Waiting Tone
call waiting tone
Enable or disables the playing of a call waiting tone
when a caller is on an active call and a new call comes
into the phone.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Stuttered Dial Tone
For more information on this feature, see. “Call
Waiting/Call Waiting Tone” on page 5-67.
stutter disabled
Enable or disables the playing of a stuttered dial tone
when there is a message waiting on the IP phone.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
XML Beep Support
Description
For more information on this feature, see. “Stuttered
Dial Tone” on page 5-70.
xml beep notification
t1
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Enables or disables the playing of a beep to indicate a
status on the phone. When the phone receives a
status message, the BEEP notifies the user that the
message is displaying.
For more information on this feature, see “XML Beep
Support” on page 5-72.
Status Scroll Delay
(seconds)
For more information on this feature, see “Status
Scroll Delay” on page 5-74.
D
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Incoming Call Interrupts incoming call interrupts
Dialing
dialing
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Switch Focus to Ringing switch focus to ringing
Line
line
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Preferred Line
Allows you to set the time delay, in seconds, between
the scrolling of each status message on the phone.
ra
f
xml status scroll delay
preferred line
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Enable or disables how the phone handles incoming
calls while the phone is dialing out. For more
information on this feature, see “Incoming Call
Interrupts Dialing” on page 5-76.
Enables or disables whether or not the UI focus is
switched to a ringing line while the phone is in the
connected state.
For more information on this feature, see “Switch
Focus to Ringing Line” on page 5-79.
Specifies the preferred line to switch focus back to
when incoming or outgoing calls end on the phone.
For more information on this feature, see “Preferred
Line and Preferred Line Timeout” on page 5-81.
3-21
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
Preferred Line Timeout
(seconds)
preferred line timeout
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Goodbye Key Cancels
Incoming Call
goodbye key cancels
incoming call
For more information on this feature, see “UPnP
Mapping Lines (for remote phones)” on page 5-87.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Allows you to enable the Message Waiting Indicator
(MWI) on a single line or on all lines on the phone. For
example, if you set this parameter to 3, the LED
illuminates if a voice mail is pending on line 3. If you
set this parameter to 0, the LED illuminates if a voice
mail is pending on any line on the phone (lines 1
through 9).
ra
f
D
DND Key Mode
Enables or disables the use of Universal Plug and
Play (UpnP) on a specific line on the IP phone.
t1
upnp mapping lines
mwi led line
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Enable or disables the behavior of the Goodbye Key
on the IP phone.
For more information on this feature, see “Goodbye
Key Cancels Incoming Call” on page 5-85.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Message Waiting
Indicator Line
Specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone
switches back to the preferred line after a call
(incoming or outgoing) ends on the phone, or after a
duration of inactivity on an active line.
For more information on this feature, see “Preferred
Line and Preferred Line Timeout” on page 5-81.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
UPnP Mapping Lines
Description
dnd key mode
For more information on this feature, see “Message
Waiting Indicator Line” on page 5-89.
Allows you to configure the DND mode to use on the
phone (Account, Phone, Custom) when the DND key
is pressed. You can configure DND for all accounts or
a specific account.
For more information on this feature, see “DND Key
Mode” on page 5-91. Also see Chapter 5, the section,
“Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-211.
3-22
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
Call Forward Key Mode
call forward key mode
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Description
Allows you to configure the Call Forward mode to use
on the phone (Account, Phone, or Custom). You can
configure Call Forward for all accounts or a specific
account.
For more information on this feature, see “Call
Forward Mode” on page 5-93. Also see Chapter 5, the
section, “Call Forwarding” on page 5-249.
Use LLDP ELIN
use lldp elin
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Enables or disables the use of an Emergency
Location Identification Number (ELIN) received from
LLDP as a caller ID for emergency numbers.
Caution: In Release 2.3 and later, LLDP is enabled
t1
by default. If LLDP is enabled on your network, the
phones may come up with different network settings.
D
ra
f
For more information on this feature, see “Link Layer
Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices
(LLDP-MED) and Emergency Location Identification
Number (ELIN)” on page 5-97.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-23
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Incoming/Outgoing Intercom Calls
The Incoming/Outgoing Intercom Call settings on the IP Phone specify
whether the IP phone or the server is responsible for notifying the recipient that an
Intercom call is being placed. These settings also specify the prefix code for
server-side Intercom calls, and specifies the configuration to use when making the
Intercom call.
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
Description
Incoming Intercom Settings (all models)
Auto-Answer
sip allow auto answer
t1
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Enables or disables the IP phone to allow automatic
answering for an Intercom call. If auto-answer is
enabled on the IP phone, the phone plays a tone to
alert the user before answering the intercom call. If
auto-answer is disabled, the phone rejects the
incoming intercom call and sends a busy signal to the
caller.
Microphone Mute
ra
f
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/
Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on
page 5-102.
sip intercom mute mic
D
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Play Warning Tone
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Allow Barge In
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
3-24
sip intercom warning
tone
Enables or disables the microphone on the IP phone
for Intercom calls made by the originating caller.
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/
Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on
page 5-102.
Enables or disables a warning tone to play when the
phone receives an incoming intercom call on an active
line.
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/
Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on
page 5-102.
sip intercom allow barge Enable or disables how the phone handles incoming
in
intercom calls while the phone is on an active call.
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/
Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on
page 5-102.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
Description
Outgoing Intercom Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT)
Type
sip intercom type
Determines whether the IP phone or the server is
responsible for notifying the recipient that an Intercom
call is being placed. Applicable settings are
Phone-Side, Server-Side, OFF.
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/
Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on
page 5-102.
Prefix Code
sip intercom prefix code
The prefix to add to the phone number for server-side
outgoing Intercom calls. This parameter is required for
all server-side Intercom calls.
sip intercom line
Specifies the line for which the IP phone uses the
configuration from, when making the Intercom call.
The IP phone uses the first available line for physically
making the call but uses the configuration from the line
you set for this parameter.
D
ra
f
Line
t1
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/
Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on
page 5-102.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Note: The "sip intercom type" parameter must be set
with the Server-Side option to enable the "sip
intercom line" parameter.
For more information on this feature, see “Incoming/
Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In” on
page 5-102.
3-25
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Group Paging RTP Settings
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
Paging listen addresses paging addr list
Description
Allows you to specify up to 5 listening multicast
addresses to send/receive a Real Time Transport
Protocol (RTP) stream to/from these pre-configured
multicast address(es) without involving SIP signaling.
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
For more information on this feature, see “Group
Paging RTP Settings” on page 5-107.
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
map redial key to
Description
Sets the Redial key as a speeddial key if a value is
entered for this parameter. If you leave this parameter
blank, the Redial key returns to its original
functionality.
D
ra
f
Map Redial Key To
t1
Key Mapping
Map Conf Key To
map conf key to
Note: If you configure the Redial key for speeddialing
on the 9480i CT or 6757i CT Base Stations, the Redial
key on the 9480i CT and 6757i CT handsets retain
their original functionality. The Redial key on the
handset is not configured for speeddial.
For more information on this feature, see “Key
Mapping” on page 5-113.
Sets the Conf key as a speeddial key if a value is
entered for this parameter. If you leave this parameter
blank, the Conf key returns to its original functionality.
Note: If you configure the Conf key for speeddialing
on the 9480i CT or 6757i CT Base Stations, the Conf
key on the 9480i CT and 6757i CT handsets retain
their original functionality. The Conf key on the
handset is not configured for speeddial.
For more information on this feature, see “Key
Mapping” on page 5-113.
3-26
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Ring Tones
Parameter in
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Tone Set
Parameter in
Configuration Files
Tone Set
tone set
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Ring Tone
Globally sets a tone set for a
specific country
For more information on this
feature, see “Ring Tones and
Tone Sets” on page 5-117.
Global Ring Tone
ring tone
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Globally sets the type of ring tone
on the IP phone. Ring tone can
be set to one of six distinct rings.
For more information on this
feature, see “Ring Tones and
Tone Sets” on page 5-117.
LineN
t1
N/A
Description
lineN ring tone
For more information on this
feature, see “Ring Tones and
Tone Sets” on page 5-117.
D
ra
f
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Sets the type of ring tone on the
IP phone on a per-line basis.
Ring tone can be set to one of six
distinct rings.
Priority Alerting Settings
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Enable Priority Alerting
Parameter in
Configuration Files
priority alerting enabled
Description
Enables and disables distinctive ringing on the IP
phone for incoming calls and call-waiting calls.
For more information on this feature, see “Priority
Alerting” on page 5-122.
Group
alert group
When an "alert group" keyword appears in the header
of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring
tone is applied to the IP phone.
For more information on this feature, see “Priority
Alerting” on page 5-122.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-27
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
External
alert external
Description
When an "alert external" keyword appears in the
header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore
ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
For more information on this feature, see “Priority
Alerting” on page 5-122.
Internal
alert internal
When an "alert-internal" keyword appears in the
header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore
ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
For more information on this feature, see “Priority
Alerting” on page 5-122.
alert emergency
When an "alert emergency" keyword appears in the
header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore
ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
t1
Emergency
For more information on this feature, see “Priority
Alerting” on page 5-122.
alert priority
When an "alert priority" keyword appears in the
header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore
ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
ra
f
Priority
For more information on this feature, see “Priority
Alerting” on page 5-122.
alert auto call distribution When an "alert-acd" keyword appears in the header of
the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone
is applied to the IP phone.
D
Auto Call Distribution
Community 1 thru
Community 4
alert community 1
alert community 2
alert community 3
alert community 4
For more information on this feature, see “Priority
Alerting” on page 5-122.
When an "alert community-#” keyword appears in the
header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore
ring tone is applied to the IP phone. Available Bellcore
tones are:
0 Normal ringing (default)
1 Bellcore-dr2
2 Bellcore-dr3
3 Bellcore-dr4
4 Bellcore-dr5
5 Silent
For more information on this feature, see “Priority
Alerting” on page 5-122.
3-28
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Directed Call Pickup (DCP)
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Directed Call Pickup
Parameters in
Configuration Files
directed call pickup
Description
Enables or disables the use of "directed call pickup"
feature.
For more information on this feature, see “Directed
Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception)” on
page 5-129.
Directed Call Pickup
Prefix
directed call pickup
prefix
Allows you to specify a prefix to use for "directed call
pickup" that you can use with a BLF or BLF List
softkey.
play a ring splash
Enables or disables the playing of a short "ring splash
tone" when there is an incoming call on the BLF
monitored extension. If the host tone is idle, the tone
plays a "ring splash".
ra
f
Play a Ring Splash
t1
For more information on this feature, see “Directed
Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception)” on
page 5-129.
D
For more information on this feature, see “Directed
Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception)” on
page 5-129.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-29
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Auto Call Distribution (ACD) Settings
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Auto Available
acd auto available
Description
Enables or disables the use of the ACD Auto-Available
Timer.
For more information on this feature, see “Automatic
Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers)” on
page 5-188.
Auto Available Timer
acd auto available timer
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, before the IP
phone status switches back to “available.”
D
ra
f
t1
For more information on this feature, see “Automatic
Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers)” on
page 5-188.
3-30
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Time and Date
Parameter in
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Time Format
Time Format
Parameters in
Configuration Files
time format
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Description
This parameter changes the time
to 12 hour or 24 hour format. Use
“0” for the 12 hour format and “1”
for the 24 hour format.
For more information on this
feature, see “Time and Date” on
page 5-19.
Date Format
Date Format
For more information on this
feature, see “Time and Date” on
page 5-19.
D
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
time zone name
ra
f
N/A
Time Zone
Time Servers
This parameter allows the user to
change the date to various
formats.
t1
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
date format
NTP Time Servers
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Custom Parameters:
• time zone minutes
• dst minutes
• dst [start|end]
relative date
• dst start month
• dst end month
• dst start week
• dst end week
• dst start day
• dst end day
• dst start hour
• dst end hour
time server disabled
This parameter allows you to set
the time zone code or customize
the time zone for their area as
required.
For more information on this
feature, see “Time Zone & DST”
on page 5-20.
This parameter allows you to
enable or disable the Network
Time Server (NTP) to set the
time on the phone.
For more information on this
feature, see “Time Servers” on
page 5-27.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-31
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Time Server 1
Time Server 1
Parameters in
Configuration Files
time server1
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Time Server 2
time server2
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
This parameter allows you to set
the IP address of Time Server 2
in dotted decimal format.
t1
For more information on this
feature, see “Time Servers” on
page 5-27.
time server3
This parameter allows you to set
the IP address of Time Server 3
in dotted decimal format.
For more information on this
feature, see “Time Servers” on
page 5-27.
D
ra
f
Time Server 3
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
This parameter allows you to set
the IP address of Time Server 1
in dotted decimal format.
For more information on this
feature, see “Time Servers” on
page 5-27.
Time Server 2
Time Server 3
Description
3-32
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Live Dialpad
Parameter in
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Live Dialpad
N/A
Parameters in
Configuration Files
live dialpad
Note: This option can
be set by a User via
the IP Phone UI and
by an Administrator via
the IP Phone UI and
the configuration files.
Description
This parameter turns the “Live
Dialpad” feature ON or OFF.
For more information on this
feature, see “Live Dial Pad*” on
page 5-33.
Parameter in
Configuration Files
WebPage Language
D
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
language
Description
The language you want to display in the IP Phone UI
and the Aastra Web UI.
ra
f
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
t1
Language
Valid values for 9143i, 9480i, 6751i, 6753i, 6755i,
6757i are:
0 (English)
1 (French)
2 (Spanish)
3 (German)
4 (Italian)
Valid values for 9480i CT and 6757i CT handsets are:
0 (English)
1 (French)
2 (Spanish)
Note: All languages may not be available for
selection. The available languages are dependant on
the language packs currently loaded to the IP phone.
For more information about loading language packs,
see “Loading Language Packs” on page 5-34.
For more information on specifying a language to use
on the IP Phone, see “Specifying the Language to
Use” on page 5-37.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-33
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameter in
Configuration Files
Input Language
input language
Note: This option can
be set by both Users
and Administrators.
Description
Allows you to specify the language to use for inputs on
the IP Phone. Entering a language value for this
parameter allows users to enter text and characters in
the IP Phone UI, Aastra Web UI, and in XML
applications via the keypad on the phone, in the
language(s) specified.
t1
Valid values are:
• English
• French
• Français
• German
• Deutsch
• Italian
• Italiano
• Spanish
• Español
Language 1 thru 4
ra
f
For more information on this feature, see “Specifying
the Input Language to Use” on page 5-41.
language N
The language pack you want to load to the IP phone.
D
Valid values are:
lang_fr.txt
lang_fr_ca.txt
lang_es.txt
lang_es_mx.txt
lang_de.txt
lang_it.txt
Notes:
1. The languages packs you load are dependant on
available language packs from the configuration
server.
2. You must reboot the phone to load a language
pack.
For more information on this feature, see “Loading
Language Packs” on page 5-34.
3-34
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Account Configuration
The IP phones have a DND and CFWD feature that allows an Administrator and
User to configure “do not disturb” and “call forwarding” by account. You can set
specific modes for the way you want the phone to handle DND and CFWD. The
three modes you can set on the phone for these features are:
•
•
•
Account
Phone
Custom
You can set the modes for DND and CFWD in the Aastra Web UI at the path
Basic Settings->Preferences->General, or using the following parameters in the
configurations files:
dnd key mode
call forward key mode
t1
•
•
Modes
DND
Sets DND for a specific account. A
pre-configured DND key toggles the account
in focus on the IP Phone UI, to ON or OFF.
CFWD
Sets CFWD on a per account basis. Pressing a
pre-configured CFWD key applies to the
account in focus
D
Account
ra
f
The following table describes the behavior of the mode settings for DND and
CFWD.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-35
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Modes
DND
CFWD
Phone
Sets DND ON for all accounts on the phone. A Sets the same CFWD configuration for all
pre-configured DND key toggles all accounts accounts (All, Busy, and/or No Answer). When
on the phone to ON or OFF.
you configure the initial account, the phone
applies the configuration to all other accounts.
(In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you
configured is enabled. All other accounts are
grayed out but set to the same configuration.)
Using the Aastra Web UI, if you make changes
to that initial account, the changes apply to all
accounts on the phone.
Custom
Sets the phone to display custom screens
after pressing a pre-configured DND key, that
list the account(s) on the phone. The user can
select a specific account for DND, turn DND
ON for all accounts, or turn DND OFF for all
accounts
ra
f
t1
Sets CFWD for a specific account or all
accounts. You can configure a specific mode
(All, Busy, and/or No Answer) for each
account independently or all accounts. On the
9143i, 6751i, and 6753i phones, you can set all
accounts to ALL On or ALL Off. On the 9480i,
9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT, you can
set all accounts to All On, All Off, or copy the
configuration for the account in focus to all other
accounts using a CopytoAll softkey.
References
D
For more information about account configuration of DND and CFWD on the IP
Phones, see Chapter 5, the sections:
For DND:
•
•
“DND Key Mode” on page 5-91.
“Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-211.
For CFWD:
3-36
•
“Call Forward Mode” on page 5-93.
•
“Call Forwarding” on page 5-249.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Network Settings
The following paragraphs describe the network parameters you can configure on
the IP phone. Network settings are in two categories:
•
Basic network settings
•
Advanced network settings
D
ra
f
t1
Note: Specific parameters are configurable using the Aastra Web UI only
and are indicated where applicable.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-37
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Basic Network Settings
If Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is enabled, the IP phone
automatically configures all of the Network settings. If the phone cannot populate
the Network settings, or if DHCP is disabled, you can set the Network options
manually.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
DHCP
Parameters in
Configuration Files
dhcp
Description
Enables or disables DHCP.
Enabling DHCP populates the
required network information. The
DHCP server serves the network
information that the IP phone
requires. If the IP phone is unable to
get any required information, then
you must enter it manually. DHCP
populates the following network
information:
IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway,
Domain Name Servers (DNS),
TFTP, HTTP HTTPS, and FTP
servers, and Timer Servers.
D
ra
f
t1
DHCP
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Note: For DHCP to automatically
populate the IP address or qualified
domain name for the TFTP server,
your DHCP server must support
Option 66. The IP phones also
support Option 60 and 43.
For more information, see “DHCP”
on page 4-4.
IP Address
IP Address
ip
IP address of the IP phone. To
assign a static IP address, disable
DHCP.
For more information, see
“Configuring Network Settings
Manually” on page 4-24.
3-38
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Subnet Mask
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Subnet Mask
Parameters in
Configuration Files
subnet mask
Description
Subnet mask defines the IP address
range local to the IP phone. To
assign a static subnet mask, disable
DHCP.
For more information, see
“Configuring Network Settings
Manually” on page 4-24.
Gateway
Gateway
default gateway
The IP address of the network’s
gateway or default router IP
address. To assign a static Gateway
IP address, disable DHCP.
Primary DNS
dns1
D
ra
f
Primary DNS
t1
For more information, see
“Configuring Network Settings
Manually” on page 4-24.
Primary domain name server IP
address. For any of the IP address
settings on the IP phone a domain
name value can be entered instead
of an IP address. With the help of
the domain name servers the
domain names for such parameters
can then be resolved to their
corresponding IP addresses.
To assign static DNS addresses,
disable DHCP.
Note: If a host name is configured
on the IP phone, you must also set
a DNS.
For more information, see
“Configuring Network Settings
Manually” on page 4-24.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-39
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Secondary DNS
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Secondary DNS
Parameters in
Configuration Files
dns2
Description
A service that translates domain
names into IP addresses. To assign
static DNS addresses, disable
DHCP.
For more information, see
“Configuring Network Settings
Manually” on page 4-24.
Hostname
Hostname
hostname
Specifies the hostname DHCP
Option 12 that the phone sends with
the DHCP Request packet.
Ethernet
t1
For more information, see “Using
Option 12 Hostname on the IP
Phone” on page 4-11.
N/A
LAN Port
PC Port Link
PC Port
ethernet port 0
ra
f
LAN Port Link
ethernet port 1
Enable
PassThru Port
(9480i, 9480i CT,
6755i, 6757i, 6757i
CT)
D
PC Port Enabled PC Port PassThru
pc port passthrough
(9143i, 6751i,
Enable/Disable
enabled
6753i)
(9143i, 6751i, 6753i)
PC Port PassThru
Enable/Disable
(9480i, 9480i CT,
6755i, 6757i, 6757i
CT)
The send (TX) and receive (RX)
negotiation to use on the Ethernet
LAN Port and Ethernet PC Port for
transmitting and receiving data over
the LAN or to/from your PC,
respectively.
The pc port passthrough enabled
parameter applies to the 802.1x
support on the IP Phones.
For more information on configuring
the LAN and PC port negotiation,
see “Configuring LAN and PC Port
Negotiation” on page 4-24.
For more information on configuring
802.1x support, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on
page 6-31.
3-40
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
D
ra
f
t1
Advanced Network Settings
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-41
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
DHCP User Class
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
DHCP User Class
Parameters in
Configuration Files
dhcp userclass
Description
Specifies the User Class DHCP
Option 77 that the phone sends to
the configuration server with the
DHCP Request packet.
Note: If you specify a value for this
parameter, you must restart your
phone for the change to take affect.
Any change in its value during
start-up results in an automatic
reboot.
For more information, see “Using
Option 77 User Class on the IP
Phone” on page 4-14.
dhcp config option
override
D
The value specified for this
parameter overrides the
precedence order for determining a
configuration server. Valid values
are:
-1 (Disabled - ignores all DHCP
configuration options).
0 (Any)
43
66
159
160
t1
DHCP Download
Options
ra
f
Download Options
Notes:
1. If the DHCP server supplies
Options 159 and 160, the phones
will attempt to contact the
configuration server given in these
options.
2. You must restart the IP Phone for
this parameter to take affect.
For more information, see “Using
Options 159 and 160 on the IP
Phone” on page 4-17. For more
information about setting DHCP
download preference, see
“Configuration Server Download
Precedence” on page 4-20.
3-42
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
LLDP Support
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
LLDP
Parameters in
Configuration Files
lldp
Description
Enables or disables Link Layer
Discovery Protocol for Media
Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) on
the IP Phone.
Caution: In Release 2.3 and later,
LLDP is enabled by default. If LLDP
is enabled on your network, the
phones may come up with different
network settings.
LLDP Packet Interval lldp interval
D
ra
f
N/A
t1
For more information on this
feature, see “Link Layer Discovery
Protocol for Media Endpoint
Devices (LLDP-MED) and
Emergency Location Identification
Number (ELIN)” on page 5-97.
The amount of time, in seconds,
between the transmission of LLDP
Data Unit (LLDPDU) packets. The
value of zero (0) disables this
parameter.
Caution: In Release 2.3 and later,
LLDP is enabled by default. If LLDP
is enabled on your network, the
phones may come up with different
network settings.
For more information on this
feature, see “Link Layer Discovery
Protocol for Media Endpoint
Devices (LLDP-MED) and
Emergency Location Identification
Number (ELIN)” on page 5-97.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-43
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
UPnP
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
UPnP
Parameters in
Configuration Files
upnp manager
Description
Enables or disables Universal Plug
and Play (UpnP) on the IP phone. If
you set this parameter to “0”, you
can manually configure NAT on the
IP phone and the UPnP manager
will not start.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Universal Plug and Play (UPnP)
(for remote phones)” on page 4-50.
N/A
upnp gateway
IP address or fully qualified Domain
Name of the Internet gateway or
router. This parameter stores the IP
address of the gateway or router in
the event that only non-default
UPnP gateways get discovered on
the network. The UPnP port
mappings are saved to this IP
address so even if the phone
reboots, it will still have the correct
port mappings.
NAT IP
D
ra
f
t1
N/A
NAT IP
sip nat ip
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Universal Plug and Play (UPnP)
(for remote phones)” on page 4-50.
IP address the network device that
enforces NAT.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuring NAT Address and
Port (optional)” on page 4-35.
NAT SIP Port
NAT SIP Port
sip nat port
Port number of the network device
that enforces NAT.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuring NAT Address and
Port (optional)” on page 4-35.
3-44
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
NAT RTP Port
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
NAT RTP Port
Parameters in
Configuration Files
sip nat rtp port
Description
Indicates the port through which the
RTP packets are sent. This value
must specify the beginning of the
RTP port range on the gateway or
router.
The RTP port is used for sending
DTMF tones and for the audio
stream. Your network administrator
may close some ports for security
reasons. You may want to use this
parameter to send RTP data using a
different port.
Nortel NAT Traversal sip nortel nat support
Enabled
N/A
D
ra
f
Nortel NAT
t1
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuring NAT Address and
Port (optional)” on page 4-35.
Nortel NAT Timer
(seconds)
sip nortel nat timer
Enables or disables the phone to
operate while connected to a
network device that enforces NAT.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuring Nortel NAT
(optional)” on page 4-32.
The interval, in seconds, that the
phone sends SIP ping requests to
the Nortel proxy.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuring Nortel NAT
(optional)” on page 4-32.
N/A
Rport (RFC 3581)
sip rport
Allows you to enable (1) or disable
(0) the use of Rport on the IP
phone.
“Rport” in RFC 3581, allows a client
to request that the server send the
response back to the source IP
address and the port from which the
request came.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “RPORT” on page 4-65.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-45
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
N/A
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
NTP Time Servers
Parameters in
Configuration Files
time server disabled
Description
Enables or disables the time server.
This parameter affects the time
server1, time server2, and time
server3 parameters. Setting this
parameter to 0 allows the use of the
configured Time Server(s). Setting
this parameter to 1 prevents the use
of the configured Time Server(s).
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Network Time Servers” on
page 4-67.
Time Servers 1, 2,
and 3
time server1
time server2
time server3
time server4
The 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th time
server's IP address or qualified
domain name. If the time server is
enabled, the value for time server1
will be used to request the time
from.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Network Time Servers” on
page 4-67.
D
ra
f
t1
N/A
3-46
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
HTTPS Settings
Advanced Network Settings includes HTTPS settings for the IP Phones.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
HTTPS
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
HTTPS Server Redirect HTTP to
HTTPS
Parameters in
Configuration Files
https redirect http get
Description
Allows or disallows redirection from
the HTTP server to the HTTPS
server.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “HTTPS Client/Server
Configuration” on page 4-40.
D
Enables or disables the blocking of
XML scripts from HTTP POSTs.
t1
https block http post xml
ra
f
XML HTTP POSTs HTTPS Server Block XML HTTP
POSTs
Some client applications use HTTP
POSTs to transfer XML scripts. The
phones’s HTTP server accepts
these POSTs even if server
redirection is enabled, effectively
bypassing the secure connection.
When this parameter is enabled
(blocking is enabled), receipt of an
HTTP POST containing an XML
parameter header results in the
following response:
“403 Forbidden”. This forces the
client to direct the POSTs to the
HTTPS server through use of the
“https://” URL.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “HTTPS Client/Server
Configuration” on page 4-40.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-47
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Client Method
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
HTTPS Client
Method
Parameters in
Configuration Files
https client method
Description
Defines the security method that the
client advertises to the server during
the Secure Socket Layer (SSL)
handshake. Available options are:
For more information, see Chapter
4, “HTTPS Client/Server
Configuration” on page 4-40.
D
ra
f
t1
TLS 1.0 - Transport Layer Security
version 1 (TLS 1.0) is a protocol that
ensures privacy between
communicating applications and
their users on the Internet. TLS is
the successor to SSL.
SSL 3.0 - Secure Socket Layer
version 3 (SSL 3.0) is a
commonly-used protocol for
managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet.
3-48
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Cert Validation
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Validate Certificates
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
https validate certificates Enables or disables the HTTPS
validation of certificates on the
phone. When this parameter is set
to 1, the HTTPS client performs
validation on SSL certificates before
accepting them.
t1
Notes:
1. If you are using HTTPS as a
configuration method, and use a
self signed certificate, you must set
this parameter to “0” (disabled)
before upgrading to Release 2.3 or
later of the IP Phones.
Check Certificate
Expiration
https validate expires
D
Check Expires
ra
f
2. If you are using HTTPS and the
certificates are not valid or are not
signed by Verisign, Thawte, or
GeoTrust, the phones fail to
download configuration files.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “HTTPS Server Certificate
Validation” on page 4-44.
Enables or disables the HTTPS
validation of the expiration of the
certificates. When this parameter is
set to 1, the HTTPS client verifies
whether or not a certificate has
expired prior to accepting the
certificate.
Note: If the “https validate
expires” parameter is set to
enable, the clock on the phone
must be set for the phone to accept
the certificates.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “HTTPS Server Certificate
Validation” on page 4-44.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-49
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Check Hostnames
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Check Certificate
Hostnames
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
https validate hostnames Enables or disables the HTTPS
validation of hostnames on the
phone.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “HTTPS Server Certificate
Validation” on page 4-44.
N/A
Trusted Certificates
Filename
https user certificates
Specifies a file name for a .PEM file
located on the configuration server.
This file contains the User-provided
certificates in PEM format. These
certificates are used to validate peer
certificates.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “HTTPS Server Certificate
Validation” on page 4-44.
D
ra
f
t1
Note: You must disable the “https
validate certificates” parameter in
order for the phone to accept the
User-provided certificates.
3-50
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Type of Service (ToS), DSCP
Advanced Network Settings include Type of Service (ToS) and Differentiated
Services Code Point (DSCP) for the IP phones.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Type of Service
SIPt
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
SIP
Parameters in
Configuration Files
tos sip
Description
The Differentiated Services Code
Point (DSCP) for SIP packets.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Type of Service (ToS), Quality of
Service (QoS), and DiffServ QoS”
on page 4-54.
The Differentiated Services Code
Point (DSCP) for RTP packets.
t1
tos rtp
RTCP
tos rtcp
D
Type of Service
RTCP
RTP
ra
f
Type of Service
RTP
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Type of Service (ToS), Quality of
Service (QoS), and DiffServ QoS”
on page 4-54.
The Differentiated Services Code
Point (DSCP) for RTCP packets.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Type of Service (ToS), Quality of
Service (QoS), and DiffServ QoS”
on page 4-54.
3-51
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
VLAN
You can enable or disable VLAN and set specific VLAN IDs and priorities under
Network Settings.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Global Settings
VLAN Enable
VLAN Enable
tagging enabled
Enables or disables VLAN on the IP
phones.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on
page 4-54.
Priority, Non-IP
Packet
priority non-ip
Specifies the priority value for
non-IP packets.
t1
Other Priority
LAN Port Settings (Port 0)
VLAN ID
VLAN id
D
Phone VLAN ID
ra
f
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on
page 4-54.
VLAN is a feature on the IP phone
that allows for multiple logical
Ethernet interfaces to send
outgoing RTP packets over a single
physical Ethernet as described in
IEEE Std 802.3. On the IP phone,
you configure a VLAN ID that
associates with the physical
Ethernet Port 0.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on
page 4-54.
3-52
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
SIP Priority
RTP Priority
RTCP Priority
Parameters in
Configuration Files
tos priority map
Description
This parameter is based on the
Type of Service (ToS), Differentiated
Services Code Point (DSCP) setting
for SIP (tos sip parameter), RTP
(tos rtp parameter) and RTCP (tos
rtcp parameter). It is the mapping
between the DSCP value and the
VLAN priority value for SIP, RTP,
and RTCP packets.
You enter the tos priority map value
as follows:
(DSCP_1,Priority_1)(DSCP_2,Priori
ty_2).....(DSCP_64,Priority_64)
where the DSCP value range is
0-63 and the priority range is 0-7.
Mappings not enclosed in
parentheses and separated with a
comma, or with values outside the
ranges, are ignored.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on
page 4-54.
D
ra
f
t1
SIP Priority
RTP Priority
RTCP Priority
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-53
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
PC Port Settings (Port 1)
PC Port VLAN ID
VLAN ID
VLAN id port 1
Specifies the VLAN ID used to pass
packets through to a PC via Port 1.
Note: If you set the PC Port VLAN
ID (Port 1) to 4095, all untagged
packets are sent to this port. The
following is an example of
configuring the phone on a VLAN
where all untagged packets are sent
to the passthrough port.
PC Port Priority
D
ra
f
t1
Example
You enable tagging on the LAN Port
(VLAN id) as normal but set the PC
Port (VLAN id port 1) to 4095. The
following example sets the phone to
be on VLAN 3 on the LAN Port but
the PC Port is configured as
untagged.
Priority
QoS eth port 1 priority
tagging enabled: 1
VLAN id: 3
VLAN id port 1: 4095
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on
page 4-54.
Specifies the priority value used for
passing VLAN packets through to a
PC via Port 1.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on
page 4-54.
3-54
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
SIP Settings
The following paragraphs describe the SIP parameters you can configure on the IP
phone. SIP configuration consists of configuring:
•
Basic SIP Authentication Settings
•
Basic SIP Network Settings
•
Advanced SIP settings
•
RTP Settings
•
Autodial Settings
t1
Notes:
1.
Specific parameters are configurable on a global and per-line basis.
You can also configure specific parameters using the IP Phone UI, the
Aastra Web UI, or the configuration files. If you have a proxy server or
have a SIP registrar present at a different location than the PBX server,
the SIP parameters may need to be changed.
D
ra
f
2.
The IP phones allow you to define different SIP lines with the same
account information (i.e., same user name) but with different registrar and
proxy IP addresses. This feature works with Registration, Subscription,
and Notify processing. This feature also works with the following types
of calls: incoming, outgoing, Broadsoft Shared Call Appearance (SCA),
Bridged Line Appearance (BLA), conference, transfer, blind transfer.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-55
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Basic SIP Authentication Settings
Screen Name
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Screen Name
(Global and
Per-Line)
N/A
Screen Name 2
(Global and
Per-Line)
User Name
Phone Number
sip screen name
(global)
sip lineN screen name
(per-line)
sip screen name 2
(global)
sip lineN screen name 2
(per-line)
sip user name
(global)
ra
f
(Global and
Per-Line)
Parameters in
Configuration Files
sip lineN user name
(per-line)
D
Display Name
Caller ID
(Global and
Per-Line)
Description
Name that displays on the idle
screen. Valid values are up to 20
alphanumeric characters.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
Custom text message that displays
on the idle screen. Valid values are
up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
t1
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
sip display name
(global)
sip lineN display name
(per-line)
User name used in the name field of
the SIP URI for the IP phone and for
registering the phone at the
registrar. Valid values are up to 20
alphanumeric characters.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
Name used in the display name
field of the "From SIP" header field.
Some IP PBX systems use this as
the caller’s ID, and some may
overwrite this with the string that is
set at the PBX system. Valid values
are up to 20 alphanumeric
characters.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
3-56
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Auth Name
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Authentication Name sip auth name
(global)
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN auth name
(per-line)
Description
Authorization name used in the
username field of the Authorization
header field of the SIP REGISTER
request. Valid values are up to 20
alphanumeric characters.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
Password
Password
sip lineN password
(per-line)
Password used to register the IP
phone with the SIP proxy. Valid
values are up to 20 numeric
characters. Passwords are
encrypted and display as asterisks
when entering.
t1
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip password
(global)
N/A
ra
f
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
BLA Number
sip lineN bla number
(per-line)
D
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip bla number
(global)
Phone number that you assign to
BLA lines that is shared across all
phones (global configuration) or
shared on a per-line basis (per-line
configuration).
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
For more information about BLA,
see Chapter 5, the section, “Bridged
Line Appearance (BLA)” on
page 5-222.
N/A
Line Mode
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip mode
(global)
sip lineN mode
(per-line)
The mode-type that you assign to
the IP phone. Valid values are
Generic (0), BroadSoft SCA (1),
Nortel (2), or BLA (3). Default is
Generic (0).
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-57
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Basic SIP Network Settings
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Proxy Server
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Proxy Server
(Global and
Per-Line)
Proxy Port
Proxy Port
IP address of the SIP proxy server.
Up to 64 alphanumeric characters.
sip lineN proxy ip
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
sip proxy port
(global)
SIP proxy server’s port number.
Default is 0.
sip lineN proxy port
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
Backup Proxy Server sip backup proxy server
(global)
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN backup proxy
server
(per-line)
The IP address of the backup SIP
proxy server for which the IP phone
uses when the primary SIP proxy is
unavailable.
Backup Proxy Port
The port number of the backup SIP
proxy server for which the IP phone
uses when the primary SIP proxy
port is unavailable.
sip backup proxy port
(global)
D
N/A
sip proxy ip
(global)
ra
f
N/A
(Global and
Per-Line)
3-58
Description
t1
(Global and
Per-Line)
Parameters in
Configuration Files
sip lineN backup proxy
port
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
N/A
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Outbound Proxy
Server
(Global and
Per-Line)
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
sip outbound proxy
server
(global)
Address of the outbound proxy
server. All SIP messages originating
from the phone are sent to this
server. For example, if you have a
sip lineN outbound proxy Session Border Controller in your
server
network, then you would normally
(per-line)
set its address here. Default is
0.0.0.0.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
Outbound Proxy Port sip outbound proxy port
(global)
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN outbound proxy
port
(per-line)
The proxy port on the proxy server
to which the IP phone sends all SIP
messages. Default is 0.
Registrar Server
ra
f
t1
N/A
Registrar Server
sip lineN registrar ip
(per-line)
D
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip registrar ip
(global)
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
IP address of the SIP registrar. Up
to 64 alphanumeric characters.
Enables or disables the phone to be
registered with the Registrar. When
Register is disabled globally, the
phone is still active and you can dial
using username and IP address of
the phone. A message "No Service"
displays on the idle screen and the
LED is steady ON. If Register is
disabled for a single line, no
messages display and LEDs are
OFF.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
Registrar Port
Registrar Port
(Global and
Per-Line)
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
sip registrar port
(global)
SIP registrar’s port number. Default
is 0.
sip lineN registrar port
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
3-59
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
N/A
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Backup Registrar
Server
sip backup registrar ip
(global)
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN backup
registrar ip
(per-line)
Description
The address of the backup registrar
(typically, the backup SIP proxy) for
which the IP phone uses to send
REGISTER requests if the primary
registrar is unavailable.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
N/A
Backup Registrar
Port
sip backup registrar port
(global)
The backup registrar's (typically the
backup SIP proxy) port number.
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN backup
registrar port
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
Registration Period
sip registration period
(global)
The requested registration period,
in seconds, from the registrar.
sip lineN registration
period
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Basic SIP Settings” on
page 4-71.
sip centralized conf
(global)
Globally enables or disables SIP
centralized conferencing for an IP
phone.
Conference Server
URI
D
N/A
ra
f
(Global and
Per-Line)
t1
N/A
(Global and
Per-Line)
3-60
sip lineN centralized conf
(per-line)
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Centralized Conferencing (for
Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on
page 5-359.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Advanced SIP Settings
In addition to the basic SIP settings, you can also configure the following
advanced SIP parameters. These parameters are configurable via the Aastra Web
UI and the configuration files on a global basis only.
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
sip explicit mwi subscription
Description
If the IP phone has a message waiting
subscription with the Service Provider, a
Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) (LED or
display icon) tells the user there is a message
on the IP Phone. You can enable and disable
MWI by setting this parameter to 0 (disable) or
1 (enable) in the configuration files or by
checking the box for this field in the Aastra
Web UI. Default is disabled.
t1
Explicit MWI Subscription
Parameters in
Configuration Files
sip explicit mwi subscription
period
D
Explicit MWI Subscription
Period
ra
f
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-84.
Missed Call Summary
Subscription
sip missed call summary
subscription
(global)
(Global and Per-Line)
sip lineN missed call
summary subscription
(per-line)
The requested duration, in seconds, before
the MWI subscription times out. The phone
re-subscribes to MWI before the subscription
period ends.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-84.
Enables or disables the Missed Call Summary
Subscription feature.
This feature allows missed calls that have
been redirected by the server, to be
incremented in the missed calls indicator on
the phone it was initially directed to. Default is
disabled.
For more information about this parameter,
see Chapter 6, the section, “Missed Call
Summary Subscription” on page 6-13.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-61
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Missed Call Summary
Subscription Period
sip missed call summary
subscription period
Description
Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that
the phone uses the Missed Calls Summary
Subscription feature. This parameter is always
enabled with a default value of 86400
seconds. When the phone reaches the limit
set for this parameter, it sends the
subscription again.
For more information about this parameter,
see Chapter 6, the section, “Missed Call
Summary Subscription” on page 6-13.
sip as-feature-event
subscription
(global)
(Global and Per-Line)
sip lineN as-feature-event
subscription
(per-line)
For more information about this parameter,
see Chapter 6, the section, “As-Feature-Event
Subscription” on page 6-17.
sip as-feature-event
subscription period
Specifies the amount of time, in seconds,
between resubscribing. If the phone does not
resubscribe in the time specified for this
parameter, it loses subscription.
D
ra
f
AS-Feature-Event
Subscription Period
Enables or disables the specified line with the
BroadSoft’s server-side DND, CFWD, or ACD
features.
t1
AS-Feature-Event
Subscription
Send MAC Address in
REGISTER Message
sip send mac
For more information about this parameter,
see Chapter 6, the section, “As-Feature-Event
Subscription” on page 6-17.
Adds an "Aastra-Mac:" header to the SIP
REGISTER messages sent from the phone to
the call server, where the value is the MAC
address of the phone.
For more information about this parameter,
see Chapter 6, the section, “MAC Address/
Line Number in REGISTER Messages” on
page 6-5.
3-62
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Send Line Number in
REGISTER Message
Parameters in
Configuration Files
sip send line
Description
Adds an "Aastra-Line:" header to the SIP
REGISTER messages sent from the phone to
the call server, where the value is the line
number that is being registered.
For more information about this parameter,
see Chapter 6, the section, “MAC Address/
Line Number in REGISTER Messages” on
page 6-5.
sip session timer
The time, in seconds, that the IP phone uses
to send periodic re-INVITE requests to keep a
session alive. The proxy uses these re-INVITE
requests to maintain the status' of the
connected sessions. See RFC4028 for details.
Default is 0.
t1
Session Timer
sip T1 timer
sip T2 timer
D
Timer 1 and Timer 2
ra
f
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-84.
Transaction Timer
sip transaction timer
These timers are SIP transaction layer timers
defined in RFC 3261. Timer 1 is an estimate,
in milliseconds, of the round-trip time (RTT).
Timer 2 represents the amount of time, in
milliseconds, a non-INVITE server transaction
takes to respond to a request.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-84.
The amount of time, in milliseconds that the
phone allows the callserver (registrar/proxy) to
respond to SIP messages that it sends. If the
phone does not receive a response in the
amount of time designated for this parameter,
the phone assumes the message has timed
out.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-84.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-63
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Transport Protocol
Parameters in
Configuration Files
sip transport protocol
Description
The protocol that the Real-Time Transport
Protocol (RTP) port on the IP phone uses to
send out SIP signaling packets.
t1
Notes:
1. If you set the value of this parameter to 4
(TLS), the phone checks to see if the “sips
persistent tls” is enabled. If it is enabled, the
phone uses Persistent TLS on the connection.
If “sips persistent tls” is disabled, then the
phone uses TLS on the connection. If TLS is
used, you must specify the Root and
Intermediate Certificates, the Local Certificate,
the Private Key, and the Trusted Certificates.
ra
f
2. If the phone uses Persistent TLS, you
MUST specify the Trusted Certificates; the
Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local
Certificate, and the Private Key are optional.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-84.
sip local port
D
Local SIP UDP/TCP Port
Specifies the local source port (UDP/TCP)
from which the phone sends SIP messages.
Notes:
1. It is recommended that you avoid the
conflict RTP port range in case of a UDP
transport.
2. By default, the IP phones use symmetric
UDP signaling for outgoing UDP SIP
messages. When symmetric UDP is enabled,
the IP phone generates and listens for UDP
messages using port 5060.If symmetric UDP
signaling is disabled, the phone sends from
random ports but it listens on the configured
SIP local port.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “SIP and
TLS Source Ports for NAT Traversal” on
page 4-37.
3-64
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Local SIP TLS Port
Parameters in
Configuration Files
sip local tls port
Description
Specifies the local source port (SIPS/TLS)
from which the phone sends SIP messages.
Note: It is recommended that you avoid the
conflict with any TCP ports being used. For
example: WebUI HTTP server on 80/tcp and
HTTPS on 443/tcp.
For more information, see Chapter 4, “SIP and
TLS Source Ports for NAT Traversal” on
page 4-37.
sip registration retry timer
Specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone
waits between registration attempts when a
registration is rejected by the registrar.
t1
Registration Failed Retry
Timer
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-84.
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that
the phone waits until it re-attempts to register
after a REGISTER message times out.
D
ra
f
Registration Timeout Retry sip registration timeout retry
Timer
timer
Registration Renewal
Timer
If this parameter is set lower than 30 seconds,
the phone uses a minimum timer of 30
seconds.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-84.
sip registration renewal timer The length of time, in seconds, prior to
expiration, that the phone renews
registrations.
For example, if the value is set to 20, then 20
seconds before the registration is due to
expire, a new REGISTER message is sent to
the registrar to renew the registration.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-84.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-65
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
BLF Subscription Period
Parameters in
Configuration Files
sip blf subscription period
Description
Specifies the time period, in seconds, that the
IP phone resubscribes the BLF subscription
service after a software/firmware upgrade or
after a reboot of the IP phone.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-84.
sip acd subscription period
Specifies the time period, in seconds, that the
IP phone resubscribes the Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD) subscription service after a
software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of
the IP phone.
t1
ACD Subscription Period
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-84.
sip bla subscription period
Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that
the phone waits to receive a BLA subscribe
message from the server. If you specify zero
(0), the phone uses the value specified for the
BLA expiration in the subscribe message
received from the server. If no value is
specified, the phone uses the default value of
300 seconds.
D
ra
f
BLA Subscription Period
Blacklist Duration
sip blacklist duration
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on
page 4-84.
Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that a
failed server remains on the server blacklist.
The IP phone avoids sending a SIP message
to a failed server (if another server is
available) for this amount of time.
For more information about Blacklist Duration,
see Chapter 6, the section, “Blacklist
Duration” on page 6-22.
3-66
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Whitelist Proxy
Parameters in
Configuration Files
sip whitelist
Description
This parameter enables/disables the whitelist
proxy feature, as follows:
• Set to 0 to disable the feature.
• Set to 1 to enable the feature. When this
feature is enabled, an IP phone accepts
call requests from a trusted proxy server
only. The IP phone rejects any call
requests from an untrusted proxy server.
For more information about Whitelist Proxy
see Chapter 6, the section, “Whitelist Proxy”
on page 6-24.
sip xml notify event
Enables or disables the phone to accept or
reject an aastra-xml SIP NOTIFY message.
t1
XML SIP Notify
D
ra
f
Note: To ensure the SIP NOTIFY is coming
from a trusted source, it is recommended that
you enable the Whitelist feature (Whitelist
Proxy parameter) on the IP phone. If enabled,
and the phone receives a SIP NOTIFY from a
server that is NOT on the whitelist (i.e.
untrusted server), the phone rejects the
message.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
For more information about XML SIP Notify
see Chapter 6, the section, “XML SIP Notify
Events” on page 5-339.
3-67
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
RTP Settings
You can configure the following RTP settings.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
RTP Port Base
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
RTP Port
Parameters in
Configuration Files
sip rtp port
Description
The RTP port is used for sending
DTMF tones and for the audio
stream. Your network administrator
may close some ports for security
reasons. You may want to use this
parameter to send RTP data using a
different port. Default is 3000.
Basic Codecs
(G.711 u-Law,
G.711 a-Law, G.729)
sip use basic codecs
N/A
D
ra
f
N/A
t1
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Real-time Transport Protocol
(RTP) Settings” on page 4-93.
Force RFC2833 Out
of Band DTMF
sip out-of-band dtmf
Enables or disables basic codecs.
Enabling this parameter allows the
IP phone to use the basic Codecs
when sending/receiving RTP
packets. Valid values are 0
(disabled) and 1 (enabled). Default
is 0 (disabled).
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Real-time Transport Protocol
(RTP) Settings” on page 4-93.
Enables or disables out-of-band
DTMF. Enabling this parameter
forces the IP phone to use
out-of-band DTMF according to
RFC2833. Valid values are 0
(disabled) and 1 (enabled). Default
is 1 (enabled).
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Real-time Transport Protocol
(RTP) Settings” on page 4-93.
3-68
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
N/A
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Customized Codec
Preference List
Parameters in
Configuration Files
sip customized codec
Description
Specifies a customized Codec
preference list which allows you to
use the preferred Codecs for this IP
phone.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Real-time Transport Protocol
(RTP) Settings” on page 4-93.
DTMF Method
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip dtmf method
(global)
sip lineN dtmf method
(per-line)
Sets the dual-tone multifrequency
(DTMF) method to use on the IP
phone on a global or per-line basis.
Valid values are 0 (RTP), 1 (SIP
INFO), or 2 (BOTH). Default is 0
(RTP).
t1
N/A
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Real-time Transport Protocol
(RTP) Settings” on page 4-93.
RTP Encryption
sip srtp mode
(global)
ra
f
N/A
sip lineN srtp mode
(per-line)
D
(Global and
Per-Line)
This parameter determines if SRTP
is enabled on this IP phone, as
follows:
•
If set to 0, then disable SRTP.
•
If set to 1 then SRTP calls are
preferred.
•
If set to 2, then SRTP calls only
are generated/accepted.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Real-time Transport Protocol
(RTP) Settings” on page 4-93.
N/A
Silence Suppression sip silence suppression
Silence suppression is enabled by
default on the IP phones. The
phone negotiates whether or not to
use silence suppression. Disabling
this feature forces the phone to
ignore any negotiated value.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Real-time Transport Protocol
(RTP) Settings” on page 4-93.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-69
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Autodial Settings
You can configure the following Autodial settings.
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
N/A
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Autodial Number
sip autodial number
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip lineN autodial
number
Description
Globally or on a per-line basis,
specifies the SIP phone number that
the IP phone autodials when the
handset is lifted from the phone
cradle. An empty (blank) value
disables autodial on the phone.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Autodial Settings” on page 4-103.
Autodial Timeout
Globally or on a per-line basis,
specifies the time, in seconds, that the
sip lineN autodial timeout phone waits to dial a preconfigured
number after the handset is lifted from
the IP phone cradle.
D
ra
f
(Global and
Per-Line)
sip autodial timeout
t1
N/A
If this parameter is set to 0 (hotline),
the phone immediately dials a
preconfigured number when you lift
the handset. If this parameter is set to
a value greater than 0, the phone
waits the specified number of seconds
before dialing the preconfigured
number (warmline) when you lift the
handset.
Default is 0 (hotline).
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Autodial Settings” on page 4-103.
N/A
Use Global Settings
(Per-line
configurations only)
N/A
For each line, this parameter specifies
to use the global autodial settings of
“Autodial Number” and “Autodial
Timeout”.
For more information, see Chapter 4,
“Autodial Settings” on page 4-103.
3-70
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Line Settings
An administrator can configure multiple lines on the IP phone with the same SIP
network configuration (global) or a different SIP network configuration (per-line).
The following table provides the number of lines available for each IP phone
model.
Available
Lines
9143i
9
9480i
9
9480i CT
9
6753i
9
6755i
9
6757i
9
t1
IP Phone
Model
6757i CT
9
ra
f
On the IP Phones, you can configure the following on a per-line basis using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI:
Basic SIP Authentication Settings
•
Basic SIP Network Settings
•
Advanced SIP Settings (Missed Call Summary Subscription only)
•
•
D
•
RTP Settings (DTMF Method and RTP Encryption only)
Autodial Settings (On a per-line basis, you can also enable/disable the “Use
Global Settings” parameter.)
References
For more information about configuring the features listed above on a per-line
basis, see Chapter 4, the sections:
•
“Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71
•
“Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on page 4-84
•
“Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings” on page 4-93
•
“Autodial Settings” on page 4-103
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-71
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Softkeys, Programmable Keys, Expansion Module Keys
A user or administrator can assign specific functions to softkeys, programmable
keys, or expansion module keys. The available keys for configuration depend on
the IP phone model as shown in the following table.
Softkeys
Expansion Module
Keys
Programmable Keys
9143i
-
Not Applicable
7
9480i
6
Not Applicable
-
9480i CT
6
Not Applicable
-
6753i
-
36 to 108*
(Model M670i)
4
6755i
6
36 to 108*
(Model M670i)
6
IP Phone Model
6757i
12
t1
60 to 180**
(Model M675i)
36 to 108*
(Model M670i)
-
12
D
6757i CT
ra
f
60 to 180**
(Model M675i)
36 to 108* on Base
Station
(Model M670i)
-
60 to 180** on Base
Station
(Model M675i)
*The M670i expansion module consists of 36 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP
phone totaling 108 softkeys. Valid for 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT phones.
**The M675i expansion module consists of 60 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP
phone totaling 180 softkeys. Valid for 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT phones.
The softkey, programmable key, or expansion module key can be set to use a
specific function. Available functions depend on the IP phone model.
Reference
For more information about key functions see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/
Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on
page A-192.
For information about configuring softkeys, programmable keys, and expansion
module keys, see Chapter 5, the section, “Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature
Keys/Expansion Module Keys” on page 5-141.
3-72
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Action URI
The IP phones have a feature that allows an administrator to specify a uniform
resource identifier (URI) that triggers a GET when certain XML events occur. The
Action URI feature prevents the phones from hanging if the Action URIs should
fail. The phones also support transparent, non-blocking, XML post execute item
URIs.
The IP phone XML events that support this feature are defined in the following
table.
Description
Startup
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when a startup event occurs.
Successful Registration
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when a successful registration event occurs.
t1
Action URI
Registration Event
Specifies the URI for when registration events occur or when
there are registration state changes.
Outgoing Call
Offhook
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when an incoming call event occurs.
D
Incoming Call
ra
f
Note: This action URI is not called when the same event is
repeated (for example, a timeout occurs again when
registration is already in a timeout state.)
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when an outgoing call event occurs.
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when an offhook event occurs.
Onhook
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when an onhook event occurs.
Disconnected
Specifies the URI that the phone executes a GET on, when it
transitions from the incoming, outgoing, calling, or connected
state into the idle state.
XML SIP Notify
Specifies the URI to be called when an empty XML SIP
NOTIFY is received by the phone.
Poll
Specifies the URI to be called every "action uri poll interval"
seconds.
Poll Interval
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between calls from the
phone to the "action uri poll".
You can set these parameters using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-73
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Reference
For more information about setting the Action URIs for XML applications, see
“XML Action URIs” on page 5-325.
Action URI Disconnected
The phones allow an Administrator to specify a URI to allow a disconnect event
to occur when the phone transitions from any active state (outgoing, incoming,
connected, or calling) to an idle state.
Reference
For more information about configuring the Action URI Disconnected parameter,
see “Action URI Disconnected” on page 5-336.
t1
XML SIP Notify Events and Action URIs
ra
f
In order for an XML push to bypass the NAT/firewall, the phone supports a
proprietary SIP NOTIFY event (aastra-xml) with or without XML content.
If XML content is provided in the SIP NOTIFY, it is processed directly by the
phone as it is done for an XML PUSH.
D
Reference
For more information about enabling the XML SIP Notify on the IP Phones, see
Chapter 5, the section, “XML SIP Notify Events” on page 5-339.
Polling Action URIs
Another way to reach a phone behind a NAT/firewall is to have the phone make an
XML call at periodic intervals. An Administrator can use the action uri poll to
command the phone to perform an XML call at configurable intervals.
An Administrator can specify the URI to be called and specify the interval
between polls. Configuration of this feature is dynamic (no reboot required).
Reference
For more information about configuring the polling and polling interval of Action
URIs, see “Polling Action URIs” on page 5-334.
3-74
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Configuration Server Settings
The configuration server stores the firmware images, configuration files, and
software when performing software upgrades to the IP phone. An administrator
can configure the following parameters for the configuration server:
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Download Protocol Settings
download protocol
Protocol to use for downloading
new versions of software to the IP
phone. Valid values are:
TFTP
FTP
HTTP
HTTPS
D
ra
f
t1
Download Protocol Download Protocol
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Note: For DHCP to automatically
populate the IP address or domain
name for the download servers,
your DHCP server must support
Option 66. The IP phones also
support Option 60 and 43.
For more information, see Chapter
4, the section, “DHCP” on page 4-4.
For more information about
download protocols on the IP
Phone, see Chapter 4,
“Configuration Server Protocol” on
page 4-108.
3-75
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Primary TFTP
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
TFTP Server
Parameters in
Configuration Files
tftp server
Description
The TFTP server’s IP address or
qualified domain name. If DHCP is
enabled and the DHCP server
provides the information, this field is
automatically populated. Use this
parameter to change the IP address
or domain name of the TFTP server.
This will become effective after this
configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
tftp path
D
ra
f
Primary TFTP Path TFTP Path
t1
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-108.
Specifies the path name for which
the configuration files reside on the
TFTP server for downloading to the
IP Phone.
If the IP phone’s configuration and
firmware files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s
root directory, the relative path to
that sub-directory should be entered
in this field.
Note: Enter the path name in the
form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example,
ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-108.
Alternate TFTP
Alternate TFTP
alternate tftp server
The alternate TFTP server’s IP
address or qualified domain name.
This will become effective after this
configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-108.
3-76
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Alternate TFTP
Path
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Alternate TFTP Path alternate tftp path
Description
Specifies the path name for which
the configuration files reside on the
Alternate TFTP server for
downloading to the IP Phone.
If the IP phone’s configuration and
firmware files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s
root directory, the relative path to
that sub-directory should be entered
in this field.
use alternate tftp
FTP Server
ftp server
D
FTP Server
Use Alternate TFTP
ra
f
Select TFTP
t1
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-108.
Enables or disables the alternate
TFTP server. Valid values are "0"
disabled and "1" enabled.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-108.
The FTP server’s IP address or
network host name. This will
become effective after this
configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
Optional: You can also assign a
username and password for access
to the FTP server. See the following
parameters for setting username
and password.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-108.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-77
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
FTP Path
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
FTP Path
Parameters in
Configuration Files
ftp path
Description
Specifies the path name for which
the configuration files reside on the
FTP server for downloading to the
IP Phone.
If the IP phone’s configuration and
firmware files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s
root directory, the relative path to
that sub-directory should be entered
in this field.
FTP Username
ftp username
FTP Password
D
ra
f
FTP Username
t1
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-108.
FTP Password
ftp password
The username to enter for
accessing the FTP server. This will
become effective after this
configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
Note: The IP Phones support
usernames containing dots (“.”).
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-108.
The password to enter for
accessing the FTP server. This will
become effective after this
configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-108.
3-78
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
HTTP Server
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
HTTP Server
Parameters in
Configuration Files
http server
Description
The HTTP server’s IP address. This
will become effective after this
configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
Optional: You can also assign an
HTTP relative path to the HTTP
server. See the next parameter
(http path).
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-108.
HTTP Path
http path
Specifies the path name for which
the configuration files reside on the
HTTP server for downloading to the
IP Phone.
HTTP Port
D
ra
f
t1
HTTP Path
HTTP Port
http port
If the IP phone’s configuration and
firmware files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s
root directory, the relative path to
that sub-directory should be entered
in this field.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-108.
Specifies the HTTP port that the
server uses to load the
configuration to the phone over
HTTP.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-108.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-79
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Download Server
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
HTTPS Server
Parameters in
Configuration Files
https server
Description
The HTTPS server’s IP address.
This will become effective after this
configuration file has been
downloaded into the phone.
Optional: You can also assign an
HTTPS relative path to the HTTPS
server. See the next parameter
(https path).
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-108.
HTTPS Path
https path
Specifies the path name for which
the configuration files reside on the
HTTPS server for downloading to
the IP Phone.
Download Port
D
ra
f
t1
Download Path
HTTPS Port
https port
If the IP phone’s configuration and
firmware files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s
root directory, the relative path to
that sub-directory should be entered
in this field.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-108.
Specifies the HTTP port that the
server uses to load the
configuration to the phone over
HTTP.
For more information, see Chapter
4, “Configuration Server Protocol”
on page 4-108.
3-80
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Parameters in
Configuration Files
Description
Auto-Resync Settings
Mode
auto resync mode
Enables and disables the phone to
be updated automatically once a
day at a specific time in a 24-hour
period. This parameter works with
TFTP, FTP, and HTTP servers.
Notes:
1. If a user is accessing the Aastra
Web UI, they are not informed of
an auto-reboot.
2. Any changes made using the
Aastra Web UI or the IP phone
UI are not overwritten by an
auto-resync update.
Auto-resync affects the
configuration files only.
However, the settings in the
Aastra Web UI take precedence
over the IP phone UI and the
configuration files.
3. The resync time is based on the
local time of the IP phone.
4. If the IP phone is in use (not idle)
at the time of the resync check,
the reboot occurs when the
phone becomes idle.
5. The automatic update feature
works with both encrypted and
plain text configuration files.
D
ra
f
t1
N/A
For more information, see Chapter
8, the section, “Using the
Auto-Resync Feature” on page 8-7.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-81
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
Time (24-hour)
Parameters in
Configuration Files
auto resync time
Description
Sets the time of day in a 24-hour
period for the IP phone to be
automatically updated. This
parameter works with TFTP, FTP,
and HTTP servers.
Notes:
1. The resync time is based on the
local time of the IP phone.
2. The value of 00:00 is 12:00 A.M.
3. When selecting a value for this
parameter in the Aastra Web UI,
the values are in 30-minute
increments only.
4. When entering a value for this
parameter using the
configuration files, the value can
be entered using minute values
from 00 to 59 (for example, the
auto resync time can be entered
as 02:56).
5. Auto-Resync adds up to 15
minutes random time to the
configured time. For example, if
the auto resync time parameter is
set to 02:00, the event takes
place any time between 02:00
and 02:15.
6. When the language on the phone
is set to French or Spanish, you
must enter the time in the format
"00h00" (configuration files only).
D
ra
f
t1
N/A
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
For more information, see Chapter
8, the section, “Using the
Auto-Resync Feature” on page 8-7.
3-82
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter In
IP Phone UI
N/A
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Maximum Delay
Parameters in
Configuration Files
auto resync max delay
Description
Specifies the maximum time, in
minutes, the phone waits past the
scheduled time before starting a
checksync.
For more information, see Chapter
8, the section, “Using the
Auto-Resync Feature” on page 8-7.
N/A
Days
auto resync days
Specifies the amount of days that
the phone waits between checksync
operations.
ra
f
t1
Note: A value of 0 causes the
phone to checksync every time the
clock reads the proper time. A value
of 1 forces the phone to wait 24
hours prior to doing the first
checksync.
For more information, see Chapter
8, the section, “Using the
Auto-Resync Feature” on page 8-7.
XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses)
XML Push Server
List (Approved IP
Addresses)
xml application post list
D
N/A
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
The HTTP server that is pushing
XML applications to the IP phone.
For more information, see Chapter
5, the section, “XML Push
Requests” on page 5-318.
3-83
Firmware Update Features
The IP phones support the protocols, TFTP, FTP, HTTP or HTTPS to download
configuration files and upgrade firmware to the phones from a configuration
server.
You can download the firmware stored on the configuration server in one of three
ways:
Using the “Firmware Update” page in the Aastra Web UI at the location
Advanced Settings->Firmware Update.
•
Using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI to restart the phone. The phone
automatically looks for firmware updates and configuration files during the
boot process.
•
Setting an Auto-Resync feature to automatically update the firmware,
configuration files, or both at a specific time in a 24-hour period). (Feature
can be enabled using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI).
ra
f
Reference
t1
•
D
For more information about firmware update, see Chapter 8, “Upgrading the
Firmware.”
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
TLS Support
The IP Phones support a transport protocol called Transport Layer Security
(TLS) and Persistent TLS. TLS is a protocol that ensures communication
privacy between the SIP phones and the Internet. TLS ensures that no third party
may eavesdrop or tamper with any message. An Administrator can configure the
following parameters for TLS Support.
Parameter
In
IP Phone UI
Transport Protocol
Parameters in
Configuration Files
sip transport protocol
Description
Specifies the protocol that the RTP port on the
IP phone uses to send out SIP signaling
packets. Default is USP.
Notes:
1. If you set the value of this parameter to 4
(TLS), the phone checks to see if the “sips
persistent tls” is enabled. If it is enabled, the
phone uses Persistent TLS on the connection.
If “sips persistent tls” is disabled, then the
phone uses TLS on the connection. If TLS is
used, you must specify the Root and
Intermediate Certificates, the Local Certificate,
the Private Key, and the Trusted Certificates.
2. If the phone uses Persistent TLS, you
MUST specify the Trusted Certificates; the
Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local
Certificate, and the Private Key are optional.
D
ra
f
t1
N/A
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on
page 6-26.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-85
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter
In
IP Phone UI
N/A
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
N/A
Parameters in
Configuration Files
sips persistent tls
Description
Enables or disables the use of Persistent
Transport Layer Security (TLS).
t1
Persistent TLS sets up the connection to the
server once and re-uses that connection for all
calls from the phone. The setup connection for
Persistent TLS is established during the
registration of the phone. If the phones are set
to use Persistent TLS, and a call is made from
the phone, this call and all subsequent calls
use the same authenticated connection. This
significantly reduces the delay time when
placing a call.
D
ra
f
Notes:
1. Persistent TLS requires the outbound
proxy server and outbound proxy port
parameters be configured in either the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI
(Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP
Network Settings). There can be only one
persistent TLS connection created per phone.
The phone establishes the TLS connection to
the configured outbound proxy.
2. If you configure the phone to use
Persistent TLS, you must also specify the
Trusted Certificate file to use. The Root and
Intermediate Certificates, Local Certificate,
and Private Key files are optional.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on
page 6-26.
3-86
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter
In
IP Phone UI
N/A
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Root and
Intermediate
Certificates
Filename
Parameters in
Configuration Files
sips root and
intermediate
certificates
Description
Allows you to specify the SIP Root and
Intermediate Certificate files to use when the
phone uses the TLS transport protocol to
setup a call.
t1
The Root and Intermediate Certificate files
contain one root certificate and zero or more
intermediate certificates which must be placed
in order of certificate signing with root
certificate being the first in the file. If the local
certificate is signed by some well known
certificate authority, then that authority
provides the user with the Root and
Intermediate Certificate files (most likely just
CA root certificate).
This parameter is required when configuring
TLS (optional for Persistent TLS.)
N/A
D
ra
f
Note: The certificate files must use the format
“.pem”. To create custom certificate files to use
on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical
Support.
Local Certificate
Filename
sips local certificate
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on
page 6-26.
Allows you to specify the Local Certificate file
to use when the phone uses the TLS transport
protocol to setup a call.
This parameter is required when configuring
TLS (optional for Persistent TLS.)
Note: The certificate file must use the format
“.pem”. To create specific certificate files to
use on your IP phone, contact Aastra
Technical Support.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on
page 6-26.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-87
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter
In
IP Phone UI
N/A
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Private Key
Filename
Parameters in
Configuration Files
sips private key
Description
Allows you to specify a Private Key file to use
when the phone uses the TLS transport
protocol to setup a call.
This parameter is required when configuring
TLS (optional for Persistent TLS.)
Note: The key file must use the format “.pem”.
To create specific private key files to use on
your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical
Support.
Trusted Certificates sips trusted certificates Allows you to specify the Trusted Certificate
Filename
files to use when the phone uses the TLS
transport protocol to setup a call.
D
ra
f
N/A
t1
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on
page 6-26.
The Trusted Certificate files define a list of
trusted certificates. The phone’s trusted list
must contain the CA root certificates for all the
servers it is connecting to. For example, if the
phone is connecting to server A which has a
certificate signed by CA1, and server B which
has a certificate signed by CA2, the phone
must have CA1 root certificate and CA2 root
certificate in its Trusted Certificate file.
This parameter is required when configuring
TLS or Persistent TLS.
Note: The certificate files must use the format
“.pem”. To create custom certificate files to use
on your IP phone, contact Aastra Technical
Support.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on
page 6-26.
3-88
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
802.1x Support
The IP phones support the IEEE 802.1x Protocol. The 802.1x Protocol is a
standard for passing Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) over a wired or
wireless Local Area Network (LAN).
The 802.1x Protocol on the IP phone facilitates media-level access control, and
offers the capability to permit or deny network connectivity, control LAN access,
and apply traffic policy, based on user or endpoint identity. This feature supports
both the EAP-MD5 and EAP-TLS Protocols.
t1
Note: If configuring 802.1x using the IP Phone UI, the certificates
and private keys must already be configured and stored on the phone.
Use the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to load certificates
and private keys.
An Administrator can configure the following parameters for the 802.1x Protocol.
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
EAP-MD5
Identity
EAP Type
eap-type
D
802.1x
Mode
Parameters in
Configuration Files
ra
f
Parameter
In
IP Phone UI
Identity
identity
Description
Specifies the type of authentication to use on
the IP Phone.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.
Specifies the identity or username used for
authenticating the phone.
Note: The value you enter for this parameter
also displays in the Aastra Web UI at the path
Advanced Settings->
802.1x Support->General->Identity
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-89
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Administrator Level Options
Parameter
In
IP Phone UI
MD5
Password
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
MD5 Password
Parameters in
Configuration Files
md5 password
Description
Specifies the password used for the MD5
authentication of the phone.
Note: The value you enter for this parameter
also displays in the Aastra Web UI at the path
Advanced Settings->
802.1x Support->EAP-MD5 Settings->MD5
Password. The password displays as “*******”.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.
PC Port PassThru
Enable/Disable
pc port passthrough
enabled
Enables or disables the PC port on the phone
to be used for 802.1x authentication support.
t1
Enable
PassThru
Port
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.
EAP-TLS
EAP Type
eap type
Specifies the type of authentication to use on
the IP Phone.
ra
f
802.1x
Mode
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.
Identity
identity
D
Identity
Specifies the identity or username used for
authenticating the phone.
Note: The value you enter for this parameter
also displays in the Aastra Web UI at the path
Advanced Settings->
802.1x Support->General->Identity
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.
N/A
3-90
Root and
Intermediate
Certificates
Filename
802.1x root and
intermediate
certificates
Specifies the file name that contains the root
and intermediate certificates related to the
local certificate.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Administrator Options
Administrator Level Options
Parameter
In
IP Phone UI
N/A
Parameter in
Aastra Web UI
Local Certificate
Filename
Parameters in
Configuration Files
802.1x local certificate
Description
Specifies the file name that contains the local
certificate.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.
N/A
Private Key
Filename
802.1x private key
Specifies the file name that contains the
private key.
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.
Trusted Certificates 802.1x trusted
Filename
certificates
Specifies the file name that contains the
trusted certificates.
t1
N/A
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.
PC Port PassThru
Enable/Disable
pc port passthrough
enabled
Enables or disables the PC port on the phone
to be used for 802.1x authentication support.
ra
f
Enable
PassThru
Port
D
For more information, see Chapter 6, the
section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
3-91
Troubleshooting
The Troubleshooting feature in the Aastra Web UI provides tasks that a system
administrator can perform on the IP phones for troubleshooting purposes. Using
this feature, a system administrator can:
Assign an IP address and IP port in which to save log files
•
Filter the logs according to severity that get reported to log files
•
Save the current local configuration file to a specified location
•
Save the current server configuration file to a specified location
•
Show task and stack status (including “Free Memory”and “Maximum
Memory Block Size”)
•
Enable/disable a WatchDog task
•
View Error Messages
t1
•
ra
f
Aastra Technical Support can then use the information gathered to perform
troubleshooting tasks.
Reference
D
For more information about troubleshooting on the IP Phones, see Chapter 9,
“Troubleshooting.”
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
About this chapter
About this chapter
ra
f
Introduction
t1
Chapter 4
Configuring Network and
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
Features
D
This chapter provides the information required to configure the Network and
Global SIP features on the IP Phone. These features are password protected on the
IP Phone UI and the Aastra Web UI. This chapter also includes procedures for
configuring the Network and Global SIP features via the configuration files, the
IP Phone UI, and the Aastra Web UI where applicable.
Note: The IP Phone User Interface (UI) procedures in the remainder of
this Guide use the keys on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and/or
6757i CT when configuring Administrator Options. For information on
using the 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i keys to configure the Administrator
Options, see Chapter 2, the section, “Using the Options Key” on
page 2-5.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-1
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter
Topics
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic
Page
Overview
page 4-3
Network Settings
page 4-4
Basic Network Settings
page 4-4
Advanced Network Settings
page 4-30
Global SIP Settings
page 4-70
page 4-71
Advanced SIP Settings (optional)
page 4-84
Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings
page 4-93
Autodial Settings
t1
Basic SIP Settings
Configuration Server Protocol
page 4-108
D
ra
f
Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol
page 4-103
page 4-108
4-2
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Overview
Overview
An administrator can configure the IP Phone Network and SIP options from the
phone UI, from the Aastra Web UI, or the configuration files. Administrator level
options are password protected in both the IP phone UI and the Aastra Web UI.
Note: An administrator has the option of enabling and disabling the use
of password protection in the IP phone UI. This is configurable using the
configuration files only. For more information about this feature, see
Appendix A, the section “Password Settings” on page A-15.
t1
The procedures in this section include configuring from the IP phone UI and the
Aastra Web UI. To configure the IP phones using the configuration files, see
Appendix A, “Configuration Parameters.”
ra
f
To configure the phone using the IP phone UI, you must enter an administrator
password. To configure the phone using the Aastra Web UI, you must enter an
administrator username and password.
D
Note: In the IP phone UI, the default password is "22222". In the
Aastra Web UI, the default admin username is "Admin" and the default
password is "22222".
References
For configuring the IP phone at the Asterisk IP PBX, see Appendix B,
“Configuring the IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX.”
For sample configuration files, see Appendix C, “Sample Configuration Files.”
These sample files include basic parameters required to register the IP phone at
the PBX.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-3
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Network Settings
This section describes the basic network settings on the IP phone which include
configuring for:
DHCP
•
IP Address (of phone)
•
Subnet Mask (of phone)
•
Gateway
•
Primary DNS
•
Secondary DNS
•
LAN Port
•
PC Port
DHCP
ra
f
Basic Network Settings
t1
•
D
The IP phone is capable of querying a DHCP server, allowing a network
administrator a centralized and automated method of configuring various network
parameters for the phone. If DHCP is enabled, the IP phone requests the following
network information:
4-4
•
Subnet Mask
•
Gateway (i.e. router)
•
Domain Name Server (DNS)
•
Network Time Protocol Server
•
IP Address
•
TFTP Server or Alternate TFTP Server if enabled on the phone
•
TFTP Path or Alternate TFTP Path if enabled on the phone
•
FTP Server
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
•
FTP Path
•
HTTP Server
•
HTTP Path
•
HTTP Port
•
HTTPS Server
•
HTTPS Path
•
HTTPS Port
t1
The network administrator chooses which of these parameters (if any) are
supplied to the IP phone by the DHCP server. The administrator must configure
the phone manually to provide any required network parameters not supplied by
the DHCP server.
Enabling/Disabling DHCP Using the Configuration Files
ra
f
Use the following procedure to enable/disable DHCP on the phone using the
configuration files.
Configuration Files
D
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network
Settings” on page A-8.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-5
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Enabling/Disabling DHCP Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to enable/disable DHCP on the phone using the IP
Phone UI.
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press
2
Select Administrator Menu.
3
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
Select Network Settings.
5
Select option DHCP.
6
Press Change to set "Use DHCP?" to "Yes" (enable) or "No" (disable).
7
Press Done to save the changes.
D
ra
f
t1
on the phone to enter the Options List.
4-6
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Enabling/Disabling DHCP Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to enable/disable DHCP using the Aastra Web
UI.
Aastra Web UI
Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings.
2
Enable the "DHCP" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box).
3
Click
D
ra
f
t1
Step
to save your settings.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-7
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
DHCP Options 60, 66, and 43 Server Configurations
Option 66
The IP Phones support download protocols according to RFC2131 and RFC1541
(TFTP, FTP, HTTP,. HTTPS) to support DHCP option 66. Option 66 is part of the
DHCP Offer message that the DHCP server generates to tell the phone which
configuration server it should use to download new firmware and configuration
files.
Options 60 and 43
t1
For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or domain name for the
servers, your DHCP server must support Option 66. Option 66 is responsible for
forwarding the server’s IP address or domain name to the phone automatically. If
your DHCP server does not support Option 66, you must manually enter the IP
address or domain name for your applicable configuration server into your IP
phone configuration.
ra
f
The Aastra phones also support Option 60 and Option 43 as per RFC 2132.
Option 60 (Vendor Class Identifier) provides the DHCP server with a unique
identifier for each phone model. This enables a system administrator to send the
phone a customized Server Configuration in option 43.
D
The table below lists the identifier values for each phone model.
4-8
Model
Identifier Value
9143i
AastraIPPhone9143i
9480i
AastraIPPhone9480i
9480i CT
AastraIPPhone9480iCT
6751i
AastraIPPhone51i
6753i
AastraIPPhone53i
6755i
AastraIPPhone55i
6757i
AastraIPPhone57i
6757i CT
AastraIPPhone57iCT
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
The System administrator can use the Vendor Class Identifier to send the phone a
customized Server Configuration in option 43 (Vendor-Specific information).
Note: If Aastra IP Phones receive the server configuration from both
DHCP Option 66 and DHCP Option 43, then Option 43 takes precedence
over Option 66.
Using Option 43 to Customize the IP Phone
A System Administrator can customize the IP Phone(s) in the network by entering
a text string in the phone’s configuration files. The following is an Option 43
example using Linux.
Linux Example
t1
On the startup of the phones, when the DHCP server receives the request with the
information in this example, it allows the 6757i phones to use FTP and the 6757i
CT phones to use TFTP from the same server.
ra
f
A System Administrator can enter the following in the Aastra IP Phone
configuration file:
option space AastraIPPhone57i;
option AastraIPPhone57i.cfg-server-name code 02 = text;
D
option space AastraIPPhone57iCT;
option AastraIPPhone57iCT.cfg-server-name code 02 = text;
Subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 {
class "vendor-class-57i" {
match if option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone57i";
vendor-option-space AastraIPPhone57i;
option AastraIPPhone57i.cfg-server-name "ftp://
username:password@10.10.10.1";
}
class "vendor-class-57iCT" {
match if option vendor-class-identifier="AastraIPPhone57iCT";
vendor-option-space AastraIPPhone57iCT;
option AastraIPPhone57iCT.cfg-server-name "tftp://10.10.10.1";
}
}
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-9
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Your DHCP server configuration file, such as the dhcpd.conf file, may include one
of these lines to configure the configuration server protocol and the server details.
Protocol
Format
Examples
HTTP
http:///
option tftp-server-name “http://192.168.1.45”;
option tftp-server-name “http://192.168.1.45/path”;
option tftp-server-name “http://httpsvr.example.com/path”;
HTTPS
https:///
option tftp-server-name “https://192.168.1.45”;
option tftp-server-name “https://192.168.1.45/path”;
FTP
ftp://user:password@ftpserver
t1
option tftp-server-name “https://httpssvr.example.com/
path”;
option tftp-server-name “ftp://192.168.1.45”;
ra
f
option tftp-server-name “ftp://ftpsvr.example.com”;
(for anonymous user)
option tftp-server-name “ftp://userID:password@
ftpsvr.example.com”;
TFTP
tftp://tftpserver
option tftp-server-name “192.168.1.45”;
D
option tftp-server-name “tftpsvr.example.com”;
4-10
option tftp-server-name “tftp://tftpsvr.example.com”;
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Using Option 12 Hostname on the IP Phone
If you set the phone to use DHCP Option 12, the phone automatically sends this
option to the configuration server. This option specifies the hostname (name of the
client). The name may or may not be qualified with the local domain name (based
on RFC 2132). See RFC 1035 for character set restrictions.
Notes:
1.
The hostname of [] automatically
populates the field on initial startup of the phone. For example, for a
6753i, the “Hostname” field is automatically populated as
“53i00085D164435”, where the model number is “6753i” and the MAC
address is “00085D164435”.
t1
2.
If the configuration server sends the hostname back to the phone in
a DHCP Reply Packet, the hostname is ignored.
ra
f
An Administrator can change the “Hostname” for the DHCP Option 12 via the
configuration files, the IP Phone UI, and the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring DHCP Option 12 Hostname on the IP Phone
D
Use the following procedures to configure DHCP Option 12 Hostname on the IP
Phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DHCP Option
Settings” on page A-13.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-11
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu.
On the 6751i:
Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu.
Select Network Settings.
3
Select Hostname.
4
By default, the “Hostname” field is automatically populated with [] of your
phone (for example, 53i00085D164435).
t1
2
Restart the phone for the change to take affect.
D
5
ra
f
If you want to change the hostname, enter a hostname for your phone in the “Hostname” field, then
press DONE.
Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. You can use a fully qualified domain name if
required.
4-12
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings.
Hostname
By default, the “Hostname” field is automatically populated with [] of your
phone (for example, 53i00085D164435).
D
2
ra
f
t1
1
If you want to change the hostname, enter a hostname for your phone in the “Hostname” field.
Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. You can use a fully qualified domain name if
required.
3
Click
to save your changes.
Note: Changing the “Hostname” field requires a reboot of your phone.
4
Click on Operation->Reset, and click RESTART.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-13
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Using Option 77 User Class on the IP Phone
DHCP Option 77 User Class is sent in DHCP request packets from the phone to
the configuration server. This Option 77 defines specific User Class identifiers to
convey information about a phone’s software configuration or about its user's
preferences. For example, you can use the User Class option to configure all
phones in the Accounting Department with different user preferences than the
phones in the Marketing Department. A DHCP server uses the User Class option
to choose the address pool for which it allocates an address from, and/or to select
any other configuration option.
Notes:
1.
If the User Class is not specified (left blank) in the DHCP request
packet, the phone does not send the User Class DHCP Option 77.
Multiple User Classes inside a DHCP Option 77 are not supported.
t1
2.
ra
f
3.
DHCP Option 77 may affect the precedence of DHCP Options,
dependent on the DHCP Server.
An Administrator can configure the DHCP Option 77 User Class via the
configuration files, the IP Phone UI, and the Aastra Web UI.
D
Configuring DHCP Option 77 User Class on the IP Phone
Use the following procedures to configure DHCP Option 77 User Class on the IP
Phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DHCP Option
Settings” on page A-13.
4-14
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu.
On the 6751i:
Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu.
Select Network Settings.
3
Select DHCP Settings.
4
Select DHCP User Class.
5
In the “DHCP User Class” field, enter a DHCP User Class to apply to your phones, then press
DONE.
Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. For example, “admin”.
6
Restart the phone for the change to take affect.
D
ra
f
t1
2
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-15
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
D
ra
f
t1
DHCP User Class
2
In the “DHCP User Class” field, enter a DHCP User Class to apply to your phones. For example,
“admin”. Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters.
3
Click
to save your changes.
Note: Entering a value in the “DHCP User Class” field requires a reboot of your phone.
4
4-16
Click on Operation->Reset, and click RESTART.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Using Options 159 and 160 on the IP Phone
In addition to DHCP options 43 and 66 already supported on the IP Phones, the
phones also support DHCP Options 159 and 160. The IP Phones use the following
order of precedence when deriving the configuration server parameters: 43, 160,
159, 66.
In addition, an administrator can override this order of precedence by setting a
configuration parameter called, dhcp config option override (configuration
files), DHCP Download Options (Aastra Web UI), or Download Options (IP
Phone UI). Setting this parameter results in the phone only using the chosen
DHCP option and ignoring the other options.
t1
For more information about setting DHCP download preference, see
“Configuration Server Download Precedence” on page 4-20..
ra
f
Warning: Administrators should review the updated IP phone DHCP
option precedence order and configuration options to avoid potential
impact to existing Aastra IP phone deployments.
Configuring DHCP Download Options on the IP Phones
D
Use the following procedures to configure DHCP Option Override on the IP
Phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DHCP Option
Settings” on page A-13.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-17
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu.
On the 6751i:
Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu.
Enter you Administrator password and press Enter.
3
Select Network Settings.
4
Select DHCP Settings.
5
Select Download Options. The following list displays:
Any (default) - no override - uses normal precedence order of 43, 160,
Option 43
Option 66
Option 159
Option 160
Disabled (Ignores all DHCP configuration options (43, 66, 159, 160))
159, 66.
ra
f
•
•
•
•
•
•
t1
2
Choose an option that you want to use to override the DHCP normal precedence order, and press
DONE.
7
Restart the phone for the selection to take affect.
4-18
D
6
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
2
D
ra
f
t1
DHCP Download
Options Parameter
In the “DHCP Download Options” field, select an option to use to override the normal precedence
order. Valid values are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Any (default) - no override - uses normal precedence order of 43, 160,
Option 43
Option 66
Option 159
Option 160
Disabled (Ignores all DHCP configuration options (43, 66, 159, 160))
159, 66.
3
Click
4
Click on Operation->Reset, and restart the phone for the changes to take affect.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
to save your changes.
4-19
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Configuration Server Download Precedence
An Administrator can set the phone’s download precedence to ignore DHCP,
(only during the boot when the remote configuration server is contacted) and
use the following precedence instead:
1.
Configuration URI,
2.
DHCP, and then
3.
Direct configuration.
t1
To configure the download precedence, you use the option value (-1) as the value
for the “dhcp config option override” parameter in the configuration files.
Setting this parameter to “-1” causes all DHCP configuration options to be
ignored.
Configuring a Download Precedence Using the Configuration Files
ra
f
Use the following procedure to configure the DHCP download precedence using
the configuration files.
Configuration Files
D
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DHCP Option
Settings” on page A-13.
4-20
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Configuring a Download Precedence Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to configure a download precedence using the IP
Phone UI.
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu.
On the 6751i:
Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu.
Enter you Administrator password and press Enter.
3
Select Network Settings.
4
Select DHCP Settings.
5
Select Download Options.
• Disabled (Ignores all DHCP configuration options (43,
ra
f
6
t1
2
66, 159, 160))
Select the Disabled option and press Enter.
7
D
Note: The “Disabled” download option performs the same function as the “-1” in the configuration
files (ignores DHCP options).
Restart the phone for the selection to take affect.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-21
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Configuring a Download Precedence Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure a download precedence using the Aastra
Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
D
ra
f
t1
DHCP Download Options
Parameter
2
In the “DHCP Download Options” field, select “Disabled” from the list of options.
Note: In the Aastra Web UI, the “Disabled” download option performs the same function as the “-1”
in the configuration files (ignores DHCP options).
3
Click
4
Select Operation->Reset, and click Restart to reboot the phone.
4-22
to save your setting.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Multiple DHCP Servers
The IP Phones can receive messages from multiple DHCP servers.
After the phone receives its first DHCP message, it listens for a specific time
period, for more DHCP messages. If the first DHCP offer contains configuration
server information (Options 43, 66, 159 or 160), then the phone times out and
continues using the first DHCP offer, without listening for more DHCP offers. If
the first DHCP message contains no configuration server information, the phone
continues to listen for other DHCP messages. If the second DHCP message
contains configuration server information and other conditions, the phone chooses
the second DHCP message over the initial DHCP message.
IMPORTANT NOTE
t1
Note: If the DHCP Download Options parameter is enabled with a
value (Option 43, Option 66, Option 159, or Option 160), the phone
checks the override option setting before timing out.
ra
f
Users currently using multiple DHCP servers on a single network could be
affected by this feature.
DNS Caching
D
The IP phones have the ability to cache DNS requests according to RFC1035 and
RFC2181. The phone caches DNS lookups according to the TTL field, so that the
phone only performs another lookup for an address when the TTL expires.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-23
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Configuring Network Settings Manually
If you disable DHCP on your phone, you need to configure the following network
settings manually:
•
IP Address
•
Subnet Mask
•
Gateway
•
Primary DNS
•
Secondary DNS
t1
Note: If you disable DHCP on the phone, the phone uses the TFTP
protocol as the default server protocol. If you want to specify a different
protocol to use, see “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108.
ra
f
You can configure the network settings using the configuration files, the IP phone
UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
D
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network
Settings” on page A-8.
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press
2
Select Administrator Menu.
3
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
Select Network Settings.
5
Select IP Address and enter the IP address of the phone.
6
Select Subnet Mask and enter the subnet mask.
4-24
on the phone to enter the Options List.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
7
Select Gateway and enter the gateway address.
8
Select DNS and enter a Primary and/or Secondary DNS server.
9
Press Done to save the changes.
The IP phone is manually configured.
.
t1
Aastra Web UI
Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings.
2
Enter an IP address of the phone in the IP Address field.
3
Enter a subnet mask in the Subnet Mask field.
4
Enter a gateway address in the Gateway field.
5
Enter a Primary DNS in the Primary DNS field, and/or a secondary DNS in the Secondary DNS
field.
6
Click
D
ra
f
Step
to save your settings.
The IP phone is manually configured.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-25
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Configuring LAN and PC Port Negotiation
Ethernet is the computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs).
You use the LAN Port to connect to a LAN using a twisted pair 10BASE-T cable
to transmit 10BASE-T Ethernet. You use the PC Port to connect to the
configuration server (your PC).
There are two Ethernet ports on the rear of the IP phones: LAN Port and PC Port.
Using the Aastra Web UI, you can select the type of transmission you want these
ports to use to communicate over the LAN. The IP phones support each of the
following methods of transmission:
Auto-negotiation
•
Half-duplex (10Mbps or 100 Mbps)
•
Full-duplex (10Mbps or 100Mbps)
Auto-negotiation
t1
•
D
ra
f
Auto-negotiation is when two connected devices choose common transmission
parameters. In the auto-negotiation process, the connected devices share their
speed and duplex capabilities and connect at the highest common denominator
(HCD). Auto-negotiation can be used by devices that are capable of different
transmission rates (such as 10Mbit/sec and 100Mbit/sec), different duplex modes
(half duplex and full duplex) and/or different standards at the same speed. You can
set the LAN and PC Ports on the IP phones to auto-negotiate during transmission.
Half-Duplex (10Mbps or 100Mbps)
Half-duplex data transmission means that data can be transmitted in both
directions on a signal carrier, but not at the same time. For example, on a LAN
using a technology that has half-duplex transmission, one device can send data on
the line and then immediately receive data on the line from the same direction in
which data was just transmitted. Half-duplex transmission implies a bidirectional
line (one that can carry data in both directions). On the IP phones, you can set the
half-duplex transmission to transmit in 10Mbps or in 100Mbps.
4-26
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Full-Duplex (10Mbps or 100Mbps)
Full-duplex data transmission means that data can be transmitted in both
directions on a signal carrier at the same time. For example, on a LAN with a
technology that has full-duplex transmission, one device can be sending data on
the line while another device is receiving data. Full-duplex transmission implies a
bidirectional line (one that can move data in both directions). On the IP phones,
you can set the full-duplex transmission to transmit in 10Mbps or in 100Mbps.
Configuring the LAN Port and PC Port
Configuration Files
t1
You can configure the Ethernet port transmission method to use on the IP phones
using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
D
IP Phone UI
ra
f
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network
Settings” on page A-8.
Step
Action
1
Press
2
Select Administrator Menu.
3
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
Select Network Settings.
5
Select Ethernet.
6
Select LAN Port Link.
on the phone to enter the Options List.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-27
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
7
Select a negotiation method to use on port 0 and press Done. Valid values are:
• AutoNegotiation
• FullDuplex 10Mbps
• FullDuplex 100Mbps
• HalfDuplex 10Mbps
• HalfDuplex 100Mbps
Default is AutoNegotiation.
Select PC Port Link.
9
Select a negotiation method to use on port 1and press Done. Valid values are:
• AutoNegotiation
• FullDuplex 10Mbps
• FullDuplex 100Mbps
• HalfDuplex 10Mbps
• HalfDuplex 100Mbps
10
ra
f
Default is AutoNegotiation.
t1
8
Press Done (3 times) to finish configuring the configuration server protocol for the IP phone.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
Select Restart.
D
11
4-28
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings.
2
In the “LAN Port” field, select a negotiation method to use on port 0. Valid values are:
• Auto Negotiation
• Full Duplex, 10Mbps
• Full Duplex, 100Mbps
• Half Duplex, 10Mbps
• Half Duplex, 100Mbps
D
ra
f
t1
Step
Default is Auto Negotiation.
3
In the “PC Port” field, select a negotiation method to use on port 1. Valid values are:
• Auto Negotiation
• Full Duplex, 10Mbps
• Full Duplex, 100Mbps
• Half Duplex, 10Mbps
• Half Duplex, 100Mbps
Default is Auto Negotiation.
4
Click
to save your settings.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-29
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Advanced Network Settings
You can set advanced network settings on the IP phone such as, Network Address
Translation (NAT), Nortel NAT, Network Time Protocol (NTP) Time Servers,
Virtual LAN (VLAN), and Quality of Service (QoS), and Universal Plug and Play
(UPnP) using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
Note: The available advanced network parameters via the IP phone UI
are NAT, Nortel NAT, UPnP, VLAN, and QoS only.
Network Address Translation (NAT)
D
ra
f
t1
The protocols used by all IP phones do not interoperate completely with Network
Address Translation (NAT). For the IP Phones, specific configuration parameters
allow the phone to operate while connected to a network device that enforces
NAT. The following is a sample network using a NAT proxy and relevant IP
phone configuration parameters.
4-30
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Nortel Proxy/Registrar
The phone at IP address 10.10.10.10 is configured to register with the proxy at
63.251.195.10. Because it is a Nortel proxy, the configuration must additionally
include the "sip nortel nat support" and "sip nortel nat timer" settings, telling the
firmware to enhance the protocols with Nortel specific content.
Note: This IP phone uses RTP port 3000 (the default value) since an RTP
port was not explicitly configured.
SBC or ALG proxy/registrar
t1
The phone at IP address 10.10.10.20 is configured to register with the proxy at
63.251.195.20. Because the proxy/registrar has session border control (SBC) or
application layer gateway (ALG) functionality, no additional IP phone
configuration is required.
ra
f
Other proxy/registrars
D
The phone at IP address 10.10.10.30 is configured to register with the proxy at
63.251.195.30. Because this proxy/registrar is not a Nortel proxy and has no SBC
or ALG functionality, the configuration must additionally include the "sip nat ip"
and "sip nat port" settings that contain the public ip address of the NAT router and
the port used for call signaling messages. This information is embedded in
protocol messages to allow the proxy/registrar to reach the IP phone on the NAT
router private network.
NAT router configuration
You must configure the NAT router to allow signaling or media packets
containing the various UDP port values to flow between the private and public
networks that are separated by the NAT router. In the sample network, the NAT
router must not filter packets using ports 3000, 5060, 6060, 16420, and 16430.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-31
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Nortel Networks NAT
Nortel Networks provides a proprietary solution to support connectivity to their
proxies from phones placed behind devices (such as routers or firewalls) that use
NAT. Nortel uses the SIP ping request/reply between the Nortel proxy and the
phone in order to keep the connection through the router or firewall active. A SIP
Nortel NAT timer is the interval, in seconds (default is 60), that the phone sends
SIP ping requests to the Nortel proxy.
ra
f
t1
When you use NAT in your network, a network device (usually a router) provides
a “firewall” division between the public network (usually the Internet) and the
private network, to which the IP Phones are connected. The firewall protects the
network by translating port numbers within packets between the public and
private networks. When using NAT, and an RTP packet arrives at the public side
of the firewall, it is expected to have the NAT RTP port within the packet. If the
packet contains the proper port number, the firewall changes the NAT RTP port
number in the packet to the RTP port number that the phone recognizes, and then
forwards it onto the private network. Often the router/firewall automatically
discovers these various port numbers and other information concerning public and
private sides of the network with the use of the Universal Plug and Play (UPnP)
Protocol between the phone and the router/firewall.
Configuring Nortel NAT (optional)
D
You can configure Nortel NAT using the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or
the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network
Address Translation (NAT) Settings” on page A-29.
4-32
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press
2
Select Administrator Menu.
3
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
Select Network Settings.
5
Select NAT Settings.
6
Select Nortel NAT.
7
Press Change to set either “Enabled” or “Disabled”.
8
Press Done (3 times) to finish.
t1
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
Select Restart.
D
ra
f
9
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-33
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
2
Select Yes (enable) or No (disable) in the "Nortel NAT Traversal Enabled" field to enable or disable
NAT for a Nortel network.
3
Enter a time, in seconds, in the "Nortel NAT timer" field. Valid values are 0 to 2147483647.
Default is 60.
4
Click
D
ra
f
t1
Step
4-34
to save your settings.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Configuring NAT Address and Port (optional)
You can also configure a specific NAT address and port on the IP phone using the
configuration files, IP Phone UI, or Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network
Address Translation (NAT) Settings” on page A-29.
t1
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press
2
Select Administrator Menu.
3
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
Select Network Settings.
5
Select Static NAT.
6
Select NAT IP.
7
Enter a public IP address of your NAT device in dotted-decimal format.
8
Press Done to save the setting.
9
Select NAT SIP Port. Default is 51620.
10
Enter the public SIP signalling port number of your NAT device.
11
Press Done to save the setting.
12
Select NAT RTP Port.
13
Enter the RTP Port number of your NAT device. Default is 51720.
14
Press Done (4 times) to finish.
D
ra
f
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
15
Select Restart.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-35
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
2
Enter a NAT IP address in the "NAT IP" field. The value must be entered in dotted decimal format.
For example, 0.0.0.0. The “NAT IP” is the public IP address of your NAT device.
3
Enter a NAT port in the "NAT SIP Port" field. Default is 51620.
The “NAT SIP Port” is the public SIP signalling port number of your NAT device.
4
Enter a NAT port in the "NAT RTP Port" field. Default is 51720.
The “NAT RTP Port” is the RTP Port number of your NAT device.
5
Click
D
ra
f
t1
Step
4-36
to save your settings.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
SIP and TLS Source Ports for NAT Traversal
A System Administrator can configure the SIP and TLS source ports on the IP
Phone. Previously, the IP phone used default values (5060 for UDP/TCP and 5061
for TLS). The two new parameters for configuring the SIP and TLS source ports
are:
•
sip local port
•
sip local tls port
You can configure the SIP and TLS source ports using the configuration files or
the Aastra Web UI. After configuring these parameters, you must reboot the
phone.
t1
If NAT is disabled, the port number also shows in the VIA and Contact SIP
headers.
ra
f
If you enable NAT, the phone uses the NAT port number (and NAT IP address) in
the Via and Contact SIP headers of SIP messages, but still use the configured
source port.
D
Note: By default, the IP phones use symmetric UDP signaling for
outgoing UDP SIP messages. When symmetric UDP is enabled, the IP
phone generates and listens for UDP messages using port 5060.If
symmetric UDP signaling is disabled, the phone sends from random
ports but it listens on the configured SIP local port.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-37
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Configuring SIP and TLS Source Ports Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameters to configure SIP and TLS ports for NAT
traversal:
•
sip local port
•
sip local tls port
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections:
“Local SIP UDP/TCP Port Setting” on page A-32.
“Local SIP TLS Port” on page A-32.
D
ra
f
t1
•
•
4-38
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Configuring SIP and TLS Source Ports Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure SIP and TLS source ports using the
Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.
.
D
ra
f
t1
1
“Local SIP UDP/TCP Port” Parameter
2
“Local SIP TLS Port” Parameter
The “Local SIP UDP/TCP Port” field has a default value of 5060. Change this value if required to a
value greater than 1024 and less than 65535.
Note: It is recommended that you avoid the conflict RTP port range in case of a UDP transport.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-39
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
3
The “Local SIP TLS Port” field has a default value of 5061. Change this value if required to a value
greater than 1024 and less than 65535.
Note: It is recommended that you avoid the conflict with any TCP ports being used. For example:
WebUI HTTP server on 80/tcp and HTTPS on 443/tcp.
4
Click
to save your changes.
HTTPS Client/Server Configuration
ra
f
t1
HTTPS is a Web protocol that encrypts and decrypts user page requests as well as
the pages that are returned by the Web server. HTTPS uses Secure Socket Layer
(SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) as a sublayer under its regular HTTP
application layering. SSL is a commonly-used protocol for managing the
security of a message transmission on the Internet. It uses a 40-bit key size
for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm, which is considered an adequate degree
of encryption for commercial exchange. TLS is a protocol that ensures privacy
between communicating applications and their users on the Internet. When a
server and client communicate, TLS ensures that no third party may eavesdrop or
tamper with any message. TLS is the successor to SSL.
D
Note: HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions
with the TCP/IP lower layer.
When an HTTPS client opens and closes its TCP socket, the SSL software
respectively handshakes upon opening and disconnects upon closing from the
HTTPS server. The main HTTPS client functions are:
4-40
•
Downloading of configuration files and firmware images.
•
Downloading of script files based on an “HTTPS://” URL supplied by a
softkey definition.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
The HTTPS server provides HTTP functionality over secure connections. It
coexists with the HTTP server but has its own set of tasks. The main HTTPS
server functions are:
•
Delivery of web page content to a browser client over a secure connection.
•
Execution of HTTP GET and POST requests received over a secure
connection.
Using the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI, you can
configure the following regarding HTTPS:
Specify HTTPS security client method to use (TSLv1 or SSLv3)
•
Enable or disable HTTP to HTTPS server redirect function
•
HTTPS server blocking of XML HTTP POSTS to the phone
t1
•
Configuring HTTPS Client and Server Settings
ra
f
Use the following procedures to configure the HTTPS client and server for
the IP phones.
D
Note: To enable or disable the IP phones to use the HTTPS protocol as
the configuration server, see the section, “Configuring the Configuration
Server Protocol” on page 4-108.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “HTTPS Client
and Server Settings” on page A-33.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-41
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press
2
Select Administrator Menu.
3
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
Select Configuration Server.
5
Select HTTPS Settings.
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Configure HTTPS Client
Select HTTPS Client.
7
Select Client Method.
8
Press Change to select a client method to use for HTTPS. Valid values are:
9
SSL 3.0 (default)
TLS 1.0
ra
f
•
•
t1
6
Press Done to save the changes.
Configure HTTPS Server
Select HTTPS Server.
11
Select HTTP->HTTPS.
12
Press Change to select “Yes” or “No”. Default is “No”.
Enabling this feature redirects the HTTP protocol to HTTPS.
13
Press Done to save the changes.
14
Select XML HTTP POSTs.
15
Press Change to select “Yes” or “No”. Default is “No”.
Enabling this feature blocks XML HTTP POSTs from the IP Phone.
16
Press Done (4 times) to finish.
D
10
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
17
4-42
Select Restart.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
2
Select an HTTPS client method to use from the HTTPS Client Method field. Valid values are:
D
ra
f
t1
Step
SSL 3.0 (default)
TSL 1.0
3
Enable HTTP to HTTPS redirect by checking the HTTPS Server - Redirect HTTP to HTTPS field
check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the check box). Default is disabled.
4
Enable the blocking of XML HTTP POSTs by the HTTPS server by checking the HTTPS Server Block XML HTTP POSTs field check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the check box). Default is
disabled.
5
Click
to save your settings.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-43
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
HTTPS Server Certificate Validation
The HTTPS client on the IP Phones support validation of HTTPS certificates.
This feature supports the following:
•
Verisign, GeoTrust, and Thawte signed certificates
•
User-provided certificates
•
Checking of hostnames
•
Checking of certificate expiration
•
Ability to disable any or all of the validation steps
•
Phone displays a message when a certificate is rejected (except on check-sync
operations)
t1
All validation options are enabled by default.
Certificate Management
ra
f
Aastra Provided Certificates
The phones come with root certificates from Verisign, GeoTrust, and Thawte
pre-loaded.
D
User Provided Certificates
The administrator has the option to upload their own certificates onto the phone.
The phone downloads these certificates in a file of .PEM format during boot time
after configuration downloads. The user-provided certificates are saved on the
phone between firmware upgrades but are deleted during a factory default. The
download of the User-provided certificates are based on a filename specified in
the configuration parameter, https user certificates (Trusted Certificates
Filename in the Aastra Web UI; User-provided certificates are not configurable
via the IP Phone UI).
Note: Certificates that are signed by providers other than Verisign,
GeoTrust or Thwate do not verify on the phone by default. The user can
overcome this by adding the root certificate of their certificate provider to
the use-provided certificate .PEM file.
4-44
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Certificate Validation
Certificate validation is enabled by default. Validation occurs by checking that the
certificates are well formed and signed by one of the certificates in the trusted
certificate set. It then checks the expiration date on the certificate, and finally,
compares the name in the certificate with the address for which it was connected.
If any of these validation steps fail, the connection is rejected. Certificate
validation is controlled by three parameters which you can configure via the
configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI:
https validate certificates - Enables/disables validation
•
https validate hostname - Enables/disables the checking of the certificate
commonName against the server name.
•
https validate expires - Enables/disables the checking of the expiration date
on the certificate.
User Interface
ra
f
Certificate Rejection
t1
•
When the phone rejects a certificate, it displays, "Bad Certificate" on the LCD.
D
An Administrator can configure HTTPS Server Certificate Validation using the
configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring HTTPS Server Certificate Validation
Use the following procedures to configure the HTTPS server certificate
validation on the IP phones.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “HTTPS Server
Certificate Validation Settings” on page A-35.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-45
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu.
On the 6751i:
Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu.
Select Configuration Server.
3
Select HTTPS Settings->Cert. Validation.
The following list displays:
• Enable
• Check Expires
• Check Hostnames
t1
2
ra
f
Enable/Disable HTTPS Server Certificate Validation
4
Select Enable.
5
Press Change to toggle the “Enable” field to “Yes” or “No”.
6
D
Note: If you are using HTTPS as a configuration method, and use a self signed certificate, you
must set this field to “No” before upgrading to Release 2.3 of the IP Phones.
Press DONE to save the change and return to the Certificates screen.
Note: This change is immediately applied after pressing DONE.
Enable/Disable HTTPS Validate Certificate Expiration
7
Select Check Expires.
8
Press Change to toggle the “Check Expires” field to “Yes” or “No”.
Notes:
1. This change is immediately applied after pressing DONE.
2. If the “Check Expires” parameter is set to Yes, the clock on the phone must be set for the phone
to accept the certificates.
4-46
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
9
Press DONE to save the change and return to the Certificates screen.
Note: This change is immediately applied after pressing DONE.
Enable/Disable HTTPS Validate Hostnames
10
Select Check Hostnames.
11
Press Change to toggle the “Check Hostnames” field to “Yes” or “No”.
12
Press DONE to save the change and return to the Certificates screen.
Press
to exit the Options Menu and return to the idle screen.
D
ra
f
13
t1
Note: This change is immediately applied after pressing DONE.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-47
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings.
The “Validate Certificates” field is enabled by default. To disable validation of certificates, click
the check mark in the box to clear the check mark.
ra
f
2
t1
HTTPS Validation
Certificate
Parameters
When this parameter is enabled, the HTTPS client performs validation on SSL certificates before
accepting them.
3
D
Notes:
1. This parameter is immediately applied after clicking the SAVE SETTINGS button.
2. If you are using HTTPS as a configuration method, and use a self signed certificate, you
must disable (uncheck) this field before upgrading to Release 2.3 of the IP Phones.
The “Check Certificate Expiration” field is enabled by default. To disable validation of certificate
expiration, click the check mark in the box to clear the check mark.
When this parameter is enabled, the HTTPS client verifies whether or not a certificate has expired
prior to accepting the certificate.
Notes:
1. This parameter is immediately applied after clicking the SAVE SETTINGS button.
2. If the “Check Certificates Expiration” parameter is set to Yes, the clock on the phone must be
set for the phone to accept the certificates.
4
The “Check Certificate Hostnames” field is enabled by default. To disable validation of
hostnames, click the check mark in the box to clear the check mark.
Note: This parameter is immediately applied after clicking the SAVE SETTINGS button.
4-48
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
5
If you require the download of User-provided certificates in a .PEM formatted file, enter the file
name in the format in the “Trusted Certificates Filename” field. For example:
trustedCerts.pem
This parameter specifies a file name for a .PEM file located on the configuration server. This file
contains the User-provided certificates in PEM format. These certificates are used to validate peer
certificates.
Notes:
1. You must disable the “Validate Certificates” field in order for the phone to accept the
User-provided certificates.
2. This parameter requires you restart the phone in order for it to take affect.
Click
to save your changes.
7
If you entered a filename in the “Trusted Certificates Filename” field, click on Operation->Reset,
and restart the phone for the changes to take affect.
D
ra
f
t1
6
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-49
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) (for remote phones)
UPnP is a standard that uses Internet protocols to enable devices to be plugged
into a network and automatically know about each other. With UPnP, when a user
plugs a device into the network, the device configures itself, acquires a TCP IP
address, and uses a discovery protocol based on the Internet's HTTP or HTTPS
URL to announce its presence on the network to other devices.
This method of device discovery on a network is called “Universal Plug and Play”
or UPnP. If you enable UPnP, and the phone is discovered on the network, port
mappings are set up between the phone and the Internet Gateway Device (IGD).
The phone controls the opening, closing, and polling of ports on the IGD. HTTP
and SIP use a single port each. RTP/RTCP uses a range of ports.
ra
f
t1
The UPnP manager performs its functions when you set the phone to remote
mode. When you switch the phone back to local mode, the UPnP manager
removes any open port mappings and shuts itself down. If you boot the phone in
remote mode, the UPnP manager initializes after the phone obtains an IP address
and before a SIP registration is sent out. If you want to manually configure your
NAT, you must disable UPnP on the remote mode phone.
D
Note: Enabling UPnP allows the IP phones to access the Internet even if
a firewall has been set on the IGD. This allows the phone to send and
receive SIP calls and XML pushes without interruption. UPnP does not
work with multiple firewalls.
You can enable UPnP on remote IP phones using the configuration files, the IP
Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. Using the configuration files, you can enable
UPnP using the following parameters:
•
upnp manager
•
upnp gateway
•
sip nat rtp port
The “upnp manager” parameter enables or disables UPnP. The “upnp gateway”
parameter is the IP address or qualified domain name of the Internet gateway or
router that stores the port mappings. In the event a phone using UPnP is rebooted,
it will still have the previously set port mappings on the gateway. The “sip nat rtp
port” parameter specifies the RTP port range on the gateway.
4-50
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
A User or Administrator can specify UPnP on specific lines using the
configuration files (using the “upnp mapping lines” parameter) or the Aastra
Web UI (at the path Basic Settings->Preferences->UPnP Mapping Lines).
Reference
For more information about enabling/disabling UPnP Mapping on specific lines,
see Chapter 5, the section, “UPnP Mapping Lines (for remote phones)” on
page 5-87.
Configuring UPnP (optional)
Configuration Files
t1
Use the following procedures to configure UPnP on the IP phones.
D
IP Phone UI
ra
f
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “UPnP Settings”
on page A-37.
Step
Action
1
Press
2
Select Administrator Menu.
3
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
Select Network Settings.
5
Select NAT Settings.
6
Select UPnP.
7
Press Change to select “Yes” or “No”. Default is “No”.
This field enables or disables the use of UPnP on the IP Phone.
on the phone to enter the Options List.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-51
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
8
Press Done (3 times) to save the changes.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings
9
Select Restart.
.
Aastra Web UI
Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
D
ra
f
t1
Step
4-52
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
2
The “UPnP” field is disabled by default. To enable UPnP, place a check in the “Enabled” box.
Uncheck the box to disable this field. This field enables and disable UPnP on the IP phone.
3
Click
D
ra
f
t1
to save your settings.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-53
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Virtual LAN (optional)
Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a feature on the IP phone that allows for
multiple logical Ethernet interfaces to send outgoing RTP packets over a single
physical Ethernet as described in IEEE Std 802.3. On the IP phone, you configure
a VLAN ID that associates with the physical Ethernet port.
By configuring specific VLAN parameters, the IP phones have the capability of
adding and removing tags, and processing the ID and priority information
contained within the tag.
Note: All latest VLAN functionality is backwards compatible with IP
Phone Releases 1.3 and 1.3.1.
t1
VLAN on the IP phones is disabled by default. When you enable VLAN, the IP
phone provides defaults for all VLAN parameters. If you choose to change these
parameters, you can configure them using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI,
or the Aastra Web UI.
ra
f
The following sections describe the VLAN features you can configure on the IP
phones.
Type of Service (ToS), Quality of Service (QoS), and DiffServ QoS
D
ToS is an octet as a field in the standard IP header. It is used to classify the traffic
of the different QoSs.
QoS provides service differentiation between IP packets in the network. This
service differentiation is noticeable during periods of network congestion (for
example, in case of contention for resources) and results in different levels of
network performance.
Port 0 is the Ethernet LAN Port connected to the network. Port 1 is the Ethernet
PC Port used for passthrough to a PC.
Differentiated Service (DiffServ) QoS is class-based where some classes of traffic
receive preferential handling over other traffic classes.
The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value is stored in the first six bits
of the ToS field. Each DSCP specifies a particular per-hop behavior that is
applied to a packet.
4-54
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
The following parameters allow an administrator to configure ToS, QoS, and
DiffServ QoS for VLAN:
Parameters in Configuration Files
Parameters in Aastra Web UI
Global
tagging enabled
VLAN enable
priority non-ip
Priority, Non-IP Packet
LAN Port
VLAN ID
tos priority map
SIP Priority
tos priority map
RTP Priority
tos priority map
RTCP Priority
PC Port
vlan id port 1
VLAN ID
Priority
ra
f
QoS eth port 1 priority
t1
vlan id
D
Notes:
1. In order for the software to successfully maintain connectivity with a
network using VLAN functionality, the IP phone reboots if you modify
the "tagging enabled" (VLAN Enable in the Web UI), "vlan id", or
"vlan id port 1" parameters.
2. When the LAN Port (vlan id) and the PC Port (vlan id port 1)
parameters have the same value, VLAN functionality is compatible with
earlier IP phone software releases.
If you set the PC Port (vlan id port 1) to 4095, all untagged packets are
sent to this port. For configuring this feature via the Phone UI and the
Aastra Web UI, see “Configuring VLAN (optional)” on page 4-60. For
configuring this feature using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
section, “Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Settings” on page A-38.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-55
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
DSCP Range/VLAN Priority Mapping
DSCP bits in the ToS field of the IP header are set for RTP, RTCP, and SIP packets
using either the default values or the values configured via the "tos sip", "tos rtp",
and "tos rtcp" parameters.
When the VLAN global configuration parameter, "tagging enabled" is set to 1,
VLAN priority for IP packets is mapped to the DSCP value instead of a single
priority for all packets. An administrator can also configure VLAN priority for
non-IP packets using the "priority non-ip" parameter.
t1
Since the default DSCP settings for SIP, RTP, and RTCP are 26, 46, and 46
respectively, this results in corresponding default VLAN priorities of 3 for SIP, 4
for RTP, and 4 for RTCP (based on the settings in the table “DSCP Range/VLAN
Priority” on page 4-56).
You can change the default parameters by modifying just the DSCP values, just
the VLAN priority values, or by modifying all values.
ra
f
The following table shows the DSCP range/VLAN priority mapping.
DSCP Range/VLAN Priority
DSCP
Range
VLAN Priority
0
1
16-23
2
24-31
3
32-39
4
40-47
5
48-55
6
56-63
7
D
0-7
8-15
4-56
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
The following table identifies the default DSCP of protocols.
Protocol
Name
Default DSCP
Values in the
ToS Field
sip
26
rtp
46
rtcp
46
Configuring Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP (optional)
Use the following procedures to configure ToS/DSCP on the IP phone.
ra
f
Configuration Files
t1
Note: ToS/DSCP is enabled by default. The SIP, RTP, and RTCP
parameters show defaults of 26, 46, and 46, respectively. Use the
following procedures to change these settings if required.
D
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Type of Service
(ToS)/DSCP Settings” on page A-44.
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press
2
Select Administrator Menu.
3
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
Select Network Settings.
5
Select Type of Service DSCP.
on the phone to enter the Options List.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-57
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
6
Select Type of Service SIP.
or
Select Type of Service RTP.
or
Select Type of Service RTCP.
7
Enter a value for “Type of Service SIP”. Default is 26.
or
Enter a value for “Type of Service RTP”. Default is 46.
or
Enter a value for “Type of Service RTCP”. Default is 46.
t1
Valid values are 0 to 63.
Note: If you change the ToS/DSCP setting for a Protocol, and VLAN is enabled, you will need to map
the applicable priority to the Protocol setting as shown in the table “DSCP Range/VLAN Priority” on
page 4-56 For more information, see the section “Configuring VLAN (optional)” on page 4-60.
Press Done (3 times) to save the changes.
ra
f
8
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings
Select Restart.
D
9
4-58
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Type of Service,DSCP.
2
Select a Protocol field:
• “SIP”
or
• “RTP”
or
• “RTCP”
3
Enter a value from 0 to 63. Default values are as follows:
D
ra
f
t1
Step
SIP = 26
RTP = 46
RTCP = 46
Note: If you change the ToS/DSCP setting for a Protocol, and VLAN is enabled, you will need to map
the applicable priority to the Protocol setting as shown in the table “DSCP Range/VLAN Priority” on
page 4-60 For more information, see the section “Configuring VLAN (optional)” on page 4-60.
4
Click
to save your settings.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-59
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Configuring VLAN (optional)
Use the following procedures to configure VLAN on the IP phone.
Note: VLAN is disabled by default. When you enable VLAN, the IP
phones use the default settings for each VLAN parameter. You can
change the default settings if required using the following procedure.
Configuration Files
ra
f
IP Phone UI
t1
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Virtual Local
Area Network (VLAN) Settings” on page A-38.
Step
Action
1
Press
2
Select Administrator Menu.
3
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
Select Network Settings.
5
Select VLAN Settings.
D
on the phone to enter the Options List.
To globally enable/disable VLAN and set priority for non-IP packets:
6
Select VLAN Enable.
7
Press Change to set VLAN Enable to “Yes” to enable or “No” to disable. Default is “No”.
8
Press Done to save the changes.
9
Select Phone VLAN.
10
Select VLAN Priority.
11
Select Other and enter a non-IP priority value from 0 to 7 for non-IP packets.
Default for this field is 5.
12
Press Done (3 times) to return to the VLAN Settings menu.
4-60
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
To set VLAN ID and priority for LAN Port (Port 0):
13
Select Phone VLAN.
14
Select Phone VLAN ID and enter a value from 1 to 4094 to specify the VLAN ID for the LAN Port.
Default is 1.
15
Press Done to save the change.
16
Select VLAN Priority.
17
Select one of the following VLAN Protocols:
Enter a VLAN priority value from 0 to 7 for the associated Protocol. Default values for each Protocol
are:
SIP Priority = 3
RTP Priority = 5
RTCP Priority = 5
19
ra
f
18
SIP Priority
RTP Priority
RTCP Priority
t1
•
•
•
Press Done (3 times) to return to the VLAN Settings menu.
To set VLAN ID and priority for PC Port (Port 1):
Select PC Port VLAN.
21
Select PC Port VLAN ID.
22
Enter a value from 1 to 4095 to specify the VLAN ID for the PC Port.
Default is 1.
D
20
Note: If you set the PC Port VLAN ID (Port 1) to 4095, all untagged packets are sent to this port. The
following is an example of configuring the phone on a VLAN where all untagged packets are sent to
the PC Port (passthrough port).
Example
You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the passthrough port (PC Port) to
4095. The following example sets the phone to be on VLAN 3 but the passthrough port is
configured as untagged.
VLAN Settings->VLAN Enable: Yes
VLAN Settings->Phone VLAN->Phone VLAN ID: 3
VLAN Settings->PC Port VLAN->PC Port VLAN ID: 4095
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-61
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
23
Press Done to save the change.
24
Select PC Port Priority.
25
Select a PC Port VLAN priority value from 0 to 7 for the PC Port.
Default is 0.
26
Press Done (4 times) to save the changes.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings
Select Restart.
D
ra
f
t1
27
4-62
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN.
D
ra
f
t1
Step
To globally enable/disable VLAN and set priority for non-IP packets:
2
Enable VLAN by checking the VLAN Enable field check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the
check box).
3
With VLAN enabled, select the priority (0 to 7) for non-IP packets in the Priority, Non-IP Packet field.
To set VLAN ID and priority for the LAN Port (Port 0):
4
Enter a VLAN ID value from 1 to 4094 in the VLAN ID field. Default is 1.
5
Choose a VLAN Protocol (SIP Priority, RTP Priority, and/or RTCP Priority), and select a priority for
the associated Protocol. Valid values are 0 to 7, Defaults are as follows:
SIP Priority = 3
RTP Priority = 5
RTCP Priority = 5
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-63
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
To set VLAN ID and priority for the PC Port (Port 1):
6
Enter a VLAN ID value from 1 to 4095 in the VLAN ID field. Default is 1.
Note: If you set the PC Port VLAN ID (Port 1) to 4095, all untagged packets are sent to this PC Port.
The following is an example of configuring the phone on a VLAN where all untagged packets are sent
to the passthrough port.
D
ra
f
t1
Example
You enable tagging as normal, enter a value for the LAN Port VLAN ID, and then set the PC
Port VLAN ID to 4095. The following example sets the phone to be on VLAN 3 but the PC Port
VLAN ID is configured as untagged..
7
Select a VLAN priority value from 0 to 7 for the PC Port in the Priority field. Default is 0.
8
Click
4-64
to save your settings.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
RPORT
The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) operates over UDP and TCP. When used
with UDP, responses to requests are returned to the source address from which the
request came, and returned to the port written into the topmost “Via” header of the
request. However, this behavior is not desirable when the client is behind a
Network Address Translation (NAT) or firewall.
A parameter created for the “Via” header called “Rport” in RFC 3581, allows a
client to request that the server send the response back to the source IP address
and the port from which the request came.
When you enable “Rport, the phone always uses symmetric signaling (listens on
the port used for sending requests).
t1
An Administrator can configure “Rport” using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.
Configuring Rport Using the Configuration Files
sip rport
ra
f
Use the following parameter to configure Rport on your phone.
D
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Rport Setting” on
page A-31.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-65
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
Configuring Rport Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure Rport on your phone using the Aastra
Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
D
ra
f
t1
1
2
Rport
Parameter
In the "Advanced Network Settings" section, enable the "Rport (RFC3581" field by checking the
check box. (Disable Rport by unchecking the box).
“Rport” in RFC 3581, allows a client to request that the server send the response back to the source
IP address and the port from which the request came.
3
4-66
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Network Time Servers
Network Time Protocol (NTP) is a protocol that the IP phone uses to synchronize
the phone clock time with a computer (configuration server) in the network.
To use NTP, you must enable it using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
You can specify up to three time servers in your network.
Note: The IP phones support NTP version 1.
Configuring NTP Servers (optional)
Configuration Files
t1
Use the following procedure to enable/disable and configure the NTP servers
using the configuration files.
ra
f
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Time Server
Settings” on page A-52.
D
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the NTP server using the IP Phone
UI.
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press
2
Select Preferences.
3
Select Time and Date.
4
Select Time Server.
5
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
6
Select Timer Server 1, Timer Server 2, or Time Server 3.
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Note: The Time Servers are disabled by default.
7
To set a Time Server, press Enable. (Press Disable to disable a Time Server.)
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-67
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Network Settings
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
8
Enter the IP Address (in dotted decimal) or qualified domain name for the Time Server.
9
Press Done to save the change.
Use the following procedure to enable/disable and configure the NTP Servers
using the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
2
Enable the "NTP Time Servers" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled.
D
ra
f
t1
Step
4-68
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Network Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
3
Enter an IP address or qualified domain name in the "Time Server 1", "Time Server 2", and/or
"Time Server 3" field(s) to specify the location of the NTP time server.
4
Click
D
ra
f
t1
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-69
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Global SIP Settings
Description
The IP phone uses the information in the Global Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)
settings to register at the IP PBX.
The IP phone configuration defines network and user account parameters that
apply globally to all SIP lines. Since not all SIP lines are necessarily hosted using
the same IP-PBX/server or user account, additional sets of per-line parameters
can also be defined for network and user account.
t1
You configure and modify these parameters and associated values using the
configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. The Aastra Web UI
and configuration file methods configure global and per-line SIP settings on the IP
phone. The IP phone UI configures global SIP settings only.
ra
f
On the IP Phones, you can configure Basic and Advanced SIP Settings. The Basic
SIP Settings include authentication and network settings. The Advanced SIP
Settings include other features you can configure on the IP Phone.
Reference
D
For more information about Basic SIP Settings (for authentication and network),
see “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71.
For more information bout Advanced SIP Settings, see “Advanced SIP Settings
(optional)” on page 4-84.
4-70
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Basic SIP Settings
Specific parameters are configurable on a global and per-line basis. You can also
configure specific parameters using the IP Phone UI, the Aastra Web UI, or the
configuration files. If you have a proxy server or have a SIP registrar present at a
different location than the PBX server, the SIP parameters may need to be
changed.
The IP phones allow you to define different SIP lines with the same account
information (i.e., same user name) but with different registrar and proxy IP
addresses. This feature works with Registration, Subscription, and Notify
processing. This feature also works with the following types of calls: incoming,
outgoing, Broadsoft Shared Call Appearance (SCA), Bridged Line Appearance
(BLA), conference, transfer, blind transfer.
t1
The following tables identify the SIP global and per-line, authentication and
network parameters on the IP phones.
SIP Global Parameters
Aastra Web UI Parameters
ra
f
IP Phone UI Parameters
Configuration File Parameters
SIP Global Authentication Parameters
Screen Name
N/A
User Name
Display Name
Auth Name
Password
N/A
N/A
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Screen Name
Screen Name 2
Phone Number
Caller ID
Authentication Name
Password
BLA Number
Line Mode
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
sip screen name
sip screen name 2
sip user name
sip display name
sip auth name
sip password
sip bla number
sip mode
sip vmail
Proxy Server
Proxy Port
Backup Proxy Server
Backup Proxy Port
Outbound Proxy Server
Outbound Proxy Port
Registrar Server
Registrar Port
Backup Registrar Server
Backup Registrar Port
Registration Period
Conference Server URI
(see Chapter 5)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
sip proxy ip
sip proxy port
sip backup proxy ip
sip backup proxy port
sip outbound proxy
sip outbound proxy port
sip registrar ip
sip registrar port
sip backup registrar ip
sip backup registrar port
sip registration period
sip centralized conf
(see Chapter 5)
D
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
SIP Global Network Parameters
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Proxy Server
Proxy Port
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Registrar Server
Registrar Port
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-71
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Reference
For more information about centralized conferencing, see Chapter 5, the section,
“Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on page 5-359.
SIP Per-Line Parameters
IP Phone UI Parameters
Aastra Web UI Parameters
Configuration File Parameters
SIP Per-Line Authentication Parameters
Screen Name
N/A
User Name
Display Name
Auth Name
Password
N/A
N/A
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Screen Name
Screen Name 2
Phone Number
Caller ID
Authentication Name
Password
BLA Number
Line Mode
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
sip lineN screen name
sip lineN screen name 2
sip lineN user name
sip lineN display name
sip lineN auth name
sip lineN password
sip lineN bla number
sip lineN mode
sip lineN vmail
Proxy Server
Proxy Port
Backup Proxy Server
Backup Proxy Port
Outbound Proxy Server
Outbound Proxy Port
Registrar Server
Registrar Port
Backup Registrar Server
Backup Registrar Port
Registration Period
Conference Server URI
(see Chapter 5)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
sip lineN proxy ip
sip lineN proxy port
sip lineN backup proxy ip
sip lineN backup proxy port
sip lineN outbound proxy
sip lineN outbound proxy port
sip lineN registrar ip
sip lineN registrar port
sip lineN backup registrar ip
sip lineN backup registrar port
sip lineN registration period
sip lineN centralized conf
(see Chapter 5)
SIP Per-Line Network Parameters
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ra
f
Proxy Server
Proxy Port
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Registrar Server
Registrar Port
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
D
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
t1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Reference
For more information about centralized conferencing, see Chapter 5, the section,
“Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on page 5-359.
4-72
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Note: The "sip vmail" and "sip lineN vmail" parameters are configurable
using the configuration files only. To configure voicemail see Chapter 5,
the section, “Voicemail (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT
only)” on page 5-308.
Specific sets of SIP parameters are inter-dependent with each other. To prevent
conflicting parameter values from being applied, per-line values always take
precedence over the corresponding set of global values.
t1
For example, if a parameter value is configured for one of the per-line sets, all
parameters from that set are applied and all parameters from the corresponding
global section are ignored, even if some of the parameters within the global set are
not defined in the per-line set.
SIP Precedence Example
ra
f
The following example shows the SIP proxy feature and example schema for
storage and parsing of the SIP configuration parameters.
The following SIP configuration is assumed:
D
# SIP network block
sip proxy ip: 10.30.11.154
sip proxy port: 5060
sip registrar ip: 10.44.122.37
sip registrar port: 4020
sip line3 proxy ip: siparator.vonage.com
sip line3 proxy port: 0
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-73
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Line3 specifies per-line values for proxy IP address and proxy port, so the phone
uses those parameter values for SIP calls made on that line. However, because
those parameters are part of the SIP network block, the phone does not apply any
of the global SIP network block parameters. So even though the global parameters
configure a SIP registrar, Line3 on the phone ignores all global network block
parameters. Since line3 does not contain a per-line SIP registrar entry, the phone
does not use a registrar for that line.
Note: Global SIP parameters apply to all lines unless overridden by a
per-line configuration.
D
ra
f
t1
Per-line settings are configurable for lines 1 through 7.
4-74
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Backup Proxy/Registrar Support
The IP phones support a backup SIP proxy and backup SIP registrar feature. If
the primary server is unavailable, the phone automatically switches to the backup
server allowing the user's phone to remain in service.
How it Works
All SIP registration messages are sent to the primary registrar first. If the server is
unavailable, then a new registration request is sent to the backup registrar. This
also applies to registration renewal messages, which try the primary server before
the backup.
t1
Similarly, any outgoing calls attempt to use the primary proxy first, then the
backup if necessary. In addition, subscriptions for BLF, BLA, and explicit MWI
can also use the backup proxy when the primary fails. Outgoing calls and the
previously mentioned subscriptions behave the same as registrations, where the
primary proxy is tried before the backup.
ra
f
You can configure the backup SIP proxy on a global or per-line basis via the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
SIP Server (SRV) Lookup
D
The SIP SRV Lookup feature allows you to configure the IP phone to perform a
DNS server lookup on a SIP proxy, a SIP registrar, or a SIP outbound proxy.
The IP phone performs an SRV lookup when the IP address of the server is FQDN
and the corresponding port is 0.
For example, if the phone is configured with sip proxy ip of "ana.aastra.com",
and sip proxy port of "0", the SRV lookup may return multiple servers, based on
the priorities if one is selected as primary and others are selected as secondary.
However, if the IP address is an FQDN and the corresponding server port is
non-zero, then the phone performs a DNS "A" Name Query to resolve the FQDN
into dot notation form.
If the IP address is a valid dot notation and the port is zero, then a default port
5060 is used.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-75
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
You can configure SRV lookup using the configuration files (aastra.cfg and
.cfg) only. The parameters to use are:
•
sip proxy ip
•
sip proxy port
Configuring Basic SIP Network Settings (optional)
You can configure SIP settings using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or
the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
t1
Note: To configure the SIP settings per-line, use the configuration files or
the Aastra Web UI.
ra
f
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “SIP Basic,
Global Settings” on page A-67 or “SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings” on page A-76
D
Note: You can set global configuration only using the IP Phone UI.
4-76
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press
2
Select Administrator Menu.
3
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
Select SIP Settings.
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Configuring Proxy IP and Proxy Port
Select Proxy IP/Port.
6
Enter an IP address or fully qualified host name in the Proxy Server field. Default is 0.0.0.0.
7
Enter a Proxy Port number in the Proxy Port field for accessing the SIP proxy server.
Default is 0.
8
Press Done to save the changes.
t1
5
ra
f
Configuring Registrar IP and Registrar Port
9
Select Registrar IP/Port.
10
Enter an IP address or fully qualified host name in the Registrar Server field. Default is 0.0.0.0.
D
A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still active and you can dial
using username@ip address of the phone.
If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2, etc.), then the
register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting
indicator (MWI) does not come on.
11
Enter a Registrar Port number in the Registrar Port field for accessing the SIP registrar server.
Default is 0.
12
Press Done to save the changes.
Enabling/Disabling the Use of the Registrar Server
13
Select SIP Register.
14
Press Change to set Register to "Yes" (enable) or "No" (disable). Default is “Yes”.
This parameter enables/disables the IP phone to register on the network.
15
Press Done to save the changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-77
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
IP Phone UI
Action
16
Select User Name to enter the username in the name field of the SIP URI for the IP phone, and for
registering the phone at the registrar.
Note: The IP phones allow usernames containing dots (“.”). You can also enter the same user name
for different registrar and proxy IP addresses.
17
Press Done to save the changes.
18
Select Display Name to enter the name used in the display name field of the "From SIP" header
field.
19
Press Done to save the changes.
20
Select Screen Name and enter the name to display on the idle screen.
21
Press Done to save the changes.
22
Select Authentication Name to enter the authorization name used in the username field of the
Authorization header field of the SIP REGISTER request.
23
Press Done to save the changes.
24
Select Password to enter the password used to register the IP phone with the SIP proxy.
Note: The IP phones accept numeric passwords only.
25
Press Done (3 times) to save the changes.
ra
f
t1
Step
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings
Select Restart.
D
26
4-78
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Action
1
For global configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Settings.
D
ra
f
t1
Step
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-79
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
D
ra
f
t1
Or, for per-line configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Line N (1-9).
To configure SIP authentication settings:
2
4-80
In the "Screen Name" field, enter the screen name that displays on the idle screen.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
3
In the "Screen Name 2" field, enter the text you want to display on the phone under the “Screen
Name” on the idle screen.
Notes:
1. If other status messages display on the phone, such as “Network Disconnected”, the Screen
Name 2 value does not display.
2. Symbol characters are allowed (such as “#”).
3. If the text is longer than the display width, than the display truncates the text to fit the display.
Figure 1
Services
Dir
Callers
Icom
t1
9480i,
9480i CT
6755i, 6757i
6757i CT
Screen Name
Screen Name 2
John Smith
Lab Phone
L1
D
ra
f
Sat Jan 1 12:18am
Figure 2
9143i,
6751i, 6753i
4
1
John Burns
Lab Phone
Sat Jun 8 2:55pm
Screen Name
Screen Name 2
In the "Phone Number" field, enter the phone number of the IP phone.
5
In the "Caller ID" field, enter the phone number of the IP phone.
6
In the "Authentication Name" field, enter the name used in the username field of the Authorization
header of the SIP REGISTER request.
7
In the "Password" field, enter the password used to register the IP phone with the SIP proxy.
Note: The IP phones accept numeric passwords only.
8
In the "BLA Number" field, enter the Bridge Line Appearance (BLA) number to be shared across all
IP phones.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-81
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
9
In the "Line Mode" field, select "Generic" for normal mode, "BroadSoft SCA" for a BroadWorks
network, or "Nortel" for a Nortel network.
To configure SIP network settings:
10
In the "Proxy Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name of the SIP proxy server.
11
In the "Proxy Port" field, enter a port number for accessing the SIP proxy server.
12
In the "Backup Proxy Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name for the backup
proxy server.
In the "Backup Proxy Port" field, enter a port number for accessing the backup proxy server.
In the "Outbound Proxy Server" field, enter the SIP outbound proxy server IP address or fully
qualified domain name. This parameter allows all SIP messages originating from a line on the IP
phone, to be sent to an outbound proxy server.
t1
13
14
ra
f
Note: If you configure an outbound proxy and registrar for a specific line, and you also configure a
global outbound proxy and registrar, the IP phone uses the global configuration for all lines except
line 1. Line 1 uses the outbound proxy and registrar that you configured for that line.
In the "Outbound Proxy Port" field, enter the port on the IP phone that allows SIP messages to be
sent to the outbound proxy server.
16
In the "Registrar Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name for the SIP registrar
server. A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still active and you can
dial using username@ip address of the phone.
D
15
If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2, etc.), then the
register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting
indicator (MWI) does not come on.
17
In the "Registrar Port" field, enter the port number associated with the Registrar.
18
In the "Backup Registrar Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name for the
backup registrar server. A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still
active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone.
If the Backup Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2, etc.), then
the register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not display, and the message waiting
indicator (MWI) does not come on.
19
In the "Backup Registrar Port" field, enter the port number associated with the backup registrar.
20
In the "Registration Period" field, enter the requested registration period, in seconds, from the
registrar.
4-82
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
21
To enter a value in the “Conference Server URI” field, see Chapter 5, the section, “Centralized
Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on page 5-359.
22
Click
D
ra
f
t1
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-83
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Advanced SIP Settings (optional)
Advanced SIP Settings on the IP Phone allow you to configure specific features
on the phone. The following table provides a list of Advanced SIP Settings that
you can configure using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
Configuration File Parameters
Explicit MWI Subscription
Explicit MWI Subscription Period
sip explicit mwi subscription
sip explicit mwi subscription period
Missed Call Summary Subscription (global)
Missed Call Summary Subscription (per-line)
(see Chapter 6)
sip missed call summary subscription (global)
sip lineN missed call summary subscription
(per-line) (see Chapter 6)
Missed Call Summary Subscription Period
(see Chapter 6)
sip missed call summary subscription period
(see Chapter 6)
AS-Feature-Event Subscription (global)
AS-Feature-Event Subscription (per-line)
(see Chapter 6)
t1
Aastra Web UI Parameters
sip as-feature-event subscription (global)
sip lineN as-feature-event subscription (per-line)
(see Chapter 6)
ra
f
AS-Feature Event Subscription Period (see Chapter 6) sip as-feature-event subscription period
(see Chapter 6)
sip send mac (see Chapter 6)
Send Line Number in REGISTER Message
(see Chapter 6)
sip send line (see Chapter 6)
Session Timer
sip session timer
D
Send MAC Address in REGISTER Message
(see Chapter 6)
T1 Timer
T2 Timer
sip T1 timer
sip T2 timer
Transaction Timer
sip transaction timer
Transport Protocol
sip transport protocol
Local SIP UDP/TCP Port (see page 4-37)
sip local port (see page 4-37)
Local SIP TLS Port (see page 4-37)
sip local tls port (see page 4-37)
Registration Failed Retry Timer
sip registration retry timer
Registration Timeout Retry Timer
sip registration timeout retry timer
Registration Renewal Timer
sip registration renewal timer
BLF Subscription Period (see Chapter 5)
sip blf subscription period (see Chapter 5)
4-84
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Configuration File Parameters
ACD Subscription Period (see Chapter 5)
sip acd subscription period (see Chapter 5)
BLA Subscription Period (see Chapter 5)
sip acd subscription period (see Chapter 5)
Blacklist Duration (see Chapter 6)
sip blacklist duration (see Chapter 6)
Whitelist Proxy (see Chapter 6)
sip whitelist (see Chapter 6)
XML SIP Notify (see Chapter 6)
XML SIP Notify (see Chapter 6)
D
ra
f
t1
Aastra Web UI Parameters
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-85
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Reference
Refer to Appendix A,“Advanced SIP Settings” on page A-92 for a description of
each of the above parameters.
For more information about Blacklist Duration and Whitelist Proxy, see
Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features.”
Configuring Advanced SIP Settings
Use the following procedures to configure the advanced SIP settings on the IP
phone.
Configuration Files
D
ra
f
t1
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Advanced SIP
Settings” on page A-92.
4-86
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
1
D
ra
f
t1
For Global configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.
Or for per-line configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Line N (1-9).
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-87
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
2
Enable the "Explicit MWI Subscription" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled).
If the IP phone has a message waiting subscription with the Service Provider, a Message Waiting
Indicator (MWI) (LED or display icon) tells the user there is a message on the IP Phone.
3
If you enable the “Explicit MWI Subscription” field, then in the “Explicit MWI Subscription Period”
field, enter the requested duration, in seconds, before the MWI subscription times out. The phone
re-subscribes to MWI before the subscription period ends. Default is 86400.
4
Enable the “Missed Call Summary Subscription” field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled).
t1
This feature allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server, to be incremented in the
missed calls indicator on the phone it was initially directed to.
For more information about this feature, see Chapter 6, the section, “Missed Call Summary
Subscription” on page 6-13.
5
ra
f
Note: The “Missed Call Summary Subscription” feature is configurable on a global or per-line basis.
If you enable the “Missed Call Summary Subscription” field, then in the “Missed Call Summary
Subscription Period” field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone uses the Missed
Calls Summary Subscription feature. Default is 86400.
D
For more information about this feature, see Chapter 6, the section, “Missed Call Summary
Subscription” on page 6-13.
Note: The “Missed Call Summary Subscription Period” is configurable on a global basis only.
6
Enable the “AS-Feature-Event Subscription” field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled).
This feature enables or disables the specified line with the BroadSoft’s server-side DND, CFWD, or
ACD features.
For more information about this feature, see Chapter 6, the section, “As-Feature-Event Subscription”
on page 6-17.
Note: The “AS-Feature-Event Subscription ” feature is configurable on a global or per-line basis.
4-88
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
7
If you enable the “AS-Feature-Event Subscription” field, then in the “AS-Feature-Event
Subscription Period” field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, between resubscribing. If the
phone does not resubscribe in the time specified for this parameter, it loses subscription. Default is
3600.
For more information about this feature, see Chapter 6, the section, “As-Feature-Event Subscription”
on page 6-17.
8
Enable the “Send MAC Address in REGISTER Message” and the “Send Line Number in
REGISTER Message” fields by checking the check boxes.
(Disable these fields by unchecking the check boxes. Default is disabled for both fields).
t1
For more information about these message features, see Chapter 6, the section, “MAC Address/Line
Number in REGISTER Messages” on page 6-5.
Note: The “AS-Feature-Event Subscription Period” feature is configurable on a global basis only
In the "Session Timer" field, enter the time, in seconds, that the IP phone uses to send periodic
re-INVITE requests to keep a session alive. The proxy uses these re-INVITE requests to maintain the
status' of the connected sessions. See RFC4028 for details.
10
In the "Timer 1 and Timer 2" fields, enter a time, in milliseconds, that will apply to an IP phone
session. These timers are SIP transaction layer timers defined in RFC 3261.
ra
f
9
11
D
Timer 1 is an estimate of the round-trip time (RTT). Default is 500 msec.
Timer 2 represents the amount of time a non-INVITE server transaction takes to respond to a
request. Default is 4 seconds.
In the "Transaction Timer" field, enter the amount of time, in milliseconds, that the phone allows the
call server (registrar/proxy) to respond to SIP messages that it sends.
Valid values are 4000 to 64000. Default is 4000.
Note: If the phone does not receive a response in the amount of time designated for this parameter,
the phone assumes the message has timed out.
12
In the "Transport Protocol" field, select a transport protocol to use when sending SIP Real-time
Transport Protocol (RTP) packets. Valid values are User Datagram Protocol (UDP) and Transmission
Control Protocol (TCP), UDP, TCP, Transport Layer Security (TLS) or Persistent TLS. The value
“UDP” is the default. For more information about TLS, see “RTP Encryption” on page 4-97 and
Chapter 6, the section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS)” on page 6-26.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-89
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
13
In the "Local SIP UDP/TCP Port" field, specify the local source port (UDP/TCP) from which the
phone sends SIP messages. Default is 5060.
For more information about this feature, see the section, “SIP and TLS Source Ports for NAT
Traversal” on page 4-37.
14
In the "Local SIP TLS Port" field, specify the local source port (SIPS/TLS) from which the phone
sends SIP messages. Default is 5061.
For more information about this feature, see the section, “SIP and TLS Source Ports for NAT
Traversal” on page 4-37.
In the " Registration Failed Retry Timer" field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone
waits between registration attempts when a registration is rejected by the registrar.
Valid values are 30 to 1800. Default is 1800.
16
In the " Registration Timeout Retry Timer" field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, that the
phone waits until it re-attempts to register after a REGISTER message times out.
Valid values are 30 to 214748364. Default is 120.
17
In the " Registration Renewal Timer" field, enter the length of time, in seconds, prior to expiration,
that the phone renews registrations.
ra
f
t1
15
D
For example, if the value is set to 20, then 20 seconds before the registration is due to expire, a new
REGISTER message is sent to the registrar to renew the registration.
Valid values are 0 to 214748364. Default is 15.
18
The “BLF Subscription Period” field is enabled by default with a value of 3600 seconds.
This feature sets the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the BLF subscription
service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone.
For information about setting the “BLF Subscription Period”, see Chapter 5, the section,
“BLF Subscription Period” on page 5-176.
19
(For Sylantro Servers) The “ACD Subscription Period” field is enabled by default with a value of
3600 seconds.
This feature sets the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the BLF subscription
service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone.
For information about setting the “ACD Subscription Period”, see Chapter 5, the section,
“ACD Subscription Period” on page 5-198.
4-90
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
20
The “BLA Subscription Period” field is enabled by default with a value of 300 seconds.
This feature sets the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone waits to receive a BLA subscribe
message from the server. If you specify zero (0), the phone uses the value specified for the BLA
expiration in the subscribe message received from the server. If no value is specified, the phone uses
the default value of 300 seconds.
For information about setting the “BLA Subscription Period”, see Chapter 5, the section,
“BLA Subscription Period” on page 5-198.
21
(For Broadsoft Servers) The “Blacklist Duration” field is enabled by default with a value of 300
seconds (5 minutes). Valid values are 0 to 9999999.
t1
This feature sets the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the BLF subscription
service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone.
Note: The value of “0” disables the blacklist feature.
22
ra
f
For information about setting the “Blacklist Duration”, see Chapter 6, the section, “Blacklist Duration”
on page 6-22.
Enable the "Whitelist Proxy" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled).
D
When this feature is enabled, an IP phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only. The
IP phone rejects any call requests from an untrusted proxy server.
For information about setting the “Whitelist Proxy”, see Chapter 6, the section, “Whitelist Proxy” on
page 6-24.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-91
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
23
Enable the "XML SIP Notify" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled).
Enabling this parameter allows the phone to accept or reject an aastra-xml SIP NOTIFY message.
Note: To ensure the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a trusted source, it is recommended that you enable
the Whitelist feature (Whitelist Proxy parameter) on the IP phone. If enabled, and the phone
receives a SIP NOTIFY from a server that is NOT on the whitelist (i.e. untrusted server), the phone
rejects the message.
Click
to save your changes.
D
ra
f
24
t1
For information about setting this feature, see Chapter 5, the section, “XML SIP Notify Events” on
page 5-339.
4-92
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings
Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) is used as the bearer path for voice packets
sent over the IP network. Information in the RTP header tells the receiver how to
reconstruct the data and describes how the bit streams are packetized (i.e. which
codec is in use). Real-time Transport Control Protocol (RTCP) allows endpoints
to monitor packet delivery, detect and compensate for any packet loss in the
network. Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) and H.323 both use RTP and RTCP for
the media stream, with User Datagram Protocol (UDP) as the transport layer
encapsulation protocol.
t1
Note: If RFC2833 relay of DTMF tones is configured, it is sent on the
same port as the RTP voice packets. The phones support decoding and
playing out DTMF tones sent in SIP INFO requests. The following
DTMF tones are supported:
• Support signals 0-9, #, *
• Support durations up to 5 seconds
ra
f
You can set the following parameters for RTP on the IP Phones:
Aastra Web UI Parameters
RTP Port
Configuration File Parameters
sip rtp port
D
Basic Codecs (G.711 u-Law, G.711 a-Law, G.729)
sip use basic codecs
Force RFC2833 Out-of-Band DTMF
sip out-of-band dtmf
Customized Codec Preference List
sip customized codec
DTMF Method (global and per-line settings)
sip dtmf method (global and per-line settings)
RTP Encryption (global and per-line settings)
sip srtp mode (global and per-line settings)
Silence Suppression
sip silence suppression
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-93
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
RTP Port
RTP is described in RFC1889. The UDP port used for RTP streams is traditionally
an even-numbered port, and the RTCP control is on the next port up. A phone call
therefore uses one pair of ports for each media stream.
The RTP port is assigned to the first line on the phone, and is then incremented for
each subsequent line available within the phone to provided each line a unique
RTP port for its own use.
On the IP phone, the initial port used as the starting point for RTP/RTCP port
allocation can be configured using "RTP Port Base". The default RTP base port
on the IP phones is 3000.
t1
For example, if the RTP base port value is 5000, the first voice patch sends RTP
on port 5000 and RTCP on port 5001. Additional calls would then use ports 5002,
5003, etc.
ra
f
You can configure the RTP port on a global-basis only, using the configuration
files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
Basic Codecs (G.711 u-Law, G.711 a-Law, G.729)
D
CODEC is an acronym for COmpress-DECompress. It consists of a set of
instructions that together implement one or more algorithms. In the case of IP
telephony, these algorithms are used to compress the sampled speech data, to
decrease the content's file size and bit-rate (the amount of network bandwidth in
kilobits per second) required to transfer the audio. With smaller file sizes and
lower bit rates, the network equipment can store and stream digital media content
over a network more easily.
Aastra IP phones support the International Telecommunications Union (ITU)
transmission standards for the following CODECs:
4-94
•
Waveform CODECs: G.711 pulse code modulation (PCM) with a-Law or
u-Law companding
•
Parametric CODEC: G.729a conjugate structure - algebraic code excited
linear prediction (CS_ACELP).
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
All Codecs have a sampling rate of 8,000 samples per second, and operate and
operate in the 300 Hz to 3,700 Hz audio range. The following table lists the
default settings for bit rate, algorithm, packetization time, and silence suppression
for each Codec, based on a minimum packet size.
Default Codec Settings.
Bit Rate
Algorithm
Packetizatio
n Time
Silence
Suppression
G.711 a-law
64 Kb/s
PCM
30 ms
enabled
G.711 u-law
64 Kb/s
PCM
30 ms
enabled
G.729a
8
Kb/s
CS-ACELP
30 ms
enabled
CODEC
t1
You can enable the IP phones to use a default "basic codec" set, which consists of
the set of codecs and packet sizes shown above.
Or you can instead configure a custom set of codecs and attributes instead of using
the defaults.
ra
f
Note: The basic and custom codec parameters apply to all calls, and are
configured on a global-basis only using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.
D
Customized Codec Preference List
You can also configure the IP phones to use preferred Codecs. To do this, you
must enter the payload value (payload), the packetization time in milliseconds
(ptime), and enable or disable silence suppression (silsupp).
Payload is the codec type to be used. This represents the data format carried
within the RTP packets to the end user at the destination. You can enter payload
values for G.711 a-law, G.711 u-law, and G.729a.
Ptime (packetization time) is a measurement of the duration of PCM data within
each RTP packet sent to the destination, and hence defines how much network
bandwidth is used for transfer of the RTP stream. You enter the ptime values for
the customized Codec list in milliseconds. (See table below).
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-95
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Silsupp is used to enable or disable silence suppression. Voice Activity Detection
(VAD) on the IP phones is used to determine whether each individual packet
contains useful speech data. Enabling silsupp results in decreased network
bandwidth, by avoiding sending RTP packets for any frame where no voice
energy was detected by the VAD.
You must enter the values for this feature in list form as shown in the following
example:
payload=8;ptime=10;silsupp=on,payload=0;ptime=10;silsupp=off
The valid values for creating a Codec preference list are as follows.
Customized Codec Settings
Attribute
0 for G.711 u-Law
8 for G.711 a-Law
18 for G.729a
t1
payload
Value
5, 10, 15, 20.......90
silsupp
on
off
ra
f
ptime (in milliseconds)
D
You can specify a customized Codec preference list on a global-basis using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Out-of-Band DTMF
The IP phones support out-of-band Dual-Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) mode
according to RFC2833. In the Aastra Web UI, you can enable or disable this
feature as required. The "out-of-band DTMF" is enabled by default.
In out-of-band mode, the DTMF audio is automatically clamped (muted) and
DTMF digits are not sent in the RTP packets.
You can configure out-of-band DTMF on a global-basis using the configuration
files or the Aastra Web UI.
4-96
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
DTMF Method
A feature on the IP phone allows you to select the DTMF method that the phone
uses to send DTMF digits from the IP phone via INFO messages. You can set the
DTMF method as Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP), SIP info, or both.
You can configure the DTMF method on a global or per-line basis using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
RTP Encryption
t1
The IP Phones include support for Secure Real-time Transfer Protocol (SRTP),
using Session Description Protocol Security (SDES) key negotiation, for
encryption and authentication of RTP/RTCP messages sent and received by the
Aastra IP phones on your network.
As administrator, you specify the global SRTP setting for all lines on the IP
phone. You can choose among three levels of SRTP encryption, as follows:
SRTP Disabled (default): IP phone generates and receives nonsecured RTP
calls. If the IP phone gets called from SRTP enabled phone, it ignores SRTP
tries to answer the call using RTP. If the receiving phone has SRTP only
enabled, the call fails; however, if it has SRTP preferred enabled, it will accept
RTP call.
•
SRTP Preferred: IP phone generates RTP secured calls, and accepts both
secured and non-secured RTP calls. If the receiving phone is not SRTP
enabled, it sends non-secured RTP calls instead.
D
•
ra
f
•
SRTP Only: IP phone generates and accepts RTP secured calls only; all other
calls are rejected (fail).
You can override the global setting as necessary, configuring SRTP support on a
per-line basis. This allows IP phone users to have both secured and unsecured
lines operating on the same phone.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-97
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
If an SRTP enabled IP phone initiates a call, and the receiving phone is also SRTP
enabled, the IP Phone UI displays a “lock” icon, indicating that the call is secure.
If the receiving phone does not support SRTP, the IP phone will send unsecured
RTP messages instead of SRTP encrypted messages. However in this case, the IP
Phone UI does not display the lock icon - indicating a non-secure call.
Note: If you enable SRTP, then you should also enable Transport Layer
Security (TLS). This prevents capture of the key used for SRTP
encryption. To enable TLC, set the Transport Protocol parameter
(located on the Global SIP Settings menu) to TLS.
You can configure SRTP on a global or per-line basis using the configuration files
or the Aastra Web UI.
t1
Silence Suppression
ra
f
In IP telephony, silence on a line (lack of voice) uses up bandwidth when sending
voice over a packet-switched system. Silence suppression is encoding that starts
and stops the times of silence in order to eliminate that wasted bandwidth.
Silence suppression is enabled by default on the IP phones. The phone negotiates
whether or not to use silence suppression. Disabling this feature forces the phone
to ignore any negotiated value.
D
You can configure silence suppression on a global-basis using the configuration
files or the Aastra Web UI.
4-98
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Configuring RTP Features
Use the following procedures to configure the RTP features on the IP phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set for RTP features in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“RTP, Codec, DTMF Global Settings” on page A-114.
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press
2
Select Administrator Menu.
3
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
Select SIP Settings.
5
Select RTP Port Base to change the RTP port base setting. Default is 3000.
6
Press Done (2 times) to save the change.
ra
f
t1
on the phone to enter the Options List.
7
D
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings
Select Restart.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-99
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
.
Aastra Web UI
Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings.
Global Settings.
ra
f
t1
Step
D
Click on Advanced Settings->Line ->RTP Settings.
Per-Line Settings.
4-100
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
2
Enter an RTP Port Base in the RTP Port field. Default is 3000.
The RTP Port indicates the port through which the RTP packets are sent. This value must specify the
beginning of the RTP port range on the gateway or router. The RTP port is used for sending DTMF
tones and for the audio stream. Your network administrator may close some ports for security
reasons. You may want to use this parameter to send RTP data using a different port.
Note: The phones support decoding and playing out DTMF tones sent in SIP INFO requests. The
following DTMF tones are supported:
• Support signals 0-9, #, *
• Support durations up to 5 seconds
Enable the "Basic Codecs (G.711 u-Law, G.711 a-Law, G.729)" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box. Default is disabled).
t1
3
Enabling this parameter allows the IP phone to use the basic Codecs when sending/receiving RTP
packets.
The "Force RFC2833 Out-of-Band DTMF" field is enabled by default. Disable this field by
unchecking the box.
ra
f
4
Enabling this parameter forces the IP phone to use out-of-band DTMF according to RFC2833.
Enter a "Customized Codec Preference List". For example,
D
5
payload=8;ptime=10;
silsupp=on,
payload=0;ptime=10;
silsupp=off
Valid values are:
Attribute
Value
payload
0 for G.711 u-Law
8 for G.711 a-Law
18 for G.729a
ptime (in milliseconds)
5, 10, 15, 20.....90
silsupp
on
off
For this parameter, you specify a customized codec list which allows you to use the preferred Codecs
for this IP phone. Default for the “Customized Codec Preference List” is blank.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-101
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
6
Select a method to use from the “DTMF Method” list box. Valid values are RTP, SIP Info, Both.
Default is RTP.
Note: You can configure the DTMF Method on a global or per-line basis.
7
Select the type of RTP encryption to use from the “RTP Encryption” list box. Valid values are SRTP
Disabled, SRTP Preferred, or SRTP Only. Default is SRTP Disabled.
Note: You can configure RTP Encryption on a global or per-line basis.
8
The “Silence Suppression” field is enabled by default. Disable this field by unchecking the check
box.
Click
to save your changes.
D
ra
f
9
t1
When enabled, the phone negotiates whether or not to use silence suppression. Disabling this
feature forces the phone to ignore any negotiated value.
4-102
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Autodial Settings
The IP phones include a feature called “Autodial”. When you configure Autodial
on an IP phone, the phone automatically dials a preconfigured number whenever
it is off-hook. Depending on the configuration you specify, the Autodial functions
as either a “hotline”, or as a “warmline,” as follows:
•
Hotline (default): The IP phone immediately dials a preconfigured number
when you lift the handset.
•
Warmline: The IP phone waits for a specified amount of time after you lift
the handset before dialing a preconfigured number. If you do not dial a
number within the time allotted, then the IP phone begins to dial the number.
t1
By default, the Autodial feature functions as a hotline. If you want Autodial to
function as a warmline, you can use the Autodial “time-out” parameter to specify
the length of time (in seconds) the IP phone waits before dialing a preconfigured
number.
ra
f
As administrator, you configure Autodial globally, or on a per-line basis, for an IP
phone. The line setting overrides the global setting. For example, you can disable
Autodial on a specific line simply by setting the line’s autodial number parameter
to empty (blank).
D
Note: IMPORTANT INFORMATION before configuring Autodial on
your IP phone:
•
Any speeddial numbers that you configure on an IP phone are not
affected by autodial settings.
•
If you configure autodial on your IP phone, any lines that function as
hotlines do not accept conference calls, transferred calls, and/or
intercom calls.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-103
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Configuring AutoDial Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameters to configure Autodial using the configuration
files:
Global Configuration
•
sip autodial number
•
sip autodial timeout
Per-Line Configuration
sip lineN autodial number
•
sip lineN autodial timeout
Configuration Files
t1
•
D
ra
f
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Autodial
Settings” on page A-119.
4-104
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Configuring Autodial Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure Autodial using the Aastra Web UI.
By default, your IP phone uses the global settings you specify for Autodial for all
lines on your IP phone. However, you can also configure Autodial on a per-line
basis.
Aastra Web UI
Global Configuration
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Autodial Settings.
2
In the “Autodial Number” field, specify the SIP number that the IP phone dials whenever the IP
phone is off-hook. An empty (blank) value disables autodial on the phone.
D
ra
f
t1
1
For example: 8500
3
In the “Autodial Timeout” field, specify a value, in seconds, for the timer as follows:
•
If you want the IP phone to autodial the number immediately (hotline) whenever the IP phone is
off-hook, accept the default value of 0.
•
If you want to specify a length of time for the IP phone to wait before dialing the number, enter
the length of time (in seconds). For example: 30
Valid values are 0 to 120.
4
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-105
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
Per-Line Configuration
Click on Advanced Settings->Line <1 - 9>->Autodial Settings.
2
Do one of the following actions:
4-106
ra
f
•
To allow this line to use the global autodial settings, click on the Use Global Settings parameter
to enable it, then click
to save your changes.
•
To specify a different autodial configuration for this specific line, disable the Use Global
Settings parameter. Then proceed to step 3.
D
3
t1
1
In the “Autodial Number” field, specify the SIP number for this line that the IP phone dials
whenever the IP phone is off-hook as follows:
•
If set to -1, then the global autodial settings for this IP phone to this line.
•
If set to empty (blank), then disable Autodial on this line.
•
If set to a valid SIP number, dial the SIP number specified for this line. For example: 8500
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Global SIP Settings
Aastra Web UI
4
In the “Autodial Timeout” field, specify a value, in seconds, for the timer for this line as follows:
•
If you want the IP phone to autodial the number immediately (hotline) whenever the IP phone is
off-hook, accept the default value of 0.
•
If you want to specify a length of time for the IP phone to wait before dialing the number, enter
the length of time (in seconds). For example: 30
Valid values are 0 to 120.
Click
to save your changes.
D
ra
f
t1
5
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-107
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Server Protocol
Configuration Server Protocol
You can download new versions of firmware and configuration files from the
configuration server to the IP phone using any of the following types of protocols:
TFTP, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS. For each Protocol, you can specify the path for
which the configuration files are located on the server. For HTTP and HTTPS,
you can also specify the port number to use for downloading the phone
configuration. For FTP, you can configure a Username and Password that are
authenticated by the FTP server.
t1
The TFTP setting is the default download protocol. You can configure the type of
protocol that the IP phones use by setting it in the configuration files, the IP phone
UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
ra
f
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or domain
name for the TFTP, FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS server, your DHCP server
must support download protocol according to RFC2131 and RFC1541 for
Option 66. For more information, see this chapter, the section, “DHCP”
on page 4-4.
D
Configuring the Configuration Server Protocol
Use the following procedure to configure the configuration server protocol.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Configuration
Server Settings” on page A-18.
4-108
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Configuration Server Protocol
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press
2
Select Administrator Menu.
3
Enter your Administrator password.
Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only.
4
Select Configuration Server.
5
Select Download Protocol.
6
Select from the following:
• Use TFTP
• Use FTP
• Use HTTP
• Use HTTPS
ra
f
Default is “Use TFTP”.
t1
on the phone to enter the Options List.
The IP phone uses the protocol you select to download new firmware and configuration files from
the configuration server.
Press Done (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) or Set (9143i, 6751i, 6753i) to save the
changes.
8
From the Configuration Server menu, select from the following. This selection is dependent on the
Download Protocol you selected in step 6.
D
7
TFTP Settings
FTP Settings
HTTP Settings
HTTPS Settings
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-109
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Server Protocol
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
9
Enter the IP address of the protocol server (in dotted decimal format).
Use the following table to configure the applicable server.
TFTP Settings
Select Primary TFTP
Enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the primary TFTP server.
Press Done or Set to save the change.
Select Pri TFTP Path.
Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the
server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field.
Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
t1
-
Optional: You can also configure an Alternate TFTP server and Alternate TFTP Path if
required by selecting the “Alternate TFTP” and the “Alt TFTP Path” parameters.
ra
f
From the TFTP Settings menu, select Alternate TFTP and press Enter.
Enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the alternate TFTP server.
Press Done or Set to save the change.
Select Alt TFTP Path.
Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the Alternate TFTP server for
downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath
the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this
field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example,
ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
D
-
FTP Settings
-
Select FTP Server.
Enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the FTP server.
Press Done or Set to save the change.
Select FTP Path.
Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the FTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s
root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field. Enter the
path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
Optional: You can enter a username and password for accessing the FTP server if required:
-
4-110
Select FTP Username.
Enter a username for accessing the FTP server.
Press Done.
Select FTP Password.
Enter a password for accessing the FTP server.
Press Done or Set.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Configuration Server Protocol
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
9
(Cont’d)
HTTP Settings
Select HTTP Server
Enter the IP address of the HTTP server.
Press Done or Set.
Select HTTP Path.
Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the HTTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the
server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field.
Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
- Select HTTP Port.
- Enter the HTTP port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTP.
Default is 80.
- Press Done or Set.
t1
-
HTTPS Settings
ra
f
Select HTTP Client.
Select Download Server.
Enter the IP address of the HTTPS server.
Press Done or Set.
Select Download Path.
Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the HTTPS server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a sub-directory beneath the
server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field.
Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
- Press Done or Set.
- Select Client Method.
- Select the client method to use for downloading the configuration files (SSl 3.0 or TLS 1.0).
For more information about which client method to use, see the section, “HTTPS Client/
Server Configuration” on page 4-40.
- Select Download Port.
- Enter the HTTPS port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over
HTTPS. Default is 443.
D
-
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-111
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Server Protocol
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
9
(Cont’d)
HTTPS Settings (Continued)
- Select HTTPS Server.
- Select HTTP->HTTPS.
- For 9143i, 6751i, 6753i:
Press Change to select “Do not redirect”or “Redirect”. Default is “Do not redirect”.
Enabling this feature redirects the HTTP protocol to HTTPS.
Press Set.
- Select XML HTTP POSTs.
t1
- For 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT:
Press Change to select “Yes” and redirect HTTP to HTTPS. Select “No” to not direct HTTPS
to HTTPS, Default is “No”. Enabling this feature redirects the HTTP protocol to HTTPS.
Press Done.
ra
f
- For 9143i, 6751i, 6753i:
Press Change to select “Do not block” or “Block”.
Enabling this feature blocks XML HTTP POSTs from the IP Phone.
D
- For 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT:
Press Change to select “Yes” and block XML HTTP Posts. Select “No” to unblock XML
HTTP Posts. Default is “No”. Enabling this feature blocks XML HTTP POSTs from the IP
Phone.
Reference
For more information on configuring the HTTPS security method, HTTP to HTTPS redirect, and
HTTPS server blocking for HTTP XML POSTs, see the section, “HTTPS Client/Server
Configuration” on page 4-40.
10
Press Done or Set repeatedly until the session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the
configuration settings.
11
Select Restart.
4-112
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Configuration Server Protocol
Aastra Web UI
Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server.
D
ra
f
t1
Step
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
4-113
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Server Protocol
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
2
Select the protocol from the "Download Protocol" list box. Valid values are TFTP, FTP, HTTP, and
HTTPS. Default is TFTP.
The IP phone uses the protocol you select to download new firmware and configuration files from the
configuration server. Use the following table to configure the applicable server.
TFTP
t1
- Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in the "TFTP Server" field.
- Enter the path name in the “TFTP Path” field for which the configuration files reside on the
TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory
should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
Optional: You can also configure an alternate TFTP server if required. If "Use Alternate
TFTP" is enabled, you must also enter an IP address or qualified domain name for the
alternate server in the "Alternate TFTP" field. You can also enter a path name for the alternate TFTP server in the “Alternate TFTP Path” field.
ra
f
FTP
D
- Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in the "FTP Server" fiel.d.
- Enter the path name in the “FTP Path” field for which the configuration files reside on the
FTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory
should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
Optional: You can enter a username and password for accessing the FTP server if
required.
- Enter a username for a user that will access the FTP server in the "FTP User Name" field.
- Enter a password for a user that allows access to the FTP server in the "FTP Password"
field.
4-114
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features
Configuration Server Protocol
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
3
HTTP
- Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in the "HTTP Server" field.
- Enter the path name in the “HTTP Path” field for which the configuration files reside on the
HTTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory
should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
- Enter the HTTP port number in the “HTTP Port” field that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTP.
t1
Optional: You can enter a list of users to be authenticated when they access the HTTP
server in the "XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses)" field.
HTTPS
ra
f
- Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in the "HTTPS Server" field.
- Enter the path name in the “HTTPS Path” field for which the configuration files reside on the
HTTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory
should be entered in this field. Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
- Enter the HTTPS port number in the “HTTPS Port” field that the server uses to load the
configuration to the phone over HTTPS.
D
Optional: You can enter a list of users to be authenticated when they access the HTTP
server in the "XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses)" field.
Reference: For more information on configuring the HTTPS security method, HTTP to HTTPS
redirect, and HTTPS server blocking for HTTP XML POSTs, see the section, “HTTPS Client/Server
Configuration” on page 4-40.
4
Click
to save your settings.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
5
Select Operation->Reset and click
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
.
4-115
D
ra
f
t1
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Configuration Server Protocol
4-116
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Chapter 5
Configuring Operational Features
About this chapter
Introduction
Topics
ra
f
t1
The IP phones have specific operational features you can configure to customize
your IP phone. This chapter describes each feature and provides procedures for
configuring your phone to use these features.
This chapter covers the following topics:
D
Topic
Page
Operational Features
page 5-5
User Passwords
page 5-5
Administrator Passwords
page 5-9
Locking/Unlocking the Phone
page 5-10
Defining an Emergency Dial Plan
page 5-16
Time and Date
page 5-19
Time Zone & DST
page 5-20
Time Servers
page 5-27
Backlight Mode (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only)
page 5-30
Live Dial Pad*
page 5-33
Language
page 5-34
Locking IP Phone Keys
page 5-49
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-1
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter
Topic
Page
page 5-50
Local Dial Plan
page 5-53
Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls
page 5-59
Suppressing DTMF Playback
page 5-63
Display DTMF Digits
page 5-65
Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone
page 5-67
Stuttered Dial Tone
page 5-70
XML Beep Support
page 5-72
Status Scroll Delay
page 5-74
Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing
page 5-76
Switch Focus to Ringing Line
page 5-79
t1
Locking/Unlocking the SAVE and DELETE keys (6753i)
page 5-81
Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call
page 5-85
UPnP Mapping Lines (for remote phones)
page 5-87
Message Waiting Indicator Line
page 5-89
DND Key Mode
page 5-91
Call Forward Mode
page 5-93
Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices
(LLDP-MED) and Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN)
page 5-97
Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In
page 5-102
Group Paging RTP Settings
page 5-107
Key Mapping
page 5-113
Ring Tones and Tone Sets
page 5-117
Priority Alerting
page 5-122
Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception)
page 5-129
Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys
page 5-141
Customizing the Key Type List in the Aastra Web UI
page 5-164
Speeddial Prefixes
page 5-167
Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add or Edit a Speeddial Key
page 5-168
Busy Lamp Field (BLF)
page 5-169
BLF Subscription Period
page 5-176
D
ra
f
Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout
5-2
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
About this chapter
Topic
Page
page 5-178
Speeddial/Conference Key (not applicable to the 6751i)
page 5-184
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers)
page 5-188
ACD Subscription Period
page 5-198
BLA Subscription Period
page 5-200
Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup (for Sylantro Servers)
page 5-202
Do Not Disturb (DND)
page 5-211
Bridged Line Appearance (BLA)
page 5-222
BLA Support for Third Party Registration
page 5-229
P-Preferred Identity Header for BLA Accounts
page 5-230
BLA Support for Message Waiting Indicator (MWI)
page 5-231
Park/Pick Up Key
t1
BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer Keys
page 5-234
Last Call Return (lcr) (Sylantro Servers)
page 5-245
Call Forwarding
page 5-249
ra
f
Callers List
page 5-288
page 5-294
Missed Calls Indicator
page 5-295
Directory List
page 5-297
D
Customizable Callers List and Services Keys
Voicemail (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only)
page 5-308
XML Customized Services
page 5-311
Creating Customized XML Services on the IP Phones
page 5-311
Configuring the Phone to use XML
page 5-317
XML Get Timeout
page 5-317
Configuring for XML on the IP Phone
page 5-318
Using the XML Customized Service
page 5-323
XML Action URIs
page 5-325
Polling Action URIs
page 5-334
Action URI Disconnected
page 5-336
XML SIP Notify Events
page 5-339
XML Softkey URI
page 5-345
Web Applications Keys
page 5-351
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-3
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter
Topic
Page
XML Key Redirection
page 5-352
Options Key Redirection (for Options Menu on all phones and
Services Menu on 6751i)
page 5-353
XML Applications and Off-Hook Interaction
page 5-355
XML URI for Key Press Simulation
page 5-355
page 5-356
Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments
page 5-357
Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)
page 5-359
“SIP Join” Feature for 3-Way Conference (not applicable to the 6751i)
page 5-363
Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods, used
with Broadsoft Client Management System (CMS)
page 5-365
Customizing the Display Columns on the M675i Expansion Module
page 5-368
D
ra
f
t1
XML Override for a Locked Phone
5-4
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Operational Features
Description
This section describes the operational features managed and configured by a
System Administrator.
User Passwords
A user or an administrator can change the user passwords on the phone using the
configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
t1
Use the following procedures to change the user password.
ra
f
Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If
you enter a password with alpha characters, the phone uses the default
password instead.
Configuring a User Password
D
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Password
Settings” on page A-15.
IP Phone UI
1
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
2
Select User Password.
3
Enter the current user password.
4
Press Enter.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-5
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
5
Enter the new user password.
Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with
alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead.
Press Enter.
7
Re-enter the new user password.
8
Press Enter.
A message, "Password Changed" displays on the screen.
t1
6
Aastra Web UI
Click on Operation->User Password.
2
In the "Current Password" field, enter the current user password.
3
In the "New Password" field, enter the new user password.
D
ra
f
1
Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with
alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead.
4
In the "Password Confirm" field, enter the new user password again.
5
Click
5-6
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Resetting a User Password
If a user forgets his password, either the user or an administrator can reset it so a
new password can be entered. The reset user password feature resets the password
to the factory default which is blank (no password).
You can reset a user password using the Aastra Web UI only at the path
Operation->Phone Lock. Use the following procedure to reset a user password.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Operation->Phone Lock.
D
ra
f
t1
1
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-7
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
2
In the “Reset User Password” field, click
.
t1
The following screen displays:
3
In the “Current Password” field, leave this blank.
4
In the “New Password” field, enter a new password for the user.
ra
f
Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with
alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead.
5
In the “Password Confirm” field, re-enter the new user password.
6
Click
D
to save the new user password and perform the next procedure.
5-8
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Administrator Passwords
An administrator can change the administrator passwords on the phone using the
configuration files only.
Procedure
t1
An administrator can also assign a password for using the Options key on the IP
phone. You turn this feature on and off by entering the "options password
enabled" parameter followed by a valid value in the configuration files. Valid
values are 0 (false; Options key not password protected), or 1 (true; Options key
password protected). If this parameter is set to 1, a user has to enter a password at
the IP phone UI. If the password is entered correctly, the user is allowed to gain
access to the Options Menu and no more password prompts display for other
password protected screens. If the user fails to enter the correct password in three
attempts, access to the Options Menu is denied and the IP phone returns to the idle
screen.
ra
f
Use the following procedure to change the administrator password.
Configuration Files
D
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Password
Settings” on page A-15.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-9
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Locking/Unlocking the Phone
A user or administrator can lock a phone to prevent it from being used or
configured. Once the phone is locked, the user or administrator can enter their
password to unlock the phone.
You can lock/unlock a phone using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the
Aastra Web UI.
You can use any of the following methods to lock/unlock a phone:
Using the IP Phone UI via the “Phone Lock” option in the Options Menu.
•
Using the Aastra Web UI via the path Operation->Phone Lock.
•
Using the configuration files to configure a key as “phonelock”, and then
pressing the key to lock/unlock the phone.
•
Using the Aastra Web UI to configure a key as “Phone Lock”, and then
pressing the key to lock/unlock the phone.
t1
•
D
ra
f
Note: All of the methods above configure locking/unlocking of the
phone dynamically. Once configured, the feature takes affect
immediately. To unlock the phone, a user or administrator must enter their
password.
5-10
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Locking/Unlocking the Phone Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following IP Phone UI procedure to lock/unlock an IP phone and prevent
it from being used or configured.
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
Lock the phone:
1
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
2
Select Phone Lock.
The prompt, “Lock the phone?” displays.
Press Lock to lock the phone.
t1
3
Unlock the phone:
1
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
2
ra
f
The prompt, “To unlock the phone...Password:”
Enter the user or administrator password and press Enter.
D
The phone unlocks.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-11
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Locking/Unlocking the Phone Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following Aastra Web UI procedure to lock/unlock an IP phone and
prevent it from being used or configured.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Operation->Phone Lock.
2
D
Lock the phone:
ra
f
t1
1
In the “Lock the Phone?” field, click
.
The phone locks dynamically and displays the following message:
“Phone is locked”.
Unlock the phone:
3
Click on Operation->Phone Lock.
4
In the “Unlock the Phone?” field, click
.
The phone unlocks dynamically and displays the following message:
“Phone is unlocked”.
5-12
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring a Lock/Unlock Key Using the Configuration Files
Using the configuration files, you can configure a key on the phone (softkey,
programmable key, or expansion module key) to use as a lock/unlock key. In the
configuration files, you assign the function of the key as “phonelock”.
Use the following procedure to configure a key as a lock/unlock key using
the configuration files.
Configuration Files
Reference
t1
To configure a softkey/programmable key as a lock/unlock key using the configuration files, see Appendix A,
the section, “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192.
D
ra
f
To use the lock/unlock softkey or programmable key, see “Using the Configured
Lock/Unlock Key on the IP Phone” on page 5-15.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-13
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring a Lock/Unlock Key using the Aastra Web UI
Using the Aastra Web UI, you can configure a key on the phone (softkey,
programmable key, expansion module key) to use as a lock/unlock key. In the
Aastra Web UI, you assign the function of the as “Phone Lock”.
Use the following procedure to configure a key as a lock/unlock key using the
Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module .
t1
1
D
ra
f
Note: Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6757i Key
Screen is shown as an example.
2
5-14
Select a key you want to configure for locking/unlocking the phone.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
3
In the “Type” field, select Phone Lock from the list of options.
4
Click
to save your changes.
Using the Configured Lock/Unlock Key on the IP Phone
After configuring a key as a lock/unlock key, refer to the following procedure to
use the key on the IP phone.
Step
Action
Lock the phone:
1
Press the LOCK softkey.
t1
IP Phone UI
Unlock the phone:
Press the UNLOCK softkey.
D
1
ra
f
The phone locks.
The LED for the softkey AND the Message Waiting Lamp illuminate steady ON.
An “Unlock” label appears next to the softkey you just pressed.
A password prompt displays.
2
Enter the user or administrator password and press ENTER.
The phone unlocks.
The LED for the softkey AND the Message Waiting Lamp go OFF.
The “Lock” label appears next to the softkey you just pressed.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-15
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Defining an Emergency Dial Plan
Public telephone networks in countries around the world have a single emergency
telephone number (emergency services number), that allows a caller to contact
local emergency services for assistance when required. The emergency telephone
number may differ from country to country. It is typically a three-digit number so
that it can be easily remembered and dialed quickly. Some countries have a
different emergency number for each of the different emergency services.
You can specify the digits to dial on the IP phone for contacting emergency
services. Once you specify the emergency number(s) on the phone, you can dial
those numbers directly on the dial pad when required and the phone automatically
dials to those emergency services.
t1
Note: Contact your local phone service provider for available emergency
numbers in your area.
ra
f
The following table describes the default emergency numbers on the IP phones.
Emergency Number
Description
911
A United States emergency number
999
An international emergency telephone
number for GSM mobile phone networks.
In all European Union countries it is also the
emergency telephone number for both
mobile and fixed-line telephones.
D
112
A United Kingdom emergency number
110
5-16
A police and/or fire emergency number in
Asia, Europe, Middle East, and South
America.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Emergency Dial Plan and Pattern Matching
The IP Phones support emergency dialing using pattern matching and prepend
dial plan functionality.
There are two ways to dial a number on the phone:
•
dialing digit-by-digit (i.e., select line and dial)
•
dialing by string (i.e., pre-dial then go off-hook)
When a user dials digit-by-digit, the phone adds every digit to a dialed string and
checks against the dial plan. If the phone is not locked, it checks against the
regular dial plan. If the phone is locked, it checks against the emergency dial plan.
t1
When a user dials by string, (pre-dial, speed-dial, etc., and then goes off-hook),
and the phone is not locked, it checks to see if the number matches the emergency
dial plan. If it doesn’t match, it blocks the call from going through. If the phone is
locked, and the number matches the emergency dial plan it allows the call to go
through.
ra
f
Adding a pre-pend to a dial plan also works with both dialing digit-by-digit and
dialing by string.
Limitation
•
D
The following is a limitation for emergency dial plans with pattern matching:
Secondary dial tone is not supported.
You can set the emergency dial plan via the configuration files or the Aastra Web
UI.
Configuring an Emergency Dial Plan
Use the following procedures to specify the numbers to use on your phone for
dialing emergency services in your area.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Emergency Dial
Plan Settings” on page A-16.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-17
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Operation->Phone Lock.
2
In the “Emergency Dial Plan” field, enter the number used in your local area to contact emergency
services. For multiple numbers, enter a “|” between each emergency number.
D
For example:
911|110.
ra
f
t1
1
Default for this field is "x+#|xx+*". You can enter up to 512 characters in this field.
3
5-18
Click
to save the emergency dial plan to your phone.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Time and Date
In addition to enabling/disabling the time server, you can also set the time and
date, set the time and date format, set the time zone, and set daylight savings time
on the IP phones. You configure these features using the configuration files, the IP
Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. The following table identifies which method of
configuration applies to each feature.
Method of configuration
Set Time
IP Phone UI
Set Time Format
Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Set Date
IP Phone UI
Set Date Format
Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
IP Phone UI
Configuration Files
ra
f
Set Time Zone
t1
Feature
Set Daylight Savings Time
IP Phone UI
Configuration Files
D
Daylight Savings Time (DST) Information
The Aastra IP Phones incorporate the federally mandated DST observance
change. This change became affective starting in 2007.
The US has made a change to its daylight savings time observance starting in
2007. The Energy Policy Act of 2005 mandates that DST will now begin at 2:00
A.M. on the second Sunday in March and revert to Standard time on the first
Sunday in November.
Note: In previous years, the DST began on the first Sunday of April and
ended on the first Sunday of October.
The changes to daylight savings time applies to the U.S. and Canada, but may
impact other countries outside North America.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-19
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Time Zone & DST
There are two ways you can set the time zone on the IP Phones.
First Method - You can set a time zone using the Time Zone option in the IP
Phone UI or you can use the “time zone name” parameter in the configuration
files. Both methods allow you to enter a value from the Time Zone table. The list
of time zone names is provided in the table in Appendix A, the section, “Time
Zone Name/Time Zone Code Table” on page A-47. The following is an example:
time zone name: US-Eastern
t1
Second Method - You can use the “time zone name” parameter in the
configuration files, and specify a value of “custom” for this parameter. This
method allows you to customize the time zone for your area using additional
configuration parameters. The following is an example using relative time for
EST:
ra
f
time zone name: custom
D
The following table identifies the additional parameters you can enter in the
configuration files if you want to customize your time zone.
Custom Configuration
File Parameter
time zone minutes
Description
Example
The number of minutes the time zone is custom time zone minutes: 300
offset from UTC (Coordinated Universal
Time). This can be positive (West of the
Prime Meridian) or negative (East of the
Prim Meridian). Eastern Standard Time
(EST) has a value of 300.
dst minutes
The number of minutes to add during
dst minutes: 60
Daylight Saving Time. Valid values are a
positive integer between 0 to 60.
dst [start|end] relative date
Specifies how to interpret the start and
dst [start|end] relative date: 1
end day, month, and week parameters absolute (0) or relative (1).
5-20
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Custom Configuration
File Parameter
Description
Example
Absolute Time (not applicable to Eastern Standard Time (EST))
The month that DST starts. Valid values dst start month: 3
are 1 to 12 (January to December).
dst end month
The month that DST ends. Valid values
are 1 to 12 (January to December).
dst end month: 4
dst [start |end] week
Not applicable to absolute time.
N/A
dst start day
The day of the month that DST starts.
Valid values are 1 to 31.
dst start day: 15
dst end day
The day of the month that DST ends.
Valid values are 1 to 31.
dst end day: 31
dst start hour
The hour that DST starts. Valid values
are an integer from 0 (midnight) to 23.
dst start hour: 5
dst end hour
The hour that DST ends. Valid values
are an integer from 0 (midnight) to 23.
dst end hour: 23
t1
dst start month
Relative Time
dst end month
The month that DST ends. Valid values
are 1 to 12 (January to December).
dst end month: 5
The week in the specified month in
which DST starts. Valid value is a
positive or negative integer from 1 to 5.
dst start week: 2
D
dst start week
The month that DST starts. Valid values dst start month: 4
are 1 to 12 (January to December).
ra
f
dst start month
1 = first full week of month
-1 = last full week of month
2 = second full week of month
.
.
.
-5 -= fifth full week of month
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-21
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Custom Configuration
File Parameter
dst end week
Description
Example
The week in the specified month in
which DST ends. Valid value is a
positive or negative integer from 1 to 5.
dst end week: -1
1 = first full week of month
-1 = last full week of month
2 = second full week of month
.
.
.
-5 -= fifth full week of month
The day of the specified week in the
dst start day: 2
specified month that DST starts on. Valid
values are an integer from 1 to 7.
t1
dst start day
The day of the specified week in the
dst end day: 7
specified month that DST ends on. Valid
values are an integer from 1 to 7.
D
dst end day
ra
f
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
.
.
.
7 = Saturday
1 = Sunday
2 = Monday
.
.
.
7 = Saturday
dst start hour
The hour that DST starts. Valid values
are an integer from 0 (midnight) to 23.
dst start hour: 10
dst end hour
The hour that DST ends. Valid values
are an integer from 0 (midnight) to 23.
dst end hour: 23
5-22
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Example 1
The following is an example of a custom time zone configuration in the
configuration files using relative time (for EST):
time zone name: custom
dst [start|end] relative date: 1 #relative
time zone minutes: 300
dst minutes: 60
Example 2
The following is an example of a custom time zone configuration in the
configuration files using absolute time:
DST
month: 11 #November
week: 1 #first full week
day: 1 #Sunday
D
#End of
dst end
dst end
dst end
DST
month: 3 #March
week: 2 #second full week
day: 1 #Sunday
ra
f
#start of
dst start
dst start
dst start
t1
time zone name: custom
dst [start|end] relative date: 0 #absolute
Configuring Time and Date Using the Configuration Files
Use the following information to set a time and date, time and date format, time
zone, and daylight savings time using the configuration files..
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Time and Date
Settings” on page A-45.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-23
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring Time and Date Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to set a time and date, time and date format, time
zone, and daylight savings time using the IP Phone UI.
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Set Time and Time Format:
Select Time and Date.
3
Select Set Time.
4
Using the keys on the keypad, enter a time to set on the IP phone.
5
Press Done to save the time you entered.
6
Select Time Format.
Valid values are 12hr and 24hr.
t1
2
ra
f
Note: The default Time Format is 12hr.
7
Press Change to toggle between 24hr and 12hr format.
8
Press Done to save the Time Format you selected.
Set Date and Date Format:
Select Set Date.
10
Using the keys on the keypad, enter a date to set on the IP phone.
11
Press Done to save the date you entered.
12
Select Date Format.
13
Select a date format from the list of options.
Valid values are:
• WWW MMM DD (default)
• DD-MMM-YY
• YYYY-MM-DD
• DD/MM/YYYY
• DD/MM/YY
• DD-MM-YY
• MM/DD/YY
• MMM DD
D
9
Note: The default Date Format is WWW MMM DD (Day of Week, Month, Day).
5-24
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
14
Press Done to save the Date Format.
Set Time Zone:
15
Select Time Zone.
16
For 9143i, 6751i, 6753i:
Press * to display a list of Time Zone options.
17
Select a Time Zone from the list of options.
For valid values, see Appendix A, the section, “Time and Date Settings” on page A-45.
Note: The default Time Zone is US-Eastern.
Press Done to save the Time Zone you selected.
Set Daylight Savings Time:
t1
18
Select Daylight Savings.
20
Select a Daylight Savings time from the list of options.
Valid values are:
• OFF
• 30 min summertime
• 1 hr summertime
• automatic
ra
f
19
21
D
Note: The default for Daylight Savings is Automatic.
Press Done to save the Daylight Savings value you selected.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-25
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring Time and Date Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to set a time and date, time and date format, time
zone, and daylight savings time using the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Time and Date Setting.
2
In the “Time Format” field, select the time format you want to use on your phone. Valid values are:
• 12h (12 hour format) (default)
• 24h (24 hour format).
ra
f
t1
1
3
D
Note: The time displays on the phone’s idle screen in the format you select for this field.
In the “Date Format” field, select the date format you want to use on your phone. Valid values are:
• WWW MMM DD (default)
• DD-MMM-YY
• YYYY-MM-DD
• DD/MM/YYYY
• DD/MM/YY
• DD-MM-YY
• MM/DD/YY
• MMM DD
Note: The date displays on the phone’s idle screen in the format you select for this field.
4
5-26
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Time Servers
A time server is a computer server that reads the actual time from a reference
clock and distributes this information to the clients in a network. The time server
may be a local network time server or an internet time server. The Network Time
Protocol (NTP) is the most widely used protocol that distributes and synchronizes
time in the network with the time on the time server.
On the IP phones, you can enable or disable a Time Server to be used to
synchronize time on the phones with the Timer Server you specify. An
Administrator can use the IP Phone UI, Aastra Web UI, or configuration files to
enable/disable the Time Server and specify a Time Server 1, Timer Server 2, and/
or Time Server 3. A User can enable/disable the Time Server using the IP Phone
UI or Aastra Web UI only. The Time Server is enabled by default.
t1
Setting Time Server Using the Configuration Files
ra
f
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the Time Server and optionally set
the IP Address of Time Servers 1, 2, and/or 3.
Configuration Files
D
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Time Server
Settings” on page A-52.
Setting Time Server Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to set the Time Server and optionally set the IP
Address of Time Servers 1, 2, and/or 3.
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
Enable/the Time Server by specifying Time Server 1, 2, and/or 3:
1
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
2
Select Preferences->Time and Date->Time Server.
3
Select Timer Server 1, Time Server 2, and/or Time Server 3.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-27
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
4
Enter the IP address of the Time Server, in dotted decimal format. Use the available softkeys to help
you enter the information.
5
Click
to save your changes.
Setting Time Server Using the Aastra Web UI
t1
Use the following procedure to set the Time Server and optionally set the IP
Address of Time Servers 1, 2, and/or 3.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Time and Date Setting.
D
ra
f
1
To enable/disable Time Server:
2
5-28
The “NTP Time Server” field is enabled by default. If you need to disable the Time Server, uncheck
the box. The Time Server 1, 2, and 3 fields are grayed out when disabled.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
To set Time Server 1, 2, and/or 3:
3
Note: The “Time Server” field must be enabled to enter values in the “Time Server 1, 2, and 3”
fields.
In the “Time Server 1”, “Time Server 2”, and/or “Time Server 3” field(s), enter the IP address of the
Time Server 1, 2, and/or 3 in your network, in dotted decimal format. Default for this field is 0.0.0.0.
For example, 132.234.5.4
Click
to save your changes.
D
ra
f
t1
4
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-29
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Backlight Mode (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only)
The 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT have a backlight feature that
allows you to turn the backlight on the LCD:
•
Off - Backlight is always OFF.
•
Auto (Default)- Automatically turns ON the backlight when the phone is in
use, and then automatically turns OFF the backlight when the phone is idle
after a specified length of time.
“The Auto” setting sets the phone to turn off the backlighting after a period of
inactivity. The period of time that the phone waits before turning the backlight off
is also configurable.
t1
You can set this backlight feature using the configuration files and the IP Phone
UI.
Configuring the Backlight Mode Using the Configuration Files
ra
f
Use the following information to set the backlight mode and backlight timer on
the IP Phones.
Configuration Files
D
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Backlight Mode
Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT)” on page A-63.
Configuring the Backlight Mode Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to set the backlight mode and backlight timer on the
IP Phone using the IP Phone UI.
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press
2
Select Preferences.
3
Select Display.
5-30
on the phone to enter the Options List.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
4
Select Backlight.
Display
1. Contrast Level
2. Backlight
- Select
Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to select the Backlight status for your phone.
Default is “Auto”. Valid options are:
• Off
• Auto (Default)
ra
f
5
t1
Done -
D
Note: Setting the Backlight to “Auto” displays an ADVANCED button for you to set the Auto timer.
Backlight
Off
Auto
Cancel Done -
6
If you select “Off”, press Done to save your setting.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-31
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
7
If you select “Auto”, press the Advanced softkey to set the automatic timer.
Backlight
Off
Auto
Using the keypad, enter the amount of seconds you want the phone to stay backlit when the phone is
idle. Valid values are 1 to 120 minutes (2 hours). Default is 10 minutes. When this period of time is
reached, the phone turns OFF the backlight. Use the "Backspace" and/or "Clear" softkeys to delete
entries if required.
ra
f
8
t1
Advanced Cancel Done -
D
Backlight On Time
10 seconds
- Backspace
- Clear
9
5-32
Cancel Done -
Press Done to save your setting. The setting applies immediately to the phone.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Live Dial Pad*
The "Live Dialpad" option on the IP phone turns the Live Dial Pad mode ON or
OFF. With live dial pad ON, the IP phone automatically dials out and turns ON
Handsfree mode as soon as a dial pad key or softkey is pressed. With live dial pad
OFF, if you dial a number while the phone is on-hook, lifting the receiver or
initiates a call to that number.
pressing the
*Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.
A User can turn the “Live Dialpad” ON and OFF using the IP Phone UI only. A
System Administrator can turn it ON and OFF using the IP Phone UI or the
configuration files.
t1
Enabling/Disabling Live Dialpad Using the Configuration Files
Use the following procedure to enable/disable Live Dialpad on the IP Phones.
Configuration Files
ra
f
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Live Dialpad
Settings” on page A-64.
Enabling/Disabling Live Dialpad Using the IP Phone UI
D
Use the following procedure to enable/disable Live Dialpad on the IP Phones.
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press
2
Select Preferences.
3
Select Live Dialpad.
4
On 9143i, 6751i, 6753i:
Press the UP and DOWN arrow keys to toggle the live dialpad setting ON or OFF.
on the phone to enter the Options List.
On 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT:
Press Change to toggle the live dialpad setting ON or OFF.
5
Press Done to save the setting.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-33
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Language
The IP phones support several different languages. You can have the IP phone UI
and the Aastra Web UI display in a specific language as required. When you set
the language to use, all of the display screens (menus, services, options,
configuration parameters, etc.) display in that language. The IP phones support
the following languages:
Associated Language File
(included in the firmware file when
downloaded from configuration
server)
Available Language
Default (resides on the phone)
German
lang_de.txt
(German)*
Spanish
lang_es.txt
(Spanish)
Mexican Spanish
French
Italian
lang_es_mx.txt (Mexican Spanish)
lang_fr.txt
(French)
lang_fr_ca.txt
(Canadian French)
ra
f
Canadian French
t1
English
lang_it.txt
(Italian)*
*German and Italian languages are not applicable to the 6757i CT cordless handset.
D
Loading Language Packs
You make languages available to use on the phone by loading language packs
from the configuration server to the local .cfg configuration file. You can
use the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to perform the download. Each
language pack consists of the IP Phone UI and Aastra Web UI translated in a
specific language.
Loading Language Packs via the Configuration File (.cfg)
Using the configuration files, you specify a language pack to load in the following
format:
lang__.txt
or
lang_.txt
5-34
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
where is the language code specified in Standard ISO 639
(see Appendix A, the section, Language Codes (from Standard ISO 639) on
page A-165) and is the country code specified in Standard ISO 3166
(see Country Codes (from Standard ISO 3166) on page A-165).
The attribute is optional.
Note: Adding/changing language packs can only be done at bootup of the
IP phone. The default language (English) cannot be changed or removed.
Example
The following is an example of the parameters you would enter in the .cfg
file to load a French, Italian, German, and Spanish language pack to the IP phone.
1:
2:
3:
4:
lang_fr_ca.txt
lang_it.txt
lang_de.txt
lang_es_mx.txt
t1
language
language
language
language
ra
f
The above entries in the .cfg file tells the phone which language packs to
load. When the language pack(s) have loaded, you must then use the configuration
files IP Phone UI to specify which language to display on the IP phone. You must
use the Aastra Web UI to specify the language to use in the Web UI.
D
References
For more information about specifying the language to use, see the section,
“Specifying the Language to Use” on page 5-37.
For more information about language codes and country codes, see Appendix A,
the section, “Language Pack Settings” on page A-164.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-35
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Loading Language Packs via the Aastra Web UI
t1
Using the Aastra Web UI, you can specify a language pack to load using the
parameters at Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings.
D
ra
f
You use the following fields in the Aastra Web UI to specify which language
packs to load:
Once the language pack is loaded to the phone, it is available for selection from
either the configuration files, the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI.
5-36
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Specifying the Language to Use
Once the language pack(s) have loaded, you must then specify which language to
use on the phone. After the phone has booted up, you can specify which
language(s) to use. You can use the configuration files and the IP Phone UI to
specify the language for the IP Phone UI. You can use the Aastra Web UI to
specify the files for the Aastra Web UI.
Use the following procedures to specify the language to use on the IP phone.
Configuration Files
t1
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Language
Settings” on page A-162 and “Language Pack Settings” on page A-164.
D
ra
f
Notes:
1.
If you specify the language to use on the phone via the
configuration files, you must reboot the phone for the changes to take
affect.
2.
All languages may not be available for selection. The available
languages are dependant on the language packs currently loaded to the IP
phone.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-37
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press
2
Select Language.
3
Select English (English), Français (French), Español (Spanish), Deutsch (German), Italiano
(Italian).
on the phone to enter the Options List.
4
Press Done to save the changes.
t1
Notes:
1. Valid values for the 6757i CT cordless handset are English, French, and Spanish only.
2. All languages may not be available for selection. The available languages are dependant on the
language packs currently loaded to the IP phone. English is the default language and cannot be
changed or removed. For more information about loading language packs, see “Loading Language
Packs” on page 5-34.
D
ra
f
The change is dynamic. The IP phone UI displays all menu items in the language you chose.
5-38
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings.
t1
1
2
ra
f
Loading the Language Pack
In the “Language N” fields, enter the file name of the language pack you want to use to display a
specific language in the Aastra Web UI. For example, you could enter the following in the
“Language 1”, “Language 2”, “Language 3”, and “Language 4” fields to display the Aastra Web UI in
French, Spanish, German, and Italian:
D
lang_de.txt
lang_es.txt
lang_es_mx.txt
lang_fr.txt
lang_fr_ca.txt
lang_it.txt
Note: You must have the language pack(s) already loaded to your phone in order to use them. For
more information about loading language packs, see “Loading Language Packs” on page 5-34.
For more information about language codes and country codes, see Appendix A, the section,
“Language Pack Settings” on page A-164.
3
Click
to save your changes.
Specifying the Language to Use in the Aastra Web UI
4
After restarting your phone, log back in using the Aastra Web UI.
5
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-39
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
6
In the “Webpage Language” field, select a language to apply to the Aastra Web UI. The IP phone
supports the following languages:
•
•
•
•
•
English (default)
French (European French and Canadian French)
Spanish (European Spanish and Mexican Spanish)
German
Italian
Notes:
1. Valid values for the 6757i CT cordless handset are English, French, and Spanish only.
2. All languages may not be available for selection. The available languages are dependant on the
language packs currently loaded to the IP phone. English is the default language and cannot be
changed or removed.
Click
to save your changes.
t1
7
D
ra
f
The Aastra Web UI displays all screens in the language you chose.
5-40
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Specifying the Input Language to Use
The 5i Series phones support text and character inputs in various languages
(English, German, French, Spanish, and Italian).
Inputting textual or character information into the IP Phone UI, Aastra Web UI,
and XML scripts can now be done in various languages using the keypad on the
phone. The System Administrator and User can enable this feature using the
Aastra Web UI or the IP Phone UI. An Administrator can also use the
configuration files to enable this feature. Users can then use text and characters in
a specific language when performing inputs on the phone.
The following tables identify the language characters that a User can enter on the
5i Series phones that support the Input Language feature.
t1
Keypad Input Alphabet Tables
English
Uppercase Characters
Lowercase Characters
0
0
0
1
1.:;=_,-'&()
1.:;=_,-'&()
2
ABC2
abc2
3
DEF3
def3
GHI4
ghi4
JKL5
jkl5
6
MNO6
mno6
7
PQRS7
pqrs7
8
TUV8
tuv8
9
WXYZ9
wxyz9
*
*
*
#
#/\@
#/\@
5
D
4
ra
f
Key
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-41
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
French
Uppercase Characters
Lowercase Characters
0
0
0
1
1.:;=_,-'&()
1.:;=_,-'&()
2
ABC2ÀÂÇÁÅÆ
abc2àâçáåæ
3
DEF3ÉÈÊË
def3éèêë
4
GHI4ÎÏ
ghi4îï
5
JKL5
jkl5
6
MNO6ÑÓÒÔÖ
mno6ñóòôö
7
PQRS7
pqrs7
8
TUV8ÚÙÛÜ
tuv8úùûü
9
WXYZ9
*
*
#
#/\@
*
Uppercase Characters
Lowercase Characters
0
0
0
1
1.:;=_,-'&()
1.:;=_,-'&()
ABC2ÁÀÇ
abc2áàç
DEF3ÉÈ
def3éè
4
GHI4ÏÍ
ghi4ïí
5
JKL5
jkl5
6
MNO6ÑÓÒ
mno6ñóò
7
PQRS7
pqrs7
8
TUV8ÚÜ
tuv8úü
9
WXYZ9
wxyz9
*
*
*
#
#/\@
#/\@
3
D
Key
2
5-42
wxyz9
#/\@
ra
f
Spanish
t1
Key
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
German
Uppercase Characters
Lowercase Characters
0
0
0
1
1.:;=_,-'&()
1.:;=_,-'&()
2
ABC2ÄÀ
abc2äà
3
DEF3É
def3é
4
GHI4
ghi4
5
JKL5
jkl5
6
MNO6Ö
mno6ö
7
PQRS7ß
pqrs7ß
8
TUV8Ü
tuv8ü
9
WXYZ9
*
*
#
#/\@
wxyz9
*
#/\@
ra
f
Italian
t1
Key
Uppercase Characters
Lowercase Characters
0
0
0
1
D
Key
1.:;=_,-'&()
1.:;=_,-'&()
ABC2ÀCÇ
abc2àcç
3
DEF3ÉÈË
def3éèë
4
GHI4
ghi4
5
JKL5
jkl5
6
MNO6ÓÒ
mno6óò
7
PQRS7
pqrs7
8
TUV8Ù
tuv8ù
9
WXYZ9
wxyz9
*
*
*
#
#/\@
#/\@
2
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-43
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring Language Input Using the Configuration Files
An Administrator can specify the input language to use by entering a specific
parameter in the configuration files. An Administrator must enter the following
parameter to enable this feature:
•
input language
Use the following procedures to specify the input language to use on the IP phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Language
Settings” on page A-162.
t1
Configuring Language Input Using the IP Phone UI
Example
ra
f
Once “Language Input” is enabled, an Administrator or User can change the input
language on the phone using the IP Phone UI. The “Input Language” option
appears under the Language option in the IP Phone UI.
D
Preferences
1. Tones
2. Contrast Level
3. Speed Dial Edit
4. Live Dialpad
5. Set Audio
6. Time and Date
7. Language
- Select
- Select
Done -
Language Option
5-44
Language
1. Screen Language
2. Input Language
Done -
Input Language Option
Input Language
1. English
2. Français
3. Español
4. Deutsch
5. Italiano
Cancel Done -
Languages Available
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Use the following procedure to change the input language using the IP
Phone UI.
Aastra IP Phone UI
Action
1
Press the Options key.
2
Select Language from the Options List.
3
Select Input Language from the Language List.
4
Select the language you want to use on the IP phone for inputting text and characters. Valid values
are:
• English (default)
• Français (French)
• Español (Spanish)
• Deutsch (German) (not applicable to 6757i CT cordless handset)
• Italiano (Italian) (not applicable to 6757i CT cordless handset)
•
Note: Available input languages are dependent on the configuration enabled by your System
Administrator.
5
Press Done when you have selected a language.
D
ra
f
t1
Step
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-45
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring Language Input Using the Aastra Web UI
Once “Language Input” is enabled, an Administrator or User can also change the
input language on the phone using the Aastra Web UI. The “Input Language”
option appears at the path Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings.
Use the following procedure to set the input language using the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings-> Preferences->Language Settings.
2
Select a language from the "Input Language" field. Setting this field allows you to specify the
language to use when entering text in the Aastra Web UI, IP Phone UI, or in XML applications on the
phone. Valid values are:
• English (default)
• Français (French)
• Español (Spanish)
• Deutsch (German) (not applicable to 6757i CT cordless handset)
• Italiano (Italian) (not applicable to 6757i CT cordless handset)
D
ra
f
t1
1
Note: Available input languages are dependent on the configuration enabled by your System
Administrator.
3
5-46
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring Language Input for an XML Application
A System Administrator can enable input languages in XML applications using
the object and the “inputLanguage” attribute.
The “inputLanguage” attribute can have a value of any of the following:
English
French
Français
German
Deutsch
Italian
Italiano
Spanish
Español
t1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The following is an example of an XML script using the “inputLanguage”
attribute with a value of “German”.
ra
f
XML Example:
D
Login Screen
User ID:
Password:
http://10.50.10.53/script.pl
UserID
Password
XML Screen Example:
LOGON-Schirm
Benutzername: Verwalter
Kennwort: *********
Backspace
Dot
Cancel
Done
The screen above shows the user input of “Verwalter” in German.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-47
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Note: If a non-supported value is used with the “inputLanguage”
attribute in the XML script, the phone uses the input language that was
configured using the Aastra Web UI or the IP Phone UI. If the parameters
are not set in the Aastra Web UI or the Phone UI, the phone uses the
default of "English".
UTF- 8 Codec for Multi-National Language Support
The IP Phones and expansion modules include support for ISO 8859-2 (Latin2) of
multi-national languages when displaying and inputing in the IP Phone UI and the
Aastra Web UI.
t1
Note: This feature is not applicable to the handsets on the 6757i CT and
the 9480i CT.
ra
f
UTF-8 is also compatible with XML encoding on the IP Phones.
D
The following table illustrates the Latin 2 character set now used on the IP
Phones.
5-48
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Locking IP Phone Keys
The IP phones allow you to lock or unlock programmable keys, softkeys, hard
keys, cordless handset keys, and expansion keys (for expansion modules). When
key locking is enabled, the phone uses the server settings and ignores any
previous local configuration. A user cannot override the configuration of a locked
key.
You can lock and unlock keys using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or
the Aastra Web UI. When viewing the locked key via the Aastra Web UI, the key
is grayed out (disabled) and cannot be changed. Locking is dynamic for XML
pushes.
t1
You use the following “locking” parameters in the configuration files to lock the
softkeys and programmable keys on the 9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT, 6753i, 6755i,
6757i, and 6757i CT. The locking parameters impact existing softkey and
programmable key parameters as shown in the table below.
Impacted Parameters
Phone Model Affected
softkeyN locked
softkeyN type
softkeyN label
softkeyN value
softkeyN line
softkeyN states
9480i
9480i CT
6755i
6757i
6757i CT
topsoftkeyN locked
topsoftkeyN type
topsoftkeyN label
topsoftkeyN value
topsoftkeyN line
6757i
6757i CT
prgkeyN locked
prgkeyN type
prgkeyN value
prgkeyN line
9143i
6753i
6755i
featurekeyN locked
featurekeyN type
featurekeyN label
9480i CT
6757i CT
expmodX keyN locked
expmodX keyN type
expmodX keyN value
expmodX keyN line
5-series phones only
(not applicable to the 6751i)
D
ra
f
Locking Parameter
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-49
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Note: The 9143i and 6753i IP phones prevent users from setting a speed
dial key via the Phone UI on a key that has been locked.
Locking the IP Phone Keys
Use the following procedures to lock the softkeys and programmable keys on the
IP phone.
Configuration Files
Reference
t1
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Locking Softkeys and Programmable Keys” on page A-226.
ra
f
For more information about locking/unlocking the phones using the Phone UI and
Aastra Web UI, see your applicable phone-specific User Guide.
Locking/Unlocking the SAVE and DELETE keys (6753i)
D
There are 4 programmable keys on the 6753i phone located to the left of the paper
label. Two additional keys (SAVE and DELETE) can be made programmable by
the Administrator, providing a total of 6 programmable keys if required.
Save Key
Delete Key
Directory
Callers List
Transfer
Conference
6753i Programmable
Keys
5-50
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
If a System Administrator unlocks the SAVE and DELETE keys, these keys can
be configured with the same functions that are available for the other
programmable keys. Only the System Administrator can unlock these keys.
The Save key allows you to save entries to the Directory and perform a Save-To
from the Callers List. It also allows you to save speeddial information to a
programmable key. You can also use the Save key while using specific XML
applications.
The Delete key allows you to remove entries from the Directory List and Callers
List. (Must enter the Directory or Callers list and select an entry, then press twice
to delete entry).
prgkey1 locked
•
prgkey2 locked
ra
f
•
t1
By default, the Save and Delete keys are locked so that a user can use them for
saving and deleting only. An Administrator can unlock these keys using the
configuration files, allowing the keys to be programmed with other functions if
required. An Administrator can use the following parameters in the configuration
file to lock and unlock the Save and Delete keys:
The value of "0" unlocks the keys, and the value of "1" locks the keys. The default
is "1" (lock).
D
The following is an example of unlocking the Save and Delete keys using the
configuration files:
Example:
•
prgkey1 locked: 0
•
prgkey2 locked: 0
Once the Save and Delete keys are unlocked, a User can change the function of
the keys using the Aastra Web UI. An Administrator can change the function of
the keys using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-51
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
IMPORTANT: If you change the functions of the Save and Delete keys, and then
an Administrator locks Keys 1 and 2, the functions are automatically set back to
the default settings of "Save" and "Delete".
Note: The Save and Delete functions are limited to Key 1 and Key 2 on
the 6753i IP phone only.
Locking and Unlocking the Save and Delete Keys using the
Configuration Files.
Configuration Files
D
ra
f
t1
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Locking the
SAVE and DLETE Keys (6753i)” on page A-229.
5-52
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Local Dial Plan
A dial plan describes the number and pattern of digits that a user dials to reach a
particular telephone number. Access codes, area codes, specialized codes, and
combinations of the number of digits dialed are all part of a dial plan. For
instance, the North American Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) uses a
10-digit dial plan that includes a 3-digit area code and a 7-digit telephone number.
Most PBXs support variable length dial plans that use 3 to 11 digits. Dial plans
must comply with the telephone networks to which they connect. Only totally
private voice networks that are not linked to the PSTN or to other PBXs can use
any dial plan.
t1
The Dial Plan field accepts up to 512 characters. If a User enters a dial plan longer
than 512 characters, or a parsing error occurs, the phone uses the default dial plan
of “x+#|xx+*”. You configure the SIP Local Dial Plan using the Aastra Web UI or
the configuration files.
The IP phone SIP local dial plan available symbols are as follows:
Description
ra
f
Symbol
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Digit symbol
;
Allows a secondary dial tone to be audible before dialing a
number.
*, #, .
|
+
Match any digit symbol (wildcard)
Other keypad symbol
D
X
Expression inclusive OR
0 or more of the preceding digit symbol or [] expression
[]
Symbol inclusive OR
-
Used only with [], represent a range of acceptable symbols;
For example, [2-8]
;
Used when a secondary dial tone is required on the phone.
(For example, “9;xxxxxx”, when a user has to dial “9” to get
and outside line and needs a secondary dial one presented
Dial Plan Example
An example of a SIP Local Dial Plan is:
[01]XXX|[2-8]XXXX|91XXXXXX
XXXX|X+.|*XX
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-53
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
The dial plan in the above example can accept any 4-digit dial strings that begin
with a '0' or '1', any 5-digit dial strings that begin with a '2' up to '8', any 12-digit
dial strings that begin with '91', any non-empty digit string that ends with a '.' or
any 2-digit code that begins with a '*'.
Prefix Dialing
The IP phones support a prefix dialing feature for outgoing calls.
You can manually dial a number or dial a number from a list. The phone
automatically maps the pre-configured prepended digit in the configuration, to the
outgoing number. When a match is found, the prepended digits are added to the
beginning of the dial string and the call is dialed.
t1
Note: The prepend digits are also added if the dialing times-out on a
partial match.
ra
f
You can enable this feature by adding a prepend digit(s) to the end of the Local
Dial Plan parameter string in the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI at
Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
•
D
For example, if you add a prepend map of “[2-9]XXXXXXXXX,91”, the IP
phone adds the digits “91” to any 10-digit number beginning with any digit from 2
to 9 that is dialed out. Other examples of prepend mappings are:
1X+#,9 (Prepends 9 to any digit string beginning with “1” and terminated
with “#”.)
•
6XXX,579 (Prepends “579” to any 4-digit string starting with “6”.)
•
[4-6]XXXXXX,78 (Prepends “78” to any 7-digit string starting with “4”, “5”, or “6”.)
Note: You can configure a local dial plan via the configuration files or
the Aastra Web UI.
Example
If you enter the following dial string for a local dial plan:
sip dial plan: 1+#,9
5-54
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
where “9” is the prepended digit, and you dial the following number:
15551212
the IP phone automatically adds the “9” digit to the beginning of the dialed
number before the number is forwarded as 915551212.
Note: You can configure a local dial plan via the configuration files or
the Aastra Web UI.
SIP Dial Plan Terminator
t1
The IP phone allows you to enable or disable the use of the “dial plan terminator”.
When you configure the phone’s dial plan to use a dial plan terminator or timeout
(such as the pound symbol (#)) the phone waits 4 or 5 seconds after you pick up
the handset or after you finish dialing the numbers on the keypad before making
the call.
ra
f
You can enable or disable the dial plan terminator using Aastra Web UI or the
configuration files.
Digit Timeout
D
The IP phone allows you to configure a “Digit Timeout” feature on the IP phone.
The Digit Timeout is the time, in seconds, between consecutive key presses on the
IP phone’s keypad. The default for this parameter is 4 seconds. If you press a key
on the phone and wait 4 seconds before pressing the next key, the key times out
and cancels the digit selection. You must press consecutive keys before the
timeout occurs.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-55
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Secondary Dial Tone
The IP phones now support a feature that allows the user to dial a predefined dial
string, obtain a dial tone, and continue dialing. A User or Administrator can
configure this using the existing Dial Plan feature on the phone.
You can enter a new character string in the dial plan that allows you to configure
the secondary dial tone. The character string is of the form ".;." , where the period
indicates an arbitrary number of digits and the semicolon indicates that the phone
is to present a dial tone after the previous dialed digit. For example, in the string:
"9;xxxxx"
t1
the user dials “9” to get the outside line, listens for the dial tone, and continues to
dial the applicable number. The “;” tells the phone to present a second dial tone
after the previously dialed digit. “The “xxxxx” in the example tells the phone that
a phone number is dialed after the secondary dial tone is audible.
ra
f
You can enter the Secondary Dial Tone string in the Dial Plan using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
You use the following parameter in the configuration files to configure a
secondary dial tone:
sip dial plan
D
•
Example
sip dial plan: “9;5551313”
5-56
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring the SIP Local Dial Plan, Dial Plan Terminator, and Digit
Timeout
Use the following procedures to configure the SIP Local Dial Plan using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
D
ra
f
t1
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “SIP Local Dial
Plan Settings” on page A-65.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-57
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences.
2
In the "Local Dial Plan" field, enter a valid local dial plan (up to 512 alphanumeric characters) for the
IP phone. Default is X+#|XX+*. Enter prepended digits or a “;”to present a secondary dial tone if
required.
D
ra
f
t1
1
Note: If a User enters a dial plan longer than 512 characters, or a parsing error occurs, the phone
uses the default dial plan of “x+#|xx+*”.
3
Enable the "Send Dial Plan Terminator" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by
unchecking the box). Default is disabled.
4
In the "Digit Timeout (in seconds)" field, enter a timeout value. This is the length of time, in
seconds, he phone waits before dialing. Default is 4 seconds.
5
Click
5-58
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls
The IP phones (including the 6757i CT handset) have a park and pickup call
feature that allows you to park a call and pickup a call when required. There are
two ways a user or administrator can configure this feature:
•
Using a static configuration (globally configures park and pickup)
•
Using a programmable configuration
Note: The IP phones accept both methods of configuration. However, to
avoid redundancy, Aastra Telecom recommends you configure either a
static configuration or a programmable configuration.
t1
The IP phones support the Park/Pickup feature on the Asterisk, BroadWorks,
Sylantro, and ININ PBX servers.
The following paragraph describes the park and pickup static configuration on the
IP phones.
ra
f
Reference
For information on configuring the park and pickup programmable configuration
(using a key), see “Park/Pick Up Key” on page 5-234.
D
Park/Pickup Static Configuration (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i
CT only)
Using the static method of configuring park and pickup configures these features
on a global basis for all IP phones connected in the network. You can use the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to configure a park/pickup static
configuration.
In the configuration files, you use the following parameters to statically configure
park/pickup:
•
sprecode:
•
pickupsprecode:
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-59
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
In the Aastra Web UI, you use the following fields at Basic Settings->
Preferences to configure park/pickup statically:
•
Park Call
•
Pickup Call
How It displays on the Phone
On the IP phone UI, the static configuration method displays the following:
•
When a call comes in, and you pickup the handset, the default label of "Park"
displays on the first screen of the Phone UI.
•
After pressing the "Park" softkey to park the call, the default label of
"Pickup" displays on the first screen of the phone UI.
t1
Note: On the 6757i CT handset, pressing Ï displays the "Park" and
"Pickup" labels.
ra
f
The values you enter for the Park/Pickup feature are dependant on your type of
server. The following table provides the values you enter for the “sprecode” and
“pickupsprecode” parameters (configuration files), or "Park Call" and "Pickup
Parked Call" fields (Aastra Web UI).
D
Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values
Server
Park Values*
Pickup Values*
Aasterisk
70
70
Sylantro
*98
*99
BroadWorks
*68
*88
callpark
pickup
ININ PBX
*Leave "value" fields blank to disable the park and pickup feature.
5-60
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring Park /Pickup using Static Configuration
(9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT only)
Use the following procedures to configure the Park/Pickup call feature using the
static configuration method.
Note: Aastra recommends you configure either the static or the
programmable configuration, but not both.
Configuration Files
D
ra
f
t1
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Park and Pickup Global Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 6757i/6757i CT only)” on page A-187.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-61
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
Enter a server value in the Park Call field to which incoming live calls will be parked.
D
ra
f
t1
1
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-60.
3
Enter a server value in the "Pickup Parked Call" field.
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-60.
4
5-62
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Suppressing DTMF Playback
A feature on the IP phones allows users and administrators to enable or disable the
suppression of DTMF playback when a number is dialed from the softkeys and
programmable keys.
When suppression of DTMF playback is disabled, and you press a softkey or
programmable key, the IP phone dials the stored number and displays each digit
as dialed in the LCD window.
When the suppression of DTMF playback is enabled, the IP phone dials the stored
number and displays the entire number immediately in the LCD window, allowing
the call to be dialed much faster.
t1
DTMF playback suppression is disabled by default. Suppressing DTMF playback
can be configured using the Aastra Web UI and the configuration files.
Configuring Suppression of DTMF Playback
ra
f
Use the following procedures to configure the suppression of DTMF playback on
the IP phone.
Configuration Files
D
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Suppress DTMF
Playback Setting” on page A-173.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-63
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
Enable the "Suppress DTMF Playback" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled.
3
Click
D
ra
f
t1
1
to save your settings.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
4
Click on Operation->Reset.
5
In the "Restart Phone" field click
5-64
to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Display DTMF Digits
A feature on the IP phones allows users and administrators to enable or disable
DTMF (dual-tone multi-frequency) digits to display to the IP phone when using
the keypad to dial, or when dialing from a softkey or programmable key.
DTMF is the signal sent from the phone to the network that you generate when
you press the phone’s touch keys. This is also known as “touchtone” dialing. Each
key you press on your phone generates two tones of specific frequencies. One
tone is generated from a high-frequency group of tones and the other from a low
frequency group.
t1
If you enable the Display DTMF Digits parameter, the digits you are dialing from
the keypad or from a softkey or programmable key display to the IP phone’s LCD
display. This parameter is disabled by default (no digits display when dialing).
You can enable the “Display DTMF Digits” parameter using the configuration
files or the Aastra Web UI.
ra
f
Configuring Display DTMF Digits
D
Use the following procedures to configure the suppression of DTMF playback on
the IP phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Display DTMF
Digits Setting” on page A-174.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-65
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
Enable the "Display DTMF Digits" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled.
3
Click
D
ra
f
t1
1
to save your settings.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
4
Click on Operation->Reset.
5
In the "Restart Phone" field click
5-66
to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone
A call waiting feature notifies the user currently on the phone, of a new incoming
call. You can disable this call waiting feature, so that the new incoming call is
automatically rejected by the phone with a busy message. A User or
Administrator can configure this feature.
If you disable call waiting on the phone, and the user is on a call, any further
incoming calls will receive busy unless “Call Forward Busy” or “Call Forward No
Answer and Busy” is configured on the phone. It will then forward the call
according to the rule configured. The phone can only:
•
transfer the currently active call
or
accept transferred calls if there is no active calls.
t1
•
If call waiting is disabled:
on the 6757i CT bases, and the handset is currently on a call, all additional
incoming calls are rejected on the handset.
•
intercom calls are treated as regular incoming calls and are rejected.
•
pre-dialing with live dial pad disabled still accepts incoming calls.
•
the “Incoming Call Cancels Dialing” parameter is ignored because the
incoming call is automatically rejected.
•
D
•
ra
f
•
the Missed Calls List does not get updated with details of calls.
the Blind Transfer feature on the phone may not work if two calls are made to
the phone at one time.
You can enable/disable call waiting using the configuration files or the Aastra
Web UI.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-67
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Call Waiting Tone
You can also enable or disable the playing of a short “Call Waiting Tone" when
there is an incoming call on your phone. This feature is enabled by default. If you
have Call Waiting enabled, and a call comes into the line for which you are on an
active call, a tone is audible to notify you of that incoming call. The tone is also
audible to the caller to indicate to that caller you are currently on another call.
Note: The Call Waiting Tone feature works only if Call Waiting is
enabled.
A User or Administrator can configure this feature. An Administrator can
configure this feature using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
t1
Configuring Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone
ra
f
Use the following procedures to configure the Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone
features on the IP phone.
Configuration Files
D
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Call Waiting
Settings” on page A-152.
5-68
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings-> Preferences->General.
2
The "Call Waiting" field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box. This feature
allows you to enable or disable the call waiting feature on the IP phone.
3
The "Play Call Waiting Tone" field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box. This
feature allows you to enable or disable the call waiting tone on the IP phone.
D
ra
f
t1
1
Note: The Call Waiting Tone feature works only if the “Call Waiting” tone field is enabled.
4
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-69
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Stuttered Dial Tone
You can enable or disable the playing of a stuttered dial tone when there is a
message waiting on the IP phone.
You can configure this feature using the configuration files and the Aastra Web
UI.
Configuring Stuttered Dial Tone
Use the following procedures to configure stuttered dial tone on the IP phones.
Configuration Files
D
ra
f
t1
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling stuttered dial tone, see
Appendix A, the section, “Stuttered Dial Tone Setting” on page A-151.
5-70
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
The "Stuttered Dial Tone" field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box.
3
Click
D
ra
f
t1
1
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-71
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
XML Beep Support
The IP phones have a feature that allows you to enable or disable a beep on the
phone with it receives a status message from an XML application. This beep can
be turned ON or OFF using the Aastra Web UI, the configuration files, or in an
XML script.
Reference
For more information about enabling/disabling the XML Beep Support in an
XML script, see “XML Customized Services” on page 5-311.
Configuring XML Beep Support
Configuration Files
t1
Use the following procedures to enable/disable XML Beep Support.
D
ra
f
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “XML Settings”
on page A-132.
5-72
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
The “XML Beep Support” field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box.
3
Click
D
ra
f
t1
1
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-73
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Status Scroll Delay
The IP phones have a feature that allows you to specify the time delay, in seconds,
between the scrolling of each status message (including XML status messages) on
the phone. The default time is 5 seconds for each message to display before
scrolling to the next message. You can configure this option via the configuration
files or the Aastra Web UI.
Reference
For more information about configuring the status scroll delay for XML status
messages, see “XML Customized Services” on page 5-311.
Configuring Status Scroll Delay
Configuration Files
t1
Use the following procedures to configure Status Scroll Delay.
D
ra
f
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “XML Settings”
on page A-132.
5-74
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
In the “Status Scroll Delay (seconds)” field, enter a value, in seconds, that each XML status
message displays on the phone. Default is 5 seconds. Valid values are 1 to 25.
3
Click
D
ra
f
t1
1
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-75
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing
You can configure whether or not an incoming call interrupts an outgoing call that
is dialing. The “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” (Web UI) parameter or
“incoming call cancels dialing” (in config file) parameter controls this feature.
How it Works
When you enable this parameter (1 = enable), an incoming call interrupts the
outgoing call during dialing and allows the phone to ring for the user to answer the
incoming call.
ra
f
t1
When you disable this parameter (0 = disable), which is the default, the phone
does not interrupt the outgoing call during dialing and the number you were
dialing continues to display in the LCD. The phones sends the incoming call to a
free line on the phone (or sends busy signal if all remaining lines are busy) and the
LED for that line blinks. You have a choice to ignore the incoming call, or answer
the incoming call on another line, via the Ignore and Answer softkeys that
display. If you choose to answer the incoming call, you can answer the call, finish
the call, and then hang up. You can still go back to the original outgoing call and
finish dialing out.
D
Notes:
1.
On a 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i, you must use the down arrow key to
ignore the call. To answer the call you must press the line key where the
call is coming in.
2.
For all models, if you disable this parameter (0=disable), and the
phone receives an incoming call while you are dialing an outgoing call,
you can pick up the call and perform transfer or conference as required.
3.
This feature works only if the User selects a line for which to dial
out. It is recommended that the Administrator always keeps Live Dialpad
ON in order for the User to have to select a line before dialing out.
5-76
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Transfer/Conference Call Behavior
If you are dialing the phone to transfer or conference a call, and your phone
receives an incoming call, your dialing is never interrupted (regardless of whether
the “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” is enabled or disabled). For Transfer and
Conference, the incoming calls always go to an available line (other than the one
you are using for dialing) and the incoming call’s line LED blinks. The LCD still
displays your dialing screen.
Intercom Behavior
ra
f
t1
If “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” (Web UI) or “incoming call cancels
dialing” (config file) is enabled and you are dialing an outgoing Intercom call, the
enabled interrupt setting takes precedence over an enabled “Allow Barge In”
setting. The incoming call interrupts your dialing on an outgoing intercom call.
On an incoming intercom call, the enabled “Allow Barge In” and
“Auto-Answer” occurs while you are dialing to transfer or conference the call.
However, the incoming call goes to an available idle line, and the LED blinks
while you are dialing the second half of the conference or transfer.
D
If “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” (Web UI) or “incoming call cancels
dialing” (config file) is disabled, an incoming intercom goes to an available idle
line and the LED blinks for that line. The phone answers the call under all
conditions.
Configuring Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing
Use the following procedures to configure how the IP phone handles incoming
calls that interrupt outgoing dialing.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling how the IP phones
handle incoming calls that interrupt outgoing dialing, see Appendix A, the section, “Incoming Call Interrupts
Dialing Setting” on page A-146.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-77
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing is disabled by default.
If required, enable the "Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing" field by checking the check box.
3
Click
5-78
D
ra
f
t1
1
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Switch Focus to Ringing Line
An Administrator or User can control the behavior of the phone when it receives
an incoming call when it is already in a connected call. By default, the phone
switches focus to the ringing line to enable the user to see who is calling them.
You can turn off this functionality so that the phone now stays focused on the
connected call. You can do this using the “switch focus to ringing line”
parameter in the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
t1
Note: If you configure the BLF/Xfer key(s) and/or Speeddial/Xfer
key(s) on the phone, you can enable or disable the switching of the
user interface focus to ringing line while the phone is in the connected
state.
Configuring “Switch Focus to Ringing Line”
ra
f
You use the following procedures to enable or disable “Switch Focus to Ringing
Line”.
Configuration Files
D
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling disabling “Switch Focus to Ringing
Line”, see Appendix A, the section, “Switch Focus to Ringing Line” on page A-148.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-79
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
.
D
ra
f
t1
1
“Switch Focus to Ringing Line” Parameter
2
The “Switch Focus to Ringing Line” field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the
box.
3
Click
5-80
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout
An Administrator or User can define a preferred line as well as a preferred
timeout. If a preferred line is selected, after a call ends (incoming or outgoing),
the display switches back to the preferred line. Next time you go off-hook, you
pickup on the preferred line. You can specify the number of seconds it takes for
the phone to switch back to the preferred line using the “preferred timeout”
parameter.
An Administrator can configure the “preferred line” and the “preferred
timeout” parameters using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. A User
can configure these parameters using the Aastra Web UI only.
t1
The following table provides the behavior of the preferred line focus feature with
other features on the phone.
Preferred Line Behavior
call return
The phone switches back to the focused line immediately after
the call ends.
speeddial
conference
The line is already specified when the speeddial is created. The
phone switches back immediately after the call ends.
For incoming calls, the phone switches back immediately after
the call ends.
For incoming or outgoing calls, the current behavior is that the
same line used to transfer the call does not change. For incoming
calls, the phone switches back immediately after the call
transfers.
D
transfer
ra
f
Phone Feature
blf
The phone switches back immediately after the call ends.
park
The phone switches back immediately after the call ends.
voicemail
The phone switches back immediately after the call ends.
redial
The phone switches back immediately after the call ends.
dialing
For incomplete dialing on a non-preferred line, the focus does not
change if some digits are entered.
If no digits are entered or digits were cleared, the focus changes
to preferred line after the time out has passed without activities.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-81
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Phone Feature
Preferred Line Behavior
caller id
If the "Switch UI Focus To Ringing Line" parameter is disabled,
the User is able to see the Caller ID when the phone switches the
focus to the ringing line.
factory default
Factory default and recovery mode clears the "preferred line" and
"preferred line timeout" parameters, and the phone operates in a
non-preferred line mode.
Notes:
1.
If you specify a value of “0” for the preferred line parameter, it
disables the preferred line focus feature.
t1
2.
If you specify a value of “0” for the preferred line timeout
parameter, the phone returns the line to the preferred line immediately.
ra
f
Configuring the Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout
You use the following procedures to configure the Preferred Line and the
Preferred Line Timeout on the IP Phones.
D
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for configuring the Preferred Line and Preferred
Line Timeout, see Appendix A, the section, “Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout” on page A-149.
5-82
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Use the following parameters to configure preferred line focus using the Aastra
Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
ra
f
Preferred Line
t1
1
D
Preferred Line
Timeout
2
In the “Preferred Line” field, select a preferred line to switch focus to after incoming or outgoing
calls end on the phone. Valid values are:
•
•
None (disables the preferred line focus feature)
1 to 9
Default is 1.
For example, if you set the preferred line to “1”, when a call (incoming or outgoing) ends on the
phone (on any line), the phone switches focus back to Line 1.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-83
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
3
In the “Preferred Line Timeout” field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone
switches back to the preferred line after a call (incoming or outgoing) ends on the phone, or after a
duration of inactivity on an active line. Default is 0. Valid values are:
•
Click
to save your changes.
D
ra
f
t1
4
0 to 999
5-84
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call
You can configure the Goodbye key to drop active calls or ignore incoming calls
using the “goodbye cancels incoming call” parameter. This parameter controls
the behavior of the goodbye key when the phone is on an active call and a second
call is presented to the phone.
How it Works
When you enable this parameter (1 = enable in the configuration files), which is
the default, the Goodbye key rejects the incoming call. When you disable this
parameter (0 = disable in the configuration files), the Goodbye key hangs up the
active call.
t1
For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT:
If you enable this parameter, and the phone receives another call when an active
call is already present, the phone displays softkey 1 as “answer” and softkey 2 as
“ignore”. You can press the required softkey as applicable.
ra
f
For the 9143i, 6751i, 6753i:
D
If you enable this parameter, and the phone receives another call when an active
call is already present, the “ignore” option only displays in the LCD window. The
phone ignores the incoming call. If you press the DOWN arrow key, the phone
answers the incoming call.
You can set this parameter using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring the Goodbye Key to Cancel Incoming Calls
Use the following procedures to configure the behavior of the Goodbye Key on
the IP phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the behavior of the
Goodbye Key, see Appendix A, the section, “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing Setting” on page A-146.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-85
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing is disabled by default.
If required, enable the "Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing" field by checking the check box.
3
Click
5-86
D
ra
f
t1
1
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
UPnP Mapping Lines (for remote phones)
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a standard that uses Internet protocols to
enable devices to be plugged into a network and automatically know about each
other. With UPnP, when a user plugs a device into the network, the device
configures itself, acquires a TCP IP address, and uses a discovery protocol based
on the Internet's HTTP or HTTPS URL to announce its presence on the network
to other devices.
This method of device discovery on a network is called “Universal Plug and Play”
or UPnP. If you enable UPnP, and the phone is discovered on the network, port
mappings are set up between the phone and the Internet Gateway Device (IGD) in
your network. The phone controls the opening, closing, and polling of ports on the
IGD. HTTP and SIP use a single port each. RTP/RTCP uses a range of ports.
t1
You can enable the UPnP mappings to specific lines on your phone. You set this
configuration using the Aastra Web UI at Basic Settings->Preferences->UPnP
Mapping Lines.
ra
f
Note: UPnP must be enabled on your remote phone before you can
configure the UPnP mapping lines. For information on enabling/disabling
UPnP see Chapter 4, the section, “Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) (for
remote phones)” on page 4-50.
D
Configuring UPnP Mapping Lines
Use the following procedures to configure UPnP mapping on specific lines on the
IP phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “UPnP Settings”
on page A-37.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-87
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
The "UPnP Mapping Lines" field is set to 0 by default. If required, change the setting to a specific
line by selecting a line from the list. Valid values are 0 through 10. The line you select is the line that
your remote phone uses to perform Universal Plug and Play on the network you are connecting to.
3
Click
5-88
D
ra
f
t1
1
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Message Waiting Indicator Line
A User or Administrator can configure the Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) to
illuminate for a specific line or for all lines. For example, if you configure the
MWI LED on line 3 only, the LED illuminates if a voice mail is pending on line 3.
If you configure the MWI LED for all lines, the LED illuminates if a voice mail is
pending on any line on the phone (lines 1 through 9).
A User can configure the MWI using the Aastra Web UI only. An Administrator
can configure the MWI on single or all lines using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.
Configuring Message Waiting Indicator (MWI)
Configuration Files
t1
Use the following procedures to configure MWI on the IP phone.
D
ra
f
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Message
Waiting Indicator Settings” on page A-153.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-89
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings-> Preferences->General.
2
In the “Message Waiting Indicator Line” field, select a single line from 1 to 9, or select “All” for all
lines. If you select a single line, the MWI illuminates when a voice mail message is pending on that
line. If you select all lines, the MWI illuminates when a voice mail message is pending on any line
from 1 to 9.
3
Click
5-90
D
ra
f
t1
1
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
DND Key Mode
The IP phones have a feature you can enable called "Do not Disturb (DND). An
Administrator or User can set “do not disturb” based on the accounts on the phone
(all accounts or a specific account). You can set specific modes for the way you
want the phone to handle DND. The three modes you can set on the phone for
DND are:
•
Account
•
Phone
•
Custom
t1
An Administrator or User can set the DND mode using the Aastra Web UI at the
path Basic Settings->Preferences->General->DND Key Mode. An Administrator
can also set the DND Key Mode using the configuration files.
ra
f
Note: You must configure a DND key on the phone to use this feature.
Reference
D
For more information about how DND works and how you can use it on the
phones, see the section, “Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-211.
Configuring the DND Key Mode
Use the following procedures to set the DND Key Mode on the phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DND Key Mode
Settings” on page A-154.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-91
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
In the “DND Key Mode” field, select a “do not disturb” (DND) mode to use on the phone.
Valid values are: Account, Phone, Custom. Default is Phone.
•
account
•
phone
•
custom
D
2
DND Key Mode
Parameter
ra
f
t1
1
Sets DND for a specific account. DND key toggles the account in focus on the
IP Phone UI, to ON or OFF.
Sets DND ON for all accounts on the phone. DND key toggles all accounts on the
phone to ON or OFF.
Sets the phone to display custom screens after pressing the DND key, that list the
account(s) on the phone. The user can select a specific account for DND, turn
DND ON for all accounts, or turn DND OFF for all accounts.
Notes:
1.
If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode setting is ignored and the
phone behaves as if the mode was set to “Phone”.
2.
Using the Aastra Web UI, if you change the DND Key Mode to “phone”, all accounts
synchronize to the current setting of Account 1.
5-92
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
3
Configure a DND key on the phone using the procedures in the section, “Do Not Disturb (DND)” on
page 5-211.
4
Click
to save your changes.
The change takes effect immediately without a reboot.
Reference
For more information, see the section, “Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-211.
Call Forward Mode
t1
Call Forward (CFWD) on the IP phone allows incoming calls to be forwarded to
another destination. The phone sends the SIP message to the SIP proxy, which
then forwards the call to the assigned destination.
D
ra
f
An Administrator or User can configure CFWD on the phone-side by setting a
mode for the phone to use (Account, Phone, or Custom). Once the mode is set,
you can use the IP Phone UI to use the CFWD feature at Options->Call Forward
or by pressing a configured Call Forward softkey/programmable key/extension
module key.
The following describes the behavior for each CFWD mode.
•
•
Account mode - The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per
account basis. Pressing a configured CFWD key applies to the account in
focus.
Phone mode - The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD
configuration for all accounts (All, Busy, and/or No Answer). When you
configure the initial account, the phone applies the configuration to all other
accounts. (In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you configured is enabled.
All other accounts are grayed out but set to the same configuration.) Using the
Aastra Web UI, if you make changes to that initial account, the changes apply
to all accounts on the phone.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-93
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
•
Custom mode - The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a
specific account or all accounts. You can configure a specific mode (All,
Busy, and/or No Answer) for each account independently or all accounts. On
the 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i phones, you can set all accounts to ALL On or
ALL Off. On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT, you can set all
accounts to All On, All Off, or copy the configuration for the account in focus
to all other accounts using a CopytoAll softkey.
Note: If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the
mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set
to “Phone”.
ra
f
Reference
t1
The states you can set for Call Forward are All, Busy, No Answer. You can enable
different call forwarding rules/modes independently (for example, you can set
different phone numbers for Busy, All, and NoAns modes and then turn them on/
off individually. The behavior of these states is dependent on the mode (account,
phone, or custom) you configure on the phone.
For more information about how Call Forwarding works and how you can use it
on the IP Phones, see “Call Forwarding” on page 5-249.
D
Configuring Call Forward Key Mode
Use the following procedures to set the Call Forward key mode on the IP phones.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Call Forward
Key Mode Settings” on page A-127.
5-94
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
ra
f
t1
1
Call Forward
Key Mode
Parameter
D
Note: If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed, you can still configure Call
Forwarding via the IP Phone UI at the path Options->Call Forward.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-95
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
2
In the “Call Forward Key Mode” field, select a call forward mode to use on the phone.
Valid values are: Account, Phone, Custom. Default is Account.
•
•
ra
f
t1
•
account
The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per account basis. Pressing a configured
CFWD key applies to the account in focus.
phone
The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD configuration for all accounts (All, Busy,
and/or No Answer). When you configure the initial account, the phone applies the configuration
to all other accounts. (In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you configured is enabled. All other
accounts are grayed out but set to the same configuration.) Using the Aastra Web UI, if you make
changes to that initial account, the changes apply to all accounts on the phone.
custom
The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a specific account or all accounts. You can
configure a specific state (All, Busy, and/or No Answer) for each account independently or all
accounts. On the 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i phones, you can set all accounts to ALL On or ALL
Off. On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT, you can set all accounts to All On, All
Off, or copy the configuration for the account in focus to all other accounts using a CopytoAll
softkey.
3
Click
D
Notes:
1. If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed, you can still set the CFWD
modes via the IP Phone UI at the path Options->Call Forward.
2. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode setting is ignored and the
phone behaves as if the mode was set to “Phone”.
3. When configuring a CFWD state (All, Busy, No Answer) for an account, you must configure a
CFWD number for that state in order for the state to be enabled.
to save your changes.
The change takes effect immediately without a reboot.
Reference
For more information, see the section, “Call Forwarding” on page 5-249.
5-96
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED)
and Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN)
The IP Phones support Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint
Devices (LLDP-MED). LLDP-MED is designed to allow for things such as:
•
Auto-discovery of LAN policies (such as VLAN, Layer 2 Priority and
Diffserv settings) leading to "plug and play" networking.
•
Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet
endpoints.
•
Inventory management, allowing network administrators to track their
network devices, and determine their characteristics (manufacturer, software
and hardware versions, serial / asset number).
t1
On the IP Phones, LLDP-MED performs the following:
Supports the MAC/PHY configuration (e.g. speed rate/duplex mode).
•
Supports VLAN info from the network policy; this takes precedence over
manual settings.
•
Allows you to enable/disable LLDP-MED if required.
•
Allows you to configure time interval between successive LLDP Data Unit
(LLDPDU) frames.
•
Allows LLDP packets to be received from the LAN port.
D
•
ra
f
•
Allows the phone to use the location information, Explicit Congestion
Notification (ECN) Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN), sent
by the switch, as a caller ID for making emergency calls.
Note: If the phone receives location information in ECN ELIN format
(10 to 25 numeric string), the phone replaces the caller ID SIP header
with the ECN ELIN value and the SIP URI does not change. The phone
determines if this is an emergency number by checking the emergency
dial plan configured on the phone.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-97
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
The following table identifies the configuration parameters for LLDP and ELIN
and which method you can use to configure each parameter. This table also
indicates whether the parameters can be configured by an Administrator, a User,
or both.
Method of Configuration
Who Can Configure
lldp
Configuration Files
Administrator
lldp interval
Configuration Files
Administrator
use lldp elin
Configuration Files
Administrator
LLDP Support
IP Phone UI
Administrator
LLDP
Aastra Web UI
Administrator
LLDP Packet Interval
Aastra Web UI
Administrator
LLDP ELIN
Aastra Web UI
Administrator and User
t1
Parameter
Configuring LLDP-MED and ELIN
ra
f
Use the following procedures to configure LLDP-MED and ELIN on the IP
phones.
D
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “LLDP-MED and
ELIN Settings” on page A-129.
Use the following procedure to enable/disable LLDP-MED using the IP Phone
UI.
Note: You cannot configure the “LLDP Interval” or the “Use LLDP
ELIN” parameters via the IP Phone UI.
5-98
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu.
On the 6751i:
Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu.
Select Network Settings.
3
Select Ethernet & VLAN.
4
Select LLDP Support.
5
Press CHANGE to toggle the LLDP setting to Enabled or Disabled.
t1
2
This field enables or disables Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices
(LLDP-MED) on the IP Phone.
ra
f
Press DONE to save the change.
D
6
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-99
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Use the following procedure to configure LLDP-MED using the Aastra Web UI:
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings.
LLDP
D
ra
f
t1
LLDP Packet Interval
2
The “LLDP” field is enabled by default. To disable LLDP, click the check mark in the box to clear
the check mark.
3
In the “LLDP Packet Interval” field, enter the time, in seconds, between the transmission of
LLDP Data Unit (LLDPDU) packets.
The value of zero (0) disables this parameter. Valid values are 0 to 2147483647. Default is 30.
4
5-100
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Select Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
t1
5
The “Use LLDP ELIN” field is enabled by default. To disable LLDP ELIN, click the check mark in
the box to clear the check mark.
D
6
ra
f
Use LLDP ELIN
This field enables or disables the use of an Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN)
received from LLDP as a caller ID for emergency numbers.
7
Click
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
to save your changes.
5-101
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In
The Intercom feature allows you to press the configured Intercom button on the IP
phone and then enter the number you want to call to initiate an intercom call.
Intercom calls can be controlled either locally (phone-side) or by the SIP server
(server-side).
You can configure incoming and outgoing intercom calls on all phone models. A
User can configure incoming intercom calls only.
Outgoing Intercom Calls
t1
On outgoing intercom calls, an available unused line is found when the Icom
button is pressed. Since this line has no configuration, the phone applies an
existing configuration ("Outgoing Intercom Settings", Line, default is Line 1) to
this line in preparation for placing the intercom call. For example, an outgoing
intercom call can use the configuration of line 1 but places the actual intercom call
using line 9. Only an Administrator can configure outgoing intercom calls.
D
ra
f
A phone-side Intercom call indicates the phone is responsible for telling the
recipient that an intercom call is being placed, while a server-side intercom call
means the SIP server is responsible for informing the recipient. Server-side calls
require additional configuration of a prefix code. After pressing the Icom button
and entering the number to call, the phone automatically adds the prefix to the
called number and sends the outgoing call via the server.
For outgoing intercom calls, an administrator can configure the following
parameters:
Configuration File Parameters
Web UI Parameters
•
sip intercom type
•
Type)
•
sip intercom prefix code
•
Prefix Code
•
sip intercom line
•
Line
Note: To configure outgoing intercom calls using these parameters, see
“Configuring Intercom Calls Settings” on page 5-104.
5-102
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Incoming Intercom Calls
You can configure how the phone handles incoming intercom calls. You can
receive incoming intercom calls whether or not there are active calls on the phone.
The way the phone handles the call depends on the incoming intercom call
configuration. The following paragraphs describe the configuration parameters for
incoming intercom calls.
Microphone Mute
You can mute or unmute the microphone on the IP phone for intercom calls made
by the originating caller. If you want to mute the intercom call, you enable this
feature. If you want to unmute (or hear the intercom call), you disable this feature.
t1
Auto-Answer/Play Warning Tone
ra
f
The auto-answer feature on the IP phone allows you to enable or disable
automatic answering for an Intercom call. If “Auto-Answer” is enabled, the phone
automatically answers an incoming intercom call. If “Play Warning Tone” is also
enabled, the phone plays a tone to alert the user before answering the intercom
call. If “Auto-Answer” is disabled, the phone rejects the incoming intercom call
and sends a busy signal to the caller.
D
“Delay” before Auto-Answer
The IP Phones include support for the "delay" parameter (in the Alert-Info header,
used in conjunction with info=alert-autoanswer) in order to facilitate auto-answer
functionality. When present, the value of the "delay" parameter specifies the
length of time in seconds an IP phone rings before a call is auto-answered. If this
value of the "delay" parameter set to 0 (delay=0), then an incoming call is
immediately auto-answered. The absence of the parameter is considered as ring
forever.
In order for the delay functionality to operate, you must first enable Auto-Answer
on the IP Phone.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-103
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Allow Barge In
You can configure whether or not the IP phone allows an incoming intercom call
to interrupt an active call. The “sip intercom allow barge in” parameter controls
this feature. When you enable the sip intercom allow barge in parameter
(1 = enable in the configuration files), which is the default value, an incoming
intercom call takes precedence over any active call, by placing the active call on
hold and automatically answering the intercom call. When you disable this
parameter (0 = disable in the configuration files), and there is an active call, the
phone treats an incoming intercom call like a normal call and plays the call
warning tone. You can set this parameter using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.
t1
For incoming intercom calls, an administrator or user can configure the following
parameters:
Web UI Parameters
•
sip allow auto answer
•
Auto-Answer
•
sip intercom mute mic
•
Microphone Mute
•
sip intercom warning tone
•
Play Warning Tone
•
sip intercom allow barge in
•
Barge In
D
ra
f
Configuration File Parameters
Note: To configure incoming intercom calls using these parameters, see
“Configuring Intercom Calls Settings” on page 5-104.
Configuring Intercom Calls Settings
You can configure the Intercom feature using the configuration files or the Aastra
Web UI.
Note: An administrator can configure the incoming and outgoing
Intercom feature. A user can configure the incoming Intercom feature
only.
5-104
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Use the following procedures to configure Intercom calls on the IP phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for outgoing Intercom, see Appendix A, the
section, “Outgoing Intercom Settings” on page A-175.
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for incoming Intercom, see Appendix A, the
section, “Incoming Intercom Settings” on page A-177.
Aastra Web UI
Outgoing intercom settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only):
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Outgoing Intercom Settings.
2
Select an Intercom type for outgoing Intercom calls from the Type list box.
Valid values are Phone-Side, Server-Side, Off. Default is Off.
3
If Server-Side is selected, enter a prefix to add to the phone number in the "Prefix Code" field.
D
ra
f
t1
1
Note: For Sylantro servers, enter *96.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-105
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
If Phone-Side or Server-Side is selected, select a line from the Line list box for which you want the IP
phone to use as its configuration on the Intercom call.
Note: The IP phone uses the configuration from the line you select from this list box. The call itself is
made using the first available line at the time of the call.
5
Click
to save your changes.
Incoming intercom settings:
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Incoming Intercom Settings.
2
The "Auto-Answer" field is enabled by default. The automatic answering feature is turned on for the
IP phone for answering Intercom calls. To disable this field, uncheck the box.\
D
ra
f
t1
1
Note: If the Auto-Answer field is not checked (disabled), the phone rejects the incoming intercom call
and sends a busy signal to the caller.
3
The "Microphone Mute" field is enabled by default. The microphone is muted on the IP phone for
Intercom calls made by the originating caller. To disable this field, uncheck the box.
4
The "Play Warning Tone" field is enabled by default. If “Auto-Answer” is enabled, the phone plays a
warning tone when it receives in incoming intercom call. To disable this field, uncheck the box.
5-106
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
5
The "Allow Barge In" field is enabled by default. If an active line on the phone receives an incoming
intercom call, the active call is put on hold and the phone automatically answers the incoming
intercom call. To disable this field, uncheck the box.
6
Click
to save your changes.
Group Paging RTP Settings
t1
An Administrator or User can configure a specific key (softkey, programmable
key, or expansion module key) on the phone that allows you to send/receive a
Real Time Transport Protocol (RTP) stream to/from pre-configured multicast
address(es) without involving SIP signaling. This is called Group Paging on the IP
phones. You can specify up to 5 listening multicast addresses.
An Administrator can use the following parameters in the configuration files to set
Group Paging RTP Settings:
paging addr list
•
softkeyN type, topsoftkeyN type, prgkeyN type, or expmodX keyN type
•
sofkeyN label
•
softkeyN value, topsoftkeyN value, prgkeyN value, or expmodX keyN
value
D
ra
f
•
An Administrator or User can use the following parameters in the Aastra Web UI
to set Group Paging RTP Settings:
•
Paging Listen Addresses (Path: Basic Settings->Preferences->Group
Paging RTP Settings)
•
Key (Operation->Softkeys and XML, Programmable Keys, or
Expansion Module Keys)
Note: The Group Paging RTP Settings are dependant upon the setting for
the “Allow Barge In” parameter.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-107
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
How it works
After pressing a configured “Paging” key on the phone, the Phone sends RTP to a
preconfigured multicast address(es) (IP port). Any phone in the local network
then listens for RTP on the preconfigured multicast address(es) (IP port). For both
sending and receiving of the multicast RTP there is no sip signaling involved. The
Phone displays the multicast RTP sent/received address(es) to the user.
Note: Multicast RTP is one way only - from sender to the receiver (i.e.
from sender to the multicast address(es) (receiver)).
The phone uses a preconfigured G711 uLaw CODEC for multicast RTP.
t1
For Paging Systems, the phone only plays RTP traffic; users have the ability to
drop a rogue page. The recipient can drop the incoming page if required. The
recipient can also set Do Not Disturb (DND) to ignore any incoming pages.
ra
f
Note: For outgoing RTP multicasts, all other existing calls on the phone
are put on hold.
For incoming RTP multicasts, the ringing display is dependant on the “Allow
Barge-In” parameter. If this parameter is disabled, and there is not other call
D
on the phone, then the paging is automatically played via the preferred
audio device (see the model-specific IP Phone User Guide for setting
Audio Mode on the phone).
If there is an existing call on the phone, the call initially displays in the ringing
state. The user has the option to accept/ignore the call. If the “Allow Barge-In”
parameter is enabled, the RTP multicast call barges in, and any existing calls are
put on hold.
If an RTP multicast session already exists on the phone, and the phone receives
another incoming RTP multicast session, the priority is given to the first multicast
session and the second multicast session is ignored. The behavior for the
incoming calls in this case is also based on the setting for the “Allow Barge-in”
parameter. The incoming call is handled as if there were an existing call already
on the phone.
5-108
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring Group Paging RTP Settings
Use the following procedure to configure Group Paging RTP Settings using the
configuration files.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Group Paging
RTP Settings” on page A-179.
Use the following procedure to configure RTP streaming for Paging applications
using the Aastra Web UI.
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Group Paging RTP Settings.
D
ra
f
1
t1
Aastra Web UI
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-109
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
2
In the “Paging Listen Addresses” text box, enter the multicast IP address(es) and port number on
which the phone listens for incoming multicast RTP packets.
Note: Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format (for example,
224.0.0.2:10000,239.0.1.20:15000) If this field is blank, Paging listening capability is disabled on the
phone.
Click on Softkeys and XML.
or
Click on Programmable Keys.
or
Click on Expansion Module Keys.
4
Choose a key that you want to assign as the Paging Key and select Paging from the “Type” field.
5
In the “Label” field, enter a key label to assign to the Paging key (for example, “Group 1”).
D
ra
f
t1
3
5-110
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
6
In the “Value” field, enter a multicast IP address(es) and a port number for the Paging key. When you
press this key, the phone initiates an outgoing multicast RTP session to the specified address(es)
using the specified port. (For example, 224.0.0.2:10000).
Note: When you select Paging for the “Type” field, the “Line” field and state fields are disabled.
Click
to save your changes.
D
ra
f
t1
7
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-111
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Using the Configured Paging Key on the IP Phone
The following procedure describes the use of the Paging key. The procedures
assumes you have already configured the Paging key using the configuration files
or the Aastra Web UI.
Notes:
1.
Recipient of a Paging call can set a global “Do Not Disturb”
(DND) to ignore any incoming pages.
2.
For incoming Paging, the phones use the Intercom configuration
settings. The incoming Page is dependant on the “Allow Barge-In”
parameter setting and the “Idling/On Call” state.
Step
t1
Aastra IP Phone UI
Action
ra
f
On the IP Phone, press the key you configured for Paging (labeled as “Group 1” in the following
illustration).
Services
Dir
Callers
Icom
D
Tues Jan1 10:00am
Group 1
LAB
ACD
The phone opens a multicast RTP session and an outgoing OR incoming phone screen displays as
follows:
Paging
00:01
Drop
Press the Drop key to end the multicast RTP session and return to the idle screen.
Note: If you enable global DND on the phone, the incoming multicast RTP session is dropped.
5-112
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Key Mapping
There are hard keys on your phone, such as Hold, Redial, Xfer, and Conf that are
configured by default for specific call-handling features. (See the product-specific
User Guide for more information about these key functions.
Notes:
1.
On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT the Xfer and
Conf
keys are hard-coded by default on keys 5 and 6 to the left of the
LCD display and cannot be reassigned. The Xfer and Conf labels
display when you lift the handset. To disable these keys, see the
next paragraph.
ra
f
t1
2.
On the 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i, the Xfer and Conf keys are
assigned by
default to keys 5 and 6, respectively. These keys are programmable
keys and can be reassigned if applicable. To disable these keys, see
the next paragraph.
Enabling/Disabling Redial, Xfer, and Conf Keys
•
•
•
D
You can enable or disable the Redial, Xfer, and Conf keys as required using the
following parameters in the configuration files:
redial disabled
conference disabled
call transfer disabled
Valid values for this parameter are 0 (enabled) and 1 (disabled).
If this parameter is set to 1, the key is not active and is ignored if pressed by the
user. For "redial disabled" the value of 1 does not save the dialed number to the
"Redial List".
If this parameter is set to 0, the key is active and can be pressed by the user.
This feature is configurable via the configuration files only.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-113
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the Redial, Xfer, and Conf keys.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Mapping Key
Settings” on page A-189.
Mapping Redial and Conf Keys as Speeddials
You can map the Redial and Conference keys on the IP phone to use as speeddial
keys. When the Redial or Conference key is pressed, the number configured for
the key automatically speed dials. If no number is configured, the Redial and
Conference keys return to their original functionality.
t1
You can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
ra
f
Note: If you configure the Redial and Conference keys for speeddialing
on the 6757i CT Base Station, the Redial and Conference keys on the
6757i CT handset retain their original functionality. The Redial and
Conference keys on the handset are not configured for speeddial.
D
Use the following procedures to set the Redial and Conf keys as speeddial keys.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Mapping Key
Settings” on page A-189.
5-114
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences.
2
In the Key Mapping section, enter a number in the "Map Redial Key To" field, that the IP phone will
use to speeddial when the Redial key is pressed.
3
Enter a number in the "Map Conf Key To" field, that the IP phone will use to speeddial when the
Conf Key is pressed.
4
Click
D
ra
f
t1
1
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-115
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Using Redial Key for “Last Number Redial”
The IP phones have an enhanced redial user interface that allows a user to
quickly redial the last number that was dialed out from the phone. You can:
•
Press the REDIAL key twice to redial the last number dialed.
•
Press the REDIAL key once, scroll the list of numbers, then press the
REDIAL button again to dial the number that displays on the screen.
The “last number redial” feature for the Redial key is static and is not
configurable.
D
ra
f
t1
Note: You can use the Redial key during active calls.
5-116
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Ring Tones and Tone Sets
You can configure ring tones and ring tone sets on the IP phones.
Ring Tones
There are several distinct ring tones a user or administrator can select from to set
on the IP phones. You can enable/disable these ring tones on a global basis or on a
per-line basis.
The following table identifies the valid settings and default values for each type of
configuration method.
Ring Tone Settings Table
Global:
0 (Tone1)
1 (Tone 2)
2 (Tone 3)
3 (Tone 4)
4 (Tone 5)
5 (Silent)
ra
f
Configuration Files
Valid Values
t1
Configuration Method
Global:
0 (tone 1)
Per-Line:
-1 (global)
0 (Tone1)
1 (Tone 2)
2 (Tone 3)
3 (Tone 4)
4 (Tone 5)
5 (Silent)
Per-Line:
-1 (global)
Global:
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 3
Tone 4
Tone 5
Global:
Tone 1
D
IP Phone UI
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Default Value
5-117
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuration Method
Default Value
Global:
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 3
Tone 4
Tone 5
Silent
Global:
Tone 1
Per-Line:
Global
Tone 1
Tone 2
Tone 3
Tone 4
Tone 5
Silent
Per-Line:
Global
D
ra
f
t1
Aastra Web UI
Valid Values
5-118
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Ring Tone Sets
In addition to ring tones, you can configure ring tone sets on a global-basis on the
IP phones. Ring tone sets consist of tones customized for a specific country. The
ring tone sets you can configure on the IP phones are:
US (Default - also used in Canada)
•
Australia
•
Europe (generic tones)
•
France
•
Germany
•
Italy
•
Mexico
•
United Kingdom (UK)
t1
•
ra
f
When you configure the country's tone set, the country-specific tone is heard on
the phone for the following:
D
- dial tone
- secondary dial tone
- ring tone
- busy tone
- congestion tones
- call waiting tone
- ring cadence pattern
Important: You configure ring tones and tone sets using the Aastra Web UI, IP Phone UI, or configuration
files. However, when using the IP phone UI, you can set global configuration only.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-119
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring Ring Tones and Tone Sets
Use the following procedures to configure ring tones and tone sets on the IP
phones.
Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
For global configuration only:
t1
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for ring tones, see Appendix A, the section,
“Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings” on page A-143 or “Ring Tone Per-Line Settings” on page A-145.
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
2
Select Preferences.
3
Select Tones.
4
Select Set Ring Tone.
5
Select the type of ring tone (Tone 1 through Tone 5, or Silent).
6
Press Done to save the change.
7
Select Tone Set.
8
Select the country for which you want to apply the tone set.
D
ra
f
1
Valid values are Australia, Europe, France, Germany, Italy, Mexico, UK, and US. Default is US.
9
5-120
Press Done to save the change.
The ring tone and tone set you select is immediately applied to the IP phone.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences.
For global configuration:
ra
f
t1
1
In the "Ring Tones" section, select a country from the "Tone Set" field.
Valid values are Australia, Europe, France, Germany, Italy, Mexico, UK, and US. Default is US.
3
Select a value from the "Global Ring Tone" field.
D
2
Note: See the “Ring Tone Settings Table” on page 5-117 for valid values.
For per-line configuration:
4
In the "Ring Tone" section, select a line for which you want to set ring tone.
5
Select a value from the "LineN" field.
Note: See the “Ring Tone Settings Table” on page 5-117 for valid values.
6
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-121
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Priority Alerting
Priority alerting on the IP phones is a feature that allows incoming calls to trigger
pre-defined ringing or call waiting alert tones.
You can enable or disable priority alerting on the IP phone for the Asterisk,
Broadworks, and Sylantro servers using the configuration files and the Aastra
Web UI. Configuration of priority alerting is on a global-basis only.
How Priority Alerting Works
When the IP phone detects an incoming call, the phone firmware inspects the
INVITE request in the IP packet for an "Alert-Info" header.
t1
If it contains an "Alert-Info" header, the firmware strips out the URL and keyword
parameter and maps it to the appropriate Bellcore tone.
ra
f
If there is no keyword parameter in the "Alert-Info" header, or the INVITE
message contains no "Alert-Info" header, then the IP phone firmware uses the
Bellcore standard ring tone.
Asterisk/Broadworks Servers
D
The ring tone keywords that can display in the "Alert-Info" header for an Asterisk
and Broadworks server are:
Asterisk/Broadworks Server
Ring Tone Keywords
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
When the ring tone keywords appear in an "Alert-Info" header from an Asterisk or
Broadworks server, the IP phone maps the keywords to the default ring tone
patterns.
5-122
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Sylantro Servers
The ring tone keywords that can display in the "Alert-Info" header for a Sylantro
server are:
Sylantro Server
Ring Tone Keywords
t1
alert-acd (auto call distribution)
alert-community-1
alert-community-2
alert-community-3
alert-community-4
alert-emergency
alert-external
alert-group
alert-internal
alert-priority
When the ring tone keywords appear in an "Alert-Info" header from a Sylantro
server, the keyword is mapped to the ring tone pattern based on the configuration
you set in the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
ra
f
Ring Tone Patterns
D
In IP Telephony, different ringing patterns have different frequencies and
cadences. Ring cadence is the ringing pattern heard by the called party, before
they pick up the call.
On the IP phones, if you enable priority alerting when using an Asterisk or
Broadworks server, the IP phone uses the following Bellcore-specified tones by
default:
Ring Tone Pattern (Asterisk/Broadworks Servers)
Call Criteria
Bellcore Tones
internal calls
Bellcore-dr2
external calls
Bellcore-dr3
calls with contact list
Bellcore-dr4
calls with specific time frames
Bellcore-dr5
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-123
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
If you enable priority alerting when using a Sylantro server, you can specify the
Bellcore tone to be used for the following configurable criteria:
Ring Tone Pattern (Sylantro Servers)
Call criteria
Bellcore tones for each call criteria
Normal ringing (default)
Bellcore-dr2
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
Silent
t1
alert-acd (auto call distribution)
alert-community-1
alert-community-2
alert-community-3
alert-community-4
alert-emergency
alert-external
alert-group
alert-internal
alert-priority
A System Administrator can configure the ring tone cadences if required, using
the configuration files. The following table identifies the different Bellcore ring
tone patterns and cadences.
Maximum
Duration
(ms)
2s On
4s Off
1800
3600
2000
4000
2200
4400
Ringing
Silent
Long
630
315
800
400
1025
525
Ringing
Silent
Long
Long
630
3475
800
4000
1025
4400
Ringing
Silent
Short
315
145
400
200
525
525
Ringing
Silent
Short
315
145
400
200
525
525
Ringing
Silent
Long
630
2975
800
4000
1025
4400
Ringing
Silent
Short
200
145
300
200
525
525
Ringing
Silent
Long
800
145
1000
200
1100
525
Ringing
Silent
Short
200
2975
300
4000
525
4400
450
500
550
Pattern
1
Ringing
Silent
2
D
Bellcore-dr2
Cadence
Nominal
Duration
(ms)
ra
f
Bellcore Tone
(Standard)
Minimum
Duration
(ms)
Pattern
ID
Bellcore-dr3
Bellcore-dr4
Bellcore-dr5
5-124
3
4
5
Ringing
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
D
ra
f
t1
Note: If the "Do Not Disturb" (DND) or the "Call Forward" (CFWD)
feature is enabled on the server-side, and the user is still waiting for a call,
the "Bellcore-dr5" is a ring splash tone that reminds the user that these are
enabled.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-125
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring Priority Alerting and Ring Tone Cadences using the
Configuration Files
Use the following procedures to configure priority alerting and ring tone cadences
on the IP phones.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections,
• “Priority Alert Settings” on page A-155.
• “Bellcore Cadence Settings” on page A-160.
D
ra
f
t1
Note: You can configure Bellcore cadences using the configuration files
only.
5-126
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring Priority Alerting using the Aastra Web UI.
Use the following procedure to configure Priority Alerting using the Aastra Web
UI.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences.
2
In the "Priority Alerting Settings" section, enable the "Enable Priority Alerting" field by checking the
check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box).
D
ra
f
t1
1
For Sylantro Servers:
3
Select a ring tone pattern for each of the following fields:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4
Group
Internal
External
Emergency
Priority
auto call distribution
community-1
community-2
community-3
community-4
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-127
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Call Waiting Tones
Call Waiting is a feature that tells you if a new caller is trying to contact you when
you are already on the phone. A discreet tone alerts you to the new caller, so you
can answer your second incoming call by putting your first caller on hold.
The IP phones use the following Bellcore-specified call waiting tones.
Bellcore
Call-Waiting Tone
Pattern
ID
Pattern
Minimum
Duration
(ms)
Nominal
Duration
(ms)
Maximum
Duration
(ms)
1
Tone On
270
300
330
Bellcore-dr2
CallWaitingTone2
2
Tone On
Tone Off
90
90
100
100
110
110
Bellcore-dr3
CallWaitingTone3
3
Tone On
Tone Off
90
90
100
100
110
110
Tone On
Tone Off
Tone On
Tone Off
90
90
90
90
100
100
100
100
110
110
110
110
Tone On
Tone Off
270
90
300
100
330
110
4
ra
f
Bellcore-dr4
CallWaitingTone4
t1
CallWaitingTone 1
D
For Asterisk and Broadworks servers, call waiting tones are specified by the
default Bellcore tones indicated in the table Ring Tone Pattern (Asterisk/
Broadworks Servers) on page -123.
For Sylantro servers, call waiting tones are specified by the Bellcore tones you
configure in the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files. See the table Ring Tone
Pattern (Sylantro Servers) on page -124.
Reference
For more information about enable/disabling call waiting on the IP Phone, see the
section, “Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone” on page 5-67.
5-128
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception)
Directed call pickup is a feature on the phones that allows a user to intercept a call
on a ringing phone which is part of the same interception group. You can use the
Directed call pickup feature on the phone in two ways:
With the existing BLF feature on Asterisk, a user can dial “*76” followed by
the extension to pick up a ringing call on another phone. (For more
information about BLF, see “Busy Lamp Field (BLF)” on page -169
•
Using XML, a user can intercept a call by selecting an extension from a list
and then pressing a “Pickup” softkey/programmable key. To use the Directed
call pickup feature from an XML application, you must list all ringing
extensions using the AastraIPPhoneTextMenu XML object in an XML
script. This allows the user to select the ringing extension from a text menu
without having to dial. The following illustration shows an example of how
this feature displays to the LCD from an XML application.:
t1
•
D
ra
f
Ringing Extensions
201
212
225
234
Pickup
Done
(For more information about using the AastraIPPhoneTextMenu object, see
Appendix F, the section, “Text Menu Object (Menu Screens)” on page F-6.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-129
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
BLF and XML softkeys/programmable keys monitor the states of an extension.
The extension states can be one of three states: "busy", "ringing" and "idle". If the
monitored extension is in the "ringing" state with an incoming call, and "Directed
call pickup" is enabled, pressing the BLF or XML key can pick up the incoming
call on the monitored extension.
Note: The Asterisk and Epygi Quadro 4x/16x IP PBX servers support
this feature. For details about Asterisk support, contact Aastra Technical
Support.
Directed Call Pickup Prefix (optional)
ra
f
t1
The optional “directed call pickup prefix” allows you to enter a specific prefix
string (depending on what is available on your server), that the phone
automatically dials when dialing the Directed Call Pickup number. For example,
for Broadsoft servers, you can enter a value of *98 for the “directed call pickup
prefix”. When the phone performs the Directed Call Pickup after pressing a BLF
or BLF/List softkey, the phone prepends the *98 value to the designated extension
of the BLF or BLF/List softkey when dialing out.
How this feature works when Directed Call Pickup is enabled with BLF or
BLF/List
Phone A monitors Phone B via BLF/List.
2.
Phone C calls Phone B; Phone B rings.
3.
4.
D
1.
If you press the BLF/List softkey on Phone A, it picks up the ringing line on
Phone B.
Phone C connects to Phone A.
How this feature works when Directed Call Pickup is disabled with BLF or
BLF/List
5-130
1.
Phone A monitors Phone B via BLF/List.
2.
Phone C calls Phone B; Phone B rings.
3.
If you press the BLF/List softkey on Phone A, it performs a speeddial to
Phone B.
4.
Phone C and Phone A are ringing Phone B on separate lines (if available).
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Notes:
1. The default method for the phone to use is Directed Call Pickup over
BLF if the server provides applicable information. If the Directed Call
Pickup over BLF information is missing in the messages to the server, the
Directed Call Pickup by Prefix method is used if a value for the prefix
code exists in the configuration.
2.
You can define only one prefix at a time for the entire BLF/List.
3. The phone that picks up displays the prefix code + the extension
number (for example, *981234 where prefix key = *98, extension =
1234).
t1
You can enable/disable “Directed Call Pickup” using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.
D
ra
f
Note: The “Directed Call Pickup” feature is disabled by default.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-131
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Enabling/Disabling Directed Call Pickup
Use the following procedure to enable or disable the Directed Call Pickup feature
on the IP phone.
Configuration Files
To enable/disable Directed Call Pickup on the IP phone using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
section, “Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) Settings” on page A-184.
t1
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Directed Call Pickup Settings.
2
Enable the "Directed Call Pickup" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled.)
3
(optional) Enter a prefix in the "Directed Call Pickup Prefix" field. For example, *98.
This prefix is appended to the beginning of the Directed Call Pickup number when dialed from the
BLF or BLF/List softkey.
D
ra
f
1
5-132
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
Enable the "Play a Ring Splash" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled.)
The IP phone plays a short "ring splash" when there is an incoming call on the BLF monitored
extension. If the "Play a Ring Splash" parameter is enabled, and the host tone is idle, the tone plays
a "ring splash".
5
Click
to save your changes.
Configuring BLF/BLF List for Directed Call Pickup
t1
Use the following procedure to configure BLF/BLF List for Directed Call Pickup
in the configuration files.
ra
f
Note: You must enable Directed Call Pickup before performing these
procedures. See “Enabling/Disabling Directed Call Pickup” on
page 5-132.
D
Configuration Files
To set BLF or BLF\List in the configuration files for Directed Call Pickup, see Appendix A, the sections:
• “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192.
• “BLF List URI Settings” on page A-230.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-133
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Use the following procedure to configure BLF or BLF/List for Directed Call
Pickup in the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Directed Call Pickup Settings.
2
Enable the "Directed Call Pickup" field by checking the check box.
3
(optional) Enter a prefix in the "Directed Call Pickup Prefix" field. For example, *98.
This prefix is appended to the beginning of the Directed Call Pickup number when dialed from the
BLF or BLF/List softkey.
4
Enable the "Play a Ring Splash" field by checking the check box.
D
ra
f
t1
1
The IP phone plays a short "ring splash" when there is an incoming call on the BLF monitored
extension. If the "Play a Ring Splash" parameter is enabled, and the host tone is idle, the tone plays
a "ring splash".
5-134
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
5
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module .
D
ra
f
t1
Note: Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6757i Key
Screen is shown as an example.
6
Select a softkey or programmable key to configure.
7
In the "Type" field, select "BLF" (Asterisk), "BLF\List" (BroadSoft BroadWorks).
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-135
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
8
For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT softkeys:
In the "Label" field, enter the name of the person who’s extension you are monitoring (if “Type” is
BLF).
Note: If BLF\List type is selected, no label value is required. The BroadWorks BLF List name is
configured in the "BLF List URI" field instead.
9
In the "Value" field, enter a value to associate with the softkey or programmable key.
For example, for BLF, the value is the extension you want to monitor.
For BLF\List, the value is an identifier for the list of numbers you are monitoring.
10
Click
11
In the "Line" field, select a line number that is actively registered to the appropriate SIP proxy you are
using.
12
In the "BLF List URI" field, enter the name of the BLF list defined on the BroadSoft BroadWorks
Busy Lamp field page for your particular user.
For example, my6757i-blf-list@as.broadworks.com.
ra
f
t1
to save your changes.
Note: The value of the BLF\List URI parameter must match the list name configured. Otherwise, no
values display on the 6757i screen and the feature is disabled.
13
Select the line state (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) that you want to apply to the BLF
softkey or programmable key.
14
Click
5-136
D
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring XML for Directed Call Pickup
Use the following procedure to configure XML for Directed Call Pickup in the
configuration files.
Notes:
1.
Before implementing this procedure, you must create an XML
application that the phone uses when the XML softkey or programmable
key is pressed. This XML application must be entered as a URI in the
“Value” field of the XML key. For information about creating an XML
script, see Appendix F, the section, “Text Menu Object (Menu Screens)”
on page F-6.
ra
f
t1
2.
You must enable Directed Call Pickup before performing these
procedures. See “Enabling/Disabling Directed Call Pickup” on
page 5-132.
Configuration Files
D
To set XML in the configuration files for Directed Call Pickup, see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/
Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-137
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Use the following procedure to configure XML for Directed Call Pickup in the
Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Directed Call Pickup Settings.
2
Enable the "Directed Call Pickup" field by checking the check box.
3
(optional) Enter a prefix in the "Directed Call Pickup Prefix" field. For example, *98.
This prefix is appended to the beginning of the Directed Call Pickup number when dialed from the
BLF or BLF/List softkey.
4
Enable the "Play a Ring Splash" field by checking the check box.
D
ra
f
t1
1
The IP phone plays a short "call waiting tone" when there is an incoming call on the BLF monitored
extension. If the "Play a Ring Splash" parameter is enabled, and the host tone is idle, the tone plays
a "ring splash".
5-138
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
5
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module .
D
ra
f
t1
Note: Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6757i Key
Screen is shown as an example.
6
Select a softkey or programmable key to configure.
7
In the "Type" field, select "XML”.
8
For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT softkeys:
In the "Label" field, enter the name of the person who’s extension you are monitoring.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-139
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
9
In the "Value" field, enter the URI that the phone uses to display the XML application to the LCD.
For example, http://65.205.71.13/xml/startup/key.php?user=$$SIPREMOTENUMBER$$.
Note: For more information about creating an XML script to use with Directed Call Pickup, see
Appendix F, the section, “Text Menu Object (Menu Screens)” on page F-6.
10
Select the line state (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) that you want to apply to the XML
softkey or programmable key.
11
Click
D
ra
f
t1
to save your changes.
5-140
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys
You can configure the softkeys, programmable keys (9143i and 6753i have
programmable keys only), feature keys, and expansion module keys to perform
specific functions on the IP phones.
Note: When entering definitions for softkeys in the configuration files,
the “#” sign must be enclosed in quotes.
Softkeys (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT)
Softkeys
6
6
6755i
6
Programmable
Keys
Lines
Available
Handset
Keys
Available
Not Applicable
-
9
-
Not Applicable
-
9
15
36 to 108*
(Model M670i)
6
9
-
-
9
-
-
9
15
D
9480i
9480i CT
Expansion Module
Keys
ra
f
IP Phone
Model
t1
The 9480i, 9480i CT, and 6755i IP phone have 6 softkeys you can configure to
perform specific functions, The 6757i and 6757i CT IP phones have 12 softkeys
you can configure. With up to 3 expansion modules attached to a 67xi model
phone, you can get an additional 108 softkeys (M670i) or an additional 180
softkeys (M675i) to configure. The following table provides the number of
softkeys you can configure, and the number of lines available for each type of
phone.
60 to 180**
(Model M675i)
6757i
12
36 to 108*
(Model M670i)
60 to 180**
(Model M675i)
6757i CT
12
36 to 108* on Base
Station
(Model M670i)
60 to 180** on Base
Station
(Model M675i)
*The M670i expansion module consists of 36 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP
phone totaling 108 softkeys. Valid for all 67xi model phones EXCEPT the 6751i.
**The M675i expansion module consists of 60 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP
phone totaling 180 softkeys. Valid for 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT phones.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-141
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
State-Based Softkeys (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT only)
Users and administrators can configure a specific state to display when a softkey
is being used. Available states you can configure for each softkey include:
•
idle - The phone is not being used.
•
connected - The current line is in an active call (or the call is on hold)
•
incoming - The phone is ringing.
•
outgoing - The user is dialing a number, or the far-end is ringing.
•
busy - The current line is busy because the line is in use or the line is set as
“Do Not Disturb”.
t1
The following table identifies the applicable default states for each type of
softkey you can configure on the IP phone.
Default States
None
All states disabled.
Line
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
Speeddial
DND
BLF
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
D
BLF List
ra
f
Softkey Type
Auto Call
Distribution
(ACD)
idle
Directed Call
Pickup (DCP)
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
Group Call
Pickup (GCP)
5-142
XML
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
WebApps
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
Flash
All states disabled.
Sprecode
connected
Park
connected
Pickup
idle, outgoing
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Default States
Last Call Return
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
Call Forward
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
BLF/Xfer
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
Speeddial/Xfer
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
Directory
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
Callers List
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
Intercom
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
Services
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
Phone Lock
All states disabled.
Paging
All states disabled.
Empty
idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy
t1
Softkey Type
ra
f
You can enable or disable the softkey states using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI. In the Aastra Web UI, you disable a state by unchecking the box
for that operational state.
In the configuration files, you use the following parameters to enable and disable
operational states:
softkeyN states
D
•
You can enter multiple values (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) for
the "softkeyN state" parameter. For example:
softkeyN states: idle connected
You must associate the softkeyN state parameter with a specific softkey. In the
following example, the softkeyN states parameter is associated with softkey 12:
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-143
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
softkey12
softkey12
softkey12
softkey12
type: speeddial
label: voicemail
value *89
states: outgoing
D
ra
f
t1
Note: The IP phone idle screen condenses the softkeys. So in the
previous example, softkey 12 will appear in position 1 if no other
softkeys are set. A softkey type of "empty" does not display on the idle
screen at all. For more information about the softkey type of "empty" see
Appendix A, the section, “Softkey Settings for 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i,
6757i, 6757i CT” on page A-193.
5-144
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuration Example
The following example illustrates the use of the "softkeyN states" parameter, and
the "softkeyN type" parameter with a value of empty. For clarity purposes, only
the "softkeyN type" and "softkeyNstates" parameters are shown.
softkey1
softkey1
softkey3
softkey3
softkey4
softkey5
softkey5
softkey6
softkey6
type: line
states: idle connected
type: dnd
states: idle
type: line
type: empty
states: connected
type: speeddial
states: connected
t1
The following table shows how the keys in the example above would display on
the IP Phone UI.
softkey1
softkey2
Idle
Key 1
Connected
Key 2
D
Softkey
ra
f
Note: The "empty" key type allows a softkey to be removed quickly by
deleting the softkey information from the configuration file.
Notes
Line displays for softkey1.
Key 1 in connected state is the Drop key. Idle
and connected display as applicable.
(not used)
(not used)
Softkey2 is not displayed.
softkey3
Key 2
(not used)
DND displays for softkey3. Idle displays as
applicable.
softkey4
Key 3
Key 3
Line displays for softkey4. Default state
values (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing)
display as applicable.
softkey5
(not used)
Key 4 (blank)
A blank displays for softkey5. Connected
displays as applicable.
softkey6
(not used)
Key 5
Speeddial displays for softkey6. Connected
displays as applicable.
Softkeys and programmable keys are configurable using the Aastra Web UI or the
configuration files.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-145
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Programmable Keys (9143i, 6753i, 6755i)
The following table provides the number of softkeys and programmable keys you
can configure, and the number of lines available for each type of phone.
Softkeys
Expansion Module
Keys
Programmable
Keys
Lines
Available
Handset
Keys
Available
9143i
-
Not Applicable
7
9
-
6753i
-
36 to 108*
(Model M670i)
6**
9
-
6755i
6
36 to 108*
(Model M670i)
6
9
-
IP Phone
Model
60 to 180**
(Model M675i)
t1
*The M670i expansion module consists of 36 softkeys. You can have up to 3 expansion modules on an IP phone totaling
108 softkeys.
**On the 6753i, two of the 6 programmable keys are the DELETE and SAVE keys and can be programmed only if
Administrator allows.
ra
f
Softkey/Programmable Key/Expansion Module Key Functions
D
You can configure the softkeys and programmable keys on the phones, and any
attached expansion module keys on the 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT to
perform specific functions using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. The
following table identifies the available functions of the softkeys, programmable
keys, and expansion module keys on the IP phones. Available functions may vary
on each model phone.
The following Key Functions Table lists the available functions for the keys on
the IP Phones and Expansion Modules.
Note: These functions apply to the 9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT, 6753i, 6755i,
6757i, 6757i CT and Expansion Modules unless specifically stated
otherwise. The 6751i IP Phone does not have programmable keys or
softkeys.
5-146
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Key Functions Table
Softkey/
Programmable
Key Function
Configuration
File Parameter
Aastra Web UI
Parameter
Description
None
none
None
Indicates not setting for the key.
Line
line
Line
Indicates the key is configured for line use.
Speeddial
speeddial
Speeddial
Indicates the key is configured for speeddial
use.
t1
You can configure a softkey to speeddial a
specific number. Optionally, you can also
configure a speeddial key to dial prefix
numbers. With this option, the prefix numbers
automatically dial when you press the softkey,
and the phone waits for you to enter the
remaining numbers to dial out.
Busy Lamp Field
(BLF)
D
ra
f
For more information about speeddial prefixes,
see “Speeddial Prefixes” on page 5-167.
blf
BLF
You can also create speeddial keys and edit
the keys using the IP Phone keypad. For more
information about speeddial keys and editing
speeddial keys, see your Model-specific User
Guide for more information.
Indicates the key is configured for Busy Lamp
Field (BLF) use. A user can dial out on a BLF
configured key. You can also set a BLF
subscription period.
For more information about BLF, see the
section “Busy Lamp Field (BLF)” on
page 5-169.
For more information about BLF Subscription
Period, see “BLF Subscription Period” on
page 5-176.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-147
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Softkey/
Programmable
Key Function
Busy Lamp Field
List
Configuration
File Parameter
list
Aastra Web UI
Parameter
BLF/List
Description
Indicates the key is configured for BLF list use.
A user can dial out on a BLF\List configured
key.
For more information on BLF, see the section
“Busy Lamp Field (BLF)” on page 5-169.
Auto Call
Distribution
(For Sylantro Servers) Indicates the key is
configured for automatic call distribution
(ACD). ACD allows the Sylantro Server to
distribute calls from a queue to registered IP
Phones (agents). You can also set an ACD
subscription period.
t1
Auto Call
acd
Distribution (ACD)
For more information about ACD, see the
section “Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for
Sylantro Servers)” on page 5-188.
Directed Call
Pickup
D
dcp
Directed Call
Pickup (DCP)/
Group Call Pickup
(GCP)
ra
f
For more information about ACD subscription
period, see “ACD Subscription Period” on
page 5-198.
Do Not Disturb
(DND)
dnd
Do Not Disturb
(For Sylantro Servers) Indicates the key is
configured for either Directed Call Pickup or
Group Call Pickup. The DCP/GCP feature
allows you to intercept - or pickup - a call on a
monitored extension(s).
For more information about DCP/GCP, see the
section “Directed Call Pickup/Group Call
Pickup (for Sylantro Servers)” on page 5-202.
Indicates key is configured for "do not disturb"
use.
For more information on DND, see the section
“Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-211.
5-148
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Softkey/
Programmable
Key Function
Configuration
File Parameter
Extensible Markup xml
Language) (XML)
Aastra Web UI
Parameter
XML
Description
Indicates the key is configured to accept an
XML application for accessing customized
XML services. You can also specify a URL for
an XML key.
For more information on XML, see the section
“XML Customized Services” on page 5-311.
WebApps
webapps
WebApps
(Not applicable to
the CT handsets)
Indicates the key is pre-programmed to access
an Aastra XML-based application called,
“xml.myaastra.com“.
t1
On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and
6757i CT phones, the WebApps softkey
displays on softkey 1 on the idle screen by
default. You can also access Web Apps from
the Services menu on these phones.
D
ra
f
On the 9143i and 6753i, you can access
WebApps from the Services menu, or from a
configured programmable key. By default,
WebApps displays in the Services menu.
Flash
flash
Flash
On the 6751i phone, you can access
WebApps from the Services menu only.
For more information on the WebApps key,
see the section “Web Applications Keys” on
page 5-351.
Indicates the key is set to generate a flash
event when it is pressed, or when a feature
key is pressed on the 6757i CT handset. The
IP phone generates flash events only when a
call is connected and there is an active RTP
stream (for example, when the call is not on
hold).
For more information about the Flash key, see
your Model-specific User Guide.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-149
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Softkey/
Programmable
Key Function
Sprecode
Configuration
File Parameter
sprecode
Aastra Web UI
Parameter
Sprecode
Description
Indicates the key is set to automatically
activate specific services offered by the server.
For example, if the sprecode value of *82 is
configured, then by pressing the key, *82
automatically activates a service provided by
the server. The value you enter for this field is
dependent on the services provided by the
server.
For more information about the Flash key, see
your Model-specific User Guide.
park
Park
Indicates the key is set to be used as a park
key to park an incoming call.
t1
Park
For more information on park, see the section
“Park/Pick Up Key” on page 5-234.
pickup
Pickup
Indicates the key is set to be used as a pickup
key to pick up a parked call.
ra
f
Pickup
For more information on pickup, see the
section “Park/Pick Up Key” on page 5-234.
Call Forward
lcr
Last Call Return
D
Last Call Return
(LCR)
call forward
Call Forward
(For Sylantro Servers) Indicates the key is set
to be used to dial the last call that came in on
that line.
For more information on lcr, see the section
“Last Call Return (lcr) (Sylantro Servers)” on
page 5-245.
Indicates the key is set to be used to access
the Call Forward menus on the phone.
For more information about call forwarding,
see the section “Call Forwarding” on
page 5-249.
BLF/Xfer
blf/xfer
Call Forward
Indicates the key is set to be used as a BLF
key AND as a Transfer key.
For more information about the BLF/Xfer
feature, see the section “BLF/Xfer and
Speeddial/Xfer Keys” on page 5-178.
5-150
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Softkey/
Programmable
Key Function
Speeddial/Xfer
Configuration
File Parameter
speeddial/xfer
Aastra Web UI
Parameter
Speeddial/Xfer
Description
Indicates the key is set to be used as a
speeddial key AND as a Transfer key.
For more information about the Speeddial/Xfer
feature, see the section “BLF/Xfer and
Speeddial/Xfer Keys” on page 5-178.
Speeddial/Conf
speeddial/conf
Speeddial/Conf
Indicates the key is set to be used as a
speeddial key AND as a conference key.
Callers List
t1
For more information about the Speeddial/
Conf feature, see the section “Speeddial/
Conference Key (not applicable to the 6751i)”
on page 5-184.
callers
Callers List
Indicates the key is set for accessing the
Callers List.
Icom
directory
Directory
D
Directory
ra
f
For more information on the Callers List, see
the section “Callers List” on page 5-288.
icom
Intercom
Indicates the key is set for accessing the
Directory List.
For more information about the Directory List,
see the section “Directory List” on page 5-297.
Indicates the key is set to be used as the
Intercom key. For more information about
using the Intercom key, see your
model-specific Aastra IP Phone User’s Guide.
For information about other Intercom features,
see “Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with
Auto-Answer and Barge In” on page 5-102.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-151
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Softkey/
Programmable
Key Function
Conference
Configuration
File Parameter
conf
Aastra Web UI
Parameter
Conference
(Applicable to the
6753i only)
Description
Indicates the key is configured as a
conference key (for local conferencing).
(For Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers) An
Administrator can also enable centralized
conferencing on the IP Phones.
For more information about using the
Conference key, see your Model-specific
User’s Guide.
(Applicable to the
6753i only)
Transfer
Phone Lock
(Not applicable to
the cordless
handsets on CT
models)
5-152
Indicates the key is configured as a transfer
key for transferring calls.
For more information about using the Xfer key,
see your Model-specific User’s Guide.
services
Services
D
Services
xfer
ra
f
Transfer
t1
For information about enabling centralizing
conferencing, see “Centralized Conferencing
(for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on
page 5-359.
phone lock
Phone Lock
Indicates the key is set to access Services,
such as, Directory List, Callers List, Voicemail,
and any other XML applications configured on
the phone.
For more information about using the Services
key, see your Model-specific User’s Guide.
Indicates the key is configured as a phone lock
key, allowing you to press this key to lock/
unlock the phone.
For more information about the lock/unlock
key, see “Locking IP Phone Keys” on
page 5-49.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Softkey/
Programmable
Key Function
Paging
Configuration
File Parameter
paging
Aastra Web UI
Parameter
Paging
Description
Indicates the softkey is set for Group Paging
on the phone. Pressing this key automatically
sends a Real Time Transport Protocol (RTP)
stream to pre-configured multicast address(es)
without involving SIP signaling.
For more information about the Paging key,
see “Group Paging RTP Settings” on
page 5-107.
empty
Empty
(Not applicable to
programmable keys
or expansion
module keys)
Indicates the key is configured to force a blank
entry on the IP phone display for a specific
key. If a particular key is not defined, it is
ignored.
t1
Empty
For more information about empty keys, see
your Model-specific User’s Guide.
ra
f
Reference
D
For more information about key functions for your model phone, see your
Model-specific User’s Guide.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-153
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring Softkeys and Programmable Keys
Use the following procedures to configure the softkeys and programmable keys
on the IP phone.
Configuration Files
D
ra
f
t1
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections,
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192.
5-154
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module .
D
ra
f
t1
Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6757i Key Screen is
shown as an example.
2
Select a key to configure.
For Softkeys and Expansion Module Keys:
3
In the "Type" field, select the type of softkey you want to configure.
Reference: For available type values on each IP phone model, see Appendix A, the section,
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192.
4
If applicable, enter a label in the “Label” field.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-155
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
5
If applicable, in the "Value" field, enter a value to associate with the softkey. For example, for a
speeddial value, you can enter a number you want to use for the speeddial key, or 12345+ as a
speeddial prefix.
6
If applicable, in the "Line" field, select the line for which you want to associate the softkey.
7
Some softkey types allow you to configure specific operational states.
Operational states display to the IP phone when a softkey is used.
To enable/disable an operational state, click the "Idle", "Connected", "Incoming", or "Outgoing"
fields to check or uncheck the box.
Note: Operational states are not applicable to expansion modules.
8
Click
to save your changes.
9
t1
For programmable keys:
In the “Hard Key” field, select the programmable key type you want to configure.
Reference: For available type values on each IP phone model, see Appendix A, the section,
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192.
In the "Value" field, enter a value to associate with the programmable key. For example, for a
speeddial value, you can enter a number you want to use for the speeddial key, or 12345+ as a
speeddial prefix.
11
In the "Line" field, select the line for which you want to associate the programmable key.
12
Click
5-156
ra
f
10
D
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
6757i Cordless (CT) Feature Keys
In addition to the softkeys on the 6757i CT, this phone also has handset keys you
can configure with specific features. You can use the Aastra Web UI to configure
the handset keys.
Note: You configure the handset keys using the Aastra Web UI
(Operation->Handset Keys) or by pressing the "F" button on the
handset.
You can program up to 15 feature keys on the 6757i CT handset with specific
functions using the Aastra Web UI.
The following table identifies the functions available for all 15 handset keys and
the default functions for each key.
t1
Description
Line 1 key - Selects line one
Line 2 key - Selects line two
Line 3 key - Selects line three
Line 4 key - Selects line four
Icom key – Enter handset list to select handset to call
Directory key – Activate directory feature
Callers key – Activate callers feature
Transfer key - Activate transfer feature
Conference key - Activate conference feature
Public key – Toggle between public & private call mode
No function selected. Line 5 key (if available) - Selects line
five.
No function selected. Line 6 key (if available) - Selects line
six.
No function selected. Line 7 key (if available) - Selects line
seven.
No function selected. Line 8 key (if available) - Selects line
eight.
No function selected. Line 9 key (if available) - Selects line
nine.
ra
f
Key Function
Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Icom
Dir
Callers
Xfer
Conf
Public
None
D
Handset Key
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
None
13
None
14
None
15
None
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-157
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Feature Key Programming Guidelines
The following are guidelines to use when programming the feature keys on the
handset:
All handsets paired with the same Base Station have the same programmed
functions since the web interface applies the functions to all the handsets
paired with that base.
•
A newly registered handset or handset that was out-of-range during the
programming needs to perform an "off-hook and on-hook" sequence in order
for the newly programmed function to be broadcasted to the affected
handsets. Simply press the v key from the idle state to go off-hook. Then,
press the y key to go back on-hook.
•
Duplicate functions can exist in the feature key as there is no filtering or
duplicate checking done on the handset or the base.
•
If no line keys are programmed for the feature key, the handset is restricted to
intercom calls only.
•
If all 12 programmable functions have been programmed to "None", the user
is presented with a List empty message when the feature key is pressed.
ra
f
t1
•
List empty
D
Use web page to
configure
5-158
•
For security reasons, the user has 180 seconds (3 minutes) to complete the
programming. Otherwise, the phone displays the following error:
** Error **: Session expired, Please reload page.
•
For security reasons, the user must submit the page from the same browser
that was used to load the page. If the user tries to submit the page from any
other IP address, the following error displays:
** Error ** Session invalid. Different Client IP Addresses. —
Please reload page
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Handset Feature Key Functions
You can configure the features keys on the 6757i CT handset to perform specific
functions using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.The following table
identifies the available functions for the feature keys on the 6757i CT handset.
The following Handset Key Functions Table lists the available functions for the
keys on the 6757i CT IP Phone.
Handset Key Functions Table
None
Configuration
File Parameter
none
Aastra Web UI
Parameter
None
Description
Indicates the key is disabled.
t1
Feature Key
Function
This option is available from Web UI only.
line
(Lines 1 through 9
are available for
selection)
icom
Icom
D
Icom
Line
Directory
Indicates the key is configured for line use.
ra
f
Line
dir
Dir
Indicates the key is set to be used as the
Intercom key.
For more information about the Icom key, see
your Aastra IP Phone 6757i CT User’s Guide.
For information about other Intercom features,
see “Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with
Auto-Answer and Barge In” on page 5-102.
Indicates the key is set for accessing the
Directory List.
For more information about the Directory List,
see the section “Directory List” on page -297.
Callers
callers
Callers
Indicates the key is set for accessing the
Callers List.
For more information on the Callers List, see
the section “Callers List” on page -288.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-159
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Feature Key
Function
Transfer
Configuration
File Parameter
xfer
Aastra Web UI
Parameter
Xfer
Description
Indicates the key is configured as a transfer
key for transferring calls.
For more information about the Xfer key, see
your Aastra IP Phone 6757i CT User’s Guide.
Park
park
Park
Indicates the key is set to be used as a park
key to park an incoming call.
For more information on park, see the section
“Park/Pick Up Key” on page 5-234.
Pickup
pickup
PickUp
Indicates the key is set to be used as a pickup
key to pick up a parked call.
Conference
conf
t1
For more information on pickup, see the
section “Park/Pick Up Key” on page 5-234.
Conf
Indicates the key is configured as a
conference key (for local conferencing).
D
ra
f
(For Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers) An
Administrator can also enable centralized
conferencing on the IP Phones.
5-160
For more information about using the
Conference key, see your Aastra IP Phone
6757i CT User’s Guide.
For information about enabling centralizing
conferencing, see “Centralized Conferencing
(for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on
page 5-359.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Feature Key
Function
Public
Configuration
File Parameter
public
Aastra Web UI
Parameter
Public
Description
Indicates the key is configured to toggle from
public to private mode. A public and private
key can be used when at a line item in the
Directory List. The Private key toggles a
number in the Directory List to private. The
Public key allows a number in the Directory
List to be sent to the handsets. A 6757i CT
accepts a maximum of 50 entries with the
public attribute.
For more information about the public/private
keys, see your Aastra IP Phone 6757i CT
User’s Guide.
flash
Flash
Indicates the key is set to generate a flash
event when it is pressed, or when a feature
key is pressed on the 6757i CT cordless
handset. The IP phone generates flash events
only when a call is connected and there is an
active RTP stream (for example, when the call
is not on hold).
ra
f
t1
Flash
D
For more information about the Flash key, see
your Aastra IP Phone 6757i CT User’s Guide.
Reference
For more information about features key functions for your 6757i CT, see your
Aastra IP Phone 6757i CT User’s Guide.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-161
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring Handset Feature Keys
You can program up to 15 feature keys on the 6757i CT IP phone using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Use the following procedure to program
the feature keys on your 6757i CT Base Station and all paired handsets.
Use the following procedures to configure the IP phone handset feature keys.
Configuration Files
D
ra
f
t1
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Handset Feature Key Settings for the 9480i CT and 6757i CT” on page A-214.
5-162
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Operation->Handset Keys.
2
Select the handset key you want to program.
3
Select the function for that handset key from the "Key Function" field.
4
Click
D
ra
f
t1
1
to save the function you selected to the handset key.
The key programming information is sent to the 6757i Base Station and to all the cordless handsets
associated with that Base Station. Any key programmed to "None" does not appear in the handset’s
list.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-163
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Customizing the Key Type List in the Aastra Web UI
An Administrator can configure which key types display in the Aastra Web UI list
for a Softkey, Programmable Key, Expansion Module Key, and/or Feature Key
(CT Models). Currently, in the Aastra Web UI for a phone, you can select a type of
key from a list of approximately 26 key types to assign to a softkey,
programmable key, expansion module key, and/or feature key.
Using the configuration files, you can specify key types to display in the key type
list that apply to a User’s environment.
D
ra
f
t1
List of Available Keys Types
5-164
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
t1
Example of a
List of Configured Keys Types
(None, Line, XML, Empty)
In addition to being able to specify which key types display in the list, the
Administrator can also determine in which order the key types display.
ra
f
You can use the following configuration file parameters to control which key
types to display and specify in which order to display them in:
•
softkey selection list
•
feature key selection list
D
If no value is specified for the “softkey selection list” and/or “feature key
selection list” parameters, the key “Type” list displays all of the key types by
default.
If an Administrator configures specific key types for a phone in the configuration
file, and the phone for which he downloads the configuration to already has key
types configured on it, those key types display in the key list for those keys, in
addition to the key types specified by the Administrator. For example, a phone has
a Park key and a Pickup key already configured on the phone, and the
Administrator downloads a configuration file to the phone that has specific key
types of None, Line, Speeddial, and XML. After the configuration file is
downloaded, the Park key list will show None, Line, Speeddial, XML, and Park;
the Pickup key list will show None, Line, Speeddial, XML, and Pickup; all other
keys that were configured as None before the download will show only None,
Line, Speeddial, and XML.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-165
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Notes:
1.
Any key types configured that do not apply to the phone are
ignored.
2.
The SAVE and DELETE keys appear by default as Keys 1 and 2 on
the 6753i and 9143i, unless specifically allowed by the Administrator to
be configurable.
3.
An Administrator must use the English value when configuring the
key types in the configuration files.
5.
After configuring specific key types for a phone, the key types in
the Aastra Web UI display the same for both the User and Administrator
Web interfaces for that phone.
t1
Customizing the Key Type List Using the Configuration Files
ra
f
Use the following procedure to configure the Key Type List that displays in the
Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
D
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Customizing the Key Type List” on page A-223.
5-166
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Speeddial Prefixes
The normal function of the speeddial option allows you to configure a specific
key on the phone to dial a number quickly by pressing the configured key. For
example, if you had the following speeddial configuration in the configuration
files:
softkey1
softkey1
softkey1
softkey1
type: speeddial
label: Office
value: 5552345
line: 1
after you press softkey1 on the phone, it dials the Office number at 555-2345 on
line 1.
type: speeddial
label: Europe Office
value: 1234567+
line: 2
ra
f
softkey2
softkey2
softkey2
softkey2
t1
A new feature for the speeddial option allows you to configure a preset string of
numbers followed by a “+”. This feature allows the phone to speeddial a prefix
number and then pause to let you enter the remaining phone number. You can use
this feature for numbers that contain long prefixes. For example, if you had the
following speeddial configuration in the configuration files:
D
after you press softkey2 on the phone, it dials the prefix number automatically and
pauses for you to enter the remaining number using the keypad on the phone.
You can configure the speeddial prefix using the configuration files or the Aastra
Web UI.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-167
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add or Edit a Speeddial Key
The IP Phones allow you to set a parameter, “speeddial edit” using the
configuration files that allows you to enable or disable the ability to add a
speeddial key or edit a speeddial key from the IP Phone UI. Disabling this
parameter prevents a user from adding or editing a speeddial key.
The default for this parameter is enabled, allowing you to create and edit
speeddial keys on the phone using the Press-and-hold feature, softkeys,
programmable keys, expansion module keys and key pad, speeddial menu in the
IP Phone UI, and the SAVE TO key.
If this parameter is set to disabled, it blocks the user from using any of the features
on the phone to create or edit a speeddial key.
t1
Enabling/Disabling the Ability to Add or Edit a Speeddial Key Using
the Configuration Files
ra
f
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the ability to add and edit a
speeddial key.
Configuration Files
D
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add/Edit Speeddial Keys” on page A-230.
5-168
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Busy Lamp Field (BLF)
The BLF feature on the IP phones allows a specific extension to be monitored for
state changes. BLF monitors the status (busy or idle) of extensions on the IP
phone.
Note: The BLF setting is applicable to the Asterisk server only.
Example
t1
A Supervisor configures BLFs on his phone for monitoring the status of a
worker’s phone use (busy or idle). When the worker picks up his phone to make a
call, a busy indicator on the Supervisor’s phone shows that the worker’s phone is
in use and busy.
BLF Setting (For use with Asterisk)
D
ra
f
On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT, the busy and idle indicators
show on the IP phone screen display next to the softkey or programmable key
configured for BLF functionality. When the monitored user is idle, an icon with
the handset on-hook shows next to the BLF softkey or programmable key. When
the monitored user is on an active call, a small telephone icon is shown with the
handset off-hook.
On the 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i, the LED lights next to each BLF programmable
key illuminate steady to indicate the monitored line is off-hook or unregistered.
The LED goes off when the line is idle.
Note: You can configure a maximum of 50 BLFs on the M670i and
M675i Expansion Modules.
You can configure a BLF key on the IP Phones using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-169
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
BLF\List Setting
(For use with the BroadSoft Broadworks Rel 13 or higher platform only)
The BLF\List feature on the IP phones is specifically designed to support the
BroadSoft Broadworks Rel 13 Busy Lamp Field feature. This feature allows the
IP phone to subscribe to a list of monitored users defined through the BroadWorks
web portal.
In addition to monitoring the idle and busy state, the BLF\List feature also
supports the ringing state. When the monitored user is idle, there is a small
telephone icon shown with the handset on-hook. When the monitored user is in
ringing state, there is a small bell icon shown. When the monitored user is on an
active call then a small telephone icon is shown with the handset off-hook.
t1
On the 9143i and 6753i phone, the LED lights next to each BLF programmable
key illuminate steady to indicate the monitored line is off-hook or unregistered.
The LED goes off when the is idle. When the monitored extension is ringing, the
LED flashes.
ra
f
Note: The Broadworks BLF feature is not the same as the Broadworks
Shared Call Appearance (SCA) feature and does not permit call control
over the monitored extension.
D
You can configure a BLF/List key on the IP Phones using the configuration files
or the Aastra Web UI. You can also specify a BLF list URI that the phone uses to
access the required BLF list. You can specify a BLF List URI using the “list uri”
parameter in the configuration files or the BLF List URI field in the Aastra Web
UI at the path Operation->Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Expansion Module
Keys->Services->BLF List URI. For more information about the “list uri”
parameter, see Appendix A, the section, “BLF List URI Settings” on page A-230.
Example
A receptionist has a 6757i running Broadsoft firmware that subscribes to a list of
extensions from the BroadWorks Application Server. Each monitored extension
in the list shows up individually on the 6757i screen next to a softkey button. The
softkey icons on the screen change depending on the state of the extensions.
5-170
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
D
ra
f
t1
On the 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i running Broadsoft firmware, the programmable
key LEDs illuminate either flashing, solid, or turn off depending on the state of
those extensions.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-171
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Asterisk BLF Configuration
You can enable the BLF feature on Asterisk to enable monitoring for specific
extensions. BLF on Asterisk is possible through the “hint” extension parameter.
Add the following in the Asterisk extensions.conf file for each target extension
being monitored.
For example:
exten -> 9995551212,hint,SIP/9995551212
Add the following in the Asterisk sip.conf file for each subscriber if it is not
defined already.
[9995551212]
Subscribecontext=sip
t1
For example:
ra
f
BroadSoft BLF Configuration
D
You can enable the BLF feature on BroadSoft BroadWorks Rel 13 or higher
through the BroadWorks Web Portal. Each user must have the Busy Lamp Field
service enabled for their user. The user must add each desired extension to the
“Monitored Users List” on the Busy Lamp Field service page and also enter in a
list name for the monitored users BLF list on the same page.
Changes to the “Monitored Users List” are dynamic and the Aastra IP phones are
automatically updated without requiring a restart.
Reference
For sample BLF configurations, see Appendix D, “Sample BLF Softkey
Settings.”
5-172
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring BLFs
Use the following procedures to configure BLF and BLF\List on the IP phone.
Configuration Files
To set BLF or BLF\List in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections,
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192.
“BLF List URI Settings” on page A-230.
D
ra
f
t1
•
•
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-173
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module .
D
ra
f
t1
Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6757i Key Screen is
shown as an example.
2
Select a softkey, programmable, or expansion module key to configure.
3
In the "Type" field, select "BLF" (Asterisk), "BLF\List" (BroadSoft BroadWorks).
5-174
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT softkeys:
In the "Label" field, enter the name of the person who’s extension you are monitoring (if “Type” is
BLF).
Note: If BLF\List type is selected, no label value is required. The BroadWorks BLF List name is
configured in the "BLF List URI" field instead.
5
In the "Value" field, enter a value to associate with the softkey or programmable key.
For example, for BLF, the value is the extension you want to monitor.
For BLF\List, the value is an identifier for the list of numbers you are monitoring.
6
Click
7
In the "Line" field, select a line number that is actively registered to the appropriate SIP proxy you are
using.
8
In the "BLF List URI" field, enter the name of the BLF list defined on the BroadSoft BroadWorks
Busy Lamp field page for your particular user.
For example, my6757i-blf-list@as.broadworks.com.
ra
f
t1
to save your changes.
Note: The value of the BLF\List URI parameter must match the list name configured. Otherwise, no
values display on the 6757i screen and the feature is disabled.
Click
to save your changes.
D
9
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-175
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
BLF Subscription Period
On the IP phones, you can set the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone
resubscribes the BLF subscription service after a software/firmware upgrade or
after a reboot of the IP phone.
In the configuration files, you enter the following parameter with a valid value to
set the BLF subscription period:
sip blf subscription period:
The minimum value for this 120 seconds (2 minutes). The default is 3600 (1
hour).
t1
Setting this parameter to a value lower than 3600 allows the configured BLF
feature to become active more quickly after a software/firmware upgrade or after
a reboot of the IP phone. If you enter a value lower than 120 for this parameter,
the default value (3600) will be used by the IP phone.
ra
f
You can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring BLF Subscription Period
D
Use the following procedures to configure the BLF subscription period on the IP
phone.
Configuration Files
To configure the BLF subscription period on the IP phones using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
section, “Advanced SIP Settings” on page A-92.
5-176
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.
2
Enter a value, in seconds, from 120 (2 min) to 3600 (1 hour) in the "BLF Subscription Period" field.
3
Click
D
ra
f
t1
1
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-177
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer Keys
The IP Phones have a transfer (Xfer) enhancement feature you can use with the
BLF and Speeddial keys - BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer.
The BLF key allows one or more extensions to be monitored, and once there is
any state change with those extensions, the key shows the status of the monitored
lines. The Xfer key allows a call to be transferred to other recipients blindly or
consultatively.
The Speeddial key allows a number to be dialed quickly by pressing one key
configured for speeddialing. After answering a call, the recipient can transfer the
call to an extension by:
Pressing Xfer key
2.
Entering the number of the extension or pressing speeddial or BLF key.
3.
Pressing Xfer key again
t1
1.
D
ra
f
The BLF and Speeddial transfer enhancement feature provides a simpler way of
transferring calls using the keys called BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer. The BLF/
Xfer key combines the BLF and Xfer key's functionality together allowing the
user to transfer calls or use BLF with one key. Similarly, the Speeddial/Xfer key
combines the Speeddial key and Xfer key's functionality together allowing the
user to press one key to speeddial and transfer calls.
Note: It is recommended that you enable the “switch focus to
ringing” parameter when using the BLF and Speeddial transfer key
feature. For more information about this parameter, see “Switch Focus
to Ringing Line” on page 5-79.
5-178
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
BLF/Xfer Key Requirements and Functionality
•
BLF/Xfer and BLF
A BLF/Xfer key can be configured for subscribing to an extension and
monitor the status of the extension, similar to the BLF key functionality.
Changes of the state of the monitored extension are indicated by a LED / Icon.
•
BLF/Xfer and Blind Transfer Calls
When the focused line is in the “Connected” state, pressing the BLF/Xfer key
transfers the call to the extension unconditionally, disregarding the status of
the monitored extension.
•
t1
If transferring a call to an extension fails, a message “Transfer Failed”
displays on the phone, and you can reconnect the call (get the call back) by
pressing the line key again.
BLF/Xfer and Call forward
BLF/Xfer and Speeddial
D
•
ra
f
When the focused line is in the “Ringing” state, pressing the BLF/Xfer key
forwards the call to the extension unconditionally, disregarding the status of
the monitored extension.
When the focused line and the monitored extension are idle, pressing the
BLF/Xfer key causes the phone to go offhook and dial the number of the
extension.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-179
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Speeddial/Xfer Key Requirements and Functionality
The Speeddial/Xfer key has the following capabilities:
•
Speeddial/Xfer and Speeddial
When the phone is in the “Idle” state, pressing the Speeddial/Xfer key causes
the phone to go offhook and dial the predefined extension.
•
Speeddial/Xfer and Blind Transfer
When the phone is connected to a call, pressing the Speeddial/Xfer key blind
transfers the call to the predefined target.
•
t1
If transferring a call fails, a message “Transfer Failed” displays, and you can
reconnect the call (get the call back) by pressing the line key again.
Speeddial/Xfer and Call Forward
D
ra
f
When the phone is in the “Ringing” state, pressing the Speeddial/Xfer key
forwards the call to the predefined extension.
5-180
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring the BLF/Xfer Key and the Speeddial/Xfer Key Using the
Configuration Files
You use the following parameters in the configuration files to configure the
BLF/Xfer key and/or Speeddial/Xfer key on the IP Phone.
Softkey Parameters
Programmable Key Parameters Expansion Module Parameters
softkeyN type
softkeyN label
softkeyN value
softkeyN line
softkeyN states
prgkeyN type
prgkeyN value
prgkeyN line
expmodN keyN type
expmodN keyN label
expmodN keyN value
expmodN keyN line
topsoftkeyN type
topsoftkeyN label
topsoftkeyN value
topsoftkeyN line
type: speeddialxfer
label: BX7801
value: 7801
line: 1
states: idle connected incoming outgoing busy
D
softkey1
softkey1
softkey1
softkey1
softkey1
ra
f
Examples:
t1
Top Softkey Parameters
prgkey1 type: blfxfer
prgkey1 value: 35
prgkey1 line: 1
Refer to the following in Appendix A to configure a BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer
key on the IP phone using the configuration files.
Configuration Files
To set a BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer key using the configuration files, see Appendix A, “Softkey/
Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-181
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring the BLF/Xfer Key and the Speeddial/Xfer Key Using the
Aastra Web UI
You configure the BLF/Xfer key and/or the Speeddial/Xfer Key on the IP phone
similar to configuring a BLF key or speeddial key using the Aastra Web UI. Use
the following procedure to configure BLF/Xfer and/or Speeddial/Xfer.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML.
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Keys.
D
ra
f
Bottom Keys Tab (6757i example).
t1
1
5-182
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
ra
f
t1
Top Keys Tab (6757i example)
Choose a key that you want to assign the BLF/Xfer key or a Speeddial/Xfer key to, and select BLF/
Xfer or Speeddial/Xfer from the “Type” field.
3
In the “Label” field, enter a key label to assign to the BLF/Xfer key (for example, “BX35”).
4
In the “Value” field, enter the monitored extension (for example, “35”).
5
In the “Line” field, select the line for which you want to use the key functionality.
6
On the Bottom Key tab, in the States field, select the state(s) (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing,
busy) for which you want to use on the key.
D
2
Note: States are not applicable to programmable keys.
7
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-183
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Speeddial/Conference Key (not applicable to the 6751i)
The IP Phones allow you to configure a softkey/programmable key/expansion
module key to be used as a speeddial conference key (Speeddial/Conf key) while
remaining in the current call. This key allows a user on a call, to conference
another party at a pre-defined number while remaining in the conference.
For example, while on an active call, a user can use the Speeddial/Conf key to dial
a recording service and have the resulting conference recorded.
Note: If not currently in a conference, the Speeddial/Conf key is disabled
on the active call.
t1
How it Works
D
ra
f
If you configure a softkey/programmable key/expansion module as a Speeddial/
Conf key, and you press this key while on an active call, the focused line changes
to the dialing line. A Cancel softkey displays on the phone (only those phones
that have LCDs larger then 3 lines), allowing you to abort the conference
speeddial if required. The message "Ringing..." displays below the number when
the far end is ringing. The message "Conf. Unavailable" briefly displays when a
conference is already in progress or when the CT handset is in use. The active call
is not put on hold when the speeddial number is dialed.
Limitations for Speeddial/Conference Key
The following are limitations for the Speeddial/Conference key:
•
The CT handsets are not supported.
•
The feature is not compatible with centralized conferencing.
The softkey/programmable key is called "Speeddial/Conf" in the Web UI drop
down list. In the configuration file, use "speeddialconf" as the softkey type.
5-184
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring the Speeddial/Conf Key Using the Configuration Files
To configure the Speeddial/Conf key using the configuration files, you enter
“speeddialconf” for the key type. The following parameters are examples you
can use to configure the Speeddial/Conf key:
softkey1 type: speeddialconf
softkey1 label: Sales
softkey1 value: 5645
softkey1 line: 3
t1
topsoftkey1 type: speeddialconf
topsoftkey1 label: Sales
topsoftkey1 value: 5645
topsoftkey1 line: 3
prgkey1 type: speeddialconf
prgkey1 value: 5645
prgkey1 line: 1
D
ra
f
expmod1 key1 type: speeddialconf
expmod1 key1 label: Sales
expmod1 key1 value: 5645
expmod1 key1 line: 3
Refer to the following in Appendix A to configure a Speeddial/Conf key on the IP
phone using the configuration files.
Configuration Files
To set a Speeddial/Conf key using the configuration files, see Appendix A, “Softkey/Programmable Key/
Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-185
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring the Speeddial/Conf Key Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure the Speeddial/Conf Key using the
Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Operation->Sottkeys and XML.
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module Keys.
D
ra
f
Speeddial/Conf
Option
t1
1
2
In the “Type” field, select Speeddial/Conf from the list of options.
3
In the “Label” field, enter a key label to assign to the Speeddial/Conf key (for example, “Sales”).
4
In the “Value” field, enter the number that the phone dials when the Speeddial/Conf key is pressed
(for example, “4556”).
5
In the “Line” field, select the line for which you want to use the key functionality.
5-186
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
6
For phones with softkeys:
In the States field, select the state(s) (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) for which you want
to use on the key.
Note: States are not applicable to programmable keys (6753i, 9143i).
Click
to save your changes.
D
ra
f
t1
7
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-187
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers)
The IP phones support an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature for Sylantro
servers. The ACD feature allows the Sylantro server to distribute calls from a
queue to registered IP phone users (agents).
To use the ACD feature on an IP phone, the administrator must first configure an
an ACD softkey or programmable key. When an IP phone user wants to subscribe
to a queue (in order to receive incoming calls), the user presses the ACD key. The
IP phone UI prompts the user to specify the following information:
User ID: the phone number(s) used to login into the queue.
•
Password: the password used to login to the queue.
•
Available/unavailable: Shows the current status of the IP phone. Specifies if
the IP phone user is available/unavailable to receive a call from the queue.
This parameter is set to “unavailable” by default.
t1
•
ra
f
When the IP phone user is ready to receive calls from the server, the user logs into
a queue. Depending on the server configuration, the IP phone is either in an
“unavailable” or “available” state. If the phone is set to “available” then the server
begins to distribute calls to this phone immediately. If the phone is set to
unavailable, then server waits until the IP phone user manually changes the phone
status to “available” (using the IP phone UI) before distributing calls.
D
Whenever the IP phone user answers a call, or misses a call, the server
automatically changes the phone’s status to unavailable. The server updates it
database with this new information and no longer distributes calls to this phone.
The IP phone will remain in this state until:
— the IP phone user makes himself “available” again.
— the ACD auto-availability timer expires. This occurs only if the
administrator has configured an ACD auto-availability timer as described
in “ACD Auto-Available Timer” on page 5-189.
The IP phone user can also choose to manually change the phone status to
unavailable, using the IP Phone UI.
Note: It is recommended you configure no more than a single ACD
softkey or programmable key per IP phone.
5-188
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
ACD Auto-Available Timer
Whenever the IP phone user answers a call, or misses a call, the server
automatically changes the phone’s status to unavailable. The administrator can
control how long the IP phone remains in the unavailable state by configuring an
auto-available timer. When the timer expires, the IP phone status is automatically
changed to available. The default setting for the timer is 60 seconds.
You use the following parameters to configure an ACD Auto-Available Timer in
the configuration files:
•
acd auto available
•
acd auto available timer
Configuring an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Key
Softkey Examples
Top Softkey Examples
Programmable Key
Examples
prgkey1 type: acd
topsoftkey1 type: acd
topsoftkey1 label: sales prgkey1 line: 1:
topsoftkey1 line: 1
topsoftkey1 states: idle
D
softkey1 type: acd
softkey1 label: sales
softkey1 line: 1
softkey1 states: idle
ra
f
t1
You can configure an ACD key on softkeys, programmable keys, and extension
module keys. The following table illustrates examples of configuring an ACD key
on the phone.
Extension Module
Examples
expmod1 key1 type: acd
expmod1 key1 label: sales
expmod1 key 1 line: 1
Use the following procedures to configure an ACD key n the IP phone.
Configuration Files
To configure an ACD key using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/Programmable
Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-189
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring the ACD Auto-Available Timer.
Configuration Files
D
ra
f
t1
To configure the ACD Auto-Available Timer using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “ACD
Auto-Available Timer Settings” on page A-186.
5-190
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring an ACD Key Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure an ACD softkey, programmable key, or
expansion module key using the Aastra Web UI. This procedure uses the 6755i IP
phone as an example.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module .
D
ra
f
t1
Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6757i Key Screen is
shown as an example.
2
In the “Type” field, select Auto Call Distribution.
3
In the “Label” field, specify a name for this ACD softkey. The Label helps identify which queue you
are subscribing to when you login. (This field does not apply to the 6753i and the 9143i.)
For example: Sales
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-191
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
In the “Line” field, select the line which the IP phone uses to subscribe to the queue.
For example: Line 1
5
Click
to save your changes.
Configuring the ACD Auto-Available Timer Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure an ACD auto-available timer using the
Aastra Web UI.
t1
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Auto Call Distribution Settings.
2
In the “Auto Available” check-box, click Enabled.
3
In the “Auto Available Timer” field, specify the length of time (in seconds) before the IP phone
state is automatically reset to “available.” Valid values are 0 to 120 seconds. Default is 60.
D
ra
f
1
For example: 60
4
5-192
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Using the ACD Feature on your IP Phone
The ACD feature allows you to login to a phone queue in order to receive
distributed calls on your IP phone. To login to a phone queue, your system
administrator must preconfigure an ACD softkey or programmable key on your
Aastra IP phone.
For models 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT, the ACD softkey is labeled
according to your network requirements. Check with your administrator to verify
the label assigned to the ACD softkey on your IP phone. The label usually
describes which phone queue you are accessing when you press the ACD softkey.
t1
For example, suppose the administrator wants to configure an ACD softkey to
allow an IP phone user to log into the Customer Support phone queue. The
administrator assigns the label “Support” to the softkey, so it is easily
recognizable to the IP phone user. When the IP phone user wants to subscribe to
the Customer Support queue, the user presses the Support key and can log in.
ra
f
Once logged in to the queue, you can make himself “available” or “unavailable”
to take calls by pressing the Available/Unavailable key on the phone UI. The
server monitors your IP phone status. When you set the IP phone to “available,”
the server begins distributing calls to your phone. When you set the IP phone to
“unavailable,” the server temporarily stops distributing calls to your phone.
D
The icon that appears next to the ACD softkey or programmable key on the IP
Phone UI reflects your current status. In the example shown below, the
icon
shows the current status of this IP phone user as “logged off.”
Services
Dir
Callers
Icom
L1
Mon Jan 2 10:37am
ACD softkey
for this example
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
o Support
5-193
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
This icon changes when you log on to the phone queue and are available to take
calls. The icon changes again when you are busy with an active call. The table
below describes the meaning of the LED, and each icon, as they may appear on
your IP phone:
Phone Model
Status: Logged In
and Available
Status: Unavailable Logged Out
9143i
Solid Red LED
Blinking red LED
No LED
9480i, 9480i CT
Solid Red LED
icon
Blinking Red LED
Blinking
icon
No LED
icon
6753i
Solid Red LED
Blinking red LED
No LED
Blinking Red LED
Blinking
icon
No LED
icon
D
ra
f
t1
6755i, 6757i, 6757i Solid Red LED
CT
icon
5-194
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Logging In to a Phone Queue (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT)
Use the following procedure to log into a phone queue from your Aastra IP phone.
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press the ACD softkey on your IP phone.
Note: Check with your administrator to verify the label assigned to the ACD softkey on your IP
phone.
t1
The login screen (see below) appears. In this example, the ACD softkey accesses the Customer
Support phone queue and is labelled “Support.”
Icom
ra
f
Services
Dir
Callers
ACD: Support
User ID:
Password:
D
Backspace
2
Log In
Cancel
To log into the phone queue, use your IP phone keypad to enter the following information:
User ID: The phone number you use to access the queue.
Password: The password you use to access this queue.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-195
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
3
Press the Log In softkey.
You are logged into the phone queue. Once you log in, examine the IP Phone UI, and note the
following information:
If your IP phone status is set to “available” then the server will begin to distribute phone calls from
this queue to your IP phone.
•
If your IP phone status remains “unavailable” after you log in, then you must manually change the
state to “available” in order to start receiving calls.
•
To temporarily stop receiving calls, you can switch the IP phone status to “unavailable.”
t1
•
5-196
•
You use the IP Phone UI to manually switch the IP phone state back to available, or
•
The availability “timer” for your IP phone expires. This only occurs if your administrator has
configured an auto-availability timer on your IP phone.
To Log out of the queue, press the Log Out softkey. The server no longer distributes phone calls to
your IP phone.
D
4
ra
f
While you are on a call (or miss a call that has been distributed to your IP phone), your IP phone
status automatically switches to “unavailable.” Your IP phone remains in the unavailable state until
one of the following things occur:
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Logging In To a Phone Queue (6753i and 9143i)
Use the following procedure to log into a phone queue from your Aastra IP phone.
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press the ACD programmable key on your IP phone.
2
To login to the phone queue, use your IP phone keypad to enter the following information:
User ID: The phone number you use to access the queue.
Password: The password you use to access this queue.
Select Login.
t1
3
You are logged into the phone queue. Once you log in, examine the IP Phone UI, and note the
following information:
If your IP phone status is set to “available” then the server will begin to distribute phone calls from
this queue to your IP phone.
•
If your IP phone status remains “unavailable” after you log in, then you must manually change the
state to “available” in order to start receiving calls.
•
To temporarily stop receiving calls, you can switch the IP phone status to “unavailable.”
D
ra
f
•
While you are on a call (or miss a call that has been distributed to your IP phone), your IP phone
status automatically switches to “unavailable.” Your IP phone remains in the unavailable state until
one of the following things occur:
4
•
You use the IP Phone UI to manually switch the IP phone state back to available, or
•
The availability “timer” for your IP phone expires. This only occurs if your administrator has
configured an auto-availability timer on your IP phone.
To Log out of the queue, select Logout.
The server no longer distributes phone calls to your IP phone.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-197
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
ACD Subscription Period
On the IP phones, you can set the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone
resubscribes the ACD subscription service after a software/firmware upgrade or
after a reboot of the IP phone.
In the configuration files, you enter the following parameter with a valid value to
set the ACD subscription period:
sip acd subscription period:
The minimum value for this 120 seconds (2 minutes).
The default is 3600 (1 hour).
t1
Setting this parameter to a value lower than 3600 allows the configured ACD
feature to become active more quickly after a software/firmware upgrade or after
a reboot of the IP phone. If you enter a value lower than 120 for this parameter,
the default value (3600) will be used by the IP phone.
ra
f
You can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring ACD Subscription Period
D
Use the following procedures to configure the ACD subscription period on the IP
phone.
Configuration Files
To configure the ACD subscription period on the IP phones using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
section, “Advanced SIP Settings” on page A-92.
5-198
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.
2
Enter a value, in seconds, from 120 (2 min) to 3600 (1 hour) in the "ACD Subscription Period" field.
3
Click
D
ra
f
t1
1
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-199
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
BLA Subscription Period
The IP Phones include a SIP BLA subscription period parameter that allows an
Administrator to set the amount of time, in seconds, of the BLA subscription
period.
If this parameter is set to zero (0), the phone uses the value specified for the BLA
expiration in the subscribe message received from the server. If no value is
specified in the Subscribe message received from the server, the phone uses the
default value of 300 seconds.
You can configure this parameter using the configuration files or the Aastra Web
UI.
t1
Configuring the BLA Subscription Period
Use the following procedures to configure the BLA Subscription Period.
ra
f
Configuration Files
D
To configure the BLA subscription period on the IP phones using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
section, “Advanced SIP Settings” on page A-92.
5-200
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.
2
In the “BLA Subscription Period” field, enter a value, in seconds, that the phone waits to receive
a BLA subscribe message from the server. If you specify zero (0), the phone uses the value
specified for the BLA expiration in the subscribe message received from the server. If no value is
specified, the phone uses the default value of 300 seconds. Valid values are 0 to 3700. Default is
300 seconds.
3
Click
D
ra
f
t1
1
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
to save your changes.
5-201
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup (for Sylantro Servers)
Aastra IP phones and any attached Expansion Modules support the Directed Call
Pickup (DCP) and Group Call Pickup (GCP) features.
The Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup feature allows you to intercept - or
pickup - a call on a monitored extension. An Administrator or User can configure
this feature using the Aastra Web UI to create a DCP or GCP softkey on the IP
phone. When you configure a DCP softkey, you specify the extension that you
want to monitor. Then, when the monitored extension receives a call, you press
the DCP softkey to “pickup” (intercept) it. If the monitored extension receives
multiple incoming calls simultaneously, the IP Phone UI displays a list of
incoming calls. You select a call from this list, and are connected to the call.
ra
f
t1
When you configure a GCP softkey, you specify the ring group that you want to
monitor for incoming calls. For example, suppose an Operator configures a GCP
softkey to monitor incoming calls for a specific ring group (extensions
2200-2210). When an incoming call is received on any of these extensions, the
Operator presses the GCP softkey and is connected to the call. If multiple
incoming calls are received simultaneously, the Operator does the following
actions:
Presses the GCP softkey. The Operator Phone UI displays the current list of
incoming calls (see below).
•
Selects an extension to “pickup” first.
•
D
•
Presses the Pickup softkey. The Operator is connected to the incoming call.
Select an extension
Press the Pickup
softkey to intercept
the call
5-202
DCP on line:
1. 2201
= Pickup
= Cancel
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring DCP/GCP Using the Configuration Files
(for Sylantro Servers)
Use the following procedures to configure DCP/GCP using the configuration
files.
Configuration Files
D
ra
f
t1
To set DCP/GCP in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/Programmable Key/
Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-203
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring Directed Call Pickup (DCP) Using the Aastra Web UI
(for Sylantro Servers)
D
ra
f
t1
Use the following procedure to configure Directed Call Pickup using the Aastra
5-204
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Web UI. This procedure uses the 6757i IP Phone as an example.
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module .
D
ra
f
t1
Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6755i Key Screen is
shown as an example.
2
Select a key for which to configure Directed Call Pickup.
3
In the “Type” field, select Directed Call Pickup.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-205
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
In the “Label” field, specify a name for this Directed Call Pickup softkey.
For example: DCP2200
5
In the “Value” field, specify the extension you want to intercept when you press this softkey.
For example: 2200
Click
to save your changes.
D
ra
f
t1
6
5-206
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring Group Call Pickup (GCP) Using the Aastra Web UI
(for Sylantro Servers)
Use the following procedure to configure Group Call Pickup using the Aastra
Web UI.
D
ra
f
t1
Note: A ring group must be configured on the Sylantro Server in order
for a GCP softkey to function.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-207
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module .
D
ra
f
t1
Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6755i Key Screen is
shown as an example.
2
Select a key for which to configure Group Call Pickup.
3
In the “Type” field, select Directed Call Pickup.
4
In the “Label” field, specify a name for this Directed Call Pickup softkey.
For example: GCP_A
5-208
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
5
In the “Value” field, enter groupcallpickup.
6
Click
to save your changes.
Using Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup
Use the following procedure for the DCP/GCP on your phone.
t1
Note: Before using the DCP/GCP feature on your phone, you must first
configure the DCP or GCP key. You must identify the extension(s) or
phone number(s) you want to monitor when configuring the key.
Step
Action
ra
f
IP Phone UI
Using Directed Call Pickup (DCP)
When the monitored extension receives a call, press the DCP softkey to pick up the call.
2
If the monitored extension receives multiple incoming calls simultaneously, the phone displays a list
of incoming calls.
3
Select a call from this list using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
The call is answered.
D
1
Using Group Call Pickup (GCP)
1
When any of the monitored group of extensions receives a call, press the GCP softkey to pick up the
call.
The call is answered.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-209
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
2
If the monitored extension receives multiple incoming calls simultaneously, the phone displays a list
of incoming calls.
3
Select a call from this list using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
Press the "Pickup" softkey to answer the call you selected.
= Cancel
D
ra
f
Press the Pickup
key to answer
the call
DCP on line:
1. 2201
= Pickup
t1
Select an extension
5-210
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Do Not Disturb (DND)
The IP phones have a feature you can enable called "Do not Disturb (DND). An
Administrator or User can set “do not disturb” based on the accounts on the phone
(all accounts or a specific account). You can set specific modes for the way you
want the phone to handle DND. The three modes you can set on the phone for
DND are:
•
Account
•
Phone
•
Custom
DND Account-Based Configuration
t1
An Administrator or User can configure DND on the phone-side by setting a
mode for the phone to use (account, phone, or custom). Once the mode is set,
you can use the IP Phone UI to use the DND feature.
ra
f
Notes:
1.
If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the
mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set
to “Phone”.
D
2.
You must configure a DND key on the phone to be able to use
this feature via the phone’s keypad.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-211
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
The following describes the DND key behavior for each DND mode.
•
Account - DND key toggles the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, to ON
or OFF if DND enabled for that account.
•
Phone - DND key toggles all accounts on the phone to ON or OFF.
•
Custom - DND key displays custom screens on the IP Phone UI. User can
select whether to enable/disable DND per account, enable DND on all
accounts, or disable DND on all accounts.
The following table describes the DND key and Message Waiting Indicator
(MWI) LEDs when you enable DND on the IP Phone.
MWI LED Behavior
for All Modes
t1
Softkey LED Behavior
for All Modes
MWI LED ON if current account in focus has
DND ON.
MWI LED OFF if current account in focus
has DND OFF.
ra
f
DND key LED RED if current account in
focus has DND ON.
DND key LED OFF when current account
in focus has DND disabled.
You can configure the DND softkey and the DND mode (Account, Phone,
Custom) using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Once you configure
DND, you can access the DND screen on the IP Phone UI.
•
5-212
D
Important Notes
In the Aastra Web UI, the “Account Configuration” page replaces the
previous “Call Forward Settings” page.
•
In the IP Phone UI, the new DND key feature now has new menu screens.
•
If you make changes to the configuration for DND via the IP Phone UI,
you must refresh the Aastra Web UI screen to see the changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring DND Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameters to configure DND on the IP Phone:
•
dnd key mode
•
softkeyN type, topsoftkeyN type, prgkeyN type, or expmodX keyN type
•
softkeyN states (optional)
Note: If there is no DND key configured or if it is removed, DND is
disabled on the IP Phone.
Example
t1
The following is an example of configuring the mode for DND in the
configuration files:
ra
f
dnd key mode: 2
softkey1 type: dnd
softkey1 states: idle connected incoming outgoing busy
D
In the above example, softkey 1 is configured for DND for line 1 only, with a
“custom” configuration. Pressing softkey 1 displays DND screens for which you
can customize on the phone. For specific screens that display in the IP Phone UI,
see the section, “Using DND Modes via the IP Phone UI” on page 5-217.
Configuration Files
To set DND in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections:
•
•
“DND Key Mode Settings” on page A-154.
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-213
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring DND Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure DND mode using the Aastra Web UI:
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
2
DND Key Mode
Parameter
D
ra
f
t1
1
In the “DND Key Mode” field, select a “do not disturb” (DND) mode to use on the phone.
Valid values are: Account, Phone, Custom. Default is Phone.
•
account
•
phone
•
custom
Sets DND for a specific account. DND key toggles the account in focus on the
IP Phone UI, to ON or OFF.
Sets DND ON for all accounts on the phone. DND key toggles all accounts on the
phone to ON or OFF.
Sets the phone to display custom screens after pressing the DND key, that list the
account(s) on the phone. The user can select a specific account for DND, turn
DND ON for all accounts, or turn DND OFF for all accounts.
Notes:
1.
If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode setting is ignored and the
phone behaves as if the mode was set to “Phone”.
2.
Using the Aastra Web UI, if you change the DND Key Mode to “phone”, all accounts
synchronize to the current setting of Account 1.
5-214
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
3
Click
to save your changes.
The change takes effect immediately without a reboot.
Click on Basic Settings->Account Configuration.
5
For each account, enable DND by placing a check mark in the box. Disable DND by unchecking the
box.
D
ra
f
t1
4
Notes:
1. If you selected “Account” or “Custom” mode in step 2, you can enable/disable each account or
all accounts as applicable.
If you selected “Phone” mode, the first account allows you to change the DND status for all accounts.
2. Number and name of accounts that display to this screen are dependant on the number and
name of accounts configured on the phone. In the screen in step 4, Screenname1 is configured on
Line 1, Screenname2 is configured on Line 2, and Screenname3 is configured on Line 3. The name
for the account is dependant on the name specified for the “Screen Name” parameter at the path
Advanced Settings->LineN. If you do not specify a value for the “Screen Name” parameter, the
account name is based on the “Phone Number” parameter at the path Advanced Settings->LineN.
If neither the “Screen Name” nor the “Phone Number” parameters are specified, the account name
shows “1”, “2”, “3”, etc. only.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-215
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
6
Click
to save your changes.
The change takes effect immediately without a reboot.
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML;
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys;
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module.
D
ra
f
t1
7
Softkeys 1 and 2 configured for DND
Note: If there is no DND key configured or if it is removed, DND is disabled on the IP Phone.
8
5-216
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Using DND Modes via the IP Phone UI
If you add a DND key using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI, you can
toggle the DND state using the IP Phone UI. Use the following procedure to
enable/disable DND on the IP Phone.
The following procedure assumes you have already configured a DND key AND
assumes there are three accounts configured on the phone.
Notes:
1. If there is no DND key configured or if it is removed, DND is
disabled on the IP Phone.
t1
2. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the
mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set
to “Phone”.
D
ra
f
3. Using the Aastra Web UI, if you change the DND key mode to
“phone”, all accounts synchronize to the current setting of Account 1.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-217
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
.
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
DND in Account Mode
On the 9143i, 6751i and 6753i:
With the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, press the DND key to toggle DND ON or OFF for the
account. Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
2
Screenname1
DND On
Jan 1 12:96
3
Screenname2
Jan 1 12:96
t1
1
Screenname3
DND On
Jan 1 12:96
ra
f
In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. Only Screenname1 and 3 have DND ON. Screenname 2 has DND OFF.
D
On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT:
With the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, press the DND key to toggle DND ON or OFF for the
account. Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
Services
Dir
Callers
L1
Screenname1
Services
Dir
Callers
L2
Screenname2
Services
Dir
Callers
L3
Screenname3
DND On
Tues Jan1 10:00am
Tues Jan1 10:00am
DND On
Tues Jan1 10:00am
- DND
- DND
- DND
In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. Only Screenname1 and 3 have DND ON. Screenname 2 has DND OFF.
5-218
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
DND in Phone Mode
On the 9143i, 6751i and 6753i:
Press the DND key to toggle DND ON or OFF for all accounts on the phone. Toggling to ON enables
DND on all accounts on the phone. Toggling to OFF disables DND on all accounts on the phone. Use
the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
2
Screenname1
DND On
Jan 1 12:96
3
Screenname2
DND On
Jan 1 12:96
t1
1
Screenname3
DND On
Jan 1 12:96
ra
f
In the above example, toggling Screenname1 to DND ON, enabled DND for Screenname2 and 3
also.
D
On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT:
Press the DND key to toggle DND ON or OFF for all accounts on the phone. Toggling to ON enables
DND on all accounts on the phone. Toggling to OFF disables DND on all accounts on the phone. Use
the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
Services
Dir
Callers
L1
Screenname1
Services
Dir
Callers
L2
Screenname2
Services
Dir
Callers
L3
Screenname3
DND On
Tues Jan1 10:00am
DND On
Tues Jan1 10:00am
DND On
Tues Jan1 10:00am
- DND
- DND
- DND
In the above example, toggling Screenname1 to DND ON, enabled DND for Screenname2 and 3
also.
Note: Enabling DND in “Phone” mode toggles all accounts on the phone to DND ON.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-219
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
DND in Custom Mode
On the 9143i, 6751i and 6753i:
Press the DND key on the phone. The screen displays a list of the accounts on the phone and allows
you to enable/disable a specific account or all accounts. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll
through the accounts.
Indicates
DND Off
DND
X
2. Screenname2
Change
Done
ra
f
Indicates
DND On
DND
4. All Off
Done
Set
DND
5. All On
Done
Set
t1
DND
1. Screenname1
Change
Done
DND
3. Screenname3
Change
Done
D
In the above example, Screenname1 and 3 have DND ON as indicated by a checkmark ( 3).
Screenname2 has DND off as indicated by an X. Items 4 and 5 allow you to disable or enable DND
on all accounts, respectively.
You use the CHANGE key to enable or disable DND for a specific account. You use the SET key to
enable/disable DND for all accounts. After making the change, you must press DONE and then
Confirm (#) to save the change. Pressing Cancel (0) cancels the attempted change. The following
screen displays after pressing a DONE key:
Apply Changes?
0 Cancel
# Confirm
5-220
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
DND in Custom Mode (continued)
On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT:
Press the DND key on the phone. The screen displays a list of the accounts on the phone and allows
you to enable/disable a specific account or all accounts. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll
through the accounts.
Services
Dir
Callers
t1
DND
1. Screenname1
2. Screenname2
3. Screenname3
Cancel -
Indicates
DND On
Indicates
DND Off
Done -
ra
f
- Change
- All On
- All Off
X
D
In the above example, Screenname1 and 3 have DND ON as indicated by a checkmark ( 3).
Screenname2 has DND off as indicated by an X. The ALL ON and ALL OFF softkeys allow you to
enable or disable DND on all accounts, respectively.
You use the CHANGE key to enable or disable DND for a specific account selected. After making the
change, you must press DONE to save the change.
If DND is configured on the phone, the softkey or programmable key switches
DND ON and OFF. If the phone shares a line with other phones, only the phone
that has DND configured is affected.
The second line on the screen of the IP phone shows when DND is configured.
When a call comes in on the line, the caller hears a busy signal or recorded
message, depending on the server configuration.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-221
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Bridged Line Appearance (BLA)
A SIP bridge line appearance (BLA) on the IP phones allows multiple devices to
share a single directory address (DA).
For example, people working at a technical support department could be located
in different places. If their desktop phones are configured for BLA DA, when
customer calls come in, all the phones with the BLA DA would ring but the call
can only be answered by one of them.
Once the call is answered, the rest of the phones reflect the status of the call. If the
call was put on "hold" by the original recipient, any one from the group can pick
up the call.
t1
Note: This feature is dependent on the IP telephony system to which the
IP phone is registered and according to draft-anil-sipping-bla-02.txt.
You can apply BLA on the IP phones as follows:
As a single BLA group - One BLA DA is shared among multiple phones.
Only one phone at a time can pick up an incoming call or initiate an outgoing
call on the BLA DA. All phones reflect the usage of the BLA DA. If the call is
put on "hold", any one from the group can pick up the "held" call.
•
As a multiple BLA group - On one single phone, multiple BLA DA can be
associated with different line appearances. Every BLA DA is independent
from each other and follows the same rules as "a single BLA group".
D
•
ra
f
•
As multiple instances of a BLA DA - A "x-line-id" parameter was defined in
draft-anil-sipping-bla-02.txt to present the incoming call to or place an
outgoing call on the specified line appearance instance. The parameter is
carried in "Alert-Info" header field over the request-URI (INVITE e.g.) or in
the NOTIFY messages to report the status of a dialog.
BLA DA can be configured on a global basis or on a per-line basis on the IP
phones using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
5-222
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
The following table shows the number of lines that can be set to BLA for each
model phone.
IP Phone Model
Possible # of BLA
Lines
9143i
9
9480i
9
9480i CT
9
6751i
N/A
6753i
9
6755i
9
9
9
Configuring BLA
t1
6757i
6757i CT
ra
f
You can configure BLA on a global or per-line basis using the configuration files
or the Aastra Web UI.
Global BLA
You configure BLA on a global basis in the configuration files using the following
parameters:
D
sip mode
sip user name
sip bla number
You configure BLA on a global basis in the Aastra Web UI using the following
fields at Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Settings:
•
Line Mode
•
Phone Number
•
BLA Number
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-223
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Per-Line BLA
You configure BLA on a per-line basis in the configuration files using the
following parameters:
sip lineN mode
sip lineN username
sip lineN bla number
You configure BLA on a per-line basis in the Aastra Web UI using the following
fields at Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru Line 9:
•
Line Mode
•
Phone Number
•
BLA Number
ra
f
For Sylantro Server
t1
Sylantro servers and ININ servers require specific configuration methods for
per-line configurations.
D
When configuring the BLA feature on a per-line basis for a Sylantro server, the
value set for the "sip lineN bla number" parameter shall be the same value set for
the "sip lineN user name" parameter for all the phones in the group. For example,
if sip lineN user name is 1010, you would configure BLA on a per-line basis for
the Sylantro server as follows:
sip line 1 mode: 3
sip line1 user name: 1010 (# for all the phones)
sip line1 bla number: 1010
5-224
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
For ININ Server
When configuring the BLA feature on an ININ server, the value set for the sip
lineN bla number parameter shall be the same value set for the sip lineN user
name parameter without the incremented digit added to the phone #. For example,
if the sip lineN user name for the first phone is 10101, and the sip lineN user name
for the second phone is 10102, etc., you would configure BLA on a per-line basis
for the ININ server as follows:
(# for phone 1 with appearance of phone 3)
ra
f
t1
sip line1 mode: 3
sip line1 user name: 10101 sip line1 bla number: 1010
(# for phone 2 with appearance of phone 3)
sip line1 mode: 3
sip line1 user name: 10102
sip line1 bla number: 1010
(# for phone 3)
sip line1 mode: 3
sip line1 user name: 1010
sip line1 bla number: 1010
Note: The original phone number which has the bridged line appearance
on other phones, will have the "sip lineN user name" parameter the same
as the "sip lineN bla number" (1010 in the above example on Phone 3).
D
Use the following procedures to configure BLA on the IP phone.
Configuring Global BLA
Configuration Files
For specific global parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“SIP Basic, Global Settings” on page A-67.
Configuring Per-Line BLA
Configuration Files
For specific per-line parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings” on page A-76.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-225
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
1
For global configuration of BLA:
D
ra
f
t1
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Authentication Settings.
5-226
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For per-line configuration of BLA:
D
ra
f
t1
Click on Advanced Settings->Line N (1-9).
In the "Line Mode" field, select the BLA option.
2
In the "Phone Number" field, enter the phone number of the IP phone.
3
For global configuration of BLA:
In the "BLA Number" field, enter the Bridge Line Appearance (BLA) number to be shared across all
IP phones.
For per-line configuration of BLA:
In the "BLA Number" field, enter the Bridge Line Appearance (BLA) number to be shared on a
specific line.
4
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-227
BLA Subscription Period
The phones include a SIP BLA subscription period parameter that allows an
Administrator to set the amount of time, in seconds, of the BLA subscription
period.
Reference
For more information about setting the BLA Subscription Period, see the section,
“BLA Subscription Period” on page 5-200.
Using a BLA Line on the IP Phone
t1
If you have either a global or per-line BLA configuration, and you want to share a
call on the line with a BLA group, you need to press the Hold button before
sharing the call with the group.
For example, if line 1 is configured for BLA, and you pick up a call on line 1, you
must press the Hold button to share the call with the BLA group.
D
ra
f
If you pick up a call on line 1 configured for BLA, and another call comes in on
line 2, you can pick up line 2 without putting line 1 on hold. The line 1 call will
be on hold automatically; however it is on hold locally only. The line 1 call
cannot be shared with the BLA group.
Note: The Hold button must be pressed for a call on a BLA line to be
shared with the BLA group.
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
BLA Support for Third Party Registration
BLA allows an Address Of Record (AOR) to be assigned onto different line
appearances for a group of SIP user agents (IP phones). When a call is made to
this BLA number, the call is offered to all user agents that have mapping to this
BLA. To support this, the IP phones need to support third party registration for the
BLA along with the registration for its own primary appearance number. If the IP
phone has the primary appearance as a BLA, then there is no need for third party
registration.
When configuring the BLA feature on a per-line basis for third party registration
and subscription, the third party name must be configured using the “sip lineN bla
number” parameter. For third party registration to work effectively, one of the
lines should register as generic with its own username.
#line 1 Bob
auth name:4082272203
password:
mode: 0
user name:4082272203
display name:Bob
screen name:Bob
ra
f
line1
line1
line1
line1
line1
line1
D
sip
sip
sip
sip
sip
sip
t1
For example, Bob has Alice’s appearance on his phone. Bob’s configuration is as
follows:
#line 2 Alice
sip line2 auth name:4082272203
sip line2 password:
#BLA mode 3
sip line2 mode: 3
sip line2 user name:4082272203
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-229
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
#Alice phone number
sip line2 bla number:4085582868
sip line2 display name:Alice
sip line2 screen name:Alice
Alice’s configuration is as follows:
#line 1
sip
sip
sip
sip
sip
sip
line1
line1
line1
line1
line1
line1
auth name:4085582868
password:
mode: 3
user name:4085582868
display name: Alice
screen name: Alice
t1
P-Preferred Identity Header for BLA Accounts
ra
f
The IP Phones support the BLA specification, draft-anil-sipping-bla-02, which
states that the P-Preferrred-Identity header (RFC3325) gets added to the INVITE
message to indicate the Caller-ID that is used for the call.
D
Note: The P-Preferred-Identity for BLA accounts is also sent for hold/
unhold messages.
5-230
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
BLA Support for Message Waiting Indicator (MWI)
The IP Phones have an option for a Busy Line Appearance (BLA) configured line
to send a SUBSCRIBE SIP message for a Message Waiting Indicator (MWI).
t1
Notes:
1. If you change the setting on this parameter, you must reboot the
phone for it to take affect.
2. Both the “sip explicit mwi subscription” and “sip mwi for bla
account” parameters must be enabled in order for the MWI subscription
for BLA to occur.
3. The MWI re-subscription for the BLA account uses the value set for
the "sip explicit mwi subscription period" parameter to re-subscribe.
4. Whether or not the "sip mwi for bla account" parameter is enabled,
the priority for displaying MWI does not change.
You can configure this feature using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
ra
f
Limitations
The following are limitations of the BLA Support for MWI feature:
The phone shows MWI for the first matching identity if more than one line
with different user names has the same BLA account.
•
If a normal line has the same user name as the BLA user of another line, the
phone shows MWI only for the normal line.
D
•
Use the following procedure to configure BLA support for MWI.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-231
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring BLA Support for MWI Using the Configuration Files
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“BLA Support for MWI” on page A-87.
Configuring BLA Support for MWI using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure BLA support for MWI.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.
D
ra
f
MWI for BLA Account
Parameter
t1
1
5-232
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
2
The “MWI for BLA Account” field is disabled by default. To enable this feature, place a checkmark
in the “Enabled” box.
Notes:
1. If you change the setting on this parameter, you must reboot the phone for it to take affect.
2. Both the “sip explicit mwi subscription” and “sip mwi for bla account” parameters must be
enabled in order for the MWI subscription for BLA to occur.
3. The MWI re-subscription for the BLA account uses the value set for the "sip explicit mwi
subscription period" parameter to re-subscribe.
4. Whether or not the "sip mwi for bla account" parameter is enabled, the priority for displaying
MWI does not change.
Click
affect.
to save your changes and reboot the phone for the change to take
D
ra
f
t1
3
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-233
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Park/Pick Up Key
The IP phones (including the 6757i CT and 9480i CT handsets) have a park and
pickup call feature that allows you to park a call and pickup a call when required.
There are two ways a user or administrator can configure this feature:
•
Using a static configuration (globally configures park and pickup)
•
Using a programmable configuration (using a key)
Note: The IP phones accept both methods of configuration. However, to
avoid redundancy, Aastra Telecom recommends you configure either a
static configuration or a programmable configuration.
t1
The IP phones support the Park/Pickup feature on the Asterisk, BroadWorks,
Sylantro, and ININ PBX servers.
ra
f
The following paragraph describes the configuration of a park and pickup key on
the IP phone. For information about configuring the park and pickup static
configuration method see “Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls” on page 5-59.
Park/Pickup Programmable Configuration (using a key)
D
The programmable method of configuration creates park and pickup keys
(softkeys, programmable keys, expansion module keys) that you can configure on
the IP phones.
For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT you can set a key as "Park"
or "Pickup" and then:
•
specify a customized label to display on the Phone UI
•
specify a value
•
specify which line to use
•
specify the state of the park and/or pickup keys
For the 9143i and 6753i, you can set a programmable key as "Park" or "Pickup"
and then:
5-234
•
specify a value
•
specify a line to use
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
On 9480i/9480i CT and 6757i/6757i CT
On the IP phone UI, the Park/Pickup feature displays the following:
When a call comes in, and you pickup the handset, the custom label that you
configured for the Park softkey displays on the Phone UI.
•
After the call is parked, the label that you configured for the Pickup softkey
displays on other phones in the network. You can then press the "Pickup"
softkey, followed by the applicable value to pickup the call on another phone
in your network.
•
On the Model CTs, the customized labels apply to the base unit only. On the
Model CT handsets, pressing Ï displays the default labels of "Park" and
"Pickup".
t1
•
ra
f
Note: On the 9480i/9480i CT and 6757i/6757i CT, the old softkey
labeled "Pickup" has been renamed to "Answer". This softkey uses the
old functionality - when you pickup the handset, you see a softkey labeled
"Answer". You can then press this key to pick up an incoming call. Do
no confuse this feature with the new Park/Pickup configuration feature.
On 9143i and 6753i
•
When a call comes in, and you pickup the handset, you can press the
applicable "Park" programmable key to park the call.
D
•
After the call is parked, you can press the "Pickup" programmable key,
followed by the applicable value to pickup the call.
You can configure a Park and Pickup key configuration using the configuration
files or the Aastra Web UI.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-235
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring Park/Pickup Key Using Configuration Files
In the configuration files, you configure Park/Pickup using the key parameters.
You must specify the "softkeyN value", "prgkeyN value", “topsoftkeyN value“, or
“expmodX keyN value”. The following examples show Park/Pickup
configurations using specific servers.
Model 6757i/6757i CT and 9480i/9480i CT Examples
Server
Park Configuration
Pickup Configuration
softkeyN type: park
softkeyN label: parkCall
softkeyN value: asterisk;70
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: connected*
softkeyN type: pickup
softkeyN label: pickupCall
softkeyN value: asterisk;70
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: idle, outgoing**
Sylantro
softkeyN type: park
softkeyN label: parkCall
softkeyN value: sylantro;*98
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: connected*
softkeyN type: pickup
softkeyN label: pickupCall
softkeyN value: sylantro;*99
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: idle, outgoing**
BroadWorks
softkeyN type: park
softkeyN label: parkCall
softkeyN value: broadworks;*68
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: connected*
softkeyN type: pickup
softkeyN label: pickupCall
softkeyN value: broadworks;*88
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: idle, outgoing**
softkeyN type: park
softkeyN label: parkCall
softkeyN value: inin;callpark
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: connected*
softkeyN type: pickup
softkeyN label: pickupCall
softkeyN value: inin;pickup
softkeyN line: 1
softkeyN states: idle, outgoing**
ra
f
D
ININ PBX
t1
Asterisk
*When you configure a softkey as "Park", you must configure the state of the softkey as
"connected".
**When you configure a softkey as "Pickup", you can configure the state of the softkey as "idle,
outgoing", or just "idle", or just "outgoing".
5-236
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Model 6753i and 9143i Examples
Server
Park Configuration
Pickup Configuration
prgkeyN type: park
prgkeyN value: asterisk;70
prgkeyN line: 1
prgkeyN type: pickup
prgkeyN value: asterisk;70
prgkeyN line: 1
Sylantro
prgkeyN type: park
prgkeyN value: sylantro;*98
prgkeyN line: 1
prgkeyN type: pickup
prgkeyN value: sylantro;*99
prgkeyN line: 1
BroadWorks
prgkeyN type: park
prgkeyN value: broadworks;*68
prgkeyN line: 1
prgkeyN type: pickup
prgkeyN value: broadworks;*88
prgkeyN line: 1
ININ PBX
prgkeyN type: park
prgkeyN value: inin;callpark
prgkeyN line: 1
prgkeyN type: pickup
prgkeyN value: inin;pickup
prgkeyN line: 1
t1
Asterisk
ra
f
Note: The 6753i and 9143i do not allow for the configuration of labels
and states.
D
Use the following procedure to configure a Park/Pickup key using the
configuration files.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Softkey Settings for 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT” on page A-193 and “Programmable Key
Settings for 9143i, 6753i, and 6755i” on page A-202.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-237
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring a Park/Pickup Key Using Aastra Web UI
On the 6757i/6757i CT and 9480i/9480i CT, you configure a Park and/or Pickup
key at Operation->Softkeys and XML. You enter a key label, and value for a
specific line on the phone. The default state of the Park configuration is
"connected". The default state of the Pickup configuration is "idle, outgoing".
The 6757i CT and 9480i CT handsets use the park/pickup configuration enabled
at Operation->Handset Keys in the Aastra Web UI. If Park or Pickup are
enabled on more than one line on the base unit, the 6757i CT and 9480i CT
handset uses the first programmable configuration.
For example, if line 1 and line 6 are configured for park, the 6757i CT and 9480i
CT handset uses the configuration set for line 1 to park a call.
t1
On the 6753i and 9143i, you configure a Park and/or Pickup key at
Operation->Programmable Keys, and then enter the appropriate value and line.
ra
f
Note: Applicable values depend on the server in your network (Asterisk,
BroadWorks, Sylantro, ININ PBX. See the table below for applicable
values.
Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values
Park Values*
D
Server
Pickup Values*
Aasterisk
70
70
Sylantro
*98
*99
BroadWorks
*68
*88
callpark
pickup
ININ PBX
*Leave "value" fields blank to disable the park and pickup feature.
Use the following procedure to configure the Park/Pickup call feature using the
programmable configuration method and the Aastra Web UI.
5-238
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 6757i/6757i CT and 9480i/9480i CT:
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML.
2
Pick a softkey to configure for Parking a call.
3
In the "Type" field, select Park.
4
In the "Label" field, enter a label for the Park softkey.
5
In the "Value" field, enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network.
D
ra
f
t1
1
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-238.
6
In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the Park configuration.
7
The park softkey has a default state of “Connected”.
Leave this state enabled or to disable, uncheck the check box.
8
Pick a softkey to configure for Picking up a call.
9
In the "Type" field, select Pickup.
10
In the "Label" field, enter a label for the Pickup softkey.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-239
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
11
In the "Value" field, enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network.
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-238.
12
In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the Pickup configuration.
13
The pickup softkey has a default state of “Idle” and “Outgoing”.
Leave these states enabled or to disable, uncheck the check boxes.
14
Click
to save your changes.
For the 6757i CT and 9480i CT Handset:
Click on Operation->Handset Keys.
2
Pick a handset key to configure for parking a call.
3
In the "Key Function" field, select Park.
4
Pick another handset key to configure for picking up a call.
5
In the "Key Function" field, select Pickup.
6
Click
D
ra
f
t1
1
5-240
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 6753i and 9143i:
1
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
ra
f
t1
6753i and 9143i Screen
2
Pick a hard key (from keys 3 through 6) to configure for Parking a call.
3
In the "Hard Key" field, select Park.
4
In the "Value" field, enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network.
5
D
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-238.
For the 6753i and 9143i:
In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the Park configuration.
6
Pick a hard key to configure for Picking up a call.
7
In the "Hard Key" field, select Pickup.
8
In the "Value" field, enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network.
Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values”
on page 5-238.
9
For the 6753i and 9143i:
In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the Pickup configuration.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-241
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
10
Click
to save your changes.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
Click on Operation->Reset.
12
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.
D
ra
f
t1
11
5-242
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Using the Park Call/Pickup Parked Call Feature
Use the following procedures on the IP phones to park a call and pick up a parked
call.
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
Parking a Call
1
While on a live call, press the "Park" softkey.
2
Perform the following for your specific server:
For Asterisk Server:
t1
- Server announces the
extension number where the call
has been parked. Once the call is
parked, press the y key
to complete parking.
ra
f
For BroadWorks Server:
- After you hear the greeting from
the CallPark server, enter the
extension where you want to
park the call.
D
For Sylantro Server:
- Enter the extension number
where you want to park the call,
followed by "#" key.
For ININ Server:
- Enter the extension number
where you want to park the call,
followed by "#" key.
If the call is parked successfully, the response is either a greeting voice confirming that the call was
parked, or a hang up occurs. The parked call party will get music on hold.
3
If the call fails, you can pick up the call (using the next procedure) and press the "Park" softkey again
to retry step 2.
Picking up a Parked Call
4
Pick up the handset on the phone.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-243
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
5
Enter the extension number where the call was parked.
6
Press the "Pickup" softkey.
D
ra
f
t1
If the call pick up is successful, you are connected with the parked call.
5-244
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Last Call Return (lcr) (Sylantro Servers)
Last call return (lcr) allows an administrator or user to configure a "last call
return" function on a softkey or programmable key. This feature is for
Sylantro servers only.
You can configure the “lcr” softkey feature via the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI.
How it works
If you configure "lcr" on a softkey or programmable key, and a call comes
into your phone, after you are finished with the call and hangup, you can
press the key configured for “lcr” and the phone dials the last call you received.
t1
When you configure an “lcr” softkey, the label “LCR” displays next to that
softkey on the IP phone. When the Sylantro server detects an “lcr” request, it
translates this request and routes the call to the last caller.
ra
f
Configuring Last Call Return
Use the following procedures to configure LCR on the IP phones.
D
Configuration Files
For specific last call return (lcr) parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
section, “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-245
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 6757i/6757i CT:
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML.
2
Pick a softkey to configure for Last Call Return.
3
In the "Type" field, select lcr.
4
In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the last call return configuration.
5
The lcr softkey has a default state of “Idle”, “Connected”, “Incoming”, “Outgoing”.
Leave these states enabled or to disable, uncheck the check boxes as required.
6
Click
5-246
D
ra
f
t1
1
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 6757i CT Handset:
Click on Operation->Handset Keys.
2
Pick a handset key to configure for Last Call Return.
3
In the "Key Function" field, select lcr.
4
Click
D
ra
f
t1
1
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-247
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 6753i and 9143i
1
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
ra
f
t1
6753i and 9143i Screen
Pick a hard key (from keys 3 through 6) to configure for Last Call Return.
3
In the "Type" field, select lcr.
4
For the 6753i and 9143i:
D
2
In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the lcr configuration.
5
5-248
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Call Forwarding
Call Forward (CFWD) on the IP phone allows incoming calls to be forwarded to
another destination. The phone sends the SIP message to the SIP proxy, which
then forwards the call to the assigned destination.
An Administrator or User can configure CFWD on the phone-side by setting a
mode for the phone to use (Account, Phone, or Custom). Once the mode is set,
you can use the IP Phone UI to use the CFWD feature at Options->Call Forward
or by pressing a configured Call Forward softkey/programmable key/extension
module key.
The following describes the behavior for each CFWD mode.
Account mode - The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per
account basis. Pressing a configured CFWD key applies to the account in
focus.
•
Phone mode - The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD
configuration for all accounts (All, Busy, and/or No Answer). When you
configure the initial account, the phone applies the configuration to all other
accounts. (In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you configured is enabled.
All other accounts are grayed out but set to the same configuration.) Using the
Aastra Web UI, if you make changes to that initial account, the changes apply
to all accounts on the phone.
•
D
ra
f
t1
•
Custom mode - The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a
specific account or all accounts. You can configure a specific mode (All,
Busy, and/or No Answer) for each account independently or all accounts. On
the 9143i, 6751i and 6753i phones, you can set all accounts to ALL On or
ALL Off. On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT, you can set all
accounts to All On, All Off, or copy the configuration for the account in focus
to all other accounts using a CopytoAll softkey.
Note: If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the
mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set
to “Phone”.
You can enable different call forwarding rules/modes independently (for example,
you can set different phone numbers for Busy, All, and NoAns modes and then
turn them on/off individually).
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-249
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
The following table describes the key and Message Waiting Indicator (MWI)
LEDs when you enable CFWD on the IP Phone.
Key LED Behavior
for All Modes
MWI LED Behavior
for All Modes
CFWD key LED RED if CFWD All, CFWD MWI LED ON if current account in focus has
Busy, or CFWD No Answer is enabled for CFWD ALL enabled.
the account in focus.
MWI LED OFF if CFWD All is disabled.
CFWD key LED OFF if any CFWD mode
is disabled.
Important Notes
In the configuration files, the “call forward key mode” parameter in the
section, “Configuring Call Forwarding” on page 5-251 is in addition to the
previous call forward parameter (call forward disabled). You can still use the
previous call forwarding parameter if desired in the configuration files.
•
In the IP Phone UI, you can access the Call Forwarding features at the path
Options->Call Forward or by pressing a configured CFWD key.
D
ra
f
•
•
5-250
t1
You can enable/disable CFWD and set a CFWD key using the configuration files
or the Aastra Web UI. You can set CFWD mode (Account, Phone, Custom)
using the configuration files, Aastra Web UI or IP Phone UI.
If you make changes to the configuration for CFWD via the IP Phone UI,
you must refresh the Aastra Web UI screen to see the changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring Call Forwarding
You use the following parameters to set CFWD on the IP Phone using the
configuration files:
•
•
•
call forward key mode
softkeyN type, topsoftkeyN type, prgkeyN type, or expmodX keyN type
softkeyN states (optional)
Notes:
1.
If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is
removed, you can still set the CFWD modes via the IP Phone UI at the
path Options->Call Forward.
t1
2.
If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the
mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set
to “Phone”.
ra
f
3.
When configuring a CFWD mode (All, Busy, No Answer) for
an account, you must configure a CFWD number for that mode in
order for the mode to be enabled.
D
Use the following procedures to configure Call Forwarding on the IP phones.
Configuration Files
For specific last call forwarding parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the
sections,
• “Priority Alert Settings” on page A-155.
• “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-251
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
:
Aastra Web UI
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML;
or
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys;
or
Click on Operation->Expansion Module.
D
ra
f
t1
1
Softkey 2 configured for CFWD
2
5-252
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General.
Call Forward
Key Mode
Parameter
ra
f
t1
3
D
Note: If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed, you can still set the CFWD
modes via the IP Phone UI at the path Options->Call Forward.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-253
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
In the “Call Forward Key Mode” field, select a call forward mode to use on the phone.
Valid values are: Account, Phone, Custom. Default is Account.
•
•
ra
f
t1
•
account
The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per account basis. Pressing a configured
CFWD key applies to the account in focus.
phone
The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD configuration for all accounts (All, Busy,
and/or No Answer). When you configure the initial account, the phone applies the configuration
to all other accounts. (In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you configured is enabled. All other
accounts are grayed out but set to the same configuration.) Using the Aastra Web UI, if you make
changes to that initial account, the changes apply to all accounts on the phone.
custom
The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a specific account or all accounts. You can
configure a specific state (All, Busy, and/or No Answer) for each account independently or all
accounts. On the 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i phones, you can set all accounts to ALL On or ALL
Off. On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT, you can set all accounts to All On, All
Off, or copy the configuration for the account in focus to all other accounts using a CopytoAll
softkey.
5
Click
D
Notes:
1. If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed, you can still set the CFWD
modes via the IP Phone UI at the path Options->Call Forward.
2. If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the mode setting is ignored and the
phone behaves as if the mode was set to “Phone”.
3. When configuring a CFWD state (All, Busy, No Answer) for an account, you must configure a
CFWD number for that state in order for the state to be enabled.
to save your changes.
The change takes effect immediately without a reboot.
5-254
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Basic Settings->Account Configuration.
7
For each account, enable CFWD state by placing a check mark in one or more of the following
“State” fields:
•
•
•
D
ra
f
t1
6
All
Busy
No Answer
The “All” option forwards all incoming calls for this account to the specified phone number regardless
of the state of the phone. The phone can be in the Busy or No Answer states, or can be in the idle
state. The phone still forwards all calls to the specified number.
The “Busy” option call forwards incoming calls only if the account is in the busy state. The calls are
forwarded to the specified phone number.
The “No Answer” option call forwards incoming calls only if the account rings but is not answered in
the defined number of rings. The call gets forwarded to the specified number.
Note: You can use the “Busy” and “No Answer” states together using different forwarding phone
numbers. If these states are enabled for an account (the “All” state is disabled), and the phone is in
the busy state when a call comes in, the phone can forward the call to the specified phone number
(for example, voicemail). If there is no answer on the phone after the specified number of rings, the
phone can forward the call to a different specified number, such as a cell phone number.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-255
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
8
For each account, in the “Number” field, enter the phone number for which you want the incoming
calls to forward to if the phone is in the specified state.
If using the “Account” mode or “Custom” mode, you can enter different phone numbers for each
account.
Notes:
1. If you selected “Account” mode in step 4, you can enable/disable each account or all accounts
as applicable. You can enter different phone number for each enabled state.
If you selected “Custom” mode, you can enable/disable each account or all accounts as applicable.
You can enter different phone numbers for each enabled state.
If you selected “Phone” mode, all accounts are set to the same CFWD configuration (All, Busy, and/
or No Answer) as Account 1 on the phone. (In the Aastra Web UI, only Account 1 is enabled. All
other accounts are grayed out but use the same configuration as Account 1.)
ra
f
t1
Using the Aastra Web UI, if you make changes to Account 1, the changes apply to all accounts on
the phone. Using the IP Phone UI, if you make changes to any other account other then Account 1,
the changes also apply to all accounts on the phone. When enabling a CFWD state, you must specify
a phone number for the phone to CFWD to. The number you specify applies to all accounts of the
same mode.
D
2. Number and name of accounts that display to this screen are dependant on the number and
name of accounts configured on the phone. In the screen in step 6, Screenname1 is configured on
Line 1, Screenname2 is configured on Line 2, and Screenname3 is configured on Line 3. The name
for the account is dependant on the name specified for the “Screen Name” parameter at the path
Advanced Settings->LineN. If you do not specify a value for the “Screen Name” parameter, the
account name is based on the “Phone Number” parameter at the path Advanced Settings->LineN.
If neither the “Screen Name” nor the “Phone Number” parameters are specified, the account name
shows “1”, “2”, “3”, etc. only.
9
For the No Answer state, in the “No. Rings” field, enter the number of times that the account rings
before forwarding the call to the specified number. Valid values are 1 through 20. Default is 1.
Note: When using the “Account” mode or “Custom” mode, you can enter a different number of rings
for each account. If you use the Aastra Web UI to change the Call Forward Key Mode to “Phone”, all
accounts synchronize to Account 1.
10
Click
to save your changes.
The change takes effect immediately without a reboot.
5-256
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Using CFWD Modes via the IP Phone UI
If you enable/disable CFWD using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI,
you can use the CFWD screens that display to the IP Phone UI. You can access the
CFWD parameters by pressing a configured CFWD key (if previously
configured) OR by pressing Options->Call Forward on the phone’s front panel.
The following procedure assumes you have already configured a CFWD key
AND assumes there are three accounts configured on the phone.
Notes:
1.
If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is
removed, you can still enable CFWD via the IP Phone UI at the path
Options->Call Forward.
t1
2.
If there is only one account configured on the phone, then the
mode setting is ignored and the phone behaves as if the mode was set
to “Phone”.
D
ra
f
3.
Using the Aastra Web UI, if you change the CFWD key mode to
“Phone”, all accounts synchronize to the current setting of Account 1.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-257
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
.
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
CFWD in Account Mode (9143i, 6751i, and 6753i)
1
Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
1
2
Screenname1
CFWD All
Jan 1 12:96
3
Screenname2
Jan 1 12:96
Screenname3
CFWD Busy
Jan 1 12:96
Press the Call Forward key. The Call Forward Mode screen displays. Use the UP and DOWN arrow
keys to scroll through each state type.
Cfwd Mode
1. All
Done
D
Indicates
CFWD Enabled
ra
f
2
t1
In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. Screenname1 has “CFWD All” enabled, Screenname 2 has CFWD
disabled as indicated by no message displayed, and Screenname3 has “CFWD Busy” enabled.
Indicates
no CFWD
phone number
configured
Indicates
CFWD Disabled
Change
Cfwd Mode
2. Busy
Done
Change
Cfwd Mode
3. NoAns
Done
X
Change
Cfwd Mode
4. All Off
Done
Set
Cfwd Mode
5. All On
Done
Set
!
In the above example, CFWD All is enabled as indicated by a checkmark ( 3), CFWD Busy is
enabled but no call forward phone number configured as indicated by a !, and CFWD NoAns is
disabled, as indicated by an X.
5-258
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
3
Select a state for the account(s) in focus using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
You can enable/disable any or all of the following states for an account:
All - Enables CFWD All for an account and forwards all incoming calls for that account, to the
specified number.
•
Busy - Enables CFWD Busy for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if
DND has been enabled for that account OR if the account is currently engaged in another call.
•
No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified
number if the call has not been answered for the specified number of rings.
t1
•
ra
f
Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has
DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns.
You can also use the following keys if required:
All Off - Disables all CFWD states for the current account in focus.
4
D
All On - Enables all CFWD states for the current account in focus.
Press the CHANGE key for the state you selected in step 3. Scroll to the CFWD State screen. This
displays the current state of the mode you selected. In the following example, the CFWD All state is
ON.
Use
CFWD State
Screen
to view
1. Cfwd State
On
Done
Change
Change
1. Cfwd All
Cfwd State
On
Next
Cfwd State
Off
Next
Set
Set
5
Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. Press NEXT to toggle the state of the CFWD
mode ON or OFF. In the example in Step 4, you press NEXT to change the option to OFF.
6
Press the SET key to save the change.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-259
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
7
In the CFWD State screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the CFWD Number screen and
press CHANGE.
1. Cfwd All
Use
to view
Change
t1
1. Cfwd State
On
Done
CFWD Number
Screen
2. Cfwd Number
Done
Change
Change
Cfwd Number
__
Cancel
Set
Enter a phone number to apply to the current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you
specified, and a call comes into the phone, it forwards the call to the number you specify.
9
Press SET to save the change.
D
ra
f
8
5-260
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
10
For the CFWD No Answer state, In the CFWD Number screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll
to the CFWD No. Rings screen and press CHANGE.
1. Cfwd NoAns
Use
to view
Change
t1
1. Cfwd State
On
Done
CFWD No.
Rings Screen
2. Cfwd Number
Change
ra
f
Done
3. No. Rings
Done
No. Rings
1
Next
Set
Press the NEXT key to select the number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming
calls. Valid values are 1 to 20. Default is 1.
D
11
Change
Change
When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone
rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call if there is
no answer.
12
Press SET to save the change.
13
Press DONE to save CFWD All Number, CFWD All State, CFWD Busy Number, CFWD Busy State,
CFWD No Answer Number, CFWD No Answer State, CFWD No Answer Rings.
Each time you press DONE, the following “Apply Changes” screen displays.
Apply Changes?
0 Cancel
# Confirm
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-261
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
14
Press # to confirm the change(s) each time the “Apply Changes” screen displays.
D
ra
f
t1
All changes are saved to the phone.
5-262
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
CFWD in Phone Mode (9143i, 6751i, and 6753i)
1
Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
1
Screenname1
CFWD All
Jan 1 12:96
2
Screenname2
CFWD All
Jan 1 12:96
3
Screenname3
CFWD All
Jan 1 12:96
t1
In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. All three accounts have CFWD enabled as indicated by the “CFWD All”
message.
D
ra
f
Note: In ”Phone” mode, when you change the call forward configuration for an account, the
change applies to all accounts.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-263
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
2
Press the Call Forward key. The Call Forward Mode screen displays. Use the UP and DOWN arrow
keys to scroll through each state type.
Change
!
Cfwd Mode
3. NoAns
Done
Change
Cfwd Mode
4. All Off
Done
Set
Cfwd Mode
5. All On
Done
Set
D
Indicates
CFWD NoAns
enabled
Cfwd Mode
2. Busy
Done
t1
Indicates
no CFWD
phone number
configured for
Busy
Change
ra
f
Indicates
CFWD ALL
enabled
Cfwd Mode
1. All
Done
In the above example, the account has CFWD All and CFWD NoAns enabled as indicated by a
checkmark ( 3). The CFWD Busy setting is enabled but no call forward phone number is configured
as indicated by a !
5-264
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
3
Select a state using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
You can enable/disable a specific account on the phone with any or all of the following states.
However, the configuration you set will apply to all accounts on the phone.
All - Enables CFWD All on the phone and forwards all incoming calls to the specified number.
•
Busy - Enables CFWD Busy on the phone and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if
DND has been enabled OR if the phone is currently engaged in another call.
•
No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns on the phone and forwards incoming calls to a specified
number if the call has not been answered for the specified number of rings.
t1
•
ra
f
Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has
DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns.
You can also use the following keys if required:
All Off - Disables all CFWD states for the phone.
D
All On - Enables all CFWD states for the phone.
Note: In “Phone” mode, the initial configuration you set for an account applies to all the
accounts on the phone.
4
Press the CHANGE key for the mode you selected in step 2. Scroll to the CFWD State screen. This
displays the current state of the mode you selected. In the following example, the CFWD All state is
ON.
Use
CFWD State
Screen
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
to view
1. Cfwd State
On
Done
Change
Change
1. Cfwd All
Cfwd State
On
Next
Cfwd State
Off
Next
Set
Set
5-265
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
5
Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. Press NEXT to toggle the state of the CFWD
state ON or OFF. In the example in Step 4, you press NEXT to change the option to OFF.
6
Press the SET key to save the change.
7
In the CFWD State screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the CFWD Number screen and
press CHANGE.
1. Cfwd All
to view
t1
Use
CFWD Number
Screen
Change
ra
f
1. Cfwd State
On
Done
2. Cfwd Number
Done
Change
Change
Cfwd Number
__
Cancel
Set
Enter a phone number to apply to the current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you
specified, and a call comes into the phone, it forwards the call to the number you specify.
9
Press SET to save the change.
5-266
D
8
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
10
For the CFWD No Answer state, in the CFWD Number screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll
to the CFWD No. Rings screen and press CHANGE.
1. Cfwd NoAns
Use
to view
Change
t1
1. Cfwd State
On
Done
CFWD No.
Rings Screen
2. Cfwd Number
Change
ra
f
Done
3. No. Rings
Done
No. Rings
1
Next
Set
Press the NEXT key to select the number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming
calls. Valid values are 1 to 20. Default is 1.
D
11
Change
Change
When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone
rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call.
12
Press SET to save the change.
13
Press DONE to save CFWD All Number, CFWD All State, CFWD Busy Number, CFWD Busy State,
CFWD No Answer Number, CFWD No Answer State, CFWD No Answer Rings.
Each time you press DONE, the following “Apply Changes” screen displays.
Apply Changes?
0 Cancel
# Confirm
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-267
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
14
Press # to confirm the change(s) each time the “Apply Changes” screen displays.
D
ra
f
t1
All the same changes are saved to all accounts on the phone.
5-268
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
CFWD in Custom Mode (9143i, 6751i, and 6753i)
1
Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
1
Screenname1
CFWD All
Jan 1 12:96
2
3
Screenname2
CFWD Busy
Jan 1 12:96
Screenname3
CFWD NoAns
Jan 1 12:96
t1
In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. All three accounts have CFWD enabled as indicated by the “CFWD All”,
“CFWD Busy”, and “CFWD NoAns” messages.
Press the Call Forward key. The CFWD Account screens display. Use the UP and DOWN arrow
keys to scroll through each account.
ra
f
Call Forward
1. Screenname1
Change
Done
Indicates
CFWD Enabled
D
Indicates
CFWD Disabled
Indicates
no CFWD phone
number
configured
Call Forward
X
2. Screenname2
Change
Done
Call Forward
!
3. Screenname3
Change
Done
Call Forward
4. All Off
Done
Set
Call Forward
5. All On
Done
Set
In the above example, Screenname1 has one or more CFWD states enabled as indicated by a
checkmark ( 3). Screenname2 has one or more CFWD states disabled as indicated by an X.
Screenname3 has one or more CFWD states configured but a specific state has no call forward
phone number configured as indicated by a !. Items 4 and 5 allow you to disable or enable CFWD on
all accounts, respectively.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-269
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
2
Select an account to configure. Press the CHANGE key. The CFWD Mode screen displays. Use the
UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through each state screen.
Change
Cfwd Mode
3. NoAns
Done
!
Change
Cfwd Mode
4. All Off
Done
Set
Cfwd Mode
5. All On
Done
Set
D
Indicates
CFWD NoAns
enabled
Cfwd Mode
2. Busy
Done
t1
Indicates
no CFWD
phone number
configured for
Busy
Change
ra
f
Indicates
CFWD All
enabled
Cfwd Mode
1. All
Done
In the above example, the account has CFWD All and CFWD NoAns enabled as indicated by a
checkmark ( 3). The CFWD Busy setting is enabled for the account but has no call forward phone
number configured as indicated by a !.
5-270
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
3
Select a state for the account(s) in focus using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
You can enable/disable any or all of the following states for a specific account or for all accounts (with
individual configurations):
All - Enables CFWD All for an account and forwards all incoming calls for that account, to the
specified number. The phone number can be different between accounts.
•
Busy - Enables CFWD Busy for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if
DND has been enabled for that account OR if that account is currently engaged in another call.
The phone number can be different between accounts.
•
No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified
number if the call has not been answered for a specified number of rings. The phone number can
be different between accounts.
t1
•
ra
f
Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has
DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns.
You can also use the following keys if required:
D
All Off - Disables all CFWD states for the current account in focus or all accounts.
All On - Enables all CFWD states for the current account in focus or all accounts.
4
Press the CHANGE key for the mode you selected in step 2. Scroll to the CFWD State screen. This
displays the current state of the mode you selected. In the following example, the CFWD All state is
ON.
Use
CFWD State
Screen
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
to view
1. Cfwd State
On
Done
Change
Change
1. Cfwd All
Cfwd State
On
Next
Cfwd State
Off
Next
Set
Set
5-271
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
5
Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. Press NEXT to toggle the state of the CFWD
state ON or OFF. In the example in Step 4, you press NEXT to change the option to OFF.
6
Press the SET key to save the change.
7
In the CFWD State screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the CFWD Number screen and
press CHANGE.
1. Cfwd All
to view
t1
Use
CFWD Number
Screen
Change
ra
f
1. Cfwd State
On
Done
2. Cfwd Number
Done
Change
Change
Cfwd Number
__
Cancel
Set
Enter a phone number to apply to the current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you
specified, and a call comes into the phone, it forwards the call to the number you specify.
9
Press SET to save the change.
5-272
D
8
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
10
For the CFWD No Answer state, in the CFWD Number screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll
to the CFWD No. Rings screen and press CHANGE.
1. Cfwd NoAns
Use
to view
Change
t1
1. Cfwd State
On
Done
CFWD No.
Rings Screen
2. Cfwd Number
Change
ra
f
Done
3. No. Rings
Done
No. Rings
1
Next
Set
Press the NEXT key to select the number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming
calls. Valid values are 1 to 20. Default is 1.
D
11
Change
Change
When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone
rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call.
12
Press SET to save the change.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-273
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
13
Press DONE to save CFWD All Number, CFWD All State, CFWD Busy Number, CFWD Busy State,
CFWD No Answer Number, CFWD No Answer State, CFWD No Answer Rings.
Each time you press DONE, the following “Apply Changes” screen displays.
Apply Changes?
0 Cancel
# Confirm
Press # to confirm the change(s) each time the “Apply Changes” screen displays.
t1
14
D
ra
f
All changes are saved to the phone for all accounts.
5-274
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
.
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
CFWD in Account Mode (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT)
Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
Services
Dir
Callers
L1
Screenname1
Services
Dir
Callers
L2
Screenname2
Services
Dir
Callers
L3
Screenname3
CFWD All
Tues Jan1 10:00am
CFWD Busy
Tues Jan1 10:00am
Tues Jan1 10:00am
t1
1
- Call Fwd
- Call Fwd
- Call Fwd
Press the Call Forward key. The Call Forward Mode screen displays for the account you selected.
Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through each state type.
D
2
ra
f
In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. Screenname1 has “CFWD All” enabled, Screenname2 has “CFWD Busy”
enabled, and Screenname3 has CFWD disabled as indicated by no message displayed.
Call Forward
Mode Screen
Services
Dir
Callers
Indicates
CFWD Enabled
Call Forward Mode
1. All
2. Busy
3. No Answer
- Change
- All Off
- All On
!
X
CopytoAll Cancel Done -
Indicates
no CFWD phone
number configured
Indicates
CFWD Disabled
In the above example, CFWD All is enabled as indicated by a checkmark ( 3), CFWD Busy is
enabled but no call forward phone number is configured as indicated by a !, and CFWD NoAns is
disabled as indicated by an X.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-275
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
3
Select a state for the account(s) in focus using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
You can enable/disable any or all of the following states for an account:
All - Enables CFWD All for an account and forwards all incoming calls for that account, to the
specified number.
•
Busy - Enables CFWD Busy for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if
DND has been enabled for that account OR if the account is currently engaged in another call.
•
No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified
number if the call has not been answered for the specified number of rings.
t1
•
ra
f
Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has
DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns.
You can also use the following keys if required:
All Off Key- Disables all CFWD states for the current account in focus.
D
All On Key - Enables all CFWD states for the current account in focus.
CopytoAll Key - Copies the call forward phone number and state of the Call Forward mode (All,
Busy, No Answer) in focus to every Call Forward mode of that account. For example, if you have the
cursor pointing at the “All” state and it is enabled and has a call forward phone number configured,
pressing the CopytoAll Key enables the Busy state and the NoAns state and assigns the same
phone number to both states.
Cancel Key - Cancels any configuration you may have made without saving. To cancel a
configuration, you must press this CANCEL key before pressing the DONE key.
5-276
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
4
For the CFWD No Answer state, press the CHANGE key for the mode you selected in step 2. This
displays the Call Forward State screen. In the following example, the CFWD All state is ON.
Services
Dir
Callers
Change
D
Change the
State
Services
Dir
Callers
ra
f
Call Forward
State Screen
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State:
Off
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 1
- Change
Cancel - AllAccts
Done -
t1
Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State:
On
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 1
- Change
Cancel - AllAccts
Done -
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State: Off
Number: 5551212__
No. Rings: 1
- Backspace
Cancel - AllAccts
Done -
Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State: Off
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 3
- Change
Cancel - AllAccts
Done -
Change the
Number
Change the
No. Rings
Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-277
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
5
Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. With the cursor in the “State” field, toggle the
state ON and OFF by pressing the CHANGE key.
Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.
6
Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “Number” field. Enter a phone number to apply to the
current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you specified, and a call comes into the phone,
it forwards the call to the number you specify.
t1
Use the BACKSPACE key if required to delete characters.
Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.
Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “No. Rings” field. Press the CHANGE key to select the
number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming calls. Valid values are 1 to 20.
Default is 1.
ra
f
7
D
When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone
rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call.
Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.
8
5-278
Press DONE in the CFWD State Screen to save all changes.
Press DONE in the CFWD Mode Screen to save all changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
CFWD in Phone Mode (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT)
1
Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
Services
Dir
Callers
L1
Screenname1
Services
Dir
Callers
L2
Screenname2
Services
Dir
Callers
L3
Screenname3
CFWD All
Tues Jan1 10:00am
CFWD All
Tues Jan1 10:00am
CFWD All
Tues Jan1 10:00am
- Call Fwd
- Call Fwd
t1
- Call Fwd
ra
f
In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. Screenname1, 2 and 3 have “CFWD All” enabled.
Note: In “Phone” mode, the initial configuration you set for an account applies to all the
accounts on the phone.
Press the Call Forward key. The Call Forward Mode screen displays. Use the UP and DOWN arrow
keys to scroll through each state type.
D
2
Call Forward
Mode Screen
Services
Dir
Callers
Indicates
CFWD Enabled
Call Forward Mode
1. All
2. Busy
3. No Answer
- Change
- All Off
- All On
!
X
CopytoAll Cancel Done -
Indicates
no CFWD phone
number configured
Indicates
CFWD Disabled
In the above example, CFWD All is enabled as indicated by a checkmark ( 3), CFWD Busy is
enabled but no call forward phone number is configured as indicated by a !, and CFWD No Answer
is disabled, as indicated by an X.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-279
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
3
Select a state for the phone using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
You can enable/disable a specific account on the phone with any or all of the following states.
However, the configuration you set will apply to all accounts on the phone.
All - Enables CFWD All on the phone and forwards all incoming calls to the specified number.
•
Busy - Enables CFWD Busy on the phone and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if
DND has been enabled OR if the phone is currently engaged in another call.
•
No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns on the phone and forwards incoming calls to a specified
number if the call has not been answered for the specified number of rings.
t1
•
ra
f
Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has
DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns.
You can also use the following keys if required:
All Off Key- Disables all CFWD modes.
D
All On Key - Disables all CFWD modes.
CopytoAll Key - Copies the call forward phone number and state of the Call Forward mode (All,
Busy, No Answer) in focus to every Call Forward mode. For example, if you have the cursor pointing
at the “All” state and it is enabled and has a call forward phone number configured, pressing the
CopytoAll Key enables the Busy state and the NoAns state and assigns the same phone number to
both states.
Cancel Key - Cancels any configuration you may have made without saving. To cancel a
configuration, you must press this CANCEL key before pressing the DONE key.
5-280
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
4
In the CFWD No Answer state, press the CHANGE key for the mode you selected in step 2. This
displays the Call Forward State screen. In the following example, the CFWD All state is ON.
Change
Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State: Off
Number: 5551212__
No. Rings: 1
- Backspace
Cancel Done -
D
ra
f
Call Forward
State Screen
Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State:
Off
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 1
- Change
Cancel Done -
Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State: Off
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 3
- Change
Cancel Done -
5
Change the
State
t1
Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State:
On
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 1
- Change
Cancel Done -
Change the
Number
Change the
No. Rings
Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. With the cursor in the “State” field, toggle the
state ON and OFF by pressing the CHANGE key.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-281
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
6
Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “Number” field. Enter a phone number to apply to the
current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you specified, and a call comes into the phone,
it forwards the call to the number you specify.
Use the BACKSPACE key if required to delete characters.
7
Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “No. Rings” field. Press the CHANGE key to select the
number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming calls. Valid values are 1 to 20.
Default is 1.
8
t1
When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone
rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call.
Press DONE in the CFWD State Screen to save all changes.
Press DONE in the CFWD Mode Screen to save all changes.
D
ra
f
Note: In “Phone” mode, the configuration applies to all the accounts on the phone.
5-282
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
CFWD in Custom Mode (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT)
1
Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
Services
Dir
Callers
L1
Screenname1
Services
Dir
Callers
L2
Screenname2
Services
Dir
Callers
L3
Screenname3
CFWD All
Tues Jan1 10:00am
CFWD Busy
Tues Jan1 10:00am
Tues Jan1 10:00am
- Call Fwd
t1
- Call Fwd
- Call Fwd
With the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, press the Call Forward key. The Call Forward Account
screen displays which lists all the accounts on the phone. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to
scroll through each account.
D
2
ra
f
In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts
configured on the phone. Screenname1 has “CFWD All” enabled, Screenname2 has “CFWD Busy”
enabled, and Screenname3 has CFWD disabled as indicated by no message displayed.
Call Forward
Account Screen
Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
1. Screenname1
2. Screenname2
3. Screenname3
- Change
- All Off
- All On
Indicates
CFWD Enabled
!
X
CopytoAll Cancel Done -
Indicates
no CFWD phone
number configured
Indicates
CFWD Disabled
In the above example, Screenname1 has one or more CFWD states enabled as indicated by a
checkmark ( 3), Screenname 2 has one or more CFWD states enabled but a specific state has no
call forward phone number configured as indicated by a !, and Screenname3 has one or more
CFWD states disabled as indicated by an X.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-283
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
3
Select an account using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
You can also use the following keys if required:
All Off Key- Disables CFWD for all accounts on the phone.
All On Key - Enables CFWD for all accounts on the phone.
t1
CopytoAll Key - Copies all settings for the account you select, to all other accounts on the Call
Forward Account screen. For example, if you have the cursor pointing at Screenname1, and you
press the CopytoAll key, all of the CFWD settings for Screenname1 are copied to Screenname2 and
Screenname3.
Cancel Key - Cancels any configuration you may have made without saving. To cancel a
configuration, you must press this CANCEL key before pressing the DONE key.
After selecting an account, press CHANGE.
ra
f
4
D
The Call Forward Mode screen displays for the account you selected. Use the UP and DOWN arrow
keys to scroll through each state type.
Call Forward
Mode Screen
Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward Mode
1. All
2. Busy
3. No Answer
- Change
- All Off
- All On
!
X
CopytoAll Cancel Done -
Indicates
CFWD Enabled
Indicates
no CFWD phone
number configured
Indicates
CFWD Disabled
In the above example, CFWD All is enabled as indicated by a checkmark ( 3), CFWD Busy is
enabled but no call forward phone number is configured as indicated by a !, and CFWD No Answer
is disabled, as indicated by an X.
5-284
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
5
Select a state for the selected account(s) using the UP and DOWN arrow keys.
You can enable/disable any or all of the following states for a specific account or for all accounts (with
individual configurations):
All - Enables CFWD All for an account and forwards all incoming calls for that account, to the
specified number. The phone number can be different between accounts.
•
Busy - Enables CFWD Busy for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified number if
DND has been enabled for that account OR if that account is currently engaged in another call.
The phone number can be different between accounts.
•
No Answer - Enables CFWD NoAns for an account and forwards incoming calls to a specified
number if the call has not been answered for a specified number of rings. The phone number can
be different between accounts.
t1
•
ra
f
Note: If CFWD All AND CFWD Busy AND CFWD NoAns are all enabled (and/or if the account has
DND enabled), the CFWD All settings take precedence over CFWD Busy and CFWD NoAns.
You can also use the following keys if required:
D
All Off Key- Disables all CFWD states for the selected account.
All On Key - Enables all CFWD states for the selected account.
CopytoAll Key - Copies the call forward phone number and state of the selected Call Forward mode
(All, Busy, No Answer) to every Call Forward mode of that account. For example, if you have the
cursor pointing at the “All” state and it is enabled and has a call forward phone number configured,
pressing the CopytoAll Key enables the Busy state and the NoAns state and assigns the same
phone number to both states.
Cancel Key - Cancels any configuration you may have made without saving. To cancel a
configuration, you must press this CANCEL key before pressing the DONE key.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-285
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
6
Press the CHANGE key for the mode you selected in step 4. This displays the Call Forward State
screen. In the following example, the CFWD All state is ON.
Services
Dir
Callers
Change
D
Change the
State
Services
Dir
Callers
ra
f
Call Forward
State Screen
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State:
Off
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 1
- Change
Cancel - AllAccts
Done -
t1
Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State:
On
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 1
- Change
Cancel - AllAccts
Done -
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State: Off
Number: 5551212__
No. Rings: 1
- Backspace
Cancel - AllAccts
Done -
Services
Dir
Callers
Call Forward
Mode NoAns
State: Off
Number: 5551212
No. Rings: 3
- Change
Cancel - AllAccts
Done -
Change the
Number
Change the
No. Rings
Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.
5-286
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
7
Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. With the cursor in the “State” field, toggle the
state ON and OFF by pressing the CHANGE key.
Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.
8
Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “Number” field. Enter a phone number to apply to the
current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you specified, and a call comes into the phone,
it forwards the call to the number you specify.
t1
Use the BACKSPACE key if required to delete characters.
Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.
Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “No. Rings” field. Press the CHANGE key to select the
number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming calls. Valid values are 1 to 20.
Default is 1.
ra
f
9
D
When the phone receives an incoming call, and call forward is configured on the phone, the phone
rings the number of times you specify in the No. Rings screen, and then forwards the call.
Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings
screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the
same settings for that call forward mode.
10
Press DONE in the CFWD State screen to save all changes.
Press DONE in the CFWD Mode screen to save all changes.
Press DONE in the CFWD Account screen to save all changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-287
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Callers List
The IP phones have a "Callers List" feature that store the name, phone number,
and incremental calls, for each call received by the phone.
The following illustrations show the default location of the Callers List Key on
each type of phone model.
Callers List Key under
Services Menu
Callers List Key
Options
Directory
9480i
Hold
Redial
Delete
Conf
Options
1
Xfer
2 ABC
3 DEF
4 GHI
5 JKL
6 MNO
7 PQRS 8 TUV
*
0
9 WXYZ
#
L3
L1
D
5-288
3 DEF
5
JKL
6 MNO
7 PQRS 8 TUV
9 WXYZ
GHI
L2
Mute
9143i
2 ABC
4
ra
f
1
Goodbye
t1
Save
*
0
#
Xfer
Icom
Conf
L1
Services
L2
L3
L4
9480i/9480i CT
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Callers List Key
6753i
ra
f
t1
6755i
D
6757i/6757i CT
You can enable and disable the Callers List feature using the configuration files.
When disabled, the Callers List does not display on the IP phone UI and the Caller
List key is ignored when pressed.
When enabled, you can view, scroll, and delete line items in the Callers List from
the IP phone UI. You can also directly dial from a displayed line item in the
Callers List. You can download the Callers List to your PC for viewing using the
Aastra Web UI.
When you download the Callers List, the phone stores the callerlist.csv file to
your computer in comma-separated value (CSV) format.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-289
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
You can use any spreadsheet application to open the file for viewing. The
following is an example of a Callers List in a spreadsheet application.
D
ra
f
t1
The file displays the name, phone number, and the line that the call came in on.
5-290
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Enabling/Disabling Callers List
You can enable and disable user access to the Callers List on the IP phones using
the following parameter in the configuration files:
•
callers list disabled
Valid values for this parameter are 0 (enabled) and 1 (disabled). If this parameter
is set to 0, the Callers List can be accessed by all users. If this parameter is
set to 1, the IP phone does not save any caller information to the Caller List. For
6757i and 6757i CT phones, the "Caller List" option on the IP phone is removed
from the Services menu, and the Caller List key is ignored if pressed by the user.
Configuration Files
t1
Use the following procedures to enable/disable the Callers List on the IP phones.
ra
f
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the Callers List, see
Appendix A, the section, “Callers List Settings” on page A-124.
Using the Callers List
D
Use the following procedure to access and use the Callers List.
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
On 9143i, 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT:
Press the “Callers List” key on the phone to enter the Callers List.
On the 9480i, 9480i CT:
Press the “Services” key on the phone, and then select “Callers List” from the list of options.
2
Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Callers List.
To the left of a line item, a b icon displays with the handset ON or OFF the receiver. The ON
receiver indicates the call came in as a missed call. The OFF receiver indicates the call came in and
was answered.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-291
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
3
To delete all entries in the Callers list, press the 3 Delete key at the "Callers List" header.
To delete a line item from the Callers List, select the line item you want to delete and press the 3
Delete key.
4
To cancel a delete function, press the r or the s Scroll keys.
To save a line item to a programmable key for speeddialing, press the 3 Save key and enter the line
number at the "Save to?" prompt that is already configured for speeddialing at a programmable key.
6
To dial a displayed entry from the Callers List, pick up the handset, press the d/f handsfree key, or
press a line key.
7
To exit the Callers List, press the “Callers List” key again or the “Goodbye” key.
D
ra
f
t1
5
5-292
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Downloading the Callers List
Use the following procedure to download the Callers List using the Aastra Web
UI.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Operation->Directory.
2
In the Callers List field, click on
ra
f
t1
1
.
A “File Download” message displays.
Click
.
4
Enter the location on your computer where you want to download the Callers List and click
.
D
3
The callerslist.csv file downloads to your computer.
5
Use a spreadsheet application to open and view the Callers List.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-293
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Customizable Callers List and Services Keys
The IP phones currently have a Callers List key (all 5i Series phones) and a
Services key (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT). An Administrator
can specify URI overrides for these keys using the following parameters in the
configuration files:
• services script
• callers list script
Specifying URIs for these parameters cause the creation of an XML custom
application instead of the standard function of the Callers List and Services keys.
An Administrator can configure these parameters using the configuration files
only.
t1
Creating Customizable Callers List and Services Keys
ra
f
Use the following procedure to create customized Callers List and Services keys
on the IP Phone using the configuration files.
Configuration Files
D
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Customize
Callers List and Services Key” on page A-125.
5-294
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Missed Calls Indicator
The IP phone has a "missed calls" indicator that increments the number of missed
calls to the phone. This feature is accessible from the IP phone UI only.
You can enable and disable the Missed Calls Indicator feature using the
configuration files. When disabled, the Missed Calls Indicator does not increment
as calls come into the IP phone.
t1
When enabled, the number of calls that have not been answered increment on the
phone’s idle screen as " New Calls". As the number of unanswered
calls increment, the phone numbers associated with the calls are stored in the
Callers List. The user can access the Callers List and clear the call from the list.
Once the user accesses the Callers List, the " New Calls" on the idle
screen is cleared.
ra
f
Note: The phones also include a “Missed-Calls-Message” field in a
“message summary” event of a SIP NOTIFY message.
Enabling/Disabling Missed Calls Indicator
You can enable (turn on) and disable (turn off) the Missed Calls Indicator on the
IP phones using the following parameter in the configuration files:
missed calls indicator disabled
D
•
Valid values for this parameter are 0 (enabled) and 1 (disabled). If this parameter
is set to 0, the indicator increments as unanswered calls come into the IP phone. If
set to 1, the indicator does not increment the unanswered calls.
Use the following procedures to enable/disable the Missed Calls Indicator on the
IP phones.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the Missed Calls
Indicator, see Appendix A, the section, “Missed Calls Indicator Settings” on page A-131.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-295
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Accessing and Clearing Missed Calls
Use the following procedure to access and clear missed calls from the Callers List.
Once you display the Callers List, the " New Calls" indicator clears.
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press the “Callers List” key on the phone to enter the Callers List.
2
3
Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Callers List to find the line items that have
the b icon with the receiver ON. These are the missed calls to the phone.
To clear the line item from the Callers List, select the line item you want to clear and press the 3,
Clear, or Delete key (depending on your phone model).
t1
Note: To cancel a delete function, press the r or the s Scroll keys.
D
ra
f
The line item deletes from the Callers List.
5-296
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Directory List
The IP phones have a "Directory List" feature that allows you to store frequently
used names and numbers on the phone. You can also dial directly from the
directory entry.
The following illustrations show the default location of the Directory Key on each
type of phone model.
Directory Key under
Services Menu
Directory Key
t1
Options
Directory
Save
Hold
Redial
Delete
Conf
Options
1
Xfer
2 ABC
4 GHI
5 JKL
7 PQRS 8 TUV
*
0
3 DEF
ra
f
1
6 MNO
9 WXYZ
#
L3
D
Mute
9143i
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
2 ABC
3 DEF
4 GHI
5 JKL
6 MNO
7
8
9 WXYZ
PQRS
L2
L1
9480i
Goodbye
*
0
TUV
#
Xfer
Icom
Conf
L1
Services
L2
L3
L4
9480i/9480i CT
5-297
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Directory Key
Options Key
(Directory is
an option under
Services Menu)
6753i
t1
6751i
D
ra
f
Directory Key
5-298
6755i
6757i/6757i CT
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Directory List Capabilities
In the Directory List a user or administrator can store a maximum of 7 numbers
associated with a unique name. You can apply pre-defined labels to the entry
which include, Office, Home, Cell, and Pager, or create your own labels. Labels
can be up to 14 characters in length.
You can also sort multiple numbers according to preference and perform a
quick-search feature that allows you to enter the first letter that corresponds to a
name in the Directory to find specific line items. The phone displays the first
name with this letter.The quick-search feature in the Directory List works only
when the Directory is first accessed.
Reference
t1
For more detailed information about the Directory Key on your IP phone, and the
Directory List, see your model-specific User Guide.
ra
f
Administrator/User Functions for Directory List
You can perform the following pertaining to the Directory List:
•
You can enable and disable access to the Directory List using the
configuration files. When disabled, the Directory List does not display on the
IP phone UI and the Directory List softkey is ignored when pressed. This is an
administrator function only.
D
•
If the Directory List is enabled, you can view, add, change, and delete entries
to/from the Directory List using the IP phone UI. You can also directly dial a
number from the Directory List. This is an administrator and user function.
•
A public and private softkey can be used when at a line item in the Directory
List. The Private key toggles a number in the Directory List to private. The
Public key allows a number in the Directory List to be sent to the handsets. A
6757i CT accepts a maximum of 50 entries with the public attribute. This is an
administrator and user function.
•
You can download the Directory List to your PC via the Aastra Web UI. The
phone stores the directorylist.csv file to your PC in comma-separated value
(CSV) format. This is an administrator and user function.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-299
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
•
You can use any spreadsheet application to open the file for viewing. The
following is an example of a Directory List in a spreadsheet application. This
is an administrator and user function.
t1
The file displays the name, phone number(s), and line number(s) for each
Directory entry.
ra
f
Enabling/Disabling Directory List
You can enable and disable user access to the Directory List on the IP phones
using the following parameter in the configuration files:
directory disabled
D
•
Valid values for this parameter are 0 (enabled) and 1 (disabled). If this parameter
is set to 0, the Directory List can be accessed by all users. If this parameter is set
to 1, the Directory List does not display on the IP phone and the Directory key is
disabled. On the 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i, the "Directory" option is also removed
from the "Services" menu.
Use the following procedures to enable/disable the Directory List on the IP
phones.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the Directory List, see
Appendix A, the section, “Directory Settings” on page A-123.
5-300
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Server to IP Phone Download
You can populate your IP phone Directory List with server directory files. To
activate this feature, you need to add the following parameters to the
configuration files:
•
directory 1: company_directory
•
directory 2: my_personal_directory’
The IP phone recognizes the following characters in a Directory List:
Character
Description
Pound character; any characters appearing after
the # on a line are treated as a comment
’,’
Comma character; used to separate the name,
URI number, line, and mode fields within each
directory entry.
’"’
Quotation mark; when pound and comma
characters are found between quotes in a name
field or URI number field, they are treated as
regular characters.
ra
f
t1
’#’
D
A valid directory entry has a name, a URI number, and optional line number, and
an optional mode attribute, all separated by commas. If a line number is not
present, the entry is assigned to line 1. If a mode attribute (public or private) is not
present, the entry is assigned to "Private".
The following directory entries are considered valid:
# our company's directory
# updated 1 jan 2012
# mode = private, by default
#
joe foo bar, 123456789, 6
# line = 1, by default
# mode = private, by default
#
snidley whiplash, 000111222
# the parser ignores the COMMA # in the name
# mode = private, by default
#
"manny, jr", 093666888, 9
# the parser ignores the POUND # chars in the URI number
# mode = private, by default
#
hello dolly, "12#34#7", 2
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-301
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Server to IP Phone Download Behavior
The software that reads directory files from the server, loads the file’s contents
into the phone's NVRAM when the phone is booting. Directory entries in the
NVRAM that originate from a server directory file are 'owned' by the server.
During the boot process both directory files are read, combined into a single list,
and any duplicate entries are deleted from the list. Any entries in this list that are
not already in the phone's NVRAM are added to the NVRAM and flagged as
being owned by the server.
Likewise, any entries in the NVRAM that are owned by the server, but are no
longer in one of the server's directory files, are removed from the NVRAM.
Entries made from the IP phone UI are never touched.
t1
Directory List Limitations
The following table indicates the maximum characters for each line and field in
the Directory List.
ra
f
Directory List Limitations
255 characters
Maximum length of a name
15 characters
Maximum length of a URI
45 characters
Maximum number directory entries in the NVRAM
200 entries
Maximum number directory entries in the NVRAM
with the "public" attribute
(6757i CT only)
50 entries
D
Maximum length of a line
5-302
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Using the Directory List
Use the following procedures to access and use the Directory List.
Note: In the following procedure, the location of keys (hard keys,
softkeys, and programmable keys) on the phone are dependant on your
specific phone model. See Chapter 1, Overview, for the keys that are
specific to your phone model.
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
On the 9143i, 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT:
On the 9480i, 9480i CT:
t1
Press the DIRECTORY key to enter the Directory List.
ra
f
Press the Services key, and then select “Directory” from the list of options.
Note: After entering the Directory List, if no key is pressed within 3 seconds, the phone prompts you
to press the first letter in the name of the required directory entry. The phone finds and displays the
first name with this letter.
Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Directory List.
D
2
To dial from an entry in the Directory List:
3
At a line item in the Directory List, pick up the handset, press the d/f key, or press a line key.
The phone automatically dials the Directory List number for you.
To add a new entry to the Directory List:
4
a
Press the SAVE key or ADD NEW softkey (depending on your model phone) at the Directory List
header screen and perform step 4.
or
Press the SAVE key or ADD NEW softkey at a line item and press the DIRECTORY key again.
b
Enter a phone number, name, and line number and press the SAVE key after each field entry.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-303
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
To edit an entry in the Directory List:
5
a
At a line item in the Directory List, press the 3 key.
Note: Use the SAVE key to scroll between the number, name and line entries.
Edit the phone number if required and press SAVE.
c
Edit the name if required and press SAVE.
d
Edit the line if required and press SAVE.
e
Press SAVE to save the changes and exit the editing function.
t1
b
To delete an entry from the Directory List:
a
At a line item in the Directory List, press DELETE. The following prompt displays:
ra
f
6
“DELETE again to erase this item”.
b
Press DELETE again to delete the entry from the Directory List.
D
Note: To cancel a delete function, press the r or the s scroll keys.
To delete all entries from the Directory List:
7
a
At the Directory List header, press DELETE or DELETE LIST (depending on your phone model).
The following prompt displays:
“DELETE again to erase all items”.
b
Press DELETE again to delete all entries from the Directory List.
Note: To cancel a delete function, press the r or the s scroll keys.
To copy an entry from the Directory List to a speeddial key (for 9143i, and 6753i only):
8
At a line item in the Directory List, press the SAVE key.
The "Save to?" prompt displays.
Enter a number from 1 to 9 (associated with the keypad) where you want to save the item as a
speeddial.
Note: You must have a speeddial key previously configured on your phone to use this feature. To
configure a speeddial key, see your Model-specific User’s Guide.
5-304
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
9
To exit the Directory List, press the DIRECTORY key again, the GOODBYE key, or the QUIT key
(depending on your specific phone model).
From the 9480i CT and 6757i CT handset:
10
a
Press the Public/Private softkeys to toggle between making the new entry public or private.
Note: The entry is set to Private by default. If the entry is made Public, the entry is sent to the
handsets. A 6757i CT accepts a maximum of 50 entries with the public attribute.
b
D
ra
f
t1
c
To edit an entry, use the Change softkey.
A screen displays allowing you to edit the name, phone number, and line number, as well as the
public/private setting.
To dial a displayed entry from the Directory List, pick up the handset, press the d/f handsfree
key, or press the Dial softkey.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-305
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Downloading from the Server to the IP Phone
You can use the configuration files to download the Directory List from the
configuration server to the IP phone..
Note: You must use TFTP to download the Directory List.
Use the following procedure to configure the download.
Configuration Files
t1
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for downloading the Directory List, see
Appendix A, the section, “Directory Settings” on page A-123.
Downloading from the IP Phone to the Server
ra
f
You can use the Aastra Web UI to download the Directory List from the IP phone
to the configuration server.
D
Note: You must use TFTP to download the Directory List.
5-306
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Use the following procedure to configure the download.
Click on Operation->Directory.
2
In the Directory List field, click on
.
ra
f
1
t1
Aastra Web UI
A “File Download” message displays.
Click
.
4
Enter the location on your computer where you want to download the Directory List and click
.
D
3
The directorylist.csv file downloads to your computer.
5
Use a spreadsheet application to open and view the Directory List.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-307
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Voicemail (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only)
The Voicemail feature on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i and 6757i CT IP
phones allow you to configure lines with phone numbers so the phone can dial out
to connect to a voicemail server. You associate the Voicemail numbers with the
phone numbers configured on each line (1 - 9 lines).
For each assigned Voicemail number, there can be a minimum of 0 or a maximum
of 1 Voicemail access phone number.
The Voicemail list displays a list of phone numbers assigned to the 9480i,
9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT that have registered voicemail accounts
associated with them.
t1
Note: The Voicemail list does not display the voicemail access number.
ra
f
The phone displays up to 99 voicemails for an account even if the number of
voicemails exceeds the limit.
Registered account numbers/URIs that exceed the length of the screen, either with
or without the voicemail icon and the message count, are truncated with an ellipse
character at the end of the number/URI string.
D
The end of the Voicemail list displays the number of new voicemail messages (if
any exist).
Configuring Voicemail (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT
only)
You configure Voicemail in the configuration files to dial a specific number to
access an existing voicemail account. The user then follows the voicemail
instructions for listening to voicemails.
Note: The phone must have a registered voicemail account from a server
for this feature to be enabled. When no registered voicemail accounts are
registered to the phone, the display shows "List Empty".
5-308
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
To configure the Voicemail feature on the 9480i/9480i CT and 6757i/6757i CT,
you must enter the following parameter in the configuration files:
•
sip lineN vmail:
You can enter up to 9 Voicemail numbers associated with each of the 9 lines on the
phone.
For example:
sip line1 vmail: *97
sip line2 vmail: *95
t1
Note: In the above example, the user would dial *97 to access the
voicemail account for line 1, and *95 to access the voicemail account for
line 2.
Use the following procedure to configure voicemail using the configuration files.
ra
f
Configuration Files
D
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Voicemail
Settings” on page A-122.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-309
Using Voicemail (9480i, 9480i CT, 6757i6757i CT only)
Use the following procedure to access and use voicemail.
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6757i/6757i CT:
1
Press Services on the phone to display the Services menu.
2
From the Services menu, select "Voicemail".
3
Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Voicemail List.
t1
When you have selected a line item, press the d/f handsfree key, 4 Scroll Right key, or press a
line softkey to make an outgoing call using the voicemail access phone number associated with the
line for which the voicemail account is registered.
ra
f
From a selected item in the Voicemail list, you can also lift the handset (go offhook) to make an
outgoing call using the voicemail access phone number.
D
4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
XML Customized Services
Extensible Markup Language (XML) is a markup language much like HTML.
HTML was designed to display data and to focus on how data looks. XML was
designed to describe data and to focus on what data is.
The following are characteristics of XML:
•
XML tags are not predefined. You must define your own tags.
•
XML uses a Document Type Definition (DTD) or an XML Schema to
describe the data.
•
XML with a DTD or XML Schema is designed to be self-descriptive
•
XML is a W3C Standard Recommendation
t1
Creating Customized XML Services on the IP Phones
ra
f
The XML application for the IP phones allows users to create custom services
they can use via the phone’s keyboard and display. These services include things
like weather and traffic reports, contact information, company info, stock quotes,
or custom call scripts.
D
The IP phone XML application supports the following proprietary objects that
allow for the customization of the IP phone’s display.
XML Object
Description
AastraIPPhoneTextMenu
(for Menu screens)
Creates a numerical list of menu items on
the IP phones.
AastraIPPhoneTextScreen
(for Text screens)
Creates a screen of text that wraps
appropriately.
AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen
Creates a formatted screen of text
(for Text screens)
(specifies text alignment, text size, text
static or scrolling)
AastraIPPhoneInputScreen
(for User Input screens)
Creates screens for which the user can
input text where applicable.
AastraIPPhoneInputScreen Time
and Date Attributes
(for User Input screens)
Allows you to specify US (HH:MM:SS am/
pm and MM/DD/YYYY) or International
(HH:MM:SS and DD/MM/YYYY) time/date
formats for an XML user input screen.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-311
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Description
AastraIPPhoneDirectory
(for Directory List screen)
Creates an online Directory List that a user
can browse in real-time.
AastraIPPhoneStatus
(for Idle screen)
Creates a screen that displays status
messages when applicable.
AastraIPPhoneExecute
(for executing XML commands)
Allows the phone to execute commands
(i.e., “reset”, “NoOp”, etc.) using XML.
AastraIPPhoneConfiguration
(for pushing a configuration to the phone)
Allows the server to push a configuration to
the phone.(See page 5-316 for more
information).
AastraIPPhoneImageScreen
(Standard Bitmap Image)
Creates a display with a single bitmap
image according to alignment, height, and
width specifications.
AastraIPPhoneImageMenu
(Menu Image)
Creates a display with a bitmap image as a
menu. Menu selections are linked to keypad
keys (0-9, *, #).
AastraIPPhoneTextMenu (Icon Menu)
(Icon Menu Image)
Creates a display that has a small icon
before each item in the menu.
ra
f
t1
XML Object
D
For more information about creating customized XML applications, see
Appendix F, “Creating and Managing XML Applications.”
5-312
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
You can also use the following attributes/options with the XML objects to further
customize your XML applications:
Attribute/Option
Description/Usage
Valid Values
Beep
Enables or disables a BEEP option to
indicate a status on the phone.
yes | no
Default = no
Use with:
XML object (See Appendix F)
Configuration files (See page 5-315)
Aastra Web UI (See page 5-315)
Note: This value is
case sensitive.
xml status scroll delay (config files)
Status Scroll Delay (seconds) (Web UI)
1 to 25
Allows you to set the time delay, in
seconds, between the scrolling of each Default = 5
status message on the phone.
t1
Use with:
Configuration files (See page 5-316)
Aastra Web UI (See page 5-316)
Specifies a timeout value for the LCD
screen display.
ra
f
Timeout
0, 30, 45, 60
Default =45
Use with:
XML object (See Appendix F)
Specifies a timeout value, in seconds,
that the phone waits for the far side to
return a response after accepting the
HTTP GET connection.
D
XML Get Timeout
0 to 214748364
seconds
Default =0 (never
timeout)
Use with:
Configuration Files (See page 5-317)
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-313
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Attribute/Option
Description/Usage
Valid Values
LockIn
Specifies whether or not the
information on the LCD screen stays
displayed when other events occur
(such as pressing buttons on the
keypad).
yes | no
Default = no
Use with:
XML object (See Appendix F)
CancelAction
Specifies a URI that the phone
executes a GET on when the user
presses the default CANCEL key.
For example:
cancelAction=
http://
10.50.10.117/
ft.xml
D
ra
f
t1
Use with:
XML object (See Appendix F)
Fully qualified URI
5-314
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Enabling/Disabling a Beep for Status Message Displays
You can enable or disable a BEEP option using the Status Message object
(AastraIPPhoneStatus), the configuration files, or the Aastra Web UI.
Note: For enabling/disabling a status message beep using the Status
Message object, see Appendix F, “Creating and Managing XML
Applications.”
When the phone receives a status message, the BEEP notifies the user that the
message is displaying.
You can use the following to enable/disable a status message beep:
AastraIPPhoneStatus object (via XML object; see Appendix F)
•
xml beep notification (via configuration files)
•
XML Beep Support (via the Aastra Web UI)
t1
•
ra
f
Enabling the beep is an indication to the phone to sound a beep when it receives
an AastraIPPhoneStatus object. If you disable the beep, or no
AastraIPPhoneStatus object appears in the status message, then the default
behavior is no beep is heard when the object arrives to the phone.
D
The value set in the configuration files and Aastra Web UI override the attribute
you specify for the AastraIPPhoneStatus object.
For example, if the AastraIPPhoneStatus object has the attribute of Beep=”yes”,
and you uncheck (disable) the “XML Beep Support” in the Aastra Web UI, the
phone does not beep when it receives an AastraIPPhoneStatus object.
Setting the BEEP option in the configuration files and the Aastra Web UI applies
to the phone immediately.
Reference
For information about enabling/disabling the XML beep in the Aastra Web UI, see
“XML Beep Support” on page 5-72.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-315
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Scroll Delay Option for Status Messages
The IP phones support a scroll delay option that allows you to set the time delay,
in seconds, between the scrolling of each status message on the phone. The default
time is 5 seconds for each message to display before scrolling to the next message.
You can configure this option via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
You can use the following to set the scroll delay for status messages:
•
xml status scroll delay (via the configuration files)
•
Status Scroll Delay (seconds) (via the Aastra Web UI)
Changes apply to the phone immediately.
t1
Reference
For more information about configuring status scroll delay, see “Status Scroll
Delay” on page 5-74.
ra
f
XML Configuration Push from the Server
D
The IP phones provide an XML feature that allows you to make configuration
changes to the phone that take affect immediately, without having to reboot the
phone. This feature involves creating XML scripts that push the changed
configuration parameter(s) from the server to the IP phones.
You can use the AastraIPPhoneConfiguration object in the XML scripts to
change configuration parameters or configure new parameters. However, since the
IP phone does not save new parameters created in XML scripts to the local.cfg
file, when the phone reboots, it does not save the new parameters on the phone. In
order for the phone to apply new configuration parameters, you have to enter the
parameters via the user interfaces (Telephone User Interface, Web User Interface,
or configuration files), or reapply the new parameters using the XML scripts after
every boot.
Specific configuration parameters are dynamic on the phone when pushed from
XML scripts on the server. See Appendix F, “Creating and Managing XML
Applications” for more information about XML configuration scripts and
dynamic configuration parameters.
5-316
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
For more information about creating XML configuration scripts and for XML
script examples, see Appendix F, “Creating and Managing XML Applications”.
Configuring the Phone to use XML
You can configure the phone to request the XML objects you create by
configuring specific parameters via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Users can access XML applications via softkeys configured on the IP phones.
The phone performs an HTTP GET on the URI configured in the Aastra Web UI
or configuration files.
You configure the following parameters for object requests:
xml application URI
•
xml application title
t1
•
The xml application URI is the application you are loading into the IP phone.
ra
f
The xml application title is the name of the XML application that displays on the
Services menu in the IP Phone UI (as option #4).
XML Get Timeout
D
The IP phone has a parameter called, “xml get timeout” that allows you to
specify a timeout value, in seconds, that the phone waits for the far side to return a
response after accepting the HTTP GET connection. If the far side accepts the
GET connection but never returns a response, it blocks the phone until it is
rebooted. If you enter a value greater than 0 for this parameter, the phone times
out and will not be blocked.
For more information about configuring this parameter, see Appendix A, the
section, “XML Settings” on page A-132.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-317
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
XML Push Requests
In addition to initiating a request to an XML application from a softkey, an HTTP
server can push an XML object to the phone via HTTP Post. When the phone sees
a PUSH request containing an XML object, it tries to authenticate the request. It
does so by checking the IP address or host name of the requesting host against a
list of trusted hosts (or domain names) configured via the Aastra Web UI
(parameter called XML Push Server List) or the configuration files (parameter
called xml application post list). If the request is authenticated, the XML object
is handled by the IP phone accordingly, and displays the information to the screen.
t1
Note: The HTTP Post must contain HTTP packets that have an "xml"
line in the message body. For more information about adding "xml" lines
in HTTP packets, see Appendix F, “Creating and Managing XML
Applications”.
Example Configuration of XML Application
ra
f
The following example shows the parameters you enter in the configuration files
to configure an XML application:
xml application URI: http://172.16.96.63/aastra/internet.php
xml application title: Aastra Telecom
D
xml application post list: 10.50.10.53, dhcp10-53.ana.aastra.com
Configuring for XML on the IP Phone
After creating an XML application, an administrator can configure the IP phone to
use the application using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “XML Settings”
on page A-132.
5-318
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT:
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML.
2
Select a key from keys 1 through 20.
3
In the "Type" field, select XML from the list box.
4
In the "Label" field, enter a label that displays on the IP phone for the softkey. For example, "XML".
5
In the "Value" field, enter the IP address or qualified domain name of the XML application.
6
In the "XML Application URI" field, enter the HTTP server path or qualified domain name of the XML
application you want to load to the IP phone. For example, you could enter an XML application called
"http://172.16.96.63/aastra/internet.php" in the applicable field.
D
ra
f
t1
1
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-319
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
7
In the "XML Application Title" field, enter the name of the XML application that you want to display
on the IP phone Services Menu. In the illustration above, the XML Application Title is "Aastra
Telecom".
8
Click
to save your changes.
The XML application is applied to the IP phone immediately.
When the XML application is pushed to the phone via an HTTP POST, a host IP address or domain
name server is required.
Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server.
10
In the "XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses)" field, enter the host IP address and/or
domain name server. You can enter multiple IP address and/or domain name servers (separated by
commas). In the example in Step 8, the illustration shows a host IP address of "10.50.10.53,
10.50.10.54" in the applicable field.
11
Click
D
ra
f
t1
9
to save your changes.
Note: No posting is performed if a session times out.
5-320
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 9143i, 6753i
1
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
ra
f
t1
6753i and 9143i Screen
For the 6753i and 9143i, select a key from keys 3 through 6.
3
In the "Hard Key" field, select XML from the list box.
4
In the "Value" field, enter the IP address or qualified domain name of the XML application.
5
Click
D
2
to save your changes.
The XML application is applied to the IP phone immediately.
When the XML application is pushed to the phone via an HTTP POST, a host IP address or domain
name server is required.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-321
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server.
7
In the "XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses)" field, enter the host IP address and/or
domain name server. You can enter multiple IP address and/or domain name servers (separated by
commas). In the example in Step 6, the illustration shows a host IP address of "10.50.10.53,
10.50.10.54" in the applicable field.
8
Click
D
ra
f
t1
6
to save your changes.
Note: No posting is performed if a session times out.
5-322
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Using the XML Customized Service
After you create, save, and configure the IP phone with an XML application, the
customized service is ready for you to use.
Use the following procedure to use the XML feature on the IP phone.
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT:
Press the Services key on the phone to display the Services menu.
2
Select "Custom Features".
3
Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in a menu-driven and directory "Custom
Features" screen.
t1
1
Message services display to the screen after selecting the "Custom Features" option.
For user input services, follow the prompts as appropriate.
ra
f
To exit from the "Custom Features" screen, press Exit.
D
4
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-323
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
For the 9143i, 6753i:
1
Press the programmable key configured on the phone for XML services.
A "Custom Features" screen displays.
2
Use the r and s to scroll through the customized features.
3
Select a service to display the information for that customized service.
To exit from the "Custom Features" screen, press the XML programmable key again.
D
ra
f
4
t1
Message services display to the screen after pressing the programmable key.
For user input services, follow the prompts as appropriate.
5-324
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
XML Action URIs
The IP phones have a feature that allows an administrator to specify a uniform
resource identifier (URI) that triggers a GET when certain events occur. The IP
phone events that support this feature are:
The IP phones have a feature that allows an administrator to specify a uniform
resource identifier (URI) that triggers a GET when certain XML events occur. The
Action URI feature prevents the phones from hanging if the Action URIs should
fail. The phones also support transparent, non-blocking, XML post execute item
URIs.
Action URI
Description
Startup
t1
The IP phone XML events that support this feature are defined in the following
table.
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when a startup event occurs.
Successful Registration
Incoming Call
ra
f
Specifies the URI for when registration events occur or when
there are registration state changes.
D
Registration Event
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when a successful registration event occurs.
Note: This action URI is not called when the same event is
repeated (for example, a timeout occurs again when
registration is already in a timeout state.)
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when an incoming call event occurs.
Outgoing Call
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when an outgoing call event occurs.
Offhook
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when an offhook event occurs.
Onhook
Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on
when an onhook event occurs.
Disconnected
Specifies the URI that the phone executes a GET on, when it
transitions from the incoming, outgoing, calling, or connected
state into the idle state. For more information, see “Action URI
Disconnected” on page 5-336.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-325
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Action URI
Description
XML SIP Notify
Specifies the URI to be called when an empty XML SIP
NOTIFY is received by the phone. For more information, see
“XML SIP Notify Events” on page 5-339.
Poll
Specifies the URI to be called every "action uri poll interval"
seconds. For more information, see “Polling Action URIs” on
page 5-334.
Poll Interval
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between calls from the
phone to the "action uri poll". For more information, see
“Polling Action URIs” on page 5-334.
t1
Note: For more information about the XML execute items, see
Appendix F, “Creating and Managing XML Applications”.
ra
f
The following table identifies the configurable action URI parameters in the
configuration files and the Aastra Web UI. This table also identifies the variables
that apply to specific parameters.
Action URIs and Associated Variables
action uri startup
action uri registered
5-326
Aastra Web UI Parameters at
Advanced Settings->Action URI
D
Configuration File
Parameters
Applicable Variables
Startup
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$
$$PROXYURL$$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$CALLDURATION$$
$$CALLDIRECTION$$
Successful Registration
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$PROXYURL$$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuration File
Parameters
Aastra Web UI Parameters at
Advanced Settings->Action URI
Applicable Variables
Registration Event
$$REGISTRATIONSTATE$$
$$REGISTRATIONCODE$$
action uri incoming
Incoming Call
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$CALLDURATION$$
$$CALLDIRECTION$$
$$LOCALIP$$
action uri outgoing
Outgoing Call
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$
action uri offhook
Offhook
action uri onhook
Onhook
action uri
disconnected
Disconnected
t1
action uri registration
event
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$
D
ra
f
$$LOCALIP$$
$$CALLDURATION$$
$$CALLDIRECTION$$
$$LINESTATE$$
action uri xml sip notify XML SIP Notify
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$
For more information, see “Action URI
Disconnected” on page -336.
$$LOCALIP$$
For more information, see “XML SIP Notify
Events” on page 5-339.
action uri poll
Poll
For more information, see “Polling Action
URIs” on page 5-334.
action uri poll interval
Interval
For more information, see “Polling Action
URIs” on page 5-334.
Variable Descriptions
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-327
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
The following table provides a description of each variable.
Description
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
Username associated with:
• registered phone
• incoming caller
• outgoing caller
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
Authentication name associated with:
• registered phone
$$PROXYURL$$
Proxy URL associated with:
• registered phone
$$LINESTATE$$
Current line state associated with:
• registered phone
• incoming caller
• outgoing caller
• offhook
• onhook
• disconnected
$$LOCALIP$$
IP Address associated with:
• registered phone
• onhook
ra
f
t1
Variable
Note: This variable allows for
enhanced information in call
records and billing applications.
Remote number associated with:
• incoming caller
• outgoing caller
D
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
Display name associated with:
• incoming caller
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
Username associated with:
• registered phone
• incoming caller
• outgoing caller
$$INCOMINGNAME$$
Name associated with:
• incoming caller
$$CALLDURATION$$
Duration of last call. This variable is associated with:
• onhook
Note: This variable allows for
enhanced information in call
records and billing applications.
5-328
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Variable
Description
$$CALLDIRECTION$$
Specifies whether the current/last call was incoming or outgoing. This
variable is associated with:
• onhook
Note: This variable allows for
enhanced information in call
records and billing applications.
Specifies the state of the phone’s registration. Registration states can
be:
• registered
• unregistered
• expired
• refused
• timeout
$$REGISTRATIONCODE$$
Specifies the code generated during the registration process.
Registration code can be:
"xxx"
where xxx is the 3 digit code; for example, "403". Possible codes are:
001 (registration successful)
403 (registration failed)
ra
f
•
•
t1
$$REGISTRATIONSTATE$$
How it works
D
When a startup, successful registration, incoming call, outgoing call,
offhook, or onhook call event occurs on the phone, the phone checks to see if
the event has an action URI configured. If the phones finds a URI configured, any
variables configured (in the form $$VARIABLENAME$$) are replaced with the
value of the appropriate variable. After all of the variables are bound, the phone
executes a GET on the URI. The Action URI binds all variables and is not
dependant on the state of the phone.
For example, if you enter the following string for the action uri outgoing
parameter:
action uri outgoing: http://10.50.10.140/
outgoing.pl?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$
and you dial out the number 5551212, the phone executes a GET on:
http://10.50.10.140/outgoing.pl?number=5551212
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-329
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Note: If the phone can’t find the Action URI you specify, it returns a
“NULL” response. For example,
http://10.50.10.140/outgoing.pl?number=
You can configure this feature via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring XML Action URIs
Use the following procedures to configure XML Action URIs using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
D
ra
f
t1
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Action URI
Settings” on page A-135.
5-330
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Advanced Settings->Action URI.
2
Enter an XML URI for a startup event in the “Startup” field. For example:
ra
f
t1
1
D
http://10.50.10.140/startup
This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a startup event
occurs.
3
Enter an XML URI for a successful registration in the “Successful Registration” field. For example:
http://10.50.10.14/registered.php?auth name=$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a successful
registration event occurs.
Note: For a successful registration event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action
URIs and Associated Variables” on page 5-326.
The “Successful Registration” parameter executes on the first successful registration of each
unique line configured on the phone.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-331
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
Enter an XML URI in the “Registration Event” field, for when the phone performs registration. For
example:
http://10.30.100.39/PHPtests/
actionuri.php?action=RegEvt®state=$$REGISTRATIONSTATE$$®code=$$REGI
STRATIONCODE$$
This parameter specifies the URI that the phone executes a GET on, when a registration event
change occurs.
Note: For a registration event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action URIs and
Associated Variables” on page 5-326.
5
Enter an XML URI for an incoming call event in the “Incoming Call” field. For example:
t1
http://10.50.10.140/incoming.php?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$
This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an incoming call
event occurs.
6
ra
f
Note: For an incoming call event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action URIs
and Associated Variables” on page 5-326.
Enter an XML URI for an outgoing call event in the “Outgoing Call” field. For example:
D
http://10.50.10.140/outgoing.php?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$
This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an outgoing call
event occurs.
Note: For an outgoing call event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action URIs and
Associated Variables” on page 5-326.
7
Enter an XML URI for an offhook event in the “Offhook” field. For example:
http://10.50.10.140/offhook.php?state=$$LINESTATE$$
This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an offhook event
occurs.
Note: For an offhook event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action URIs and
Associated Variables” on page 5-326.
5-332
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
8
Enter an XML URI for an onhook event in the “Onhook” field. For example:
http://10.50.10.140/onhook.php?state=$$LINESTATE$$
This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an onhook event
occurs.
Note: For an onhook event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action URIs and
Associated Variables” on page 5-326.
To configure a Disconnected event, see the section, “Action URI Disconnected” on page 5-336.
10
To configure an XML SIP Notify event, see the section, “XML SIP Notify Events” on page 5-339.
11
(Optional) You can poll a URI at specific intervals on the phones. For more information about polling
Action URIs, see “Polling Action URIs” on page 5-334.
12
Click
t1
9
D
ra
f
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-333
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Polling Action URIs
Another way to reach a phone behind a NAT/firewall is to have the phone make an
XML call at periodic intervals. An Administrator can use the action uri poll
parameter that commands the phone to perform an XML call at configurable
intervals.
An Administrator can specify the URI to be called and specify the interval
between polls using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuration of
this feature is dynamic (no reboot required).
Configuring Polling Action URI via the Configuration Files
Use the following parameters to configure the polling Action URI on the IP
Phones.
action uri poll
•
action uri poll interval
ra
f
t1
•
Configuration Files
D
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Polling Action
URI Settings” on page A-142.
5-334
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring Polling Action URI via the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure polling Action URI using the Aastra
Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Advanced Settings->Action URI.
2
In the “Poll” field, enter a URI to be called every "action uri pool interval" seconds. Enter the value in
a URI format. For example, http://myserver.com/myappli.xml.
3
In the “Interval” field, enter the interval, in seconds, between calls from the phone to the "action uri
poll". The value of “0” is disabled.
4
Click
D
ra
f
t1
1
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-335
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Action URI Disconnected
The phones have a parameter, “action uri disconnected” that allow a disconnect
event to occur when the phone transitions from any active state (outgoing,
incoming, connected, or calling) to an idle state. This parameter can use the
variable “$$LINESTATE$$”.
Note: The $$LINESTATE$$ variable is optional and not required when
enabling the “action uri disconnected” parameter.
If the Administrator enables this feature (by specifying a disconnect URI),
when a call is disconnected, the phone checks to see if the event has a
ra
f
t1
Disconnect URI configured. If the phones finds a configured URI with a
$$LINESTATE$$ variable, it replaces the $$LINESTATE$$ variable with the
appropriate line state of the current active line. After all of the variables are
bound, the phone executes a GET on the URI. The following table lists the
applicable values for the $$LINESTATE$$ variable.
$$LINESTATE$$ Value Description
Meaning in a Disconnected URI
Phone is idle.
N/A
DIALING
Phone is offhook and ready to dial.
N/A
CALLING
A SIP INVITE was sent but no response
was received.
Error occurred during the call.
Remote party is ringing.
Call was cancelled.
Local phone is ringing.
Call was missed or cancelled.
CONNECTED
Parties are talking.
Call was successful.
CLEARING
Call was released but not acknowledged.
OUTGOING
INCOMING
D
IDLE
N/A
The Action URI Disconnect feature allows an Administrator to determine the
reason for the disconnect if required.
Note: If you enable the Action URI Disconnect feature by specifying a
URI, the URI is called when any disconnect event occurs including an
intercom call or a conference setup.
5-336
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Example
If you enter the following string on Phone A for the “action uri disconnected”
parameter:
action uri disconnected: http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/
disconnected.xml?state=$$LINESTATE$$
and then Phone A calls Phone B, Phone B answers and then hangs up, Phone A
executes a GET on:
http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/disconnected.xml?state=CONNECTED
which is what the remote server receives.
t1
Note: If the phone can’t find the Action URI you specify, it returns a
“NULL” response. For example,
http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/disconnected.xml?state=
ra
f
An Administrator can enable the disconnect feature using the configuration files
or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring the Action URI Disconnected Feature
D
Use the following procedure to configure the Action URI Disconnected feature on
the phone.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Action URI
Settings” on page A-135.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-337
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Advanced Settings->Action URI->Event.
2
In the “Disconnected” field, enter a valid URI for which the phone executes a GET on, when it
transitions from the incoming, outgoing, calling, or connected state into the idle state. Leaving this
field empty disables the Action URI Disconnected feature. For example,
ra
f
t1
1
http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/disconnected.xml?state=$$LINESTATE$$
D
The following table lists the applicable values and descriptions for the $$LINESTATE$$.
$$LINESTATE$$ Value
IDLE
3
5-338
Meaning in a
Disconnected URI
Description
Phone is idle.
N/A
DIALING
Phone is offhook and ready
to dial.
N/A
CALLING
A SIP INVITE was sent but
no response was received.
Error occurred during the call.
OUTGOING
Remote party is ringing.
Call was cancelled.
INCOMING
Local phone is ringing.
Call was missed or cancelled.
CONNECTED
Parties are talking.
Call was successful.
CLEARING
Call was released but not
acknowledged.
N/A
Click
to save your settings.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
XML SIP Notify Events
In order for an XML push to bypass the NAT/firewall, the phone supports a
proprietary SIP NOTIFY event (aastra-xml) with or without XML content. An
Administrator can enable/disable the SIP NOTIFY event using a specific
parameter in the configuration files (sip xml notify event) or the Aastra Web UI
(XML SIP Notify).
If XML content is provided in the SIP NOTIFY, it is processed directly by the
phone as it is done for an XML PUSH.
If the content is empty in the SIP NOTIFY, the phone automatically triggers a new
pre-configured action uri (action uri xml sip notify).
t1
Example of a SIP NOTIFY with XML Content
D
ra
f
NOTIFY sip:200@10.30.100.103:5060 SIP/2.0
Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.30.100.103:5060;branch=z9hG4bK7bbc1fac;rport
From: ;tag=81be2861f3
To: Jacky200
Contact:
Call-ID: 59638f5d95c9d301
CSeq: 4 NOTIFY
Max-Forwards: 70
Event: aastra-xml
Content-Type: application/xml
Content-Length: 115
;tag=81be2861f3
To: Jacky200
Contact:
Call-ID: 59638f5d95c9d301
CSeq: 4 NOTIFY
Max-Forwards: 70
Event: aastra-xml
Content-Type: application/xml
Content-Length: 0
ra
f
When the phone receives the SIP NOTIFY, it will trigger the action uri xml sip
notify parameter, if it has been previously configured using the configuration files
or the Aastra Web UI. If the action uri xml sip notify parameter is not
configured, the phone does not do anything.
D
On the phone side, a System Administrator can enable or disable this SIP
NOTIFY feature using the configuration files or the phone Web UI.
Also to ensure that the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a trusted source, it is
recommended that you enable the Whitelist feature (Whitelist Proxy parameter)
on the IP phone. If enabled, and the phone receives a SIP NOTIFY from a server
that is NOT on the whitelist, the phone rejects the message.
5-340
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Enabling/Disabling XML SIP NOTIFY using the Configuration Files
To enable/disable the SIP NOTIFY event, you can set the following parameter in
the configuration files:
•
sip xml notify event
If the content is missing in the SIP NOTIFY message received by the phone, the
phone automatically uses the value you specify for the following parameter:
•
action uri xml sip notify
Configuration Files
D
ra
f
t1
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Polling Action
URI Settings” on page A-142.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-341
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Enabling/Disabling XML SIP NOTIFY Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the XML SIP NOTIFY feature in
the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
Enabling/Disabling the XML SIP NOTIFY Feature
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.
D
ra
f
t1
1
XML SIP Notify Parameter
5-342
Enabling Whitelist Proxy is recommended
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
2
The “XML SIP Notify" field is disabled by default. To enable this field, check the box.
This field enables or disables the phone to accept or reject an aastra-xml SIP NOTIFY message.
Note: To ensure the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a trusted source, it is recommended that you enable
the Whitelist feature (Whitelist Proxy parameter) on the IP phone. If enabled, and the phone
receives a SIP NOTIFY from a server that is NOT on the whitelist (i.e. untrusted server), the phone
rejects the message.
Click
to save your changes.
D
ra
f
t1
3
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-343
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring XML SIP NOTIFY using the Aastra Web UI if an Empty
SIP NOTIFY Message Received by the Phone
Use the following procedure in the Aastra Web UI to configure the XML SIP
NOTIFY parameter when the phone receives an empty SIP NOTIFY message.
Aastra Web UI
1
If the content is missing in the SIP NOTIFY message received by the phone, the phone automatically
uses the value you specify for the Action URI XML SIP Notify parameter at the path Advanced
Settings->Action URI.
D
ra
f
t1
Click on Advanced Settings->Action URI.
XML SIP Notify Parameter
2
Specify a URI to be called when an empty XML SIP NOTIFY is received by the phone.
For example:
http://myserver.com/myappli.xml
Note: The sip xml notify event parameter at the path Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced
SIP Settings must be enabled.
3
5-344
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
XML Softkey URI
In addition to specifying variables for the Action URIs, you can also specify
variables in the XML softkey URIs that are bound when the key is pressed. These
variables are the same as those used in the Action URIs.
When an administrator enters an XML softkey URI either via the Aastra Web UI
or the configuration files, they can specify the following variables:
t1
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$SIPAUTHNAME$$
$$PROXYURL$$
$$LINESTATE$$
$$LOCALIP$$
$$REMOTENUMBER$$
$$DISPLAYNAME$$
$$SIPUSERNAME$$
$$INCOMINGNAME$$
$$CALLDURATION$$
$$CALLDIRECTION$$
ra
f
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Note: For a description of each variable in the above list, see
D
“Variable Descriptions” on page 5-327.
When the softkey is pressed, if the phone finds a URI configured with variables
(in the form $$VARIABLENAME$$), they are replaced with the value of the
appropriate variable. After all of the variables are bound, the softkey executes a
GET on the URI.
Example
For example, if the administrator specifies an XML softkey with the value:
http://10.50.10.140/script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$
This softkey executes a GET on:
http://10.50.10.140/script.pl?name=42512
assuming that the sip username of the specific line is 42512.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-345
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
You can configure the XML softkey URI variables via the configuration files or
the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring XML Softkey URIs
Use the following procedures to configure XML Softkey URIs using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
D
ra
f
t1
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192.
5-346
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT:
Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML.
2
Select a key from keys 1 through 20.
3
In the "Type" field, select XML from the list box.
4
In the "Label" field, enter a label that displays on the IP phone for the XML softkey. For example,
"aastra".
D
ra
f
t1
1
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-347
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
5
In the "Value" field, enter the URI that the phone performs a GET on when the key is pressed. For
example:
http://10.50.10.140/script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$
Click
to save your changes.
D
ra
f
6
t1
Note: You can use the following variables in the URI:
• $$SIPUSERNAME$$
• $$SIPAUTHNAME$$
• $$PROXYURL$$
• $$LINESTATE$$
• $$LOCALIP$$
• $$REMOTENUMBER$$
• $$DISPLAYNAME$$
• $$SIPUSERNAME$$
• $$INCOMINGNAME$$
• $$CALLDURATION$$
• $$CALLDIRECTION$$
5-348
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
For the 9143i, 6753i:
1
Click on Operation->Programmable Keys.
ra
f
t1
6753i and 9143i Screen
On the 9143i and 6753i, select a key from keys 1 through 6.
3
In the "Type" field, select XML from the list box.
4
On the 9143i and 6753i, in the "Label" field, enter a label that displays on the IP phone for the XML
softkey. For example, "aastra".
D
2
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-349
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
5
In the "Value" field, enter the URI that the phone performs a GET on when the key is pressed. For
example:
http://10.50.10.140/script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$
Click
to save your changes.
D
ra
f
6
t1
Note: You can use the following variables in the URI:
• $$SIPUSERNAME$$
• $$SIPAUTHNAME$$
• $$PROXYURL$$
• $$LINESTATE$$
• $$LOCALIP$$
• $$REMOTENUMBER$$
• $$DISPLAYNAME$$
• $$SIPUSERNAME$$
• $$INCOMINGNAME$$
• $$CALLDURATION$$
• $$CALLDIRECTION$$
5-350
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Web Applications Keys
The IP Phones have a feature that allow a User or Administrator to assign a
pre-programmed XML-based application to a softkey, programmable key, or
expansion module key. This pre-programmed key is called, "WebApps", and is
hardcoded on the phone. Pressing this key launches an XML-based application
called, “xml.myaastra.com”. You can assign the WebApps key to any softkey,
programmable key, or expansion module key on the phone.
On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT phones, the WebApps
softkey displays on softkey 1 on the idle screen by default. You can also access
Web Apps from the Services menu on these phones.
t1
On the 9143i and 6753i, you can access WebApps from the Services menu, or
from a configured programmable key. By default, WebApps displays in the
Services menu.
On the 6751i phone, you can access WebApps from the Services menu only.
ra
f
Note: The WebApps key is not applicable to the CT handsets.
Reference
D
For information on configuring a WebApps softkey or programmable key,
see Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys
on page 5-141.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-351
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
XML Key Redirection
The IP phones allow the redirecting of phone-based hard keys to XML scripts.
This allows the server to provide the phone with Redial, Transfer (Xfer),
Conference (Conf), and Intercom (Icom) key features, and the Voicemail option
feature, rather then accessing them from the phone-side. This feature allows you
to access the redirected keys and voicemail option from the server using the IP
Phone’s Services Menu. By default, the server-side keys function the same as the
phone-side key features.
The following table identifies the phone states that apply to each key
redirection.
Redirects in
Conference (Conf)
the connected state
Transfer (Xfer)
Redial
t1
Hard Keys/Options
the connected and dialing states
all states
Voicemail
all states
all states
ra
f
Intercom (Icom)
D
Notes:
1. If XML key redirection is enabled on the 6751i., the Xfer and Conf
menu items perform redirection.
2. Key remapping takes precedence over redirecting.
3. Disabling the redial, conference, or transfer features on the phone
also disables the redirection of these keys.
The following URI configuration parameters control the redirection of the keys
and the voicemail option:
•
•
•
•
•
redial script
xfer script
conf script
icom script
voicemail script
An Administrator can configure the XML key, redirection URI parameters using
the configuration files only.
5-352
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring XML Redirection of the Redial, Xfer, Conf, and Icom
Keys, and the Voicemail Option
Use the following procedure to configure XML redirection of the Redial, Xfer,
Conf, and Icom keys, and the Voicemail option.
Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “XML Key
Redirection Settings (for Redial, Xfer, Conf, Icom, Voicemail)” on page A-237.
Options Key Redirection
(for Options Menu on all phones and Services Menu on 6751i)
ra
f
t1
The IP phones allow the redirecting of the Options Key (Options Menu on all
phones and Services Menu on the 6751i) to an XML script. This allows the server
to provide the phone with available options, rather then accessing them from the
phone-side. You access the Options Key XML script by pressing the Options Key.
You can still access the Options Menu from the phone-side by pressing and
holding the Options key to display the phone-side Options Menu.
The following URI configuration parameter controls the redirection of the
Options Key:
options script
D
•
IMPORTANT NOTES
•
If no Options URI script is configured, the local Options Menu on the phone
displays as normal.
•
If you configure password access to the Options Menu, this password is
required when accessing the local Option Menu, but is not required for the
Options Key redirection feature.
•
Pressing the Options Menu for redirection from the server does not interfere
with normal operations of the phone (for example, pressing the options menu
when on a call does not affect the call).
•
If the phone is locked, you must unlock the phone before accessing the
Options Menu redirect feature. After pressing the Options Key, the phone
displays a screen that allows you to unlock the phone before continuing.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-353
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
•
On the 6751i, the redirection feature works after selecting “Options” from the
Services Menu. To display the original Options Menu, press and hold the
Services key.
An Administrator can configure the XML Options Key (or Services Key on the
6751i), redirection URI parameter using the configuration files only.
Configuring XML Redirection of the Options Key (Services Key on
the 6751i)
Use the following procedure to configure XML redirection of the Options key
(Services key on 6751i).
Configuration Files
D
ra
f
t1
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Options Key
Redirection Setting (Services key on 6751i)” on page A-239.
5-354
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
XML Applications and Off-Hook Interaction
A feature on the IP phone allows you to specify whether the phone is prevented
from going into the off-hook/dialing state when the handset is off-hook and the
call ends.
By default, the phone behaves as follows:
You are in a call using the handset and the phone displays an XML application.
The far-end terminates the call, and a new XML application gets pushed/pulled
onto the display. Since the handset is off-hook and in idle mode, the "offhook idle
timer" starts. When this timer expires, the phone applies dial tone and moves to
the off-hook/dialing state, which then destroys the XML application that was
being displayed.
t1
With the “off-hook interaction” feature you can set an “auto offhook” parameter
that determines whether or not the phone is prevented from entering the off-hook/
dialing state, if the handset is off-hook and the call ends.
ra
f
An Administrator can enable (allow phone to enter the off-hook dialing state) or
disable (prevent the phone from entering the off-hook dialing state) using the
“auto offhook” parameter in the configuration files only.
Configuring the Off-Hook Interaction Feature
D
Use the following procedure to configure the XML application and off-hook
interaction feature.
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Off-Hook and
XML Application Interaction Setting” on page A-239.
XML URI for Key Press Simulation
The Phones provide a feature that allow an XML Developer or Administrator to
define XML Key URIs that can send key press events to the phone, just as if the
physical hard key, softkey, or programmable key were pressed on the phone.
For more information about this feature, see Appendix F, the section, “XML URI
for Key Press Simulation” on page F-60.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-355
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
XML Override for a Locked Phone
The IP phones have a feature that allows a locked phone to be overridden when an
XML application is sent to the phone. This feature also allows you to still use any
softkeys/programmable key/Extension Module Keys applicable to the XML
application even though the phone is locked. However, any keys NOT associated
with the XML application cannot be used when the phone is locked.
Also, XML Get Requests override the locked feature on the phone so that any
softkey pressed by the user that initiates a Get Request continues to get sent.
To allow the overriding of the locked phone for XML applications, the System
Administrator must enter the following parameter in the configuration files:
xml lock override
t1
•
Configuring XML Override for a Locked Phone using the
Configuration Files
ra
f
Configuration Files
D
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “XML Override
for a Locked Phone Setting” on page A-240.
Note: A System Administrator can also lock and unlock a remote phone
using the “lock” and “unlock” commands with the
AastraIPPhoneExecute object in an XML application. For more
information about this feature, see Appendix F, the section, “Using the
Lock and Unlock Commands” on page F-46.
5-356
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments
The audio gain properties for the IP phone handset, headset, and speakerphone is
adjusted to reduce side-tone and echo on the local and far-end equipment. You can
adjust these settings from -10 db to +10 db to best suit your comfort level and
deployment environment by using the following parameters in the configuration
files:
headset tx gain
•
headset sidetone gain
•
handset tx gain
•
handset sidetone gain
•
handsfree tx gain
•
audio mode
t1
•
The default setting for these parameters is 0 (zero).
ra
f
Note: Aastra Telecom recommends you leave the default of 0 (zero) as
the settings for these parameters.
Parameter
Headset tx gain
D
The following table describes each parameter.
Description
The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal transmitted from
the headset microphone to t he far-end party.
Headset sidetone gain
The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of sidetone signal from the
headset microphone to the headset speaker.
Handset tx gain
The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal transmitted from
the handset microphone to the far-end party.
Handset sidetone gain
The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of sidetone signal from the
handset microphone to the handset speaker.
(continued)
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-357
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Parameter
Description
Handsfree tx gain
The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal transmitted from
the base microphone to the far-end party.
Audio mode
Allows you to configure how the d/f key (handsfree key) works. Audio
mode has 4 options:
0 (Speaker) - Calls can be made or received using the handset or
handsfree speakerphone and can be switched between the two modes by
pressing the d /fkey. When on speaker, you can return to using the
handset by placing the handset on the cradle and picking it up again.
1 (Headset) - Calls can be made or received using the headset. Calls can
be switched between the headset and handset by pressing the d /fkey.
t1
2 (Speaker/Headset) - Incoming calls are sent to the speakerphone. By
pressing the d /fkey, you can switch between the handsfree
speakerphone, the headset, and the handset.
ra
f
3 (Headset/Speaker) - Incoming calls are sent to the headset. By pressing
the d /fkey, you can switch between the headset, the handsfree
speakerphone, and the handset.
D
Configuring Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments
You can configure the audio transmit and gain adjustments using the configuration
files only.
Use the following procedure to configure this feature.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Audio Transmit
and Receive Gain Adjustment Settings” on page A-180.
5-358
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)
The IP phones include support for centralized conferencing (Ad-Hoc
conferencing) for Sylantro and Broadsoft servers. This feature provides
centralized conferencing on the SIP server (versus localized, on the phone) and
allows IP phone users to do these tasks:
•
Conference two active calls together into a conference call.
•
When on an active conference call, invite another party into the call.
•
Create simultaneous conference calls on the same IP phone (Sylantro servers
only). For example, the IP phone user at extension 2005 could create these
two conferences, and put one conference on hold while conversing with the
other party:
t1
— Line 1: conference together extensions 2005, 2010, and 2020.
— Line 2: conference together extensions 2005, 2011 and 2021.
ra
f
When an IP phone user is connected to multiple conference calls, some
outbound proxies have maximum call “hold” time set from 30-90 seconds.
After this time, the call that is on hold is disconnected.
Disconnect from an active conference call while allowing the other callers to
remain connected.
•
Ability to create N-way conference.
•
•
D
•
Join two active calls together into a conference call.
Incoming or outgoing active call can join any of the existing conferences.
If the administrator does not configure centralized conferencing, then the IP
phone uses localized conferencing by default.
Note: When you configure centralized conferencing globally for an IP
Phone, the global settings apply to all lines. Although, for the global
setting to work on soft lines, the user must configure the lines with the
applicable phone number.
An Administrator can configure centralized conferencing on a global or per-line
basis using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-359
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
To use the centralized conferencing after it is enabled, see your Model-specific IP
Phone User Guide.
Configuring Centralized Conferencing Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameters to configure centralized conferencing in the
configuration files:
Global Parameter
•
sip centralized conf
Per-Line Parameter
Configuration Files
t1
sip lineN centralized conf
D
ra
f
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Centralized
Conferencing Settings” on page A-88.
5-360
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Configuring Centralized Conferencing Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure centralized conferencing using the
Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
Global Configuration
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP Settings->Basic SIP Network Settings.
2
In the “Conference Server URI” field, do one of the following actions:
D
ra
f
t1
1
•
To disable centralized conferencing on the IP phone, leave this field empty (blank).
•
To enable SIP centralized conferencing on the IP phone, do one of the following actions:
—
If you have specified a proxy server/registrar server, then to reach the media server via the
proxy server, set this field to one of the following:
conf (Sylantro server), or
Conference (Broadsoft server)
By setting this field to conf or Conference, you specify conf@:
. For example, if the proxy server address is 206.229.26.60 and the port used
is 10060, then by setting this parameter to conf, you are specifying the following:
conf@206.229.26.60:10060.
— To reach the media server using a different address/port than that specified by the proxy,
set this field to the following:
conf@:
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-361
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
3
Click
to save your changes.
Per-Line Configuration
Click on Advanced Settings->Line <#>->Basic SIP Network Settings
2
In the “Conference Server URI” field, do one of the following actions:
ra
f
t1
1
To disable centralized conferencing on this line, leave this field empty (blank).
•
To enable SIP centralized conferencing on this line, do one of the following actions:
—
D
•
If you have specified a proxy server/registrar server, then to reach the media server via the
proxy server, set this field to one of the following:
conf (Sylantro server), or
Conference (Broadsoft server)
By setting this field to conf or Conference, you specify conf@:
.
—
To reach the media server using a different address/port than that specified by the proxy,
set this field to the following:
conf@:
3
5-362
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
“SIP Join” Feature for 3-Way Conference (not applicable to the 6751i)
The IP Phones support RFC 3911 which allows an additional caller to join an
active call between two parties if the caller knows the dialog information. This
feature begins a conference using a join header as described in RFC 3911.
The “SIP Join“ feature provides the following:
•
Security via the whitelist (which is a feature that already exists on the phone).
•
Initiates an offhook action uri when it is answered.
•
Initiates an onhook action uri at call termination.
•
Creates a caller list entry.
t1
This feature is disabled by default. You can enable the “SIP Join” feature by
setting the “sip join support” parameter in the configuration files.
Limitations of the “SIP Join” Feature
ra
f
The following are limitations of the “SIP Join” feature:
Not applicable to a conference call already in progress.
•
Not applicable to a CT handset that has two active calls.
•
Not applicable to a phone mixing RTP.
•
•
D
•
Allows secondary parties to join calls if they can determine the dialog
parameters. In order to provide security, it is recommended that the
Administrator configure the SIP whitelist.
Not applicable while the active call between two parties is in the early dialog
state.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-363
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring the “SIP Join” Feature Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameters to configure the “SIP Join feature in the
configuration files:
sip join support
Configuration Files
D
ra
f
t1
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “SIP Join Feature
for 3-Way Conference” on page A-90.
5-364
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods, used
with Broadsoft Client Management System (CMS)
The IP phones support HTTP/HTTPS digest authentication as defined in
RFC 2617. (The HTTP client supports digest authentication; the HTTP server
does not; the HTTP server supports basic authentication). This feature allows the
phones to interoperate with Broadsoft’s CMS phone configuration tool.
Using the configuration files, you can enable/disable the following parameter to
display a LOG IN softkey which allows the HTTP/HTTPS server to perform
digest authentication:
http digest force login - specifies whether or not to display the LOG IN
softkey on the IP Phone UI screen. Valid values are 0 (disabled) or 1
(enabled). Default is 0 (disabled).
t1
•
Using the configuration files, you can change the default values for the
following parameters:
D
•
ra
f
If the “http digest force login” parameter is set to 1 (enabled), after the phone
boots, the LOG IN softkey displays on the phone’s LCD. If the user presses this
softkey, a username/password screen displays, allowing the user to enter the
configured username and password that is sent to the HTTP/HTTPS server for
digest authentication by the server. By default, username is “aastra” and
password is “aastra”. You can enter the username and password in two ways:
— http digest username - specifies the username to use for HTTP/HTTPS
digest authentication.
— http digest password - specifies the password to use for HTTP/HTTPS
digest authentication.
•
By enabling the “http digest force login” parameter (setting to 1) - the phone
displays the LOG IN key so the user can enter the default username/password
via the IP Phone UI.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-365
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Configuring Broadsoft CMS Support via the Configuration Files
Configure Broadsoft CMS support on the IP Phone using the following
parameters in the configuration files:
•
http digest force login
•
http digest username
•
http digest password
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “HTTP/HTTPS
Authentication Support for Broadsoft CMS” on page A-91.
t1
Using the IP Phone when Broadsoft CMS is Enabled
If you enable the HTTP/HTTPS digest authentication feature, the phone behaves
as follows with the BroadSoft CMS tool:
Factory default the phone.
2.
Configure the HTTP or HTTPS server (specify the HTTP or HTTPS server,
path, and port).
3.
Restart the phone.
D
ra
f
1.
The first time the phone reboots, the phone is challenged by the server. The
phone sends the default username of “aastra” and the default password of
“aastra” to the server.
The server sends the default profile to the phone. This profile includes the
information “http digest force login: 1”.When the phone receives the profile,
it displays the “Log In” key on the IP Phone UI’s idle screen.
5-366
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
4.
Press the “Log In" key to displays the username/password screen.
Note: On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT, you use the
Log In softkey to log in. On the 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i, you press the
right arrow key to log in.
9143i, 6751i, and 6753i Login Screens
Please Enter:
Username:
Next
Submit
t1
471348471
Tues Jan1 10:00am
Log In
ra
f
9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT Login Screens
L1
471348471
D
Tues Jan1 10:00am
Log In -
5.
Please Enter:
Username:
Password:
- Backspace
Cancel -
- abc...
Submit -
Enter a username in the “Username” field (up to 40 characters) and a
password in the “Password” field (up to 20 characters).
Note: The “Username” and “Password” fields accept special
characters, such as, @, #, %, =, _, etc. You can also specify domain names
in the Username field (i.e., user@domain).
6.
After entering the username and password, press Submit.
The phone attempts to authenticate with the server. If successful, the phone
reboots and loads the user configuration. If unsuccessful, the phone displays
“Authentication Failed”.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-367
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Customizing the Display Columns on the M675i Expansion Module
The M675i Expansion Module screen displays softkeys in column format. The
function keys on the bottom left of the Module allow you to display 3 full screens
of softkeys. Each screen consists of 2 columns with the following default
headings on each page:
Page 1
"List 1" and "List 2"
Page 2
"List 3" and "List 4"
Page 3
"List 5" and "List 6"
Softkeys
List 2
t1
List 1
Lock/Unlock
BLF 200
D
ra
f
Home (speeddial)
Function Keys
(Press for page 1)
(Press for page 2)
(Press for page 3)
Page 1 Screen
5-368
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
List 3
List 5
List 4
Page 2 Screen
List 6
Page 3 Screen
t1
To use the M675i, press the function key for the page you want to display to the
LCD (page 1, page2, or page 3), and press the applicable softkey.
ra
f
You can customize the headings on each M675i Expansion Module screen using
the configuration files. You use the following parameters to customize the column
headings:
•
expmod1page1left
•
expmod1page1right
•
D
Expansion Module 1 (3 pages)
•
•
•
expmod1page2left
expmod1page2right
expmod1page3left
expmod1page3right
Expansion Module 2 (3 pages)
•
expmod2page1left
•
expmod2page1right
•
expmod2page2left
•
expmod2page2right
•
expmod2page3left
•
expmod2page3right
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-369
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
Expansion Module 3 (3 pages)
•
expmod3page1left
•
expmod3page1right
•
expmod3page2left
•
expmod3page2right
•
expmod3page3left
•
expmod3page3right
Example
The following is an example of configuring Expansion Module 1 column
headings.
D
ra
f
t1
expmod1page1left: Personnel Ext
expmod1page1right: Operations Ext
expmod1page2left: Marketing Ext
expmod1page2right: Logistics Ext
expmod1page3left: Engineering Ext
expmod1page3right: Shipping Ext
5-370
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Operational Features
Operational Features
These settings display to the Expansion Module as shown in the following
illustrations.
Personnel Ext
Marketing Ext
Operations Ext
Page 1 Screen
Logistics Ext
t1
Page 2 Screen
D
ra
f
Engineering Ext Shipping Ext
Page 3 Screen
Customizing the M675i Expansion Module Column Display.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“Customizing M675i Expansion Module Column Display” on page A-231.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
5-371
D
ra
f
t1
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational Features
5-372
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Chapter 6
Configuring Advanced
Operational Features
About this chapter
t1
Introduction
ra
f
The IP phones have advanced operational features you can configure using the
configuration files and/or the Aastra Web UI.
This chapter describes each of these features and provides procedures for
configuring each feature.
D
Topics
This chapter covers the following topics:
Topic
Page
Advanced Operational Features
page 6-3
MAC Address/Line Number in REGISTER Messages
page 6-5
SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer
page 6-7
Update Caller ID During a Call
page 6-8
Boot Sequence Recovery Mode
page 6-9
Auto-discovery Using mDNS
page 6-10
Single Call Restriction (6757i CT and 9480i CT only)
page 6-11
Missed Call Summary Subscription
page 6-13
As-Feature-Event Subscription
page 6-17
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-1
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter
Topic
Page
page 6-22
Whitelist Proxy
page 6-24
Transport Layer Security (TLS)
page 6-26
802.1x Support
page 6-31
Symmetric UDP Signaling
page 6-43
Removing UserAgent and Server SIP Headers
page 6-44
GRUU and sip.instance Support
page 6-45
Multi-Stage Digit Collection (Billing Codes) Support (for Sylantro
Servers)
page 6-46
Configurable DNS Queries
page 6-49
Ignore Out of Sequence Errors
page 6-51
t1
Blacklist Duration
page 6-52
Reason Header Field in SIP Message
page 6-52
D
ra
f
“Early-Only” Parameter in Replaces Header RFC3891
6-2
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Description
This section provides the following information about advanced features of the IP
phones:
Description
MAC Address/Line Number in REGISTER
Messages
Allows you to enable or disable the sending of the MAC
address and line number from the IP phone to the call
server, in a REGISTER message.
SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer
Allows you to enable or disable the phone to use the Blind
Transfer method available in software prior to release 1.4.
Update Caller ID During a Call
D
Auto-discovery Using mDNS
Allows you to enable or disable the updating of the Caller ID
information during a call.
Allows you to enable or disable Web recovery mode and set
the maximum boot count on the IP phone.
ra
f
Boot Sequence Recovery Mode
t1
Feature
The IP phones automatically perform an auto-discovery of all
servers on a network using mDNS. When the IP phone
discovers a TFTP server, it is automatically configured by
that TFTP server.
Single Call Restriction (6757i CT and 9480i
CT only)
Allows you to enable or disable a single call restriction
between the 6757i CT base unit and a call server.
Missed Call Summary Subscription
Allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server,
to be incremented in the missed calls indicator on the phone
it was initially directed to.
As-Feature-Event Subscription
Allows you to enable or disable a specific line on the phone
with the BroadSoft’s server-side DND, CFWD, or ACD
features.
Blacklist Duration
Allows you to specifies the length of time, in seconds, that a
failed server remains on the server blacklist. The IP phone
avoids sending a SIP message to a failed server (if another
server is available) for this amount of time.
Whitelist Proxy
Allows you to configure the phone to either accept or reject
call requests from a trusted proxy server.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-3
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Feature
Description
Transport Layer Security (TLS)
Allows you to enable or disable the use of Persistent
Transport Layer Security (TLS).
Persistent TLS sets up the connection to the server once
and re-uses that connection for all calls from the phone. The
setup connection for Persistent TLS is established during the
registration of the phone. If the phones are set to use
Persistent TLS, and a call is made from the phone, this call
and all subsequent calls use the same authenticated
connection. This significantly reduces the delay time when
placing a call.
Allows you to enable or disable the 802.1x Protocol support
on the IP Phones.
Symmetric UDP Signaling
Allows you to enable or disable the phone to use port 5060
to send SIP UDP messages.
Removing UserAgent and Server SIP
Headers
D
Configurable DNS Queries
Ignore Out of Sequence Errors
6-4
Allows you to enable or disable the addition of the
User-Agent and Server SIP headers in the SIP stack.
IP Phones support Sylantro Server features, like mandatory
and optional billing codes that require the application server
to notify the phone to collect more digits before completing
the call. The IP phone is able to collect digits in two stages to
support the billing code feature.
ra
f
Multi-Stage Digit Collection (Billing Codes)
Support (for Sylantro Servers)
t1
802.1x Support
Allows you to specify the Domain Name Service (DNS)
query method to use when the phone performs a DNS
lookup.
Allows you to configure the phone to ignore CSeq number
errors on all SIP dialogs on the phone.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
MAC Address/Line Number in REGISTER Messages
The IP phones can send the MAC address and line number in the REGISTER
packets making it easier for the call server when a user configures the phones via
the Aastra Web UI or the IP Phone UI. The following two configurable headers
send this information to the call server:
Aastra-Mac:
Aastra-Line:
The MAC address is sent in uppercase hex numbers, for example,
00085D03C792. The line number is a number between 1 and 9.
•
sip send mac
•
sip send line
t1
The following parameters allow you to enable/disable the sending of MAC
address and line number to the call server:
ra
f
These parameters are disabled by default. The parameters are configurable via the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring the MAC address/Line Number in REGISTER Message
D
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling MAC address and line
number, see Appendix A, the section, “Advanced Operational Parameters” on page A-233.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-5
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
.
Aastra Web UI
Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Setting.
2
Enable the "Send MAC Address in REGISTER Message" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box).
3
Enable the "Send Line Number in REGISTER Message" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box).
4
Click
D
ra
f
t1
Step
to save your settings.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
5
6-6
Select Operation->Reset and click
.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer
The SIP message sequence for Blind Transfer avoids the transfer target having
two simultaneous calls. Prior to release 1.4, a CANCEL message was sent to the
transfer target (if it was in a ringing state) after sending a REFER to the transferee
to complete the transfer. In the 1.4 and later releases, the CANCEL is now sent
before the REFER message.
The following parameter allows the system administrator to force the phone to use
the Blind Transfer method available in software versions prior to 1.4:
sip cancel after blind transfer
This parameter is configurable via the configuration files only.
Configuration Files
t1
Configuring SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer
D
ra
f
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the blind transfer
method, see Appendix A, the section, “Blind Transfer Setting” on page A-233.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-7
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Update Caller ID During a Call
It is possible for a proxy or call server to update the Caller ID information that
displays on the phone during a call, by modifying the SIP Contact header in the
re-INVITE message. The phone displays the updated name and number
information contained within the Contact header.
The following parameter allows the system administrator to enable or disable this
feature:
sip update callerid:
This parameter is configurable via the configuration files only.
Configuration Files
t1
Configuring Update Caller ID During a Call
D
ra
f
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files for enabling/disabling the update of caller ID
during a call, see Appendix A, the section, “Update Caller ID Setting.” on page A-233.
6-8
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Boot Sequence Recovery Mode
You can force the IP phone into recovery mode by pressing the 1 and # keys
during boot up when the logo displays. This feature is enabled by default on the IP
phone.
You can disable this feature using the following parameter in the configuration
files:
•
force web recovery mode disabled
Valid values for this parameter are 0 (false) and 1 (true). Default is 0 (false).
t1
A boot counter increments after each faulty boot. When the counter reaches a
predetermined value, it forces Web recovery mode. The counter is reset to zero
upon a successful boot.
The predetermined value is set using the following parameter in the configuration
files:
max boot count
ra
f
•
A zero (0) value disables this feature. The default value is 10.
D
You can configure the boot sequence recovery mode parameters using the
configuration files only.
Configuring Boot Sequence Recovery Mode
Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for boot sequence recovery mode, see
Appendix A, the section, “Boot Sequence Recovery Mode Settings.” on page A-234.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-9
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Auto-discovery Using mDNS
The IP phones can perform an auto-discovery of all servers on a network using
mDNS. When the IP phone discovers a TFTP server, it is automatically
configured by that TFTP server.
An unconfigured phone (phone right out of the box) added to a network, attempts
to auto-discover a configuration server on the network without any end-user
intervention. When it receives DHCP option 66 (TFTP server), it automatically
gets configured by the TFTP server.
An already configured phone (either previously configured by auto-discovery or
manually configured) added to a network, uses its predefined configuration to
boot up.
ra
f
t1
Notes:
1. Configuration parameters received via DHCP do not constitute
configuration information, with the exception of a TFTP server.
Therefore, you can plug a phone into a DHCP environment, still use the
auto-discovery process, and still allow the use of the TFTP server
parameter to set the configuration server.
D
2. DHCP option 66 (TFTP server details) overrides the mDNS phase of
the auto-discovery. Therefore, the DHCP option takes priority and the
remaining process of auto-discovery continues.
3. As the phone performs auto-discovery, all servers in the network
(including the TFTP server), display in the phone window. However, only
the server configured for TFTP automatically configures the phone.
6-10
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Single Call Restriction (6757i CT and 9480i CT only)
On the 6757i CT and 9480i CT, an administrator can enable or disable a single
call restriction between the 6757i CT and 9480i CT base unit and a call server.
When this feature is enabled (set to 1), you can make separate active calls from
the 6757i CT and 9480i CT base unit and from the cordless handset. If this feature
is disabled (set to 0), only one call can be active at a time either from the base unit
or from the handset. When this feature is disabled, and you make an active call on
either the base unit or the handset, any other attempt to make an active call is put
on hold. Also, when this feature is disabled, more than one call can negotiate
complex audio codecs since only a single call is decoding audio at a time.
You can configure this feature via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
t1
Configuring Single Call Restriction.
D
ra
f
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for single call restriction on the 6757i CT
and 9480i CT, see Appendix A, the section, “Single Call Restriction Setting” on page A-235.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-11
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings.
2
Enable the "Two Call Support" field by checking the check box.
(Disable this field by unchecking the box).
3
Click
D
ra
f
t1
Step
to save your settings.
Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings.
4
6-12
Select Operation->Reset and click
.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Missed Call Summary Subscription
The “Missed Call Summary Subscription” feature allows missed calls that have
been redirected by the server, to be incremented in the missed calls indicator on
the phone it was initially directed to. This feature is called the Missed Call
Summary Subscription and can be set with a timer that allows the phone to use the
feature for a period of time before the timer expires. For this feature to work, you
must configure voicemail on the phone that the call was initially directed to.
3KRQH&
ra
f
3KRQH$
t1
For example, phones A, B, and C are connected to the server. You configure the
server to direct calls coming into phone B (which has voicemail configured) to be
forwarded to phone C. When phone A calls phone B, the server forwards the call
to phone C. With this feature, phone B receives notification from the server that
the call was forwarded and the missed calls indicator is incremented on phone B.
3KRQH%
%IRZDUGVFDOOWR&
D
$FDOOV%
0LVVHGFDOOVLQGLFDWRULQFUHPHQWVRQSKRQH%
9RLFHPDLOPXVWEHFRQILJXUHGRQSKRQH%
1RWH
An Administrator can configure this feature on a global or per-line basis, using the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-13
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Configuring Missed Call Summary Subscription using the
Configuration Files
In addition to enabling/disabling the Misses Call Summary Subscription, You can
also configure the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone uses this feature.
The timer is configurable on a global basis only.
You use the following parameters to configure Missed Call Summary
Subscription feature on a global basis:
Global Parameters
•
sip missed call summary subscription
•
sip missed call summary subscription period
Per-Line Parameter
sip lineN missed call summary subscription
ra
f
•
t1
Use the following parameters to configure Missed Call Summary Subscription
feature on a per-line basis:
Configuration Files
D
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for Missed Call Summary Subscription, see
Appendix A, the section, “Missed Call Summary Subscription Settings” on page A-101.
6-14
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Configuring Missed Call Summary Subscription using the
Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure the Missed Call Summary Subscription
feature using the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
Global Configuration
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.
D
ra
f
t1
1
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-15
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
2
The "Missed Call Summary Subscription" field is disabled by default. To enable this field, check
the box.
This feature allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server, to be incremented in the
missed calls indicator on the phone it was initially directed to. For example, phones A, B, and C are
connected to the server. You configure the server to direct calls coming into phone B (which has
voicemail configured) to be forwarded to phone C. When phone A calls sip missed call summary
subscription parameter, phone B receives notification from the server that the call was forwarded
and the missed calls indicator is incremented on phone B.
Note: You must configure voicemail on the phone that the call was initially directed to (phone B in the
above example).
3
The "Missed Call Summary Subscription Period" field is enabled with a default value of 86400. To
disable this field, enter zero (0), or leave the field blank.
4
Click
t1
to save your changes.
Per-Line Configuration
Click on Advanced Settings->Line ->Advanced SIP Settings.
2
Click
D
ra
f
1
6-16
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
As-Feature-Event Subscription
The IP phones support server-side Do Not Disturb (DND), Call Forward
(CFWD), and Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature events.This feature is
called “as-feature-event” and works with the DND, CFWD, and ACD keys.
Notes:
1. The 6751i supports server-side DND and CFWD only.
2. The DND, CFWD, and ACD server-side feature is not applicable to
the CT handset.
This feature is configurable using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
How it Works on the Phone UI
t1
When you enable the “as-feature-event” on the phone, AND you activate a DND,
CFWD, and/or ACD key, pressing the key performs as follows:
If the key is configured for an account on the phone, the server applies DND,
CFWD or ACD to that account. (For information about CFWD and DND
account configuration, see Chapter 3, the section, “Account Configuration”
on page 3-35).
•
If the key is “custom” configured, a screen displays on the phone allowing the
user to choose the account to apply DND or CFWD. (For information about
CFWD and DND custom configuration, see Chapter 3, the section, “Account
Configuration” on page 3-35).
D
•
ra
f
•
A solid “Message Waiting Indicator” (MWI) indicates if one line/account has
DND or CFWD enabled, and the LED next to the DND/CFWD key is ON. A
status displays on the LCD that indicates the status of the line in focus (for
example, the status of CFWD could be “Call Forward Busy” (CFWDB) or
“Call Forward No Answer” (CFWDNA).
Note: If the ACD key is configured on the phone, and the
“as-feature-event” is not enabled, the phones uses the ACD icons and
LED behavior from a Sylantro server instead.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-17
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
When you press the DND, CFWD, or ACD key, only one attempt is made to
enable/disable the “as-feature-event” feature on the server. The message “Trying”
displays on the phone’s LCD after pressing the key. If the attempt is successful,
the idle screen displays. If the attempt is unsuccessful, the message “Failed”
displays. The user can press the softkey again to re-attempt the feature if required.
The following screen displays on the IP Phone UI for server-side call forwarding:
Call Forward
Mode: CFA
Next
Done
For server-side ACD, when you press the ACD softkey, the screen that displays is
dependant on the state of the ACD subscription. Possible state for ACD are::
Logged Out - User has the option of logging in.
•
Logged In - User has the option of logging out or making the phone
unavailable.
•
Unavailable - User has the option of logging out or making the phone
available.
ra
f
t1
•
ACD Screen for 9143i, 6751i, 6753i
ACD
Logged In
Unavail
Log Out
Logged Out
Log In
D
ACD
ACD
Avail
Unavailable
Log Out
ACD Screen for 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT
ACD
ACD
Logged Out
Logged In
- Log Out
- Log In
Cancel -
6-18
ACD
- Unavailable
Unavailable
- Log Out
Cancel -
- Available
Cancel -
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Note: IMPORTANT!
If DND and CFWD are configured to use “Account” mode on the IP
Phone, pressing the DND and CFWD keys apply to the account in focus
as described in Chapter 3, the section, “Account Configuration” on
page 3-35.
If ACD is configured on the phone, the ACD softkey applies to the line
for which the key is configured. The ACD softkey must be configured for
the first line of an account. For example, if account 2 has line 3 and line 4
you must configure the ACD softkey for line 3.
t1
Configuring As-Feature-Event Subscription Using the Configuration
Files
ra
f
If the phone-side features of the DND, CFWD, and ACD keys are enabled, the
phone uses the existing parameter values for these keys. If the server-side features
are enabled, the phone saves the state of the features from the server on the phone.
Use the following parameters to enable/disable the server-side “as-feature-event”
on the IP Phone:
•
sip lineN as-feature-event subscription
D
•
sip as-feature-event subscription period
Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section,
“As-Feature-Event Subscription Settings” on page A-104.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-19
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Configuring As-Feature-Event Subscription Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the server-side “as-feature-event”
on the IP Phone using the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Advanced Settings->LineN->Advanced SIP Settings.
2
In the “Advanced SIP Settings” section, enable the "As--Feature-Event Subscription" field, by
checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box).
3
Click
D
ra
f
t1
1
6-20
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.
D
ra
f
t1
As-Feature-Event
Subscription
Period
5
In the “Advanced SIP Settings” section, in the “As-Feature-Event Subscription Period” field, enter
the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone waits after sending a SUBSCRIBE, to receive a
NOTIFY response from the server side.
Default is 3600. Valid values are
6
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-21
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Blacklist Duration
The Blacklist Duration feature helps to reduce unnecessary delays during proxy/
registrar server failures, caused by the IP phone repeatedly sending SIP messages
to a failed server. If you enable this feature, then whenever the IP phone sends a
SIP message to a server, and does not get a response, the phone automatically
adds the server to the blacklist. The IP phone avoids sending messages to any
servers on the blacklist. If all servers are on the blacklist, then the IP phone
attempts to send the message to the first server on the list.
You can specify how long failed servers remain on the blacklist in the IP phone’s
configuration file or in the Aastra Web UI. The default setting is 300 seconds. If
you set the duration to 0 seconds, then you disable the blacklist feature.
t1
Configuring Blacklist Duration Using the Configuration Files
Use the following parameter to configure the Blacklist Duration in the
configuration files:
sip blacklist duration
ra
f
•
Configuration Files
D
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for setting Blacklist Duration, see Appendix
A, the section, “Blacklist Duration Setting” on page A-236.
6-22
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Configuring a Server Blacklist Using the Aastra Web UI
You use the following procedure to configure Blacklist Duration using the Aastra
Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings
2
In the “Blacklist Duration” field, specify the length of time, in seconds, that a failed server remains
on the server blacklist. The IP phone avoids sending a SIP message to a failed server (if another
server is available) for this amount of time. Valid values are 0 to 9999999. Default is 300 seconds (5
minutes).
D
ra
f
t1
1
For example: 600
Note: The value of “0” disables the blacklist feature.
3
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-23
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Whitelist Proxy
To protect your IP phone network, you can configure a “Whitelist Proxy” feature
that screens incoming call requests received by the IP phones. When this feature is
enabled, an IP phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only. The IP
phone rejects any call requests from an untrusted proxy server
Configuring Whitelist Proxy Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameter to configure the whitelist proxy feature using the
configuration files:
sip whitelist
Configuration Files
t1
•
D
ra
f
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for setting Whitelist Proxy, see Appendix A,
the section, “Whitelist Proxy Setting” on page A-236.
6-24
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Configuring Whitelist Proxy Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to configure the Whitelist Proxy feature using the
Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings
2
The "Whitelist Proxy" field is disabled by default. To enable this field, check the box.
D
ra
f
t1
1
When this feature is enabled, an IP phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only. The
IP phone rejects any call requests from an untrusted proxy server.
3
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-25
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Transport Layer Security (TLS)
The IP Phones support a transport protocol called Transport Layer Security
(TLS) and Persistent TLS. TLS is a protocol that ensures communication
privacy between the SIP phones and the Internet. TLS ensures that no third party
may eavesdrop or tamper with any message.
TLS is composed of two layers: the TLS Record Protocol and the TLS handshake
protocol. The TLS Record Protocol provides connection security with some
encryption method such as the Data Encryption Standard (DES). The TLS
Handshake Protocol allows the server and client to authenticate each other and to
negotiate an encryption algorithm and cryptographic keys before data is
exchanged. TLS requires the use of the following security certificate files to
perform TLS handshake:
Root and Intermediate Certificates
•
Local Certificate
•
Private Key
•
Trusted Certificate
ra
f
t1
•
D
When the phones use TLS to authenticate with the server, each individual call
must setup a new TLS connection. This can take more time when placing each
call. Thus, the IP phones also have a feature that allows you to setup the
connection to the server once and re-use that one connection for all calls from the
phone. It is called Persistent TLS. The setup connection for Persistent TLS is
established during the registration of the phone. If the phones are set to use
Persistent TLS, and a call is made from the phone, this call and all subsequent
calls use the same authenticated connection. This significantly reduces the delay
time when placing a call.
6-26
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Notes:
1.
Persistent TLS requires the outbound proxy server and outbound
proxy port parameters be configured in either the configuration files or
the Aastra Web UI (Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Network
Settings). There can be only one persistent TLS connection created per
phone. The phone establishes the TLS connection to the configured
outbound proxy.
2.
If you configure the phone to use Persistent TLS, you must also
specify the Trusted Certificate file to use. The Root and Intermediate
Certificates, Local Certificate, and Private Key files are optional.
t1
On the IP phones, an Administrator can configure TLS and Persistent TLS on a
global-basis only, using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
SIP Asserted Identity (for Sylantro Servers)
ra
f
The IP Phones support a private extension to the SIP, Asserted Identity (SAI)
within Trusted Networks (as defined in RFC 3325), inside the User Agent Server
(UA) in the Aastra IP phones.
D
Note: The phones support PAI header in the UPDATE message,
according to draft-ietf-sipping-update-pai-00. This feature is always
enabled.
If an UPDATE is received with a PAI header from a trusted source, the
phone updates the display with this information. The phone ignores any
PAI received from untrusted entities
This feature allows a network of trusted SIP servers to assert the identity of
authenticated users, and verify that phone messages originate from a Trusted
Identity. Upon receiving a message from a caller in the Trust Network, the IP
phone reads the contents of the P-Asserted-Identity (PAI) header field and
displays it on the phone UI. This field contains a more accurate description of the
caller identity (extension/phone number) than is contained in the SIP message.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-27
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
When an IP phone receives an incoming call, the IP phone does the following
actions:
•
Checks to see if the incoming call is from a registered proxy server.
•
If the call is forwarded via a registered proxy server, then the message has
already been verified and authenticated by the server. The caller is part of the
Trust Network. The IP phone UI displays the caller information contained in
the PAI header.
•
If the call is not forwarded via a registered proxy server - and therefore is not
a “Trusted Entity” - the IP phone UI does not display any trust information
contained in the PAI header.
Configuring TLS Using the Configuration Files
t1
You use the following parameters to configure TLS in the configuration files:
sip transport protocol
•
sips persistent tls
•
sips root and intermediate certificates
•
sips local certificate
•
sips private key
•
sips trusted certificates
D
ra
f
•
Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for setting TLS, see Appendix A, the
section, “Transport Layer Security (TLS) Settings” on page A-105.
6-28
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Configuring TLS Using the Aastra Web UI
To configure TLS using the Aastra Web UI, you must enable TLS or Persistent
TLS first. Then you must define the TLS certificate file names that you want the
phone to use. Use the following procedure to configure TLS using the Aastra Web
UI.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.
2
In the "Transport Protocol" field, select TLS or Persistent TLS.
D
ra
f
t1
1
Note: If configuring Persistent TLS, you must go to Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic Network
Settings and configure the “Outbound Proxy Server” and “Outbound Proxy Port” parameters.
3
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-29
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
Click on Advanced Settings->TLS Support.
5
Enter the certificate file names and the private key file name in the appropriate fields.
ra
f
t1
4
The Root and Intermediate Certificate files contain one root certificate and zero or more intermediate
certificates which must be placed in order of certificate signing with root certificate being the first in
the file. If the local certificate is signed by some well known certificate authority, then that authority
provides the user with the Root and Intermediate Certificate files (most likely just CA root certificate).
D
The Trusted Certificate files define a list of trusted certificates. The phone’s trusted list must contain
the CA root certificates for all the servers it is connecting to. For example, if the phone is connecting
to server A which has a certificate signed by CA1, and server B which has a certificate signed by
CA2, the phone must have CA1 root certificate and CS2 root certificate in its Trusted Certificate file.
Notes:
1. If configuring TLS, you must specify the files for Root and Intermediate Certificates, the Local
Certificate, the Private Key, and the Trusted Certificates in order for the phone to receive calls.
2. If configuring Persistent TLS, you must specify the Trusted Certificates (which contains the trusted
certificate list). All other certificates and the Private Key are optional.
3. The certificate files and Private Key file names must use the format “.pem”.
4. To create custom certificate files and private key files to use on your IP phone, contact Aastra
Technical Support.
6
6-30
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
802.1x Support
The IP phones support the IEEE 802.1x protocol. The 802.1x protocol is a
standard for passing Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) over a wired or
wireless Local Area Network (LAN).
The 802.1x protocol on the IP phone facilitates media-level access control, and
offers the capability to permit or deny network connectivity, control LAN access,
and apply traffic policy, based on user or endpoint identity. This feature supports
both the EAP-MD5 and EAP-TLS protocols.
t1
If 802.1x on the phone is enabled, the following screen displays during startup of
the phone.
D
ra
f
>> 10%
802.1x Authenticating....
If the 802.1x failed to authenticate with the server, the phone continues it's normal
startup process using DHCP. However, the network port on the phone may or may
not be disabled, depending on the switch configuration.
Certificates and Private Key Information
•
If the certificates and private key are NOT stored in the phone:
— the phone connects to an open unauthenticated VLAN and the certificates
are downloaded.
or
— the phone connects using EAP-MD5 to a restricted VLAN and the
certificates are downloaded.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-31
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
•
If the certificates and private key ARE stored in the phone, the phone uses
them during the authentication process.
•
If the phone uses EAP-TLS for successful authentication, after the phone
reboots, it downloads the latest certificates and private key files to the phone.
•
The private key uses AES-128 to encrypt the private key file.
•
Switch Supplicant Mode - The switch supports the following 2 modes:
— Single supplicant - This mode enables the port once any machine
connected to this port is authenticated. For security reasons, the IP phone
has the option to disable the pass-through port.
— Multiple supplicants - Using this mode, the switch can support multiple
clients connected to same port. The switch distinguishes between the
clients based on their MAC address.
Factory default and recovery mode deletes all certificates and private keys,
and sets the EAP type to disabled.
t1
•
ra
f
You can configure the 802.1x feature on the IP phone using the configuration
files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
D
Note: If configuring 802.1x using the IP Phone UI, the certificates
and private keys must already be configured and stored on the phone.
Use the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to load certificates
and private keys.
6-32
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Configuring the 802.1x Protocol Using the Configuration Files
You use the following parameters to configure the 802.1x Protocol on your phone
using the configuration files.
For EAP-MD5 use:
eap type
•
identity
•
md5 password
•
pc port passthrough enabled
For EAP-TLS use:
t1
•
eap type
•
identity
•
802.1x root and intermediate certificates
(use 1 root and 0 or 1 intermediate certificates)
•
802.1x local certificate
(use 1 local certificate)
D
•
ra
f
•
802.1x private key
(1 private key that corresponds to local certificate)
•
802.1x trusted certificates
(0 or more trusted certificates (a maximum of 2))
•
pc port passthrough enabled
Configuration Files
For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for setting 802.1x support, see Appendix A,
the section, “802.1x Support Settings” on page A-109.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-33
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Configuring the 802.1x Protocol Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to configure the 802.1x Protocol on your phone
using the IP Phone UI.
Note: If configuring 802.1x using the IP Phone UI, the
certificates and private keys must already be configured and
stored on the phone. Use the configuration files or the Aastra
Web UI to load certificates and private keys.
t1
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press
2
Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator password.
D
ra
f
to enter the Options List.
6-34
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
3
On 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT:
Select Network Settings->Ethernet->Enable PassThru Port.
On the 9143i, 6751i, 6753i:
Select Network Settings->Ethernet->PC Port Enabled.
1. LAN Port Link
10. Ethernet
Ethernet Link
9143i, 6751i, 6753i
ra
f
- Select
Enter
t1
Next
1. LAN Port Link
2. PC Port Link
3. Enable PassThru Port
4. 802.1x Settings
Done -
D
9480i, 9480i CT,
6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT
Next
2. PC Port Link
Next
Enter
3. PC Port Enabled
Yes
Change
Next
4. 802.1x Settings
Next
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Enter
Enter
6-35
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
4
The PC PassThru Port is enabled by default.
Enable PassThru Port
Enable PassThru Port
Yes
- Change
t1
Cancel Done -
ra
f
Note: The PC PassThru Port must be enabled to use the 802.1x Protocol.
Press Done (on 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT).
or
Press Next (on 9143i, 6751i, 6753i).
6
Select 802.1x Settings.
7
Select 802.1x Mode.
D
5
802.1x Settings
1. 802.1x Mode
1. 802.1x Mode
2. EAP-MD5 Settings
Next
Enter
2. EAP-MD5 Settings
Yes
Enter
Next
- Select
Done -
6-36
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
8
Select EAP-MD5 to configure the phone to use MD5 authentication;
or
Select EAP-TLS to configure the phone to use TLS authentication.
4. 802.1x Settings
802.1x Mode
Next
1. 802.1x Mode
Enter
Next
Enter
Disabled
EAP-MD5
802.1x Mode
Disabled
Next
Set
802.1x Mode
EAP-MD5
Next
Set
802.1x Mode
EAP-TLS
Next
Set
t1
EAP-TLS
ra
f
Cancel Done -
Note: The 802.1x Protocol is disabled by default. If you select EAP-TLS authentication, you must use
the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to configure the certificates and private key for the phone.
Press Done (on 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT)
or
Press Set (on 9143i, 6751i, 6753i).
10
To configure MD5, select EAP-MD5 Settings.
11
Select Identity.
D
9
1. EAP-MD5 Settings
EAP-MD5 Setting
1. Identity
2. MD5 Password
Next
Enter
1. Identity
Next
Enter
User Name
|
Cancel
Set
Enter
Password
|
Cancel
Set
2. MD5 Password
Next
- Select
Done -
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-37
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
12
Enter the identity or username used for authenticating the phone.
1. EAP-MD5 Settings
Next
Username
Enter
Username:
|
1. Identity
Next
Enter
User Name
|
Cancel
Set
Enter
Password
|
Cancel
Set
2. MD5 Password
Next
t1
- Backspace Nextspace Cancel - ABC
Done -
Use the keys as applicable while entering the username; then press Done (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i,
6757i, 6757i CT).
or
Press Set (9143i, 6751i, 6753i).
14
Enter the password used for authenticating the phone.
D
ra
f
13
1. EAP-MD5 Settings
Password
Password:
|
Next
Enter
1. Identity
Next
Enter
User Name
|
Cancel
Set
Enter
Password
|
Cancel
Set
2. MD5 Password
Next
- Backspace Nextspace Cancel - ABC
Done -
6-38
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra IP Phone UI
Step
Action
15
Use the keys as applicable while entering the password; then press Done (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i,
6757i, 6757i CT).
or
Press Set (9143i, 6751i, 6753i).
16
Press the
key to save your settings and exit from the IP Phone UI.
Configuring the 802.1x Protocol Using the Aastra Web UI
t1
Use the following procedure to configure the 802.1x Protocol on your phone
using the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
ra
f
Click on Advanced Settings->802.1x Support.
D
1
To configure EAP-MD5:
2
In the “EAP Type” field, select EAP-MD5.
Valid values are: Disabled (Default), EAP-MD5, and EAP-TLS.
3
In the “Identify” field, enter an Identity for the IP phone for which you are configuring 802.1x.
For example, phone1.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-39
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
4
In the “MD5 Password” field, enter a password used for the MD5 authentication of the phone.
For example, password1.
5
Click
6
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings.
PC Port PassThru
Enable/Disable
D
ra
f
t1
to save your changes.
7
The “PC Port PassThru Enable/Disable” field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck
the box.
Note: The PC Port PassThru Enable Disable field must be enabled to use the 802.1x Protocol.
8
6-40
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
To configure EAP-TLS:
Click on Advanced Settings->802.1x Support.
1
In the “EAP Type” field, select EAP-TLS.
Valid values are: Disabled (Default), EAP-MD5, and EAP-TLS.
2
In the “Identity” field, enter an Identity for the IP phone for which you are configuring 802.1x.
For example, phone1.
3
In the “Root and Intermediate Certificates Filename” field, enter the filename that contains the root
and intermediate certificates related to the local certificate. For example:
root_Intermed_certifi.pem.
4
In the “Local Certificate Filename” field, enter the filename that contains the local certificate. For
example: localcertificate.pem.
5
In the “Private Key Filename” field, enter the filename that contains the private key. For example:
privatekey.pem.
D
ra
f
t1
1
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-41
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Aastra Web UI
6
In the “Trusted Certificates Filename” field, enter the filename that contains the trusted certificates.
For example: trusted_certificates.pem.
7
Click
8
Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings.
PC Port PassThru
Enable/Disable
D
ra
f
t1
to save your changes.
9
The “PC Port PassThru Enable/Disable” field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck
the box.
Note: The PC Port PassThru Enable Disable field must be enabled to use the 802.1x Protocol.
10
6-42
Click
to save your changes.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Symmetric UDP Signaling
By default, the IP phones use symmetric UDP signaling for outgoing UDP SIP
messages. When symmetric UDP is enabled, the IP phone generates and listens
for UDP messages using port 5060.
You can manually disable symmetric UDP signaling using the IP phone’s
configuration file. When you disable symmetric UDP signaling, then the IP phone
chooses a random source port for UDP messages.
The IP phone also chooses a random source port for UDP messages if you
configure a backup proxy server, registrar server, or outbound proxy server.
t1
An Administrator can configure symmetric UDP signaling using the configuration
files only.
Configuring Symmetric UDP Signaling Using the Configuration Files
•
ra
f
You use the following parameter to enable or disable Symmetric UDP Signaling
in the configuration files:
sip symmetric udp signaling
D
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “RTP, Codec,
DTMF Global Settings” on page A-114.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-43
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Removing UserAgent and Server SIP Headers
Currently, the phone always configures the SIP UserAgent/Server headers to
contain:
Aastra /
You can suppress the addition of these headers by using the following parameter
in the configuration files:
•
sip user-agent
Setting this parameter allows you to enable or disable the addition of the
User-Agent and Server SIP headers from the SIP stack.
t1
You can configure this feature using the configuration files only.
Configuring UserAgent/Server SIP Headers
•
ra
f
You use the following parameter to specify whether the UserAgent and Server SIP
header is added to the SIP stack.
sip user-agent
D
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “User-Agent
Setting” on page A-241.
6-44
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
GRUU and sip.instance Support
Globally Routable User-Agent URIs (GRUUs) provide a way for anyone on the
Internet to route a call to a specific instance of a User-Agent.
The IP phones provide GRUU support using draft-ietf-sip-gruu-15. A sip.instance
is added to all non-GRUU contacts. By default, this feature is enabled. You can
enable or disable this support using the configuration files.
Limitations of the GRUU Feature
The following are limitations of the GRUU feature on the phones:
GRUU-Draft-15 is not compatible with versions prior to GRUU-Draft-10.
•
Phones do not support temporary or phone-created GRUUs.
t1
•
Enabling/Disabling GRUU and sip.instance Support
ra
f
Use the following procedure to enable/disable GRUU and sip.instance support.
Configuration Files
D
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “GRUU and
sip.instance Support” on page A-241.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-45
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Multi-Stage Digit Collection (Billing Codes) Support (for Sylantro
Servers)
The IP Phones support Multi-Stage Digit Collection (billing codes) for Sylantro
Servers. Sylantro Server features, like mandatory and optional billing codes,
requires that the application server notify the phone to collect more digits before
completing the call. The IP phone is able to collect digits in two stages to support
the billing code feature.
Aastra IP Phone users are prompted to enter the correct billing code when they
dial these numbers:
External numbers.
•
Eternal numbers dialed using a Speeddial key.
t1
•
Billing Codes Implementation Notes
Note the following implementation information:
IP phone users may enter a 2-9 digit billing code. Billing codes may not start
with either 0 (Operator) or 9 (external calls).
•
When using Sylantro Click-to-Call, IP phone users select a billing code from
a pull-down menu.
•
When placing a call, a secondary dial tone alerts IP phone users to enter the
billing code. The IP phone UI also displays a “Enter Billing Code” message.
•
D
•
ra
f
•
If an IP phone user redials a number, they do not have to re-enter the billing
code. The billing code information is maintained and processed accordingly.
If an IP phone user enters an invalid billing code, the call fails.
Mandatory versus Optional Billing Codes
This release of the Aastra IP phones supports two types of billing codes:
Mandatory and Optional. The Sylantro server configuration determines which
type of billing code is used on the IP phones.
•
6-46
Mandatory billing codes: Calls are not connected until the user enters a valid
billing code. The user dials the phone number. When prompted for billing
codes, user dials the billing code.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
For example, suppose the IP phone user is using billing code 300, and dialing
the external number 617-238-5500. The IP user then enters the number using
the following format:
6172385000#300
Using mandatory billing codes, if the user is configuring a Speeddial number,
then they enter the number using the following format:
%23
t1
To use this format with the default dial plan terminator (#), the # sign required
by Sylantro as a delimiter should be represented as an escaped character by
using the sequence %23. The speed dial format for an external number that
includes a mandatory billing code becomes:
%23
Optional billing codes: The user dials an optional billing code by dialing
*50, followed by the billing code digits. When prompted for additional digits,
user enters the phone number.
ra
f
•
D
For example, suppose the IP phone user is using billing code 500, and dialing
the external number 617-238-5000. The IP user then enters the number using
the following format:
*50500#6172385000
If the user is dialing configuring a Speeddial number, then they enter the
number using the following format:
*50#
To use this format with the default dial plan terminator (#), the # sign
required by Sylantro as a delimiter should be represented as an escaped
character by using the sequence %23. The speed dial format for an
external number that includes an optional billing code becomes:
*50%23
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-47
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Numbers Not Requiring Billing Codes
Billing codes are not required for the following two types of calls:
Emergency calls (E911)
•
Calls between extensions
D
ra
f
t1
•
6-48
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Configurable DNS Queries
The domain name system (DNS) is the way that Internet domain names are
located and translated into Internet Protocol addresses. A domain name is a
meaningful and easy-to-remember identifier for an Internet address.
The lists of domain names and IP addresses are distributed throughout the Internet
in a hierarchy of authority within a database of records. There is usually a DNS
server within close proximity to your geographic location that maps the domain
names in your Internet requests or forwards them to other servers in the Internet.
t1
The IP Phones support three methods of DNS lookups allowing it to adapt to
various deployment environments: eNone, eSRV, and eNAPTR&SRV. (See the
following table for a description of each method). When the IP Phone accesses the
Internet, it sends out a DNS query to the proxy to lookup the IP address and the
port, and then waits for a response from the proxy.
ra
f
You can configure the phone to use any one of these methods by entering the
applicable value in the configuration files:.
Configuration
File Value
DNS Server
Method Used
0
A only
1
SRV & A
2
NAPTR & SRV & A First, the phone sends "NAPTR" (Naming Authority Pointer) lookup
to get the “SRV” pointer and service type (such as "aastra.com
SIP+2DT .... _sip.tcp.aastra.net", which means the service prefers
to use TCP and "_sip.tcp.aastra.net" for the SRV query instead of
the default "_sip._tcp.aastra.com"). If the NAPTR record is
returned empty then the default value is used, so in the same case,
the phone will use "_sip._udp.aastra.com" for the next step lookup.
Description
D
The phone sends “A” (Host IP Address) lookup for the IP address
and uses the default port number of 5060.
The phone sends “SRV” (Service Location Record) lookup to get
the port number. Most often, the IP address is included in the
response from the DNS server to avoid extra queries. If there is no
IP address returned in the response, the phone sends out the “A”
DNS lookup to find the IP address.
Next, the phone does SRV lookup to get the IP address and port
number. If there is no IP address in the SRV response then it
sends out and “A” lookup to get it.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-49
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
Note: On the phone side, if you configure the phone with a FullyQualified Domain Name (FQDN) proxy and specified port, the phone
always sends “A only” lookups to find the Host IP Address of the proxy.
Configuring the DNS Query Method
You can configure the DNS query method for the phone to use for performing
DNS lookups using the following parameter in the configuration files:
•
sip dns query type
Configuration Files
D
ra
f
t1
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “DNS Query
Setting” on page A-242.
6-50
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Configuring Advanced Operational Features
Advanced Operational Features
Ignore Out of Sequence Errors
An Administrator can configure the phone via the “sip accept out of order
requests” parameter to ignore CSeq number errors on all SIP dialogs on the
phone. When this parameter is enabled, the phone no longer verifies that the
sequence numbers increase for each message within a dialog, and does not report
a "CSeq Out of Order" error if they do not increase.
t1
Note: As the default Asterisk configuration does not fully track dialogs
through a reboot, it is recommended that this parameter be enabled when
using the BLF feature with an Asterisk server. If you do not enable this
feature, then rebooting the Asterisk server may cause BLF to stop
working. With this parameter enabled, the BLF key starts working again
when the phone re-subscribes, which by default, are one hour apart.
An Administrator can enable/disable this feature using the configuration files
only.
ra
f
Enabling/Disabling “Out of Order SIP Requests”
Use the following procedure to enable/disable “out of order SIP requests”.
D
Configuration Files
For the specific parameter you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Ignore Out of
Order SIP Requests” on page A-243.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
6-51
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Advanced Operational Features
“Early-Only” Parameter in Replaces Header RFC3891
The phones support the “early-only” parameter in the “Replaces” header
according to RFC3891. When the phone receives a Replaces header with the
early-only parameter, it replaces the existing dialog if the call is still in the early
state. If the call has been answered, then the Replaces request is rejected.
Note: This feature is not supported in outgoing requests.
Reason Header Field in SIP Message
ra
f
Limitation
t1
The IP Phones support the receiving of the Reason Header Field in a SIP
CANCEL message, as described in RFC3326. This allows a call that is answered
from somewhere else to still display in the Callers List. Also, the missed calls
indicator and counter do not change.
D
If the call is answered somewhere else, the duration of the call does not display in
the Callers List.
6-52
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Chapter 7
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
About this chapter
Introduction
t1
This chapter provides information about encryption on the IP phones and provides
methods an administrator can use to store encrypted files to a server.
ra
f
Topics
This chapter covers the following topics:
D
Topic
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
Page
page 7-2
Configuration File Encryption Method
page 7-2
Procedure to Encrypt Configuration Files
page 7-4
Vendor Configuration File Encryption
page 7-6
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
7-1
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
An encryption feature for the IP phone allows Service Providers the capability of
storing encrypted files on their server to protect against unauthorized access and
tampering of sensitive information (i.e., user accounts, login passwords,
registration information). Service Providers also have the capability of locking a
phone to use a specific server-provided configuration only.
Configuration File Encryption Method
t1
Only a System Administrator can encrypt the configurations files for an IP Phone.
System Administrators use a password distribution scheme to manually
pre-configure or automatically configure the phones to use the encrypted
configuration with a unique key.
ra
f
From a Microsoft Windows command line, the System Administrator uses an
Aastra-supplied encryption tool called "anacrypt.exe" to encrypt the .tuz
file.
D
Note: Aastra also supplies encryption tools to support Linux platforms
(anacrypt.linux) and Solaris platforms (anacrypt.sunos) if required.
This tool processes the plain text .cfg and aastra.cfg files and creates
triple-DES encrypted versions called .tuz and aastra.tuz. Encryption is
performed using a secret password that is chosen by the administrator.
The encryption tool is also used to create an additional encrypted tag file called
security.tuz, which controls the decryption process on the IP phones. If
security.tuz is present on the TFTP/FTP/HTTP server, the IP phones download it
and use it locally to decrypt the configuration information from the aastra.tuz and
.tuz files. Because only the encrypted versions of the configuration files
need to be stored on the server, no plain-text configuration or passwords are sent
across the network, thereby ensuring security of the configuration data.
7-2
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
To make changes to the configuration files, the System Administrator must save
the original files.
Note: If the use of encrypted configuration files is enabled (via
security.tuz or pre-provisioned on the IP phone) the aastra.cfg and
.cfg files are ignored, and only the encrypted equivalent files
aastra.tuz and .tuz are read.
The security feature described above prevents unauthorized parties from reading
or writing the contents of the .tuz file. It also provides the following:
Prevents users from using the .tuz file that does not match the user’s
phone MAC address.
•
Renders the .tuz file invalid if the user renames the file.
•
Works with IP phone releases prior to Release 2.2.
•
Provides compatibility between the previous encryption routine and the new
decryption routine.
D
ra
f
t1
•
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
7-3
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
Procedure to Encrypt Configuration Files
To encrypt the IP phone configuration files:
1.
Open a command line window application (i.e., DOS window).
2.
At the prompt, enter anacrypt.exe and press .
C:\> anacrypt.exe -h
Provides encryption of the configuration files used for the family of Aastra IP
phones, using 56bit triple-DES and site-specific keys.
Copyright (c) 2008, Aastra Technologies, Ltd.
t1
Copyright (c) 1999, Philip J. Erdelsky
Usage:
anacrypt {infile.cfg|-d } [-p password] [-m] [-i] [-v] [-h]
Description
{infile.cfg | -d }
Specifies that all .cfg files in should be encrypted
[-p password]
Specifies password used to generate keys
-m
Generate MAC.tuz files that are phone specific. This switch generates files that are
only usable for phones with firmware version 2.2.0 and above.
-v
D
-i
ra
f
Anacrypt Switch
Generate security.tuz file
Specifies the version of encryption that the anacrypt tool uses. Use version 1 encryption
(i.e., -v1) to generate firmware that is readable by all model phones. Without the -v1
switch, the anacrypt tool generates files that are only readable by phones with
firmware 2.2.0 and above.
-h
Display program help text
Note: Incorrect password produces garbage. For site-specific keyfile
security.cfg the plaintext must match password.
7-4
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
Examples
The following examples illustrate the use of the anacrypt.exe file.
Example 1
Generating a security.tuz file with password 1234abcd
For firmware version 2.2.0 and up:
C:\>anacrypt -i -p 1234abcd
For any firmware version:
Example 2
t1
C:\>anacrypt -i -p 1234abcd -v1
ra
f
Encrypting a single aastra.cfg file with password 1234abcd
C:\>anacrypt aastra.cfg -p 1234abcd
D
Example 3
Encrypting a .cfg file with password 1234abcd
C:\>anacrypt 00085d000000.cfg -p 1234abcd
Example 4
Encrypting a .cfg file with password 1234abcd using the new MAC
encryption (-m is only supported for firmware version 2.2.0 and up)
C:\>anacrypt 00085d000000.cfg -m -p 1234abcd
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
7-5
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
Example 5
Encrypting all cfg files in C:\data with password 1234abcd using the new MAC
encryption and generating a security.tuz file at the same time.(2.2.0 and up)
C:\>anacrypt -d C:\data -p 1234abcd -m -i
Example 6
Encrypting all cfg files in C:\data with password 1234abcd using the and
generating a security.tuz file at the same time for all firmware versions.(any
version)
t1
C:\>anacrypt -d C:\data -p 1234abcd -i -v1
Vendor Configuration File Encryption
ra
f
Some vendors can have specific methods to encrypt files on their configuration
servers. For each phone, the configuration server can generate a random hex string
(encryption key) that is used to encrypt the phone’s MAC-specific configuration
file.
D
The encryption key is placed in a plain text MAC-specific configuration file that
the server downloads to the phone. After the phone receives the file, it updates the
encryption key.
This method of encryption does not affect the implementation of the Aastra
method of file encryption.
Note: The aastra.cfg file is not encrypted with this feature.
You can set the phone-specific encryption key using the configuration files only.
For more information about configuration file encryption, contact Aastra
Technical Support.
7-6
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
Configuring Vendor Configuration File Encryption
Use the following procedure to configure vendor configuration file encryption on
the IP Phones.
Configuration Files
D
ra
f
t1
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for automatic update, see Appendix A, the
section, “Configuration Encryption Setting” on page A-243.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
7-7
D
ra
f
t1
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone
7-8
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Upgrading the Firmware
About this chapter
Chapter 8
Upgrading the Firmware
About this chapter
t1
Introduction
This chapter provides information about upgrading the IP phone firmware.
ra
f
Topics
This chapter covers the following topics:
D
Topic
Upgrading the Firmware
Page
page 8-2
Using the “Firmware Update” Page in the Aastra Web UI
page 8-2
Using the Restart Feature
page 8-5
Using the Auto-Resync Feature
page 8-7
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
8-1
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Upgrading the Firmware
Upgrading the Firmware
The IP phones support the protocols, TFTP, FTP, HTTP or HTTPS to download
configuration files and upgrade firmware to the phones from a configuration
server.
The configuration server should be ready and able to accept connections. For
information on configuration server requirements, see Chapter 1, the section,
“Configuration Server Requirement” on page 1-35.
You can download the firmware stored on the configuration server in one of three
ways:
Using the “Firmware Update” page in the Aastra Web UI at the location
Advanced Settings->Firmware Update.
•
Using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI to restart the phone. The phone
automatically looks for firmware updates and configuration files during the
boot process.
•
Setting an Auto-Resync feature to automatically update the firmware,
configuration files, or both at a specific time in a 24-hour period). (Feature
can be enabled using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI).
D
ra
f
t1
•
Using the “Firmware Update” Page in the Aastra Web UI
You can use the Aastra Web UI to manually force a firmware update from the
configuration server to a phone in your network by selecting Advanced
Settings->Firmware Update. You can configure the phone to perform the update
using any of the protocols that the phone supports: TFTP, FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS.
Warning: Do not reset or turn off the phone until the download is
complete.
Note: This procedure downloads an updated file as
well as any other firmware files that were updated, to your phone.
8-2
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Upgrading the Firmware
Upgrading the Firmware
Use the following procedure to manually update the firmware on your
phone from the specified configuration server.
Aastra Web UI
Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Firmware Update.
D
ra
f
t1
Step
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
8-3
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Upgrading the Firmware
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
2
In the “File Name” field, enter the firmware file name (.st) that you want to download
to your IP phone. For example, 53i.st (for a 6753i phone).
Note: This file name must match the actual name of the firmware file residing on your configuration
server.
IMPORTANT: The renamed 675xi phones still use the old naming convention for the .st files. See the
following table.
Associated Firmware
9143i
9143i.st
9480i
9480i.st
9480i CT
9480iCT.st
6751i
51i.st
6753i
53i.st
6755i
55i.st
6757i CT
ra
f
6757i
t1
IP Phone Model
57i.st
57iCT.st
In the “Download Protocol” field, select the protocol from the list to use for downloading the new
firmware. Valid values are:
• TFTP
• FTP
• HTTP
• HTTPS
4
In the “Server” field, enter the IP address in dotted decimal format, of the TFTP configuration server,
or the domain name of the FTP, HTTP, or HTTPS configuration servers (dependant on the protocol
you selected in step 3.) For example: 432.221.45.6.
5
In the “Path” field, enter the path location on the protocol server for where the new firmware resides.
For example, C:\aastra\configserver\firmwareupgrade.
6
In the “Port” field, enter the port number of the protocol server. For example, 80 (for HTTP) or 443
(for HTTPS).
D
3
Note: This field is not applicable to the TFTP and FTP protocols.
7
8-4
(FTP only) In the “Username ” field, enter the username that is used for authentication when the FTP
server is accessed.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Upgrading the Firmware
Upgrading the Firmware
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
8
(FTP only) In the “Password ” field, enter the password that is used for authentication when the FTP
server is accessed.
9
Click
.
This starts the upgrade process. If the upgrade is successful the following message displays on the
screen: "Firmware Upgrade Successful".
Using the Restart Feature
t1
Restarting the phone forces the phone to check for both firmware and
configuration files stored on the configuration server.
ra
f
Warning: Do not reset or turn off the phone until the download is
complete.
Restarting the Phone Using the IP Phone UI
D
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press
2
Select Restart Phone.
3
For 9143i, 6751i, 6753i:
Press # to confirm.
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Note: To cancel the Restart, press the 3 key.
For 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT:
Press Restart.
Note: To cancel the Restart, press Cancel.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
8-5
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Upgrading the Firmware
Restarting the Phone Using the Aastra Web UI
Aastra Web UI
Click on Operation->Reset->Phone.
2
Click
ra
f
t1
1
D
to restart the phone.
8-6
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Upgrading the Firmware
Upgrading the Firmware
Using the Auto-Resync Feature
The auto-resync feature on the IP phones allows an administrator to enable the
phone to be updated automatically once a day at a specific time in a 24-hour
period if the files on the server have changed. This feature works with TFTP, FTP,
HTTP, and HTTPS servers. An administrator can enable this feature using the
Aastra Web UI or using the configuration files (aastra.cfg and .cfg).
Note: The automatic update feature works with both encrypted and plain
text configuration files.
An Administrator can enable Auto-Resync using the configuration files or the
Aastra Web UI. In the configuration files you set the following parameters:
auto resync mode - Determines whether the configuration server
automatically updates the phone’s configuration files only, the firmware only,
both the firmware and configuration files, or disables automatic updates. This
parameter works with TFTP, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS servers.
•
auto resync time - Sets the time of day in a 24-hour period for the IP phone to
be automatically updated. This parameter works with TFTP, FTP, HTTP and
HTTPS servers.
•
auto resync max delay - Specifies the maximum time, in minutes, the phone
waits past the scheduled time before starting a checksync.
ra
f
D
•
t1
•
auto resync days - Specifies the amount of days that the phone waits between
checksync operations.
In the Aastra Web UI, you can set the following parameters at the path Advanced
Settings->Configuration Server->Auto-Resync:
•
Mode
•
Time (24 hours)
•
Maximum Delay
•
Days
Setting the “auto resync max delay” (Maximum Delay) and “auto resync days”
(Days) parameters can greatly reduce the load placed on the configuration server
when downloading configurations.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
8-7
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Upgrading the Firmware
Enabling Auto-Resync Using the Configuration Files
Use the following procedure to configure automatic updates of the IP phone
firmware, configuration files, or both.
Configuration Files
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for automatic update, see Appendix A, the
section, “Configuration Server Settings” on page A-18.
.
t1
Notes:
1. If a user is accessing the Aastra Web UI, they are not informed of an
auto-reboot.
ra
f
2. Any changes made using the Aastra Web UI or the IP phone UI are
not overwritten by an auto-resync update. Auto-resync affects the
configuration files only. However, the settings in the Aastra Web UI take
precedence over the IP phone UI and the configuration files.
D
3. If the IP phone is in use (not idle) at the time of the resync check, the
reboot occurs when the phone becomes idle.
4.
The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone.
5. Auto-Resync adds up to 15 minutes random time to the configured
time. For example, if the auto resync time parameter is set to 02:00, the
event takes place any time between 02:00 and 02:15. This prevents
several phones from accessing the server at the exact same time.
6. The automatic update feature works with both encrypted and plain
text configuration files.
8-8
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Upgrading the Firmware
Upgrading the Firmware
Enabling Auto-Resync Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to enable auto-resync for the phones in your
network.
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->Auto-Resync.
D
ra
f
t1
Auto-Sync
Parameters
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
8-9
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Upgrading the Firmware
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
2
In the “Mode” field, select the auto-resync mode you want to use to automatically update the phone.
Valid values are:
In the “Time (24-hour)” field, select the time that you want the update to take place.
Valid values are 00:00 to 23:30 (in 30 minute increments).
ra
f
3
t1
None
Disable auto-resync
Configuration Files Updates the configuration files on the IP phone automatically at the specified
time if the files on the server have changed.
Firmware
Updates the firmware on the IP phone automatically at the specified time if the
files on the server have changed.
Both
Updates the configuration files and firmware automatically at the specified time
if the files on the server have changed.
Notes:
1. If a user is accessing the Aastra Web UI, they are not informed of an auto-reboot.
2. Any changes made using the Aastra Web UI or the IP phone UI are not overwritten by an
auto-resync update. Auto-resync affects the configuration files only. However, the settings in the
Aastra Web UI take precedence over the IP phone UI and the configuration files.
3. The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone.
4. If the IP phone is in use (not idle) at the time of the resync check, the reboot occurs when the
phone becomes idle.
D
Notes:
1. The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone.
2. The value of 00:00 is 12:00 A.M.
3. When selecting a value for this parameter in the Aastra Web UI, the values are in 30-minute
increments only.
4. Auto-Resync adds up to 15 minutes random time to the configured time. For example, if the auto
resync time parameter is set to 02:00, the event takes place any time between 02:00 and 02:15.
4
In the “Maximum Delay” field, specify the maximum time, in minutes, the phone waits past the
scheduled time before starting a checksync. The range is 0 to 1439. Default is 15.
5
In the “Days” field, specify the amount of days that the phone waits between checksync operations.
The range is 0 to 364. Default is 0.
Note: A value of 0 causes the phone to checksync every time the clock reads the proper time. A
value of 1 forces the phone to wait 24 hours prior to doing the first checksync.
6
Click
to save your settings.
These changes are not dynamic.
You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect.
8-10
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Upgrading the Firmware
Upgrading the Firmware
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
7
Click on Operation->Reset.
8
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone and apply the update.
D
ra
f
t1
The update performs automatically at the time you designated.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
8-11
D
ra
f
t1
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Upgrading the Firmware
8-12
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Upgrading the Firmware
D
ra
f
t1
Upgrading the Firmware
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
8-13
D
ra
f
t1
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Upgrading the Firmware
8-14
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
t1
ra
f
D
D
ra
f
t1
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Upgrading the Firmware
8-16
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Troubleshooting
About this chapter
Chapter 9
Troubleshooting
About this chapter
t1
Introduction
Topics
ra
f
This chapter describes tasks that a system administrator can perform on the IP
phones for troubleshooting purposes. It also includes answers to questions you
may have while using the IP phones.
This chapter covers the following topics:
D
Topic
Troubleshooting
Page
page 9-3
Log Settings
page 9-3
Module/Debug Level Settings
page 9-4
Support Information
page 9-7
WatchDog Task Feature
page 9-12
Error Messages Display
page 9-15
Troubleshooting Solutions
page 9-19
Why does my phone display “Application missing”?
page 9-19
Why does my phone display the “No Service” message?
page 9-20
Why does my phone display "Bad Encrypted Config"?
page 9-20
Why is my phone not receiving the TFTP IP address from the DHCP
Server?
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
page 9-21
9-1
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this chapter
Topic
Page
page 9-22
How do I set the IP phone to factory default?
page 9-23
How do I erase the phone’s local configuration?
page 9-24
How to reset a user’s password?
page 9-25
How do I lock and unlock the phone?
page 9-27
D
ra
f
t1
How do I restart the IP phone?
9-2
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
This section describes tasks that a system administrator can perform on the IP
phones for troubleshooting purposes. Using the Aastra Web UI, a system
administrator can:
Assign an IP address and IP port in which to save log files
•
Filter the logs according to severity that get reported to log files
•
Save the current local configuration file to a specified location
•
Save the current server configuration file to a specified location
•
Show task and stack status (including “Free Memory”and “Maximum
Memory Block Size”)
t1
•
Log Settings
ra
f
Aastra Technical Support can then use the information gathered to perform
troubleshooting tasks.
D
Using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI, you can specify the location
for which to save files for troubleshooting purposes.
In the configuration files, you use the following parameters to configure log
settings:
•
log server ip - The IP address for which to save log files for troubleshooting
purposes.
•
log server port - The IP port to use to save log files for troubleshooting
purposes.
•
log level - The severity level of the logs to be reported to a log file. Log Level
default is Error (3). (Changes to this parameter via the Aastra Web UI require
a reboot).
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
9-3
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting
In the Aastra Web UI, you use the following parameters to configure log
settings:
•
Log IP - The IP address for which to save log files for troubleshooting
purposes.
•
Log Port - The IP port to use to save log files for troubleshooting purposes.
Reference
For more information about the log setting configuration parameters, see
Appendix A, the section, “Troubleshooting Parameters” on page A-244.
For information about configuring the log settings using the Aastra Web UI, see
“Performing Troubleshooting Tasks” on page 9-8.
t1
Module/Debug Level Settings
ra
f
The Aastra IP phones provide blog module support that allows enhanced severity
filtering of log calls sent as blog output.
D
The blog, as used on the IP phones, is a an online debugging tool that can be
frequently updated and intended for technical support analyzation. Blogs are
defined by their format: a series of entries posted to a single page in
reverse-chronological order. The IP Phone blogs are separated into modules
which allow you to log specific information for analyzing.
The following table identifies the blog modules you can set.
9-4
Aastra Web UI Parameters
Configuration File Parameters
LINMGR (Line Manager information)
log module linemgr
UI (User Interface (UI) related)
log module user interface
MISC (Miscellaneous)
log module misc
SIP (Call control SIP stack)
log module sip
DIS (Display drivers)
log module dis
DSTORE (Delayed storage)
log module dstore
EPT (Endpoint module)
log module ept
IND (Indicator module)
log module ind
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Aastra Web UI Parameters
Configuration File Parameters
KBD (Keyboard module)
log module kbd
NET (Network module)
log module net
PROVIS (Provisioning module)
log module provis
RTPT (Realtime Transport module)
log module rtpt
SND (Sound module)
log module snd
PROF (Profiler module)
log module prof
XML (Extension Markup Lanaguage)
log module xml
STUN (Simple Traversal of User Datagram
Protocol (UDP) through Network Address
Translation (NAT)
log module stun
t1
Setting Values for the Module/Debug Levels
ra
f
There are 6 debug levels for the modules. Each debug level has a value you can
use to turn individual levels ON and OFF. The following table identifies these
debug levels and their values. The value of “1” (fatal errors) is the default setting
for all modules.
Value
Fatal Errors
1 (default)
Errors
2
Warnings
4
Init
8
Functions
16
Info
32
All debug levels
OFF
0
All Debug Levels
ON
65535
D
Debug Level
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
9-5
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting
Example 1
To turn two or more debug levels on at the same time, you add the value
associated with each level. For example,
Fatal Errors + Errors + Warnings = 1 + 2 + 4 = 7
log module linemgr: 7
log module user interface: 7
log module sip: 7
In the above example, fatal errors, general errors, and warnings are logged for the
line manager, user interface, and SIP call control modules.
Example 2
ra
f
log module dis: 48
log module net: 48
log module snd: 48
t1
Functions and Info = 16 + 32 = 48
In the above example, functions and general information are logged for the
display drivers, network, and sound modules.
D
Example 3
log module rtpt: 0
log module ind: 65535
In the above example, all debug levels are OFF for the Real Time Transport
module. All debug levels are ON for the indicator module.
You can set the Module/Debug Levels using the configuration files or the Aastra
Web UI.
Reference
For more information about the debug level configuration parameters, see
Appendix A, the section, “Troubleshooting Parameters” on page A-244.
For information about configuring the log settings using the Aastra Web UI, see
“Performing Troubleshooting Tasks” on page 9-8.
9-6
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Support Information
You can save the local and/or server configuration files of the IP phone to the
location specified in the "Log Settings" section.
Performing this task allows Aastra Technical Support to view the current
configuration of the IP phone and troubleshoot as necessary.
In the “Support Information” section, you can:
•
Get local.cfg
•
Get server.cfg
•
Show Task and Stack Status
t1
Aastra Technical Support uses this support information for troubleshooting the IP
phone when required.
ra
f
Using the Aastra Web UI and selecting “Show Task and Stack Status” displays
the tasks and stack status on the IP phone. This screen also displays the Free
Memory and the Max Block Free Memory currently on the phone as shown in
the following illustration. This information is for troubleshooting purposes only.
D
.
Free Memory
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Max Memory Block Size
9-7
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting
Performing Troubleshooting Tasks
Use the following procedures to perform troubleshooting on the IP phone via the
configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuration Files
D
ra
f
t1
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Log Settings” on
page A-244.
9-8
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Aastra Web UI
Action
1
Click on Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting.
D
ra
f
t1
Step
To set log settings:
2
In the "Log IP" field, enter the IP address of where you want log files to be stored.
3
In the "Log Port" field, enter the port number associated with the IP address specified in the "Log IP"
field. This port passes the information from the IP phone to the IP address location.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
9-9
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
4
Click
5
Click on Operation->Reset.
6
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to save your settings.
to restart the IP phone.
To set blog modules:
7
Select a module for which you want to have log files created, and sent to a blog.
8
Enter a debug level value in the “Debug Level” field for a module. Valid values are:
Value
t1
Debug Level
1 (default)
Errors
2
Warnings
4
Init
8
ra
f
Fatal Errors
16
Info
32
All debug
levels OFF
0
All Debug
Levels ON
65535
D
Functions
The value of “0” turns all debug levels OFF for a module. The value of “65535” turns all debug levels
ON for a module.
To turn two or more debug levels on at the same time, you add the value associated with each level.
For example, Fatal Errors + Errors + Warnings = 1 + 2 + 4 = 7
log module linemgr: 7
log module user interface: 7
log module sip: 7
In the above example, fatal errors, general errors, and warnings are logged for the line manager, user
interface, and SIP call control modules.
9
9-10
Click
to save your settings.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
10
Click on Operation->Reset.
11
In the "Restart Phone" field click
to restart the IP phone.
To perform support tasks:
12
To store the local configuration file to the specified location, click on
local.cfg" field.
in the "Get
13
To store the server configuration file to the specified location, click on
"Get server.cfg" field.
14
To display task and stack status information, as well as Free Memory and Maximum Block Free
Memory on the phone, click on
in the "Show Task and Stack Status" field.
t1
in the
Note: The local and server configuration file information and the task and stack status information is
for use by Aastra Technical Support for troubleshooting purposes.
ra
f
Reference
D
For information that describes solutions to most common problems using the IP
phones, see the next section, “Troubleshooting Solutions” on page 9-19.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
9-11
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting
WatchDog Task Feature
The IP Phones include a troubleshooting feature called the “WatchDog” task that
monitors the status of the phones and provides the ability to get stack traces from
the last time the phone failed. When the phone detects a failure (i.e., a crash), it
automatically reboots. You can view a WatchDog crash file using the Aastra Web
UI at the path, Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting. You can enable/disable the
WatchDog task using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Enabling/Disabling WatchDog
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the WatchDog.
t1
Configuration Files
D
ra
f
For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “WatchDog
Settings” on page A-247.
9-12
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Use the following procedure to enable/disable the WatchDog task for the IP
Phones using the Aastra Web UI. You can also view the “Crash Log” generated by
the WatchDog task using the Aastra Web UI.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting.
D
ra
f
t1
1
Enable/Disable WatchDog
View Crash Log
Enable/Disable WatchDog Task
2
The “WatchDog” field is enabled by default. To disable the WatchDog task, click in the “Enabled”
box to clear the check mark.
3
Click
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
to save your changes.
9-13
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting
Aastra Web UI
View the Crash Log
To view a crash log, in the “Get a Crash Log” field, click the SAVE AS button. You can open the
file immediately, or you can save the Crash Log to your PC.
D
ra
f
t1
4
9-14
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Error Messages Display
An Administrator can view generated error messages that may have occurred
during startup or reboot of the IP Phones. The IP Phone UI has a selection on the
Phone Status page called, “Error Messages” at the location, Options->Phone
Status->Error Messages. The Aastra Web UI also allows you to view these error
messages at the location Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting->Error Messages.
These options allow you to view error messages generated by modules during
startup only (not after registration has completed). You can use this information
for troubleshooting purposes or for reporting the errors to the Administrator.
t1
The IP Phone stores and displays up to 10 error messages (any extra error
messages beyond 10 are discarded). The time and date of each error message also
displays. After a reboot, the previous error messages are discarded and, if
applicable, new error messages display. If there are no error messages during
startup or after a reboot, the message, “No Error Messages” displays on the
screen. Error messages display in the language currently set on the phone.
ra
f
The following table identifies the possible error messages that may display.
Description
Bad Certificate
A Transport Layer Security (TLS) certificate
is not valid. The invalid certificate can be
any of the following:
• root and intermediate certificate
• local certificate
• private key filename
• trusted certificate
D
Possible Error Message
802.1x Startup Failed
The Extensible Authentication Protocol TLS
(EAP-TLS) certificates and/or the EAP-MD5
information has failed on the phone.
LLDP Startup Failed
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) failed
during startup of the phone.
HTTP Connection Manager Init Failed
The Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP)
connection manager initialization failed
while updating the configuration on the
phone.
Failed to config Line Manager
The configuration of the Line Manager
module on the phone has failed.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
9-15
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting
Viewing the Error Messages Using the IP Phone UI
Use the following procedure to view the error messages, if any, that generated
during startup.
IP Phone UI
1
Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List.
2
Select Phone Status.
3
Select Error Messages.
Phone Status
IP&MAC Addresses
LAN Port
PC Port
Firmware Info
Error Messages
t1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT
9480i, 9480i CT
- Select
ra
f
Done -
D
6751i, 6753i, 9143i
9-16
5. Error Messages
Enter
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
IP Phone UI
4
If error messages display, use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to view the messages. If no error
message exist, the message, “No Error Messages” displays on the screen.
6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT
9480i, 9480i CT
Error Messages
Fri Aug 4 1:55 pm
Fri Aug 4 1:57 pm
Fri Aug 4 2:00 pm
Error Messages
No Error Messages
Done -
Done -
No Error Messages
ra
f
t1
Error Messages
6751i, 6753i, 9143i
Fri Aug 4 2:00 pm
Exit
5
Exit
No Error Messages
D
Error Messages
No Error Messages
When done viewing, press Done or Exit to exit the Error Messages screen.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
9-17
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting
Viewing the Error Messages Using the Aastra Web UI
Use the following procedure to view the error messages, if any, that generated
during startup.
Aastra Web UI
Click on Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting->Error Messages.
D
ra
f
t1
1
Error Messages
2
9-18
Scroll down to the “Error Messages” section to view the error messages that may have generated
during startup or reboot of the IP Phone.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Solutions
Troubleshooting Solutions
Description
This section describes solutions to some most common problems that can occur
while using the IP phones.
Why does my phone display “Application missing”?
t1
If you have experienced networking issues while the phone was downloading the
application from the TFTP server, it is possible that the phone can no longer
retrieve the required firmware file. In the event that the phone is no longer able to
communicate with the TFTP server in its attempt to re-download the firmware and
the phone cannot locate the application locally, the message "Application
missing" displays.
ra
f
The phone also displays the following: “Recovery web-client at: ”.
The IP Address displayed is the IP address of the phone. If the phone is unable to
receive an IP from the DHCP server or has lost its record of its static IP, the phone
auto-assigns itself the default IP 192.168.0.50.
1.
D
To recover the firmware for your phone in this circumstance, please perform the
following:
Launch your web browser on your computer.
Note: Your computer needs to be on the same network as your IP Phone.
2.
In the URL, type: “http://” (where IP Address is the IP Address
displayed on the phone). Your browser launches the Aastra IP Phone
Firmware Recovery page.
3.
Call Customer Support and request a .st file.
4.
Copy the file to your TFTP server.
5.
Enter the .st file that is ready for download.
6.
Enter the IP address or qualified domain name of the TFTP server.
7.
Press the Download Firmware button.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
9-19
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Solutions
Please ensure that the TFTP server is running and accessible on the network. If the
firmware file is correctly located on the running TFTP server, the phone will
locate the file and reload the application onto the phone.
Why does my phone display the “No Service” message?
The phone displays the “No Service” message if the SIP settings have not been set
up correctly.
The Registrar server could be set to 0.0.0.0. A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables
registration. However, the phone is still active and you can dial using
username@ip address of the phone. The phone displays "No Service".
t1
If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1, line 2,
etc.), then the register request is not sent, the "No Service" message does not
display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI) does not come on.
ra
f
Check that the "Registrar Server" IP address in the Aastra Web UI at Advanced
Settings->Global SIP is correct. Check the "sip registrar ip" parameter in the
configuration files is correct.
Why does my phone display "Bad Encrypted Config"?
D
The IP phone displays "Bad Encrypted Config" because encrypted configuration
files are enabled but the decryption process has failed. Specific cases where
decryption fails are:
Reason:
The site-specific password in security.tuz does not match the password used to
encrypt the .tuz or aastra.tuz files.
Fix:
Encrypt the .cfg files to .tuz using the correct password, or replace the security.tuz
with the correct encrypted file.
9-20
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Solutions
Reason:
Neither of the .tuz and aastra.tuz files are present on the configuration
server (TFTP/FTP/HTTP).
Fix:
Create the encrypted files using anacrypt.exe and copy them to the configuration
server.
Reason:
The encrypted .tuz or aastra.tuz file is encrypted using a different version
of anacrypt.exe than the phone firmware.
t1
Fix:
Run "anacrypt.exe -v" and confirm that the correct version is reported, compared
to the phone firmware version.
ra
f
Why is my phone not receiving the TFTP IP address from the DHCP
Server?
D
For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or qualified domain name for
the TFTP server, your DHCP server must support Option 66. Option 66 is
responsible for forwarding the TFTP server IP address or domain name to the
phone automatically. If your DHCP server does not support Option 66, you must
manually enter the IP address or qualified domain name for the TFTP server into
your IP phone configuration.
For procedures on configuring the TFTP server using the IP phone UI and the
Aastra Web UI, see Chapter 4, the section, “Configuring the Configuration Server
Protocol” on page 4-108.
For specific protocol parameters you can set in the configuration files, see
Appendix A, the section, “Configuration Server Settings” on page A-18.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
9-21
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Solutions
How do I restart the IP phone?
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press
2
Select Restart Phone.
3
For 9143i, 6751i, 6753i:
Press # to confirm.
on the phone to enter the Options List.
Note: To cancel the Restart, press the 3 key.
t1
For 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT:
Press Restart.
Aastra Web UI
ra
f
Note: To cancel the Restart, press Cancel.
Click on Operation->Reset->Phone.
2
Click
D
1
9-22
to restart the phone.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Solutions
How do I set the IP phone to factory default?
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press
2
Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator Password (default is 22222).
3
Select Factory Default.
4
For 9143i, 6751i, 6753i:
The “Restore Defaults?” prompt displays.
Press # to confirm.
on the phone to enter the Options List.
ra
f
Aastra Web UI
t1
For 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i/6757i/6757i CT:
The “Reset phone to factory defaults?” prompt displays.
Press Default to confirm.
Action
1
Click on Operation->Reset->Current Settings.
2
In the "Restore to Factory Defaults" field, click
D
Step
.
This restores all factory defaults, and removes any saved configuration and directory list files.
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
9-23
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Solutions
How do I erase the phone’s local configuration?
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
1
Press
2
Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator Password (default is 22222).
3
Select Erase Local Config.
4
For 9143i, 6751i, 6753i:
The “Erase local config?” prompt displays.
Press # to confirm.
on the phone to enter the Options List.
ra
f
Aastra Web UI
t1
For 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT:
The “Erase local config?” prompt displays.
Press Erase to confirm.
Action
1
Click on Operation->Reset->Current Settings.
2
In the "Remove Local Configuration Settings" field, click
D
Step
.
This removes the last customized configuration settings made on the phone.
9-24
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Solutions
How to reset a user’s password?
IP Phone UI
1
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
2
Select User Password.
3
Enter the current user password.
4
Press Enter.
5
Enter the new user password.
Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with
alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead.
Press Enter.
7
Re-enter the new user password.
8
Press Enter.
A message, "Password Changed" displays on the screen.
ra
f
Aastra Web UI
t1
6
Action
1
Click on Operation->User Password.
2
In the "Current Password" field, enter the current user password.
3
In the "New Password" field, enter the new user password.
D
Step
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
9-25
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Solutions
Aastra Web UI
Step
Action
4
In the "Confirm Password" field, enter the new user password again.
5
Click
D
ra
f
t1
to save your changes.
9-26
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Solutions
How do I lock and unlock the phone?
IP Phone UI
Step
Action
Lock the phone:
1
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
2
Select Phone Lock.
The prompt, “Lock the phone?” displays.
3
Press Lock to lock the phone.
Unlock the phone:
Press
on the phone to enter the Options List.
t1
1
The prompt, “To unlock the phone...Password:”
Enter the user or administrator password and press Enter.
D
The phone unlocks.
ra
f
2
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
9-27
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Troubleshooting Solutions
Aastra Web UI
Click on Operation->Phone Lock.
Lock the phone:
2
ra
f
t1
1
In the “Lock the Phone?” field, click
.
Unlock the phone:
D
The phone locks dynamically and displays the following message:
“Phone is locked”.
3
Click on Operation->Phone Lock.
4
In the “Unlock the Phone?” field, click
.
The phone unlocks dynamically and displays the following message:
“Phone is unlocked”.
9-28
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4
About this appendix
Appendix A
Configuration Parameters
t1
About this appendix
Introduction
ra
f
This appendix describes the parameters you can set in the configuration files for
the IP phones. The configuration files include and config.cfg.
Topics
Topic
D
This appendix covers the following topics:
Page
Setting Parameters in Configuration Files
page A-6
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
page A-7
Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu
page A-7
Network Settings
page A-8
DHCP Option Settings
page A-13
Password Settings
page A-15
Emergency Dial Plan Settings
page A-16
Aastra Web UI Settings
page A-17
Configuration Server Settings
page A-18
Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings
page A-29
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-1
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this appendix
Topic
Page
page A-31
Local SIP UDP/TCP Port Setting
page A-32
Local SIP TLS Port
page A-32
HTTPS Client and Server Settings
page A-33
HTTPS Server Certificate Validation Settings
page A-35
UPnP Settings
page A-37
Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Settings
page A-38
Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP Settings
page A-44
Time and Date Settings
page A-45
Time Server Settings
page A-52
Custom Time Zone and DST Settings
page A-54
t1
Rport Setting
Backlight Mode Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT)
page A-63
Live Dialpad Settings
page A-64
SIP Local Dial Plan Settings
ra
f
SIP Basic, Global Settings
page A-67
SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings
page A-76
BLA Support for MWI
page A-87
D
Centralized Conferencing Settings
A-2
page A-65
page A-88
SIP Join Feature for 3-Way Conference
page A-90
HTTP/HTTPS Authentication Support for Broadsoft CMS
page A-91
Advanced SIP Settings
page A-92
Missed Call Summary Subscription Settings
page A-101
As-Feature-Event Subscription Settings
page A-104
Transport Layer Security (TLS) Settings
page A-105
802.1x Support Settings
page A-109
RTP, Codec, DTMF Global Settings
page A-114
Autodial Settings
page A-119
Voicemail Settings
page A-122
Directory Settings
page A-123
Callers List Settings
page A-124
Customize Callers List and Services Key
page A-125
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
About this appendix
Topic
Page
page A-126
Call Forward Key Mode Settings
page A-127
LLDP-MED and ELIN Settings
page A-129
Missed Calls Indicator Settings
page A-131
XML Settings
page A-132
Action URI Settings
page A-135
XML SIP Notify Settings
page A-141
Polling Action URI Settings
page A-142
Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings
page A-143
Ring Tone Per-Line Settings
page A-145
Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing Setting
page A-146
Switch Focus to Ringing Line
t1
Call Forward Settings
page A-148
Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout
page A-149
Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call
page A-150
Call Waiting Settings
ra
f
Stuttered Dial Tone Setting
page A-151
page A-152
page A-153
DND Key Mode Settings
page A-154
D
Message Waiting Indicator Settings
Priority Alert Settings
page A-155
Bellcore Cadence Settings
page A-160
Language Settings
page A-162
Language Pack Settings
page A-164
Suppress DTMF Playback Setting
page A-173
Display DTMF Digits Setting
page A-174
Intercom, Auto-Answer, and Barge In Settings
page A-175
Group Paging RTP Settings
page A-179
Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustment Settings
page A-180
Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) Settings
page A-184
ACD Auto-Available Timer Settings
page A-186
Park and Pickup Global Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 6757i/6757i CT only)
page A-187
Mapping Key Settings
page A-189
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-3
IP Phone Administrator Guide
About this appendix
Topic
Page
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
page A-192
Softkey Settings for 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT
page A-193
Programmable Key Settings for 9143i, 6753i, and 6755i
page A-202
Top Softkey Settings for 6757i and 6757i CT
page A-207
Handset Feature Key Settings for the 9480i CT and 6757i CT
page A-214
Expansion Module Key Settings for M670i (6753i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) and M675i page A-216
(for 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT)
page A-223
Locking Softkeys and Programmable Keys
page A-226
Locking the SAVE and DLETE Keys (6753i)
page A-229
Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add/Edit Speeddial Keys
page A-230
BLF List URI Settings
t1
Customizing the Key Type List
Customizing M675i Expansion Module Column Display
Expansion Module 1 through 3
Blind Transfer Setting
Update Caller ID Setting.
ra
f
Advanced Operational Parameters
page A-231
page A-231
page A-233
page A-233
page A-233
Boot Sequence Recovery Mode Settings.
page A-234
Single Call Restriction Setting
page A-235
Blacklist Duration Setting
page A-236
Whitelist Proxy Setting
page A-236
XML Key Redirection Settings (for Redial, Xfer, Conf, Icom, Voicemail)
page A-237
Options Key Redirection Setting (Services key on 6751i)
page A-239
Off-Hook and XML Application Interaction Setting
page A-239
XML Override for a Locked Phone Setting
page A-240
Symmetric UDP Signaling Setting
page A-240
User-Agent Setting
page A-241
GRUU and sip.instance Support
page A-241
DNS Query Setting
page A-242
Ignore Out of Order SIP Requests
page A-243
Configuration Encryption Setting
page A-243
D
A-4
page A-230
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
About this appendix
Topic
Page
Troubleshooting Parameters
page A-244
page A-244
WatchDog Settings
page A-247
D
ra
f
t1
Log Settings
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-5
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Setting Parameters in Configuration Files
Setting Parameters in Configuration Files
You can set specific configuration parameters in the configuration files for
configuring you IP phone. The aastra.cfg and .cfg files are stored on the
server. The aastra.cfg file stores global IP phone configuration settings. The
.cfg file stores configuration settings specific to the IP phone with that
MAC address. When you restart the IP phone, these files are downloaded to the
phone.
If you make changes to the phone configuration, the changes are stored in a local
configuration on the phone (not on the server).
t1
Configuration changes made to the .cfg file override the configuration
settings in the aastra.cfg file.
ra
f
Note: Configuration parameters that you enter in the configuration files
are NOT case sensitive.
Reference
D
For information about configuration file precedence, see Chapter 1, the section,
“Configuration File Precedence” on page -38.
This section includes the following types of configurable parameters:
A-6
•
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters on page A-7
•
Mapping Key Settings on page A-189
•
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters
on page A-192
•
Advanced Operational Parameters on page A-233
•
Troubleshooting Parameters on page A-244
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
The following sections provide the configuration parameters you can configure on
the IP phone. Each parameter table includes the name of the parameter, a
description, the format, default value, range, and example. The table also provides
the method for which the parameters can be configured (IP phone UI, Aastra Web
UI, or configuration files).
Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu
Parameter –
options simple menu
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Description
Allows you to enable a simplified options menu or enable the full menu on
the IP Phone UI.
Simplified Options Menu
Call Forward
Call Forward
Preferences
Preferences
Only the following display:
Services (9143i, 6751i, and
6753i)
Tones
Contrast Level
Live Dialpad
Set Audio (9480i, 9480i CT,
6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT only)
Handset Pairing (9480i CT and
6757i CT)
ra
f
t1
Full Options Menu
Phone Status
User Password
Removed
Administrator Menu
Removed
D
Phone Status
Restart Phone
Removed
Phone Lock
Phone Lock
Warning: When using the simplified menu, you cannot change the
Network settings from the IP Phone UI. If the network settings become
misconfigured, you must “factory default” the phone and use the full menu
to recover the network settings from the Phone UI OR use the Aastra
Web UI to configure the network settings.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0 (full options menu)
Range
0 (full options menu)
1 (simplified options menu)
Example
options simple menu: 1
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-7
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Network Settings
Parameter –
dhcp
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
DHCP
(in Web UI)
Description
Configuration Files
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Enables or disables DHCP. Enabling DHCP populates the required
network information. The DHCP server serves the network information
that the IP phone requires. If the IP phone is unable to get any required
information, then you must enter it manually. DHCP populates the
following network information:
IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway,, Domain Name Servers (DNS),
TFTP, HTTP, HTTP Port, HTTPS, HTTPS Port, and FTP servers, and
Timer Servers.
t1
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate the IP address or qualified
domain name for the TFTP server, your DHCP server must support
Option 66.
Integer
Default Value
1 (enabled)
Example
Parameter –
ip
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
dhcp: 1
D
Range
ra
f
Format
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Ip Address
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files
Description
This parameter assigns a static IP address to the IP phone device.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
Format
IP address
Default Value
0.0.0.0
Range
Not Applicable
Example
ip: 192.168.0.25
A-8
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
subnet mask
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Subnet Mask
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files
Description
Subnet mask defines the IP address range local to the IP phone.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
IP address
Default Value
255.255.255.0
Range
Not Applicable
Example
subnet mask: 255.255.255.224
Parameter –
default gateway
IP phone UI
t1
Format
Description
ra
f
Aastra Web UI
Gateway
(in Web UI)
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Configuration Files
The IP address of the network’s gateway or default router IP address.
Format
D
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
IP address
Default Value
1.0.0.1
Range
Not Applicable
Example
default gateway: 192.168.0.1
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-9
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
dns1
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Primary DNS
(in Web UI)
Description
Configuration Files
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Primary domain name server IP address. For any of the IP address
settings on the IP phone a domain name value can be entered instead of
an IP address. With the help of the domain name servers the domain
names for such parameters can then be resolved to their corresponding
IP addresses.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
IP address
Default Value
0.0.0.0
Range
Not Applicable
Example
dns1: 192.168.0.5
ra
f
Parameter –
dns2
t1
Format
IP phone UI
Description
D
Aastra Web UI
Secondary DNS
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
A service that translates domain names into IP addresses. To assign
static DNS addresses, disable DHCP.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
Format
IP address
Default Value
0.0.0.0
Range
Not Applicable
Example
dns2: 192.168.0.6
A-10
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
ethernet port 0
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
LAN Port
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
The send (TX) and receive (RX) method to use on Ethernet port 0 to
transmit and receive data over the LAN.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Range
0 - auto-negotiate
1 - full-duplex, 10Mbps
2 - full-duplex, 100Mbps
3 - half-duplex, 10Mbps
4 - half-duplex, 100Mbps
Example
lan port: 1
Parameter –
ethernet port 1
IP phone UI
t1
Description
ra
f
Aastra Web UI
Description
Format
Configuration Files
The send (TX) and receive (RX) method to use on Ethernet port 1 to
transmit and receive data over the LAN.
D
PC Port
(in Web UI)
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Integer
Default Value
0
Range
0 - auto-negotiate
1 - full-duplex, 10Mbps
2 - full-duplex, 100Mbps
3 - half-duplex, 10Mbps
4 - half-duplex, 100Mbps
Example
ethernet port 1: 2
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-11
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
pc port passthru enabled
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Description
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->Ethernet Link
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Enables or disables the PC port on the phone to be used for 802.1x
authentication support.
Note: For more information about configuring 802.1x support on the IP
phones, see “802.1x Support Settings” on page A-109.
Integer
Default Value
1 (enable)
Range
0 (disable)
1 (enable)
Example
pc port passthru enabled: 1
D
ra
f
t1
Format
A-12
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
DHCP Option Settings
Option 12
Parameter–
hostname
Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->Hostname
Advanced Settings->Network->
Basic Network Settings
Hostname
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Description
Specifies the hostname DHCP Option 12 that the phone sends with the
DHCP Request packet.
Note: If you change this parameter, you must restart your phone for the
change to take affect.
String
Default Value
[]
Range
Up to 64 alpha-numeric characters
t1
Format
Example
ra
f
Note: The value for this parameter can also be a fully qualified domain
name.
hostname: aastra4
Option 77
DHCP User Class
(in Web UI)
Description
Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
D
Parameter–
dhcp userclass
Aastra Web UI
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->DHCP Settings->
DHCP User Class
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
Specifies the User Class DHCP Option 77 that the phone sends to the
configuration server with the DHCP Request packet.
Note: If you specify a value for this parameter, you must restart your phone
for the change to take affect. Any change in its value during start-up results
in an automatic reboot.
Format
String
Default Value
““
Range
Up to 64 alpha-numeric characters
Example
dhcp userclass: admin
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-13
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Options 159 and 160 - DHCP Option Override
Parameter–
dhcp config option
override
Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
DHCP Download Options
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Description
The value specified for this parameter overrides the precedence order for
determining a configuration server.
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->DHCP Settings->
Download Options
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
Note: You must restart the IP Phone for this parameter to take affect.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0 (Any - no override - uses normal precedence order of 43,
Range
-1 (Disabled - ignores all DHCP configuration options (43, 66, 159, 160)
0 (Any)
43
66
159
160
Example
dhcp config option override: 66
D
ra
f
t1
160, 159, 66)
A-14
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Password Settings
Parameter –
admin password
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Description
Allows you to set a new administrator password for the IP phone.
Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you
enter a password with alpha characters, the phone uses the default
password instead.
Integer
Default Value
22222
Range
0 to 4294967295
Example
admin password: 1234567890
Parameter –
user password
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Description
Options->User Password
Operation->User Password
aastra.cfg, .cfg
ra
f
Current Password
(in Web UI)
t1
Format
Allows you to set a new user password for the IP phone.
Format
D
Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you
enter a password with alpha characters, the phone uses the default
password instead.
Integer
Default Value
Default value is an empty string ““ (left blank)
Range
0 to 4294967295
Example
user password: 123
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-15
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Emergency Dial Plan Settings
Parameter –
emergency dial plan
Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Operation->Phone Lock
Description
Allows you to specify an emergency number to use on your IP phone so a
caller can contact emergency services in the local area when required.
t1
The default emergency numbers on the IP phones is 911, 999, 112, and
110.
911 - A United States emergency number.
999 - A United Kingdom emergency number.
112 - An international emergency telephone number for GSM mobile
phone networks. In all European Union countries it is also the
emergency telephone number for both mobile and fixed-line
telephones.
110 - A police and/or fire emergency number in Asia, Europe, Middle
East, and South America.
Length (bytes)
14
18
35
54
325
D
ra
f
Dial plan(characters)
911
4xx
x+#|xx+*
911|999|112|110|450
911|112|011XX+#|101XX+#|1[2-3]XXXXXXXXX|
[4-5]XXXXXXXXX|[6-7]XXXXXXXXXX,3|
[8-9]XXXXXXXXXXX,2|XX+*|XX+#|
*XXX+#|#XX+#|4xx,2
Note: Contact your local phone service provider for available emergency
numbers in your area.
Format
Integer
Default Value
x+#|xx+*
Range
Up to 512 characters
Example
emergency dial plan: 911|999
A-16
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
options password enabled
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Description
Enables or disables password protection of the Options key on the IP
phone. If enabled, upon pressing the Options key, a user has to enter a
password at the IP phone UI. If the password is entered correctly, the user
is allowed to gain access to the Options Menu and no more password
prompts display for other password protected screens. If the user fails to
enter the correct password in three attempts, access to the Options Menu
is denied and the IP phone returns to the idle screen.
Note: The password to enter is the administrator password configured for
that phone.
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0 (false; not password protected)
1 (true; password protected)
Example
options password enabled: 1
ra
f
t1
Format
Aastra Web UI Settings
Description
Configuration Files
D
Parameter –
web interface enabled
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Enables or disables the Aastra Web UI for a single IP phone when this
parameter is entered in the .cfg file.
Enables or disables the Aastra Web UI for all phones when this parameter
is placed in the aastra.cfg file.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
Not Applicable
Range
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Example
web interface enabled: 1
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-17
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Configuration Server Settings
Parameter –
download protocol
Download Protocol
(in Web UI)
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Protocol to use for downloading new versions of software to the IP phone.
Format
Text
Default Value
TFTP
Range
TFTP
FTP
HTTP
HTTPS
Example
download protocol: HTTPS
Parameter –
tftp server
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
The TFTP server’s IP address. If DHCP is enabled and the DHCP server
provides the information, this field is automatically populated. Use this
parameter to change the IP address or domain name of the TFTP server.
This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded
into the phone.
D
Description
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->TFTP Server->Primary TFTP
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, .cfg
ra
f
TFTP Server
(in Web UI)
t1
Description
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
Format
IP address or qualified domain name
Default Value
0.0.0.0
Range
Not Applicable
Example
tftp server: 192.168.0.130
A-18
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
tftp path
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->
Configuration Server->Settings
IP Phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->TFTP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg
Description
Specifies the path name for which the configuration files reside on the
TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone.
Note: Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
String
Default Value
N/A
Range
Up to 64 alphanumeric characters
Example
tftp path: configs\tftp
Description
ra
f
Alternate TFTP
(in Web UI)
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->TFTP Server->
Alternate TFTP
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, .cfg
D
Parameter –
alternate tftp server
t1
Format
The alternate TFTP server’s IP address or qualified domain name. This
will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into
the phone.
Format
IP address or qualified domain name
Default Value
0.0.0.0
Range
Not Applicable
Example
alternate tftp server: 192.168.0.132
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-19
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
alternate tftp path
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->
Configuration Server->Settings
IP Phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->TFTP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg
Description
Specifies a path name for which the configuration files reside on an
alternate TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone.
Note: Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
String
Default Value
N/A
Range
Up to 64 alphanumeric characters
Example
alternate tftp path: configs\alternate
Parameter –
use alternate tftp
IP phone UI
Format
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Enables or disables the alternate TFTP server. Valid values are "0"
disabled and "1" enabled.
Not Applicable
Default Value
0
Range
0 or 1
Example
use alternate tftp: 1
A-20
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->TFTP Server->Select TFTP
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, .cfg
D
Use Alternate TFTP
(in Web UI)
Description
ra
f
t1
Format
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
ftp server
FTP Server
(in Web UI)
Description
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->FTP Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, .cfg
The FTP server’s IP address or network host name. This will become
effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone.
Optional: You can also assign a username and password for access to the
FTP server. See the following parameters for setting username and
password.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
Default Value
0.0.0.0
Range
Not Applicable
Example
ftp server: 192.168.0.131
Description
ra
f
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->
Configuration Server->Settings
IP Phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->FTP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg
D
Parameter –
ftp path
t1
Format
Specifies a path name for which the configuration files reside on an FTP
server for downloading to the IP Phone.
Note: Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For
example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
Format
String
Default Value
N/A
Range
Up to 64 alphanumeric characters
Example
ftp path: configs\ftp
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-21
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
ftp username
FTP User Name
(in Web UI)
Description
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->FTP Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, .cfg
The username to enter for accessing the FTP server. This will become
effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone.
Note: The IP Phones support usernames containing dots (“.”).
Text
Default Value
Not Applicable
Range
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters
Example
ftp username: 6757iaastra
Parameter –
ftp password
IP phone UI
Format
Default Value
Range
Example
A-22
ra
f
Description
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->FTP Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, .cfg
The password to enter for accessing the FTP server. This will become
effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone.
Text
D
FTP Password
(in Web UI)
t1
Format
Not Applicable
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters
ftp password: 1234
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
http server
HTTP Server
(in Web UI)
Description
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->HTTP Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, .cfg
The HTTP server’s IP address. This will become effective after this
configuration file has been downloaded into the phone.
Optional: You can also assign an HTTP relative path to the HTTP server.
See the next parameter (http path).
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
Default Value
0.0.0.0
Range
Not Applicable
Example
http server: 192.168.0.132
Parameter –
http path
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
The HTTP path name to enter.
D
Description
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->HTTP Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, .cfg
ra
f
HTTP Path
(in Web UI)
t1
Format
If the IP phone’s configuration and firmware files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s HTTP root directory, the relative path
to that sub-directory should be entered in this field.
Format
dir/dir/dir
Default Value
Not Applicable
Range
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters
Example
http path: ipphones/6757i
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-23
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
http port
HTTP Port
(in Web UI)
Description
IP Phone UI:
Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->HTTP Settings
Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->
Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg
Specifies the HTTP port that the server uses to load the configuration to
the phone over HTTP.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
Integer
Default Value
80
Range
1 through 65535
Example
http port: 1025
HTTPS Server
(in Web UI)
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->HTTPS->
HTTPS Client->Download Server
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
The HTTPS server’s IP address. This will become effective after this
configuration file has been downloaded into the phone.
Optional: You can also assign an HTTPS relative path to the HTTPS
server. See the next parameter (https path).
D
Description
IP phone UI
ra
f
Parameter –
https server
t1
Format
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
Default Value
0.0.0.0
Range
Not Applicable
Example
https server: 192.168.0.143
A-24
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
https path
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->HTTPS->
HTTPS Client->Download Path
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server
aastra.cfg, .cfg
HTTPS Path
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Description
The HTTPS path name to enter.
If the IP phone’s configuration and firmware files are located in a
sub-directory beneath the server’s HTTPS root directory, the relative path
to that sub-directory should be entered in this field.
dir/dir/dir
Default Value
Not Applicable
Range
Up to 63 alphanumeric characters
Example
https path: ipphones/6755i
HTTPS Port
(in Web UI)
Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->HTTPS Settings
Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->
Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg
Specifies the HTTPS port that the server uses to load the configuration
to the phone over HTTPS.
D
Description
IP Phone UI:
ra
f
Parameter –
https port
t1
Format
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
Format
Integer
Default Value
443
Range
1 through 65535
Example
https port: 1025
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-25
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
auto resync mode
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->
Auto-Resync
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Mode
(in Web UI)
Determines whether the configuration server automatically updates the
configuration files only, the firmware only, both the firmware and
configuration files, or disables automatic updates.
This parameter works with TFTP, FTP, HTTP and HTTPS servers.
Valid values are:
None (0) - Disable auto-resync
Configuration Files (1) - Updates the configuration files on the IP phone
automatically at the specified time if the files on the server have changed.
Firmware (2) - Updates the firmware on the IP phone automatically at the
specified time if the files on the server have changed.
Both (3) - Updates the configuration files and firmware automatically at
the specified time if the files on the server have changed.
Notes:
1. If a user is accessing the Aastra Web UI, they are not informed of an
auto-reboot.
2. Any changes made using the Aastra Web UI or the IP phone UI are not
overwritten by an auto-resync update. Auto-resync affects the
configuration files only. However, the settings in the Aastra Web UI
take precedence over the IP phone UI and the configuration files.
3. The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone.
4. If the IP phone is in use (not idle) at the time of the resync check, the
reboot occurs when the phone becomes idle.
5. The automatic update feature works with both encrypted and plain text
configuration files.
Format
Default Value
D
ra
f
t1
Description
Integer
Aastra Web UI
None
Configuration Files
0
Range
Aastra Web UI
None
Configuration Files
Firmware
Both
Configuration Files
0 (none)
1 (configuration files only)
2 (firmware only)
3 (configuration files and firmware)
Example
A-26
auto resync mode: 1
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
auto resync time
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->
Auto-Resync
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Time (24-hour)
(in Web UI)
Description
Sets the time of day in a 24-hour period for the IP phone to be
automatically updated. This parameter works with TFTP, FTP, HTTP and
HTTPS servers.
Default Value
hh:mm
00h00 (for French and Spanish configuration files)
Aastra Web UI
00:00
D
Format
ra
f
t1
Notes:
1. The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone.
2. The value of 00:00 is 12:00 A.M.
3. When selecting a value for this parameter in the Aastra Web UI, the
values are in 30-minute increments only.
4. When entering a value for this parameter using the configuration files,
the value can be entered using minute values from 00 to 59 (for
example, the auto resync time can be entered as 02:56).
5. Auto-Resync adds up to 15 minutes random time to the configured
time. For example, if the auto resync time parameter is set to 02:00,
the event takes place any time between 02:00 and 02:15.
6. When the language on the phone is set to French or Spanish, you must
enter the time in the format "00h00" (configuration files only).
Configuration Files
00:00
Range
Aastra Web UI
00:00 to 23:30 (in 30 minute increments)
Configuration Files
hh = 00 to 23
mm = 00 to 59
Example
auto resync time: 03:24
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-27
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter–
auto resync max delay
Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->
Auto-Resync
Maximum Delay
(in Web UI)
Description
Specifies the maximum time, in minutes, the phone waits past the scheduled
time before starting a checksync.
Format
Integer
Default Value
15
Range
0 to 1439
Example
auto resync max delay: 20
Parameter–
auto resync days
Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI
t1
ra
f
Days
(in Web UI)
Description
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->
Auto-Resync
Specifies the amount of days that the phone waits between checksync
operations.
Format
Default Value
D
Note: A value of 0 causes the phone to checksync every time the clock
reads the proper time. A value of 1 forces the phone to wait 24 hours prior to
doing the first checksync.
Integer
0
Range
0 to 364
Example
auto resync days: 1
A-28
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings
Parameter –
sip nat ip
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Network
aastra.cfg, .cfg
NAT IP
(in Web UI)
IP address of the network device that enforces NAT.
Format
IP Address
Default Value
0.0.0.0
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip nat ip: 192.245.2.1
Parameter –
sip nat port
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Format
Default Value
Range
Example
ra
f
Description
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Network
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Port number of the network device that enforces NAT.
Integer
0
D
NAT SIP Port
(in Web UI)
t1
Description
Not Applicable
sip nat port: 51620
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-29
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip nat rtp port
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
NAT RTP Port
(in Phone UI and Web UI)
Description
Configuration Files
Options->Administrator Menu->
SIP Settings->RTP Port Base
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Indicates the port through which the RTP packets are sent. This value
must specify the beginning of the RTP port range on the gateway or
router.
The RTP port is used for sending DTMF tones and for the audio stream.
Your network administrator may close some ports for security reasons.
You may want to use this parameter to send RTP data using a different
port.
Integer
Default Value
51720
ra
f
Format
t1
Note: The phones support decoding and playing out DTMF tones sent
in SIP INFO requests. The following DTMF tones are supported:
• Support signals 0-9, #, *
• Support durations up to 5 seconds
Range
Not Applicable
sip nat rtp port: 51730
D
Example
Parameter –
sip nortel nat support
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Network
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Nortel NAT Traversal
Enabled
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables the phone to operate while connected to a network
device that enforces NAT.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0 (disabled)
Range
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
sip nortel nat support: 1
A-30
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip nortel nat timer
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Nortel NAT Timer
(in Web UI)
Description
The interval, in seconds, that the phone sends SIP ping requests to the
Nortel proxy.
Format
Integer
Default Value
30
Range
0 to 2147483647
Example
sip nortel nat timer: 60
Description
Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg
ra
f
Parameter –
sip rport
t1
Rport Setting
Allows you to enable (1) or disable (0) the use of Rport on the IP phone.
Format
Default Value
D
“Rport” in RFC 3581, allows a client to request that the server send the
response back to the source IP address and the port from which the
request came.
Boolean
0
Range
0 (disable)
1 (enable)
Example
sip rport: 1
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-31
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Local SIP UDP/TCP Port Setting
Parameter –
sip local port
Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg
Description
Specifies the local source port (UDP/TCP) from which the phone sends
SIP messages.
Format
Numeric
Default Value
5060
Range
Greater than 1024 and less than 65535
t1
Notes:
1. It is recommended that you avoid the conflict RTP port range in case
of a UDP transport.
2. By default, the IP phones use symmetric UDP signaling for outgoing
UDP SIP messages. When symmetric UDP is enabled, the IP phone
generates and listens for UDP messages using port 5060.If symmetric
UDP signaling is disabled, the phone sends from random ports but it
listens on the configured SIP local port.
sip local port: 5060
Parameter –
sip local tls port
Description
Aastra Web UI:
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg
D
Local SIP TLS Port
ra
f
Example
Specifies the local source port (SIPS/TLS) from which the phone sends
SIP messages.
Format
Numeric
Default Value
5061
Range
Greater than 1024 and less than 65535
Note: It is recommended that you avoid the conflict with any TCP ports
being used. For example: WebUI HTTP server on 80/tcp and HTTPS
on 443/tcp.
Example
A-32
sip local tls port: 5061
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
HTTPS Client and Server Settings
Parameter –
https client method
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
HTTPS Client Method
(in Web UI)
Description
Configuration Files
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->HTTPS->HTTPS Client
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Defines the security method that the client advertises to the server during
the Secure Socket Layer (SSL) handshake. Available options are:
TLS 1.0 - Transport Layer Security version 1 (TLS 1.0) is a protocol that
ensures privacy between communicating applications and their users on
the Internet. TLS is the successor to SSL.
SSL 3.0 - Secure Socket Layer version 3 (SSL 3.0) is a commonly-used
protocol for managing the security of a message transmission on the
Internet.
Alphanumeric characters
Default Value
SSL 3.0
Range
TLS 1.0
SSL 3.0 (default)
ra
f
Example
t1
Format
https client method: TLS 1.0
IP Phone UI
D
Parameter –
https redirect http get
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->HTTPS->
HTTPS Server->Redirect
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
HTTPS Server - Redirect
HTTP to HTTPS
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Description
Allows or disallows redirection from the HTTP server to the HTTPS
server.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1 (enables redirection)
Range
0 (disables redirection)
1 (enables redirection)
Example
https redirect http get: 0
Configuration Files
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-33
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
https block http post xml
IP Phone UI
HTTPS Server - Block XML
HTTP POSTs
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Description
Enables or disables the blocking of XML scripts from HTTP POSTs.
Configuration Files
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->HTTPS->
HTTPS Server->XML
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
t1
Some client applications use HTTP POSTs to transfer XML scripts. The
phones’s HTTP server accepts these POSTs even if server redirection is
enabled, effectively bypassing the secure connection. When this
parameter is enabled (blocking is enabled), receipt of an HTTP POST
containing an XML parameter header results in the following response:
“403 Forbidden”. This forces the client to direct the POSTs to the HTTPS
server through use of the “https://” URL.
Boolean
Default Value
0 (disables blocking of XML HTTP POSTs)
Range
0 (disables blocking of XML HTTP POSTs)
1 (enables blocking of XML HTTP POSTs)
https block http post xml: 1
D
Example
ra
f
Format
A-34
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
HTTPS Server Certificate Validation Settings
Parameter–
https validate certificates
Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
Validate Certificates
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Description
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->HTTPS Settings->
Cert Validation
Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings
Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of certificates on the phone.
When this parameter is set to 1, the HTTPS client performs validation on
SSL certificates before accepting them.
Note: If you are using HTTPS as a configuration method, and use a self
signed certificate, you must set this parameter to “0” (disabled) before
upgrading to Release 2.3 of the IP Phones.
Boolean
Default Value
1 (enabled)
Range
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
https validate certificates: 0
Parameter–
https validate expires
Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
Check Certificate
Expiration
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
ra
f
D
Description
t1
Format
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->HTTPS Settings->
Cert Validation->Check Expires
Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings
Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of the expiration of the certificates.
When this parameter is set to 1, the HTTPS client verifies whether or not a
certificate has expired prior to accepting the certificate.
Note: If the “https validate expires” parameter is set to enable, the clock on
the phone must be set for the phone to accept the certificates.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1 (enabled)
Range
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
https validate expires: 0
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-35
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Configuration Files
IP Phone UI
Check Certificate
Hostnames
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Description
Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of hostnames on the phone.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
1 (enabled)
Range
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
https validate hostnames: 0
Parameter–
https user certificates
Configuration Files
Aastra Web UI
ra
f
Description
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings
Specifies a file name for a .PEM file located on the configuration server. This
file contains the User-provided certificates in PEM format. These certificates
are used to validate peer certificates.
D
Trusted Certificates
Filename
(in Web UI)
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Options->Administrator Menu->
Configuration Server->HTTPS Settings->
Cert Validation->Check Hostnames
Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings
t1
Parameter–
https validate hostnames
Note: You must disable the “https validate certificates” parameter in order
for the phone to accept the User-provided certificates.
Format
Alphanumeric string in the format
Default Value
Not applicable
Range
Not applicable
Example
https user certificates: trustedCerts.pem
A-36
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
UPnP Settings
Parameter –
upnp manager
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
UPnP
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->UPnP
Advanced Settings->Network->
Advanced Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Enables or disables Universal Plug and Play (UpnP) on the IP phone. If
you set this parameter to “0”, you can manually configure NAT on the IP
phone and the UPnP manager will not start.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0 (false)
Range
0 (false)
1 (true)
Example
upnp manager: 1
Parameter –
upnp gateway
Configuration Files
Format
Default Value
ra
f
aastra.cfg, .cfg
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name of the Internet gateway or
router. This parameter stores the IP address of the gateway or router in
the event that only non-default UPnP gateways get discovered on the
network. The UPnP port mappings are saved to this IP address so even if
the phone reboots, it will still have the correct port mappings.
D
Description
t1
Description
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
0.0.0.0
Range
Not Applicable
Example
upnp gateway: 120.400.003.2
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-37
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
upnp mapping lines
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->General
aastra.cfg, .cfg
UPnP Mapping Lines
(in Web UI)
Description
Enables or disables the use of Universal Plug and Play (UpnP) on a
specific line on the IP phone.
Note: For this feature to work, UPnP must be enabled on the phone
(upnp manager and upnp gateway must be set).
Integer
Default Value
0 (UPnP is not mapped to a specific line)
Range
0 to 10
Example
upnp mapping lines: 5
t1
Format
ra
f
This example indicates that line 5 allows UPnP mapping.
Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Settings
Parameter –
tagging enabled
VLAN Enable
(in Web UI)
D
Global Parameters
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->VLAN->VLAN Enable
Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Global
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Description
Enables or disables VLAN on the IP phones. This is a global setting.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0 (false)
Range
0 (false)
1 (true)
Example
tagging enabled: 1
A-38
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
priority non-ip
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->VLAN->Phone->Priority
->Other
Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Global
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Priority, Non-IP Packet
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Description
Specifies the priority value for non-IP packets. This is a global setting.
Format
Integer
Default Value
5
Range
0 to 7
Example
priority non-ip: 7
Description
Format
Default Value
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->VLAN->Phone->VLAN ID
Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Port 0
aastra.cfg, .cfg
ra
f
VLAN ID
(for LAN Port in
Web UI)
IP phone UI
VLAN is a feature on the IP phone that allows for multiple logical Ethernet
interfaces to send outgoing RTP packets over a single physical Ethernet
as described in IEEE Std 802.3. On the IP phone, you configure a VLAN
ID that associates with the physical Ethernet Port 0.
D
Parameter –
vlan id
t1
LAN Port (Ethernet Port 0) Parameters
Integer
1
Range
1 to 4094
Example
VLAN id: 300
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-39
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
tos priority map
IP phone UI
SIP Priority
RTP Priority
RTCP Priority
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->VLAN->Phone->
Priority->RTP
(for LAN Port in
Web UI)
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->VLAN->Phone->
Priority->RTCP
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Port 0
aastra.cfg, .cfg
This parameter is based on the Type of Service (ToS), Differentiated
Services Code Point (DSCP) setting for SIP (tos sip parameter), RTP (tos
rtp parameter) and RTCP (tos rtcp parameter). It is the mapping between
the DSCP value and the VLAN priority value for SIP, RTP, and RTCP
packets.
You enter the tos priority map value as follows:
(DSCP_1,Priority_1)(DSCP_2,Priority_2).....(DSCP_64,Priority_64)
t1
Description
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->VLAN->Phone->
Priority->SIP
Default Value
Range
Example
A-40
Integer
3 (based on the default ToS DSCP SIP setting of 26)
5 (based on the default ToS DSCP RTP setting of 46)
5 (based on the default ToS DSCP RTCP setting of 46)
D
Format
ra
f
where the DSCP value range is 0-63 and the priority range is 0-7.
Mappings not enclosed in parentheses and separated with a comma, or
with values outside the ranges, are ignored.
0 to 63 (for DSCP)
0 to 7 (for SIP, RTP, and RTCP priorities)
tos priority map: (26,7)
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
The following table identifies the default DSCP-to-priority mapping structure.
DSCP Priority
0-7
0
8-15
1
16-23
2
24-31
3
32-39
4
40-47
5
48-55
6
56-63
7
D
ra
f
t1
DSCP
Range
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-41
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
PC Port (Ethernet Port 1) Parameters
Parameter –
vlan id port 1
IP phone UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->VLAN->
Passthrough->VLAN ID
Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Port 1
aastra.cfg, .cfg
VLAN ID
(for PC Port in
Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Description
Specifies the VLAN ID used to pass packets through to a PC via Port 1.
Note: If you set the VLAN id port 1 (passthrough port) to 4095, all
untagged packets are sent to this port. The following is an example of
configuring the phone on a VLAN where all untagged packets are sent to
the passthrough port.
t1
Example
You enable tagging on the phone port as normal but set the
passthrough port (VLAN id port 1) to 4095. The following example
sets the phone to be on VLAN 3 but the passthrough port is
configured as untagged.
Default Value
Range
Example
A-42
Integer
1
D
Format
ra
f
tagging enabled: 1
VLAN id: 3
VLAN id port 1: 4095
1 to 4095
VLAN id port 1: 3
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
QoS eth port 1 priority
IP phone UI
Priority
(for PC Port in
Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Description
Specifies the priority value used for passing VLAN packets through to a
PC via Port 1.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Range
0 to 7
Example
QoS eth port 1 priority: 3
D
ra
f
t1
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->VLAN->Passthrough
->Priority
Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Port 1
aastra.cfg, .cfg
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-43
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP Settings
Parameter –
tos sip
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->Type of Service->SIP
Advanced Settings->Network->
Type of Service,DSCP
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Configuration Files
Description
The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for SIP packets.
Format
Integer
Default Value
26
Range
0 to 63
Example
tos sip: 3
Parameter –
tos rtp
IP phone UI
t1
SIP
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Format
Default Value
Range
Example
Parameter –
tos rtcp
ra
f
Description
Configuration Files
The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for RTP packets.
Integer
46
0 to 63
D
RTP
(in Web UI)
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->Type of Service->RTP
Advanced Settings->Network->
Type of Service,DSCP
aastra.cfg, .cfg
tos rtp: 2
IP phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->Administrator Menu->
Network Settings->Type of Service->RTCP
Advanced Settings->Network->
Type of Service,DSCP
aastra.cfg, .cfg
RTCP
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files
Description
The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for RTCP packets.
Format
Integer
Default Value
46
Range
0 to 63
Example
tos rtcp: 3
A-44
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Time and Date Settings
Parameter –
time format
IP phone UI
Configuration Files
Options->Time and Date->Time Format
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Time Format
(in Phone UI)
This parameter changes the time to 12 hour or 24 hour format. Use “0”
for the 12 hour format and “1” for the 24 hour format.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Range
0 (12 hr format))
1 (24 hr format)
Example
time format: 0
Parameter –
date format
IP phone UI
Configuration Files
Format
Default Value
Range
Example
ra
f
Description
Options->Time and Date->Date Format
aastra.cfg, .cfg
This parameter allows the user to change the date to various formats.
Integer
D
Date Format
(in Phone UI)
t1
Description
0
0 (WWW MMM DD) (default)
1 (DD-MMM-YY)
2 (YYYY-MM-DD)
3 (DD/MM/YYYY)
4 (DD/MM/YY)
5 (DD-MM-YY)
6 (MM/DD/YY)
7 (MMM DD)
date format: 7
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-45
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
dst config
IP phone UI
Configuration Files
Options->Time and Date->Daylight Savings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Daylight Savings
(in Phone UI)
Enables/disables the use of daylight savings time.
Format
Integer
Default Value
3
Range
0 - OFF
1 - 30 min summertime
2 - 1 hr summertime
3 - automatic
Example
dst config: 0
Parameter –
time zone name
IP phone UI
Configuration Files
Format
Default Value
Range
Example
A-46
ra
f
Description
Options->Time and Date->Time Zone
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Assigns a time zone name to the time server.
Text
D
Time Zone
(in Phone UI)
t1
Description
US-Eastern
See “Time Zone Name/Time Zone Code Table” below.
time zone name: US-Central
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Time Zone Name/Time Zone Code Table
Time Zone Code
AD-Andorra
AE - United Arab Emirates (Dubai)
AG-Antigua
AI-Anguilla
AL-Tirane
AN-Curacao
AR-Buenos Aires
AS-Pago Pago
AT-Vienna
AU-Lord Howe
AU-Tasmania
AU-Melbourne
AU-Sydney
AU-Broken Hill
AU-Brisbane
AU-Lindeman
AU-Adelaide
AU-Darwin
AU-Perth
AW-Aruba
AZ - Azerbaijan (Baku)
CET
GST
AST
AST
CET
AST
ART
BST
CET
LHS
EST
EST
EST
CST
EST
EST
CST
CST
WST
AST
AZT
BA-Sarajevo
BB-Barbados
BE-Brussels
BG-Sofia
BM-Bermuda
BO-La Paz
BR-Noronha
BR-Belem
BR-Fortaleza
BR-Recife
BR-Araguaina
BR-Maceio
BR-Sao Paulo
BR-Cuiaba
BR-Porto Velho
BR-Boa Vista
BR-Manaus
BR-Eirunepe
BR-Rio Branco
BS-Nassau
BY-Minsk
BZ-Belize
EET
AST
CET
EET
AST
BOT
FNT
BRT
BRT
BRT
BRS
BRT
BRS
AMS
AMT
AMT
AMT
ACT
ACT
EST
EET
CST
D
ra
f
t1
Time Zone Name
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-47
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Time Zone Code
CA-Newfoundland
CA-Atlantic
CA-Eastern
CA-Saskatchewan
CA-Central
CA-Mountain
CA-Pacific
CA-Yukon
CH-Zurich
CK-Rarotonga
CL-Santiago
CL-Easter
CN-China
CO-Bogota
CR-Costa Rica
CU-Havana
CY-Nicosia
CZ-Prague
NST
AST
EST
EST
CST
MST
PST
PST
CET
CKS
CLS
EAS
CST
COS
CST
CST
EES
CET
EE-Tallinn
ES-Madrid
ES-Canary
D
FI-Helsinki
FJ-Fiji
FK-Stanley
FO-Faeroe
FR-Paris
GB-London
GB-Belfast
GD-Grenada
GE - Georgia (Tbilisi)
GF-Cayenne
GI-Gibraltar
GP-Guadeloupe
GR-Athens
GS-South Georgia
GT-Guatemala
GU-Guam
GY-Guyana
A-48
CET
CET
AST
AST
ra
f
DE-Berlin
DK-Copenhagen
DM-Dominica
DO-Santo Domingo
t1
Time Zone Name
EET
CET
WET
EET
NZT
FKS
WET
CET
GMT
GMT
AST
GET
GFT
CET
AST
EET
GST
CST
CST
GYT
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Time Zone Code
HK-Hong Kong
HN-Tegucigalpa
HR-Zagreb
HT-Port-au-Prince
HU-Budapest
HKS
CST
CET
EST
CET
IE-Dublin
IS-Reykjavik
IT-Rome
GMT
GMT
CET
JM-Jamaica
JP-Tokyo
EST
JST
KY-Cayman
EST
LC-St Lucia
LI-Vaduz
LT-Vilnius
LU-Luxembourg
LV-Riga
AST
CET
EET
CET
EET
CET
EET
CET
AST
AST
CET
MUT
CST
CST
CST
CST
MST
MST
MST
PST
D
ra
f
MC-Monaco
MD-Chisinau
MK-Skopje
MQ-Martinique
MS-Montserrat
MT-Malta
MU - Mauritius
MX-Mexico City
MX-Cancun
MX-Merida
MX-Monterrey
MX-Mazatlan
MX-Chihuahua
MX-Hermosillo
MX-Tijuana
t1
Time Zone Name
NI-Managua
NL-Amsterdam
NO-Oslo
NR-Nauru
NU-Niue
NZ-Auckland
NZ-Chatham
CST
CET
CET
NRT
NUT
NZS
CHA
OM - Oman (Muscat)
GST
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-49
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Time Zone Code
PA-Panama
PE-Lima
PL-Warsaw
PR-Puerto Rico
PT-Lisbon
PT-Madeira
PT-Azores
PY-Asuncion
EST
PES
CET
AST
WET
WET
AZO
PYS
RO-Bucharest
RU-Kaliningrad
RU-Moscow
RU-Samara
RU-Yekaterinburg
RU-Omsk
RU-Novosibirsk
RU-Krasnoyarsk
RU-Irkutsk
RU-Yakutsk
RU-Vladivostok
RU-Sakhalin
RU-Magadan
RU-Kamchatka
RU-Anadyr
EET
EET
MSK
SAM
YEK
OMS
NOV
KRA
IRK
YAK
VLA
SAK
MAG
PET
ANA
ra
f
t1
Time Zone Name
CET
SGT
CET
CET
CET
SRT
CST
TR-Istanbul
TT-Port of Spain
TW-Taipei
EET
AST
CST
UA-Kiev
US-Eastern
US-Central
US-Mountain
US-Pacific
US-Alaska
US-Aleutian
US-Hawaii
UY-Montevideo
EET
EST
CST
MST
PST
AKS
HAS
HST
UYS
D
SE-Stockholm
SG-Singapore
SI-Ljubljana
SK-Bratislava
SM-San Marino
SR-Paramaribo
SV-El Salvador
A-50
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Time Zone Code
VA-Vatican
CET
YU-Belgrade
CET
D
ra
f
t1
Time Zone Name
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-51
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Time Server Settings
Parameter –
time server disabled
Aastra Web UI
IP Phone UI‘
NTP Time Servers
(in Web UI)
Description
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Time and Date Settings
Options->Preferences->
Time and Date->Time Servers
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Enables or disables the time server. This parameter affects the time
server1, time server2, and time server3 parameters. Setting this
parameter to 0 allows the use of the configured Time Server(s). Setting
this parameter to 1 prevents the use of the configured Time Server(s).
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
Integer
Default Value
0 (disabled)
Range
0 (disabled)
1 (enabled)
Example
time server disabled: 0
ra
f
Parameter –
time server1
t1
Format
Aastra Web UI
Description
D
IP Phone UI‘
Time Server 1
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Time and Date Settings
Options->Preferences->
Time and Date->Time Servers
aastra.cfg, .cfg
The primary time server's IP address or qualified domain name. If the
time server is enabled, the value for time server1 will be used to request
the time from.
Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP
server must support Option 66.
Format
IP address or qualified domain name
Default Value
0.0.0.0
Range
Not Applicable
Example
time server1: 192.168.0.5
A-52
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
time server2
Aastra Web UI
IP Phone UI‘
Time Server 2
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Time and Date Settings
Options->Preferences->
Time and Date->Time Servers
aastra.cfg, .cfg
The secondary time server's IP address or qualified domain name. If the
time server is enabled, and the primary time server is not configured or
cannot be accessed the value for time server2 will be used to request
the time from.
Format
IP address or qualified domain name
Default Value
0.0.0.0
Range
Not Applicable
Example
time server2: 192.168.0.5
Parameter –
time server3
Aastra Web UI
t1
Description
Format
Configuration Files
The tertiary time server's IP address or qualified domain name. If the
time server is enabled, and the primary and secondary time servers are
not configured or cannot be accessed the value for time server3 will be
used to request the time from.
D
Description
ra
f
IP Phone UI‘
Time Server 3
(in Web UI)
Basic Settings->Preferences->
Time and Date Settings
Options->Preferences->
Time and Date->Time Servers
aastra.cfg, .cfg
IP address or qualified domain name
Default Value
0.0.0.0
Range
Not Applicable
Example
time server3: 192.168.0.5
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-53
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Custom Time Zone and DST Settings
Configuration Files
Description
The number of minutes the timezone is offset from UTC (Coordinated
Universal Time). This can be positive (West of the Prime Meridian) or
negative (East of the Prim Meridian). Eastern Standard Time (EST) has
a value of 300.
Format
Integer
Default Value
N/A
Range
Any positive or negative Integer
Example
time zone minutes: 300
Parameter –
dst minutes
Configuration Files
Description
The number of minutes to add during Daylight Saving Time. Valid values
are a positive integer between 0 to 60.
Range
Example
A-54
ra
f
Default Value
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Integer
N/A
0 to 60
D
Format
aastra.cfg, .cfg
t1
Parameter –
time zone minutes
dst minutes: 60
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
dst [start|end] relative date
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Description
Specifies how to interpret the start and end day, month, and week
parameters - absolute (0) or relative (1).
Format
Boolean
Default Value
N/A
Range
0 (absolute)
1 (relative)
Example
dst [start|end] relative date: 1
t1
Absolute Time
Configuration Files
Description
The month that DST starts. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January to
December).
Format
Default Value
Integer
N/A
1 (January)
2 (February)
3 (March)
4 (April)
5 (May)
6 (June)
7 (July)
8 (August)
9 (September)
10 (October)
11 (November)
12 (December)
D
Range
aastra.cfg, .cfg
ra
f
Parameter –
dst start month
Example
dst start month: 7
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-55
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Description
The month that DST ends. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January to
December).
Format
Integer
Default Value
N/A
Range
1 (January)
2 (February)
3 (March)
4 (April)
5 (May)
6 (June)
7 (July)
8 (August)
9 (September)
10 (October)
11 (November)
12 (December)
dst end month: 6
D
Example
ra
f
t1
Parameter –
dst end month
A-56
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
dst start day
Configuration Files
Description
The day of the month that DST starts. Valid values are 1 to 31.
Format
Integer
Default Value
N/A
Range
1 to 31
Example
dst start day: 1
Parameter –
dst end day
Configuration Files
Description
The day of the month that DST ends. Valid values are 1 to 31.
Format
Integer
Default Value
N/A
Range
1 to 31
Description
t1
ra
f
Parameter –
dst start hour
aastra.cfg, .cfg
dst end day: 31
Configuration Files
D
Example
aastra.cfg, .cfg
aastra.cfg, .cfg
The hour that DST starts. Valid values are an integer from 0 (midnight)
to 23.
Format
Integer
Default Value
N/A
Range
0 (midnight) to 23
Example
dst start hour: 0
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-57
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
dst end hour
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Description
The hour that DST ends. Valid values are an integer from 0 (midnight) to
23.
Format
Integer
Default Value
N/A
Range
0 (midnight) to 23
Example
dst end hour: 23
Relative Time
Configuration Files
Description
The month that DST starts. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January to
December).
Format
Integer
N/A
1 (January)
2 (February)
3 (March)
4 (April)
5 (May)
6 (June)
7 (July)
8 (August)
9 (September)
10 (October)
11 (November)
12 (December)
D
Range
ra
f
Default Value
aastra.cfg, .cfg
t1
Parameter –
dst start month
Example
A-58
dst start month: 6
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Description
The month that DST ends. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January to
December).
Format
Integer
Default Value
N/A
Range
1 (January)
2 (February)
3 (March)
4 (April)
5 (May)
6 (June)
7 (July)
8 (August)
9 (September)
10 (October)
11 (November)
12 (December)
dst end month: 12
D
Example
ra
f
t1
Parameter –
dst end month
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-59
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Configuration Files
Description
The week in the specified month in which DST starts. Valid value is a
positive or negative integer from 1 to 5.
Format
Integer
Default Value
N/A
Range
1 = first full week of month
-1 = last full week of month
2 = second full week of month
-2 = last full week of month
3 = third full week of month
-3 = last full week of month
4 = fourth full week of month
-4 = last full week of month
5 = fifth full week of month
-5 = last full week of month
Example
dst start week: 1
Format
ra
f
Description
Configuration Files
aastra.cfg, .cfg
The week in the specified month in which DST ends. Valid value is a
positive or negative integer from 1 to 5.
D
Parameter –
dst end week
aastra.cfg, .cfg
t1
Parameter –
dst start week
Integer
Default Value
N/A
Range
1 = first full week of month
-1 = last full week of month
2 = second full week of month
-2 = last full week of month
3 = third full week of month
-3 = last full week of month
4 = fourth full week of month
-4 = last full week of month
5 = fifth full week of month
-5 = last full week of month
Example
dst end week: 5
A-60
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Configuration Files
Description
The day of the specified week in the specified month that DST starts on.
Valid values are an integer from 1 to 7.
Format
Integer
Default Value
N/A
Range
1 (Sunday)
2 (Monday)
3 (Tuesday)
4 (Wednesday)
5 (Thursday)
6 (Friday)
7 (Saturday)
Example
dst start day: 1
Parameter –
dst end day
Configuration Files
Default Value
Range
Example
ra
f
Format
aastra.cfg, .cfg
The day of the specified week in the specified month that DST ends on.
Valid values are an integer from 1 to 7.
Integer
D
Description
aastra.cfg, .cfg
t1
Parameter –
dst start day
N/A
1 (Sunday)
2 (Monday)
3 (Tuesday)
4 (Wednesday)
5 (Thursday)
6 (Friday)
7 (Saturday)
dst end day: 7
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-61
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
dst start hour
Configuration Files
Description
The hour that DST starts. Valid values are an integer from 0 (midnight)
to 23.
Format
Integer
Default Value
N/A
Range
0 (midnight) to 23
Example
dst start hour: 0
Parameter –
dst end hour
Configuration Files
Description
The hour that DST ends. Valid values are an integer from 0 (midnight) to
23.
Format
Integer
Default Value
N/A
t1
0 (midnight) to 23
dst end hour: 23
D
Example
aastra.cfg, .cfg
ra
f
Range
aastra.cfg, .cfg
A-62
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Backlight Mode Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT)
Parameter –
backlight mode
IP phone UI
Configuration Files
Options->Preferences->Display->Backlight
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Backlight
(in Phone UI)
Description
Allows you to turn the backlight on the LCD, On, Off, or Auto. “The Auto”
setting sets the phone to turn off the backlighting after a period of
inactivity.
Format
Integer
Default Value
1 (Auto)
Range
0
1
Example
backlight mode: 0
Parameter –
bl on time
IP phone UI
Configuration Files
Format
t1
ra
f
Description
Options->Preferences->Display->Backlight
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Allows you to set the amount of time, in seconds, that the backlight
stays ON before turning OFF because of inactivity. This settings is
applicable to the “Auto” mode only.
D
Backllight On Time
(in Phone UI)
(Off - Turns the backlight off constant)
(Auto - Turns the backlight off after a period of inactivity.)
Integer
Default Value
10
Range
1 to 120 minutes (2 hours)
Example
bl on timer: 15
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-63
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Live Dialpad Settings
Parameter –
live dialpad
IP phone UI
Configuration Files
Options->Preferences->Live Dialpad
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Live Dialpad
(in Phone UI)
Description
Turns the “Live Dialpad” feature ON or OFF.
With live dial pad ON, the IP phone automatically dials out and turns ON
Handsfree mode as soon as a dial pad key or softkey is pressed. With
live dial pad OFF, if you dial a number while the phone is on-hook, lifting
the receiver or pressing the
initiates a call to that number.
Boolean
Default Value
0 (Off)
Range
0 (Off)
1 (On)
Example
live dialpad: 1
D
ra
f
t1
Format
A-64
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
SIP Local Dial Plan Settings
Parameter –
sip dial plan
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Local Dial Plan
(in Web UI)
A dial plan describes the number and pattern of digits that a user dials to
reach a particular telephone number. The SIP local dial plan is as follows:
Symbol
Description
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Digit symbol
X
Match any digit symbol (wildcard)
*, #, .
Other keypad symbol; # can terminate
a dial string
|
Expression inclusive OR
+
0 or more of the preceding digit symbol
or [] expression
[]
Symbol inclusive OR
Used only with [], represent a range of
acceptable symbols; For example, [2-8]
“,” (open/close quotes)
In the configuration files, enter the sip dial
plan value using quotes.
.;.
Used when a secondary dial tone is
required on the phone. (For example,
“9;xxxxxx”, when a user has to dial “9” to get
and outside line and needs a secondary dial
tone presented.
ra
f
t1
Description
D
Note: You can configure prefix dialing by adding a prepend digit to the
dial string. For example, if you add a prepend map of
“[2-9]XXXXXXXXX,91”, the IP phone adds the digits “91” to any 10-digit
number beginning with any digit from 2 to 9 that is dialed out. Other
examples of prepend mappings are:
•
•
•
1X+#,9 (Prepends 9 to any digit string beginning with “1” and
terminating with “#”.)
6XXX,579 (Prepends “579” to any 4-digit string starting with “6”.)
[4-6]XXXXXX,78 (Prepends “78” to any 7-digit string starting with “4”,
“5”, or “6”.
Format
Alphanumeric characters
Default Value
X+#|XX+*
Range
Up to 512 alphanumeric characters.
Note: If a User enters a dial plan longer than 512 characters, or a parsing
error occurs, the phone uses the default dial plan of “x+#|xx+*”. If this is
the case, the Administrator cannot change the dial plan from the
configuration files. The dial plan must be changed from the Aastra Web
UI.
Example
sip dial plan: "X+#|XXX+*"
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-65
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip dial plan terminator
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Basic Settings->Preferences
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Send Dial Plan Terminator
(in Web UI)
Allows you to enable or disable a dial plan terminator. If you enable the
use of this parameter, when you configure the IP phone’s dial plan with a
dial plan terminator or timeout (such as the pound symbol (#)), the phone
waits 4 or 5 seconds after you pick up the handset or after to finish
dialing the number on the keypad before making the call.
Format
Boolean
Default Value
0
Range
0 (Disable)
1 (Enable)
Example
sip dial plan terminator: 1
Description
ra
f
Digit Timeout
(in Web UI)
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Represents the time, in seconds, between consecutive key presses on
the IP phone. The default for this parameter is 4 seconds. If you press a
key on the phone and wait 4 seconds before pressing the next key, the
key times out and cancels the digit selection. You must press consecutive
keys before the timeout occurs.
Format
Integer
Default Value
4
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip digit timeout: 6
A-66
Basic Settings->Preferences
aastra.cfg, .cfg
D
Parameter –
sip digit timeout
t1
Description
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
SIP Basic, Global Settings
SIP Global Authentication Settings
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Screen Name
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files
Description
Used to display text on the screen of the phone. You may want to set
this parameter to display the user’s name of the phone.
Format
Text
Default Value
Not Applicable
Range
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
Example
sip screen name: Joe Smith
Parameter –
sip screen name 2
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
ra
f
Description
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Configuration Files
Used to display text on a second line on the screen of the phone.
D
Screen Name 2
(in Web UI)
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
t1
Parameter –
sip screen name
Notes:
1. If other status messages display on the phone, such as “Network
Disconnected”, the Screen Name 2 value does not display.
2. Symbol characters are allowed (such as “#”).
3. If the text is longer than the display width, than the display truncates
the text to fit the display.
Format
Alphanumeric characters.
Default Value
Not Applicable
Range
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters.
Example
sip screen name 2: Lab Phone
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-67
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip user name
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Phone Number
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files
Description
Used in the name field of the SIP URI for the IP phone and for registering
the IP phone at the registrar.
Note: The IP Phones support Usernames containing dots (“.”).
Text
Default Value
Not Applicable
Range
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
Example
sip user name: 1010
Parameter –
sip display name
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Format
Default Value
ra
f
Description
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Configuration Files
Used in the display name field of the From SIP header field. Some IP
PBX systems use this as the caller’s ID and some may overwrite this
with the string that is set at the PBX system.
D
Caller ID
(in Web UI)
t1
Format
Text
Not Applicable
Range
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
Example
sip display name: Joe Smith
A-68
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Authentication Name
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files
Description
Used in the username field of the Authorization header field of the SIP
REGISTER request.
Format
Text
Default Value
Not Applicable
Range
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
Example
sip auth name: 5553456
Parameter –
sip password
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Password
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files
Default Value
Range
Example
ra
f
Format
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
The password that will be used to register at the registrar.
Text
Not Applicable
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
D
Description
Options->Administrator Menu->>SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
t1
Parameter –
sip auth name
sip password: 12345
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-69
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip bla number
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
BLA Number
(in Web UI)
Allows you to assign a phone number that is shared across all IP
phones.
Format
Integer
Default Value
Not Applicable
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip bla number: 1010
Parameter –
sip mode
Aastra Web UI
t1
Description
Allows you to configure the mode of the line. Applicable values are:
• Generic - Normal line
• BroadSoft SCA - Shared Call/Line Appearances (SCA) line for
BroadWorks network (call activity can go to more than one phone)
• Nortel - Conference line for Nortel Networks (private - all call activity
goes to one phone)
• BLA - Bridged Line Appearance (BLA) line.
D
Description
ra
f
Configuration Files
Line mode
(in Web UI)
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Range
Valid values are:
0 - Generic
1 - BroadSoft SCA
2 - Nortel
3 - BLA
Example
sip mode: 2
A-70
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
SIP Global Network Settings.
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Proxy Server
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files
Description
The IP address of the SIP proxy server for which the IP phone uses to
send all SIP requests.
A SIP proxy is a server that initiates and forwards requests generated by
the IP phone to the targeted user.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
Default Value
0.0.0.0
Range
Not applicable
Example
sip proxy ip: 192.168.0.101
Parameter –
sip proxy port
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Format
Default Value
Range
Example
ra
f
Description
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Configuration Files
The proxy server's port number.
Integer
D
Proxy Port
(in Web UI)
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
t1
Parameter –
sip proxy ip
0
Not Applicable
sip proxy port: 5060
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-71
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip backup proxy ip
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Backup Proxy Server
(in Web UI)
Description
The IP address of the backup SIP proxy server for which the IP phone
uses when the primary SIP proxy is unavailable.
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
Default Value
0.0.0.0
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip backup proxy ip: 192.168.0.102
Parameter –
sip backup proxy port
Aastra Web UI
t1
Configuration Files
Backup Proxy Port
(in Web UI)
The backup proxy’s port number.
ra
f
Description
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Not Applicable
D
Range
Example
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Parameter –
sip outbound proxy
sip backup proxy port: 5060
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
outbound proxy server
(in Web UI)
Description
This is the address of the outbound proxy server. All SIP messages
originating from the phone are sent to this server. For example, if you
have a Session Border Controller in your network, then you would
normally set its address here.
Format
IP Address or fully qualified Domain Name
Default Value
0.0.0.0
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip outbound proxy: 10.42.23.13
A-72
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip outbound proxy port
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Advanced SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
outbound proxy port
(in Web UI)
The proxy port on the proxy server to which the IP phone sends all SIP
messages.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip outbound proxy port: 5060
Parameter –
sip registrar ip
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Registrar Server
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files
ra
f
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
The address of the registrar for which the IP phone uses to send
REGISTER requests.
A SIP registrar is a server that maintains the location information of the
IP phone.
A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration. However, the phone is still
active and you can dial using username@ip address of the phone.
If the Registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e, line 1,
line 2, etc.), then the register request is not sent, the "No Service"
message does not display, and the message waiting indicator (MWI)
does not come on.
D
Description
t1
Description
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
Default Value
0.0.0.0
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip registrar ip: 192.168.0.101
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-73
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip registrar port
IP Phone UI
Aastra Web UI
Registrar Port
(in Web UI)
Configuration Files
Description
The registrar's port number.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip registrar port: 5060
Parameter –
sip backup registrar ip
Aastra Web UI
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
t1
Configuration Files
ra
f
Backup Registrar Server
(in Web UI)
The address of the backup registrar (typically, the backup SIP proxy) for
which the IP phone uses to send REGISTER requests if the primary
registrar is unavailable.
A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables backup registration. However, the
phone is still active and you can dial using username@ip address of the
phone.
If the backup registrar IP address is set to 0.0.0.0 for a per-line basis (i.e,
line 1, line 2, etc.), then the backup register request is not sent, the "No
Service" message does not display, and the message waiting indicator
(MWI) does not come on.
D
Description
Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Format
IP address or fully qualified Domain Name
Default Value
0.0.0.0
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip backup registrar ip: 192.168.0.102
A-74
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip backup registrar port
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Backup Registrar Port
(in Web UI)
Description
The backup registrar's (typically the backup SIP proxy) port number.
Format
Integer
Default Value
0
Range
Not Applicable
Example
sip backup registrar port: 5060
Parameter –
sip registration period
Aastra Web UI
t1
Configuration Files
Default Value
Range
Example
The requested registration period, in seconds, from the registrar.
Integer
0
0 to 2147483647
D
Format
ra
f
Registration Period
(in Web UI)
Description
Advanced Settings->Global SIP->
Basic SIP Network Settings
aastra.cfg, .cfg
sip registration period: 3600
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
A-75
IP Phone Administrator Guide
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings
The following parameters are SIP per-line settings. The value of "N" is 1 - 9 for
9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT, 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT.
SIP Per-Line Authentication Settings
Parameter –
sip lineN screen name
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, .cfg
Screen Name
(in Web UI)
Used to display text on the screen of the phone. You may want to set
this parameter to display the phone user's name.
Format
Text
Default Value
Not Applicable
Range
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
Example
sip line1 screen name: Joe Smith
Screen Name 2
(in Web UI)
Description
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg, .cfg
D
Parameter –
sip lineN screen name 2
ra
f
t1
Description
Used to display text on a second line on the screen of the phone.
Notes:
1. If other status messages display on the phone, such as “Network
Disconnected”, the Screen Name 2 value does not display.
2. Characters are allowed (such as “#”).
3. If the text is longer than the display width, than the display truncates
the text to fit the display.
Format
Alphanumeric characters
Default Value
Not Applicable
Range
Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
Example
sip line1 screen name 2: Lab Phone
A-76
41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.4
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters
Parameter –
sip lineN user name
Aastra Web UI
Configuration Files
Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9
aastra.cfg,